Fanuc Symbol Cap I T Operator

OPERATORS MANUAL
B-63304EN/02
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B63304EN/02
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
B63304EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
1. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data on the screen. Operating the machine with incorrect data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 2. When the tool offset function is used, before activating the machine, check the direction and value of the offset to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. Any collision may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user. 3. Before starting the NC program prepared using the conversational function, thoroughly check the contents of the NC data to ensure that the tool path and machining processes are set correctly, and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock). Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock). For example, start the machining program without mounting a workpiece on the machine. Any collision may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user. 4. Before using the conversational function to prepare a machining program, determine whether the tool data, material data, setting data, system parameters, and MTF data are set as specified by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately, the cutting conditions necessary for machining may not be set properly, possibly causing damage to the tool, or injury to the user.
s3
B63304EN/02
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

1. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3. SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT

1. Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2. START OF Symbolic FAPT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3. EXECUTION OF Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1 3.2 BLANK AND DRAWING (DRAWING AND BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLANK AND PART (PART FIGURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Drawing of Program Coordinate System and Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Part Figure Input (Input Method of with Figure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Input and Modification of Part Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Blank Figure Input of Special Figure Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Part Figure Input (Directory Input System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 Batch Input Functions for Chamfering and Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.7 Pattern Figure Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 Function for Defining the Center of an Arc According to a Given Single Coordinate . . . . . . . 3.3 MACHINE ZERO POINT AND TURRET POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Selection of Kinds of Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Process Change and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Output of Only Single Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c1 33 38 39 39 55 57 60 61 65 80 84 85 86 90 91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
3.4.4 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 3.4.5 Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.4.6 Passing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3.4.7 Specifying the Direction and Area of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.4.8 Function for Automatically Setting Area Division Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.4.9 Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3.4.10 Setting the Tool Data and Tooling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 3.4.11 Drawing a Cutting Area and Painting a Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 3.5 NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 3.5.1 Preparations of NC Data and Registrations of Machining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 3.5.2 Precautions to be Taken with Background Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 3.5.3 Display of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 3.5.4 Process Editing Function (Only with 2path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 3.5.5 Special Block Output to both Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 3.5.6 Outputting the NC Data of a Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 3.6 CHECKING NC DATA (ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 3.6.1 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 3.6.2 Flow of Animation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 3.6.3 Starting an Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 3.6.4 Setting of Parameters for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 3.6.5 Setting of Chuck Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 3.6.6 Setting of Tailstock Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 3.6.7 Setting of Tool Holder Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 3.6.8 Enlargement and Reduction in the Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 3.6.9 Related System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 3.6.10 Input/Output of Graphic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 SETTING OF SUB CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT/OUTPUT OF SUB CYCLE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEFINITION OF SUB CYCLE PROCESS IN DEFINITION OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCESS EDITING OF SUB CYCLE (2PATH LATHE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUT OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAUTIONS AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 178 180 183 185 187
5. EXTENDED SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

5.1 5.2 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 HOW A SUB CYCLE IS OUTPUT ON NC PART PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 BALANCE CUTTING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USING THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCESS EDITING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c2 193 194 196 197 198 200
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7 6.8
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL FOR BALANCE CUT B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 CAUTION AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 207 208 209
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

1. MEMORY COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
MAIN MEMORY AND SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 DISPLAY OF SUBMEMORY FILE NAME AND FILE DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 ADDITIONAL PARAMETER OF SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 NO. OF FILES REGISTERABLE IN SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 214 214 215 216 217 217
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT WITH SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 System Parameter, MTF, Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 File Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Function for Automatically Registering Parameters and Data in Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . COLLATION AND INPUT/OUTPUT WITH FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 System Parameter, MTF, Tool Data, Setting Data, Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information, Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Handling of Floppy Cassette and Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPT I/O INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGISTRATION OF FILE NAME ONTO FLOPPY CASSETTE, HANDY FILE (OPTION) . . . FILE DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Input/Output Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 File Name Registration in the Floppy Cassette or Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 219 219 223 226 227 227 229 229 231 232 233 233 233 234 235
2.2
2.3 2.4 2.5
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

1. MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.1 1.2 1.3 MATERIAL DATA AND MATERIAL FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING AND DATA WHICH CAN DISPLAYED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Method of Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c3 240 241 242 242
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
1.3.2 Method of Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Method of Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 INPUT/OUTPUT OF MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 NOTES ON MATERIAL FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243 244 245 245
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

2.1 2.2 2.3 TOOL DATA, TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Tool Data Input/Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 TOOLING INFORMATION DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 INITIALIZATION OF TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 TOOL FIGURE DATA AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 General Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Vertical Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 248 252 253 255 259 260 260 273
3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUT/INPUT AND COLLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORMAT OF PARAMETER TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERROR DISPLAY MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 292 293 294
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SKIP FUNCTION OF PAGE AND QUESTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INCREMENTAL DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Designation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC DATA OUTPUT BY SINGLE STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Single Step of Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Single Step of Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REOUTPUT OF NC DATA BY EACH PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUT IN MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBPROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c4 310 312 314 314 317 317 318 320 322 324
1.5 1.6 1.7
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SIMULTANEOUS 1 AXIS MOVEMENT IN APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.1 Setting of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.2 NC Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 UTILIZATION OF DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 APPLICATION FOR NC CHASER LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1 Interference Check by Tool Shape and Machining Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.2 Interference Check in Approach and Return relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.3 Grooving when the Tool Width and Groove Width are the Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.4 Approach and Relief to Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 INITIAL SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.1 Screen Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.2 Setting Initial Screen Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.3 Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.5 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 OUTPUTTING NC DATA IN THE FS15T/16T FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13.1 MTF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13.2 Supplementary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 FUNCTION FOR PREPARING THE NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR INTERPOLATION RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
326 326 327 329 331 336 336 336 338 339 340 340 341 345 346 347 348 348 352 353 355
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

TOOL FIGURE AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUTTING DIRECTION AND CUTTING EDGE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROUGH CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JUDGEMENT OF POCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION OF MACHINING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Finish Allowance and Surplus Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Surplus Thickness and Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 Closed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4 Definition of Optional Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Tool Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.3 Blank Figure in Grooving Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.4 Groove Bottom Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.5 Concaved Parts in Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.1 Threading Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2 Threading Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.3 Depth of Screw Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 CUTTING OVERHUNG PORTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 ERROR WHEN NC DATA IS PREPARED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 OTHER PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 361 367 368 369 371 389 389 389 390 390 391 391 392 392 392 393 394 395 395 396 396 397 399 402
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.12.5
Chucking Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting Start Position and Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method of Stopping the Tool on Z Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Path in Finish Cutting and Semifinish Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cautions for Using the 2path Lathe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402 402 403 404 404
VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
1.1 1.2 1.3 KIND OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESIGNATION OF CAXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Inserting or Deleting Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Details of Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 MILLING IN MULTIPLE PLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 CAXIS MACHINING WITH A MACHINING PLANE SPECIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 409 410 410 411 425 426
2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

2.1 SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Kind of Caxis Machining Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Tool Data for Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 Specifying the Cutting Position for Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 BLIND HOLE AND THROUGH HOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 430 430 433 433 444 445
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

3.1 3.2 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Caxis FAPT Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Parameter Screen for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 448 448 451
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

4.1 4.2 MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Input and Output of the Tool Data and Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Displaying and Setting of Tooling Informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 454 454 455 456
5. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 MTF SETTING WHEN CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIGID TAPPING NC DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FACE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c6 460 464 475 477
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5 5.6
SIDE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 G85/G89 BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 5.6.1 MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
6. CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

6.1 SIMULTANEOUS AXIS MOVE CONTROL OF APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Setting of Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 Specification of Move Order at the Time of the Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Type of NC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 SPINDLE POSITIONING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 489 489 489 490
7. INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 FIGURE DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL PATH DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 493 495 495 496
8. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Part Figure Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Machining Definition (Menu 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 NC Data Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 Animated simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.5 Material and Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2 MTF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 503 504 504 505 510 516 516 518 518 519 523
IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
1.1 1.2 1.3 DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 ROTATING THE MACHINING PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
2. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

2.1 2.2 SPECIFYING A YAXIS MACHINING PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 SPECIFYING THE YAXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 4. DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
4.1 MACHINING DEFINITION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 c7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
4.2 4.3 4.4
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 CUTTING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
7.1 SETTING MTF PARAMETERS WHEN THE YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS SUPPORTED . . . 597
8. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 2. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
2.1 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Material Data Input (Menu No.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Part Figure Input (Menu No.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Home Position and Turret Index Position (Menu No.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Machining Definition (Menu No.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 NC Data Preparation (Menu No.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.6 Animation Drawing (Menu No.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 PARAMETERS, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 WARNINGS AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 607 607 609 609 612 613 614 614 616 619 620
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
2.1 2.2 DEFINING A NEW PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 MODIFYING A DEFINED PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
3. SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND NOTES ON ITS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
4.1 AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF A TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 c8
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
DETERMINING INVERSE PROCESSES (AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION B OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AREA DIVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESIDUAL MACHINING AND THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTER DRILLING AND BAR FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MULTITIER DRILLING (B OPTION FOR THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FOR A CLOSED FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINING FOR WHICH AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION CANNOT BE USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
638 642 644 647 647 648 661 662
5. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING

1. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 5. PROCESSING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
5.1 5.2 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEFINITION BY MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Tool Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Cutting Area Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Cutting Condition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 AUTOMATIC PROCESSING DECISION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Processing Area Division Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Process Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Automatic Processing Decision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Process Area Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 674 675 676 676 677 677 679 679 680
6. NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 7. MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 8. TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 9. TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
c9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
10. RELATION WITH BACKSIDE MACHINING FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 11. RELATION WITH 4AXIS LATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 12. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 13. MTF PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 2. FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 3. OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 4. ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 ANIMATED SIMULATION OF TURNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANIMATED SIMULATION WITH GRADATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR TWOPATH LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 699 700 701 702 703 704
5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 6. SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
XIV. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B

1. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Screen View of Menu 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Tool Figure for Milling Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 Maximum Number of Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.5 Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.6 Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.7 Drawing Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.8 Simulation of 2Paths Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c10 712 712 712 713 713 713 715 715 715
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Drawing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 SoftKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
716 716 716 717 717 718
XV. Symbol CAPi T

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 2. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
2.1 2.2 2.3 DISPLAYING SCREENS WITH BACKGROUND COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECTING COLOR PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLORING DATA SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Fixed Use of Coloring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Coloring Data Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Coloring Data Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLORING DATA SETTING INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 SP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 P Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Auxiliary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOFT KEY STATUS INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING TO AND FROM THE NC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Screens for other than Menu Number 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Screen for Menu Number 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPATIBILITY WITH CAP II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 724 725 725 728 730 731 731 731 732 733 733 733 733 734
2.4
2.5 2.6
2.7
3. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
XVI. CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES

1. CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Definition of Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Definition of Part Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Home Position and Turret Index Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.4 Machining Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.5 NC Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.6 Animated Simulation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.7 Tool Data, Tooling Information, Tool Holder Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c11 1.1 1.2 744 745 745 745 746 747 759 760 762 764 764
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63304EN/02
1.3.2 MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 1.4 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 1.5 APPLICABLE CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
XVII. SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
1.1 1.2 SUPPORTED MACHINE CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 SUPPORTED MACHINING SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
2. DEFINING PART FIGURES (MENU NO. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

2.1 2.2 DEFINING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 CHECKING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
3. MACHINE ZERO POINT/TURRET TURNING POSITION (MENU NO. 3) . . . . . . . . . . 779 4. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU NO. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 DEFINING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING TOOL DATA FOR SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECTING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTERING CUTTING CONDITIONS FOR SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACH, ESCAPE, AND MOVEMENT BETWEEN SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING TOOL DATA FOR MACHINING WITH TOOL NORMAL OR REVERSE CLAMPING USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . METHOD OF USING THE SAME TOOL FOR SEPARATE MACHINING TYPES WHERE TOOL AXIS SLANT ANGLES ARE DIFFERENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 782 783 784 785 787 788
5. CREATING NC DATA (MENU NO. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 EXAMPLE OF OUTPUTTING NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUTTING COMMENTS TO NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUTTING THE TOOL ANGULAR AXIS ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUTTING THE SPINDLE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUTTING DATA ABOUT THE TOOL CLAMPING TYPE (NORMAL OR REVERSE) . . . ANIMATED SIMULATION OF SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING AT NC DATA CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 792 793 794 795 796
6. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU NO. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

6.1 ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR DIFFERENT MACHINING TYPES PERFORMED WITH THE SAME TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
7. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 8. NC MACHINE FILES (MTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 9. RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
A.1 SETTING DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 c12
B63304EN/02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SYSTEM PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCTION TABLE (MTF 2000S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.2 Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.3 Size of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.4 Reference of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4.5 Referencing an Optional Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.1 Errors Common to All Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.2 Errors at Defining Figures (Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.3 Errors at Machining Definition (Menu 4) and NC Data Preparation (Menu 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.4 Errors at Animation Drawing (Menu 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.5 Errors at Accessing the Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5.6 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2 A.3 A.4
818 845 857 857 863 875 880 895 899 899 900 901 901 902 903
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

B.1 MACHINING DEFINITION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1 Machining Definition of Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.1 Selection of kinds of machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.2 Process change and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.3 Output of only single process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.4 Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.5 Machining start position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.6 Passing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.7 Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.8 Cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.1.9 Cutting area definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.2 Cut off Machining, Bar Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.2.1 Cut off machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.2.2 Bar feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3 Machining Definition of Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3.1 Specification of Caxis machining definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3.2 Explanatory drawing of cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1.3.3 Blind hole and through hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 AUTOMATIC PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3.1 Setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.3.2 Tool data and tooling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.4 Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 906 907 909 910 910 915 915 917 918 927 930 930 934 938 938 943 946 947 947 947 951 951 956 957
c13
I. GENERAL
B63304EN/02
GENERAL
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
This manual is for conversational automatic programming function. The conversational automatic programming function is software in which functions of an epochmaking automatic programming system Symbolic FAPT are assembled, and this Symbolic FAPT allows even unexperienced NC programmers to produce NC data for machining at once simply by depressing buttons according to the instructions on the graphic display CRT. The CNC can execute machining according to a program soon after programming it at a site, or it can execute another programming during machining. The Symbolic FAPT produces NC data and loads them into builtin memory (machining memory). Machining is made according to the NC data in memory (also called NC program). During machining, another program can also be produced by using Symbolic FAPT function. When the machining memory has been unloaded after machining, another program being prepared at the automatic programming section is registered to the machining memory. Since NC data loaded in machining memory are prepared in standard NC language, an operator who knows the standard NC language can directly check or modify NC data of standard NC language in machining memory by using the CRT. (Since NC data can be registered again to machining memory after modifying NC data at the automatic programming section without any need of modifying machining memory data, it is not necessary to modify machining memory data usually.)
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
B63304EN/02
Chapter III describes the programming and operation by Symbolic FAPT. After understanding these description, you can start machining at once, referring to the machine tool builder s manual.
B63304EN/02
GENERAL
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
(1) The NC data thus produced automatically by Symbolic FAPT are not directly used for machining, but they are once loaded to the machining memory. (2) The automatic programming unit is not capable of storing various information of machine tools and machine control unit. Note that control information of machine tools can be processed only in machine control unit. (3) The machining information can be input to CNC by the following two methods. (a) Method of loading automatic programming results into the machining memory after automatic programming has been made by using the Symbolic FAPT. This is a standard method, which can be used without any knowledge on NC tape format. (b) Method of inputting the machining information into the machining memory of the machine control unit by MDI operation. Since this operation is the same as in NC unit for ordinary MDI input, you are requested to be familiar with NC tape format, etc.
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
GENERAL
B63304EN/02
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:

Name of product FANUC Series 15TFB FANUC Series 15TTFB FANUC Series 16TA (CAP II) FANUC Series 16/18TB (CAP II) FANUC Series 16/18TC (CAP II) FANUC Series 16i/18iTA (CAPII) FANUC Series 16TTA (CAPII) FANUC Series 16/18TB (2path lathe, CAP II) FANUC Series 16/18TC (2path lathe, CAP II) FANUC Series 16i/18iTA (2path lathe, CAP II) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21iTA (2path lathe, Symbol CAPi T) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21iTB (2path lathe, Symbol CAPi T) Abbreviation 15TFB 15TFB 15TTFB 16TA CAP II 16TB CAP II 16TC CAP II 16iTA CAPII 16TTA CAPII 16TB CAP II 16TC CAP II 16iTA CAP II Symbol CAPi T Symbol CAPi T Symbol CAPi T 16T CAP II
(1) This manual does not cover the functions on the NC side. (2) The function of an NC machine tool system does not depend only on the NC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, servo system, the NC, operator s panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function, programming, and operation in various combinations of them. This manual generally describes them from the standpoint of the NC. So, for a particular NC machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which should take precedence over this manual. (3) Notes refer to detailed and specific items. So, when a note will be encountered, terms used in it sometimes will not have been explained it. In such a case, first skip the note, then return to it after having read the manual in outline for details. (4) For 16T CAP II, the manual covers only the 5710 system and the 5800 system series and later. The earlier series may not support some functions described in the manual. See Appendix B for the unsupported functions.
6
II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL
B63304EN/02
EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL
1. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL
CRT/MDI panel is composed of a 14inch CRT or 10.4inch LCD color graphic display and keys which consist of alphabet, numerics, and the others. It is as shown below.
MDI panel for 15TFB/15TTFB
B63304EN/02
MDI panel for 16T/16TT CAP II
10
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
11
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
12
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
13
B63304EN/02
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
14
B63304EN/02
Fig. 1 14inch color CRT/MDI panel external view
The mode in which the CRT/MDI unit is used for the creation of CNC data with the Symbolic FAPT is called FAPT mode. The mode in which the CRT/MDI is used for operations related to the CNC functions, such as editing of created data, setting and check of various parameters for CNC machining and tool offset amounts, and check of travel during CNC machining, is called CNC mode. To change the mode of the CRT/MDI unit between FAPT and CNC/PMC, press the mode selector keys with lamps as shown below. D For 15TFB When When
MMC/ FAPT
is pressed, FAPT screen is displayed. is pressed, CNC screen is displayed.
PMC/ CNC
D For 16T CAP II When

FAPT
is pressed, the FAPT screen is displayed.
To display the CNC screen, press one of the other function keys.
15
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE
B63304EN/02
KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE
The diagram at under shows only the keys used in the Symbolic FAPT. The symbols omitted are not used in FAPT mode.
16
B63304EN/02
Fig. 2 (a) 15TFB/TTFB
17
B63304EN/02
Fig. 2 (b) 16T/TT CAP II
18
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
19
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
20
B63304EN/02
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
21
B63304EN/02
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II or Symbol CAPi T (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
22
B63304EN/02
(1) Keys for parts figure input Used for increment amount input. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet I.
Used when commanding thread. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet T. Used when commanding chamfer. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet C. Used when commanding rounding. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet R. Used when commanding grooving. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet G. Used when commanding neck. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet N. Called delete key. This key is used to set undefined data. Called the cancel key. Only 1 character is erased if this key is proceed after inputting data and before pressing the INPUT key. To cancel all the data input so far, press . SHIFT , CAN Arithmetical function keys (The can also be used as minus signs).
23
B63304EN/02
(2) Other keys Used when inputting the alphabet at the right bottom of the key. All the data in the keyin buffer line is cancelled if CAN is pressed after pressing this key. Used to input space.
Atmark key. Pressed before writing the file name, to display a @, when storing or calling family programs and material files in the sub memory.
Input key. This key is used to write the entered data into memory.
24
B63304EN/02
3. SOFT KEY
SOFT KEY
The 12 keys under the CRT are called soft keys. The function of the keys change according to the screen displayed. The function for each screen are framed at the bottom of the screen.
25
III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT
B63304EN/02
PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT
1. Symbolic FAPT
Symbolic FAPT
The Symbolic FAPT is an epoch making NC automatic programming system which enables even unexperienced NC operators to prepare NC tape immediately according to the instructions on the graphic display CRT. Each process from design drawings to NC tape preparation is entirely advanced by the conversational operation with the graphic display CRT. For (1) selection of coordinate system by drawing methods (2) selection of figures of blank and input of dimensions (3) input of parts figures and dimensions, and (4) selection of machining process and decision or cutting conditions etc., the operator has only to answer questions from the CRT. The parts figure can be input simply by depressing corresponding symbol keys on the operators panel according to the profiles of a workpiece described on design drawings. When dimensions and various data are input, various pieces of reference information are illustrated on the CRT from time to time, and questions are given to the operator using daily language. When data are input, the figure of blank and parts profile are drawn immediately, and automatic calculations of NC command data are started. The tool path is concurrently displayed as figures. Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the screens of the Symbol CAPi T to describe functions.
29
2. START OF Symbolic FAPT PROGRAMMING
B63304EN/02
START OF Symbolic FAPT PROGRAMMING
CAUTION After turning on the power, do not touch the keyboard until the initial FAPT screen is displayed. Some keys are specifically designed for maintenance or other special operations; if any of these keys is pressed before the initial screen is displayed, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
The programming by Symbolic FAPT can be started by turning on the power. The initial screen is displayed 20 seconds after turning power on.
Initial screen of Symbol CAPi T
After the SYSTEM EDITION, the series/version number will be displayed. Immediately after the series/version number, the language of the message currently being displayed will be indicated in English. Various jobs are selectable by depressing soft keys, while the initial pattern appears on CRT screen.
[FAPT EXEC] . . . . Depress this key for NC programming, while monitoring the CRT screen. [FAMILY PROGRAM] . . . For calling a family program from submemory, floppy cassette or paper tape, depress this key. For using the memory cassette, the memory cassette adapter is necessary. For using the paper tape, FANUC PPR is necessary.
30
B63304EN/02
2. START OF Symbolic FAPT PROGRAMMING
[DATA SET] . . . . . This key is used for input/output and setting of system parameter, machine tool file (MTF), setting data, material file and tooling data. For storage of material files and tooling files,the submemory, the memory cassette or paper tape is used. [AUXILIARY] . . . . This key is used to initialize sub memory FAPT execution
Press the FAPT execution on the initial screen to allow the FAPT execution procedures menu to be displayed, By pressing the Software key Execution, programming is initiated according to the procedures. Correction can be easily made by directly selecting any menu on correcting programs. For example, press the Software key 2 for selecting input of final parts figure. Press the 5 for creating the NC data. However, it is not possible to execute programming in the reverse order, namely from larger memory number to smaller one. Press the End when the above screen is being displayed to return to the initial screen.
31
3. EXECUTION OF Symbolic FAPT
B63304EN/02
EXECUTION OF Symbolic FAPT
It is possible to perform NC programming, monitoring the drawing in the FAPT screen. Proceed with programming, monitoring the CRT screen according to the following procedures:
32
B63304EN/02
3.1
BLANK AND DRAWING (DRAWING AND BLANK)
WARNING 1 Select the same material as that of the workpiece to be machined. If a desired material option is not displayed on the material menu, cancel the machining of the workpiece. Failure to select the correct material may result in the machining being performed under incorrect cutting conditions, or the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 2 Select the blank figure corresponding to that of workpiece to be machined. Failure to select the correct figure may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 3 Enter the correct blank dimensional data for the workpiece to be machined. Failure to enter the correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Soft key 1
Go to the screen for the above processes. The meaning of each question is as follows: (a) MATERIAL NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MN = This is a question for selecting the material of blank. Input the number corresponding to the material NO. For example, key in 4 when selecting aluminum.
33
B63304EN/02
(b) STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . NR = , 3. , 4. ) (1. , 2. This is a question used to select the surface roughness. Input the number of marks on the machining drawing. For example, key in . It is possible 2 if nearly all areas of machining drawing have to skip this question using system parameter No.10. (c) DRAWING FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DF = This question is used to select the drawing format. When the horizontal figure drawing is performed:
1. 2.
When the vertical figure drawing is performed:
In the case of horizontal drawing, select the drawing format 1 or 3 and 2 or 4 to easily input the dimension data on programming while the dimension value of drawing is written based on the left and right sides, respectively. This question can be skipped by setting of the system parameter No.9.
34
B63304EN/02
(d) BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF = (1. Cylinder 2. Hollow cylinder 3. Special blank) This question is used to select the blank figure. Input the number corresponding to the blank figure. For example, key in 1 to select the cylinder. (e) BLANK SIZE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D = INNER DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D0= LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L = The diameter (D) and length of blank (L) are indicated. In the case of hollow cylinder, the inner diameter (D0) is also displayed. (f) BASE LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZP = It is used to specify at which part of blank the coordinate system (X axis) to be programmed exists. (g) SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX = TZ = If a special blank is selected as blank figure, the X and Y components of surplus thickness are displayed. When data is input to the TX and TZ, it is assumed that the blank has a constant surplus thickness. When nothing is input to the TX and TZ, it is possible to define a free blank figure. The definition method is described in the following item of Blank and Part (Part Figure). (h) DEPTH OF CHUNKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZC = Input the data to determine the drawing position of chuck when the animation drawing function option is provided. See Chapter 3 Section 3.6 Check of NC data (animation drawing function) for details. Insert the , mark between data on inputting data to allow plural number of data to be input simultaneously. Example) Input as in the following to to allow several data to be input simultaneously when BF=1, L=100, D=150, and ZP=5 are input: BF=1, 100, 150, 5 INPUT Meaning of software key [ESCAPE] . . . It is used to return to the menu screen. [HELP] . . . . . It is displayed when each question regarding the drawing format, blank figure, blank size, position of base line is asked. Press this key when the meaning of each question is unknown. Then the following screen appears:
35
B63304EN/02
When it is pressed in the case of drawing format question:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
In the case of vertical drawing:
When it is pressed in the case of question for blank format, blank size, or position of base line:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
36
B63304EN/02
In the case of vertical drawing:
[MAT.NAME] . . Press this software key to see the name of 18th material or thereafter while 18 or more blank materials are registered. [CURSOR ] . . . The cursor moves in forward direction. [CURSOR ] . . . The cursor moves in backward direction. [NEXT PAGE] . . The next screen appears. If the input data contradicts or there PAGE are undefined data, the following message is displayed and it is not possible to move to the next page: KEY IN AGAIN NOTE Normally, the next screen is automatically displayed when all questions are answered on one screen. Press the NEXT PAGE if it is not required to answer all questions or data has been input to all questions. Also, it is possible to allow the screen to keep being displayed for several seconds after answering all questions or to disable advancing to the next screen. When the standard surface roughness or drawing format is fixed, it is possible to skip these questions. See Chapter 7 section 1.1 for the method of skipping the questions. Set the system parameter No.19 to determine either of horizontal or vertical drawing.
37
B63304EN/02
3.2
BLANK AND PART (PART FIGURE)
WARNING 1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece, machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 2 For a conversational program for which machining process data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the cutting area specified in the machining definition may be changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
CAUTION 1 When entering threading data, check the data that is automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly. 2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly. 3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly. 4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
38
B63304EN/02
3.2.1
Drawing of Program Coordinate System and Blank Figure
The coordinate axis and blank figure matching the drawing format previously selected are drawn on the screen.
D The blank is plotted by a dotted line. D The left end of the blank is plotted by a solid line to indicate the chuck side. D The blank is automatically scaled so that it is accommodated with the screen, irrespective of its dimensions. The system requests you to input the part figure by the following display in conversational area on the CRT screen. ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES = D If the blank is long laterally, the conversational area is provided on the lower side of the CRT screen, and if it is long longitudionally, the conversational area is provided on the right side of the CRT screen. This decision is automatically done according to the dimensions of input blanks.
3.2.2
Part Figure Input (Input Method of with Figure)
The part figure can be input by depressing the figure symbol keys sequentially along the profile of a part. Ten keys for numerical input and alphabetic keys indicating the chamfering, rounding, threading, grooving, and necking are employed as figure symbol keys.
39
B63304EN/02
(Example)
Start / End point point
For a figure illustrated above, input the following keys along the drawing.
R C
G G
T C
The system will ask you necessary dimension, each time these figure symbol keys are depressed. (1) Contents of the question and the meaning of symbolic key.
Surface roughness
The system asks you the surface roughness, each time the figure element symbol like a circle, a straight line, etc. is inputted. The already designated standard surface roughness is automatically displayed on the CRT screen at this time. If this value is allowable, depress INPUT key only. If you desire to change the surface roughness at that place only, select the number of symbols 1, 2, 3, or 4. NOTE By parameter setting on parameter No.0010, the question on the surface roughness can be skipped. When this question is skipped, the standard surface roughness is employed.
Start point
The system asks you the start point at the first step of figure input only. SDX . . . . Diameter value at start point SZ . . . . . . Z value at start point PE . . . . . . Whether a part exists on the left side or on right side along a series of a figure profile to be inputted, is selected by 1 or 0. The questions are made for the first figure element only, when a part figure is inputted.
40
B63304EN/02
Straight line
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . ES = Input an arrow along the profile figure when the system asks you the above question. For example, input
INPUT
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . SR = marks indicating the surface roughness Input the number of when the system asks you the surface roughness. (c) The system will ask you the following items sequentially, starting with the top item by displaying these items on the CRT screen. END POINT . . . . . . . . DX Z TANGENT LAST . . . . TL TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN ANGLE FROM Z . . . . A Depress
INPUT
= Diameter value at end point = Z value at end point = Whether the profile touches the last figure or not. = Whether the profile touches the next figure or not. = Angle from Z axis
You have to input only the dimensions described on the drawing. key only, if a dimension is not found on the drawing. The system does not always ask all the above items, depending upon the input arrow directions, but it ask you necessary numerical values only, and you have to input only those described on the drawing. (d) If data are insufficient, KEY IN AGAIN is displayed.
Circle
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES = Input either or key along the progressive direction of the circle when the system asks you the above question. (b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR = marks indicating the surface roughness Input the number of when the system asks you the above question. (c) END POINT . . . . . . . . DX Z TANGENT LAST . . . . TL TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . R = Diameter value at end point = Z value at end point = Whether the profile touches the last arrow figure or not. = Whether the profile touches the next arrow figure or not. = Radius value of circle
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . CDX = X value at circle center (diameter coordinate value) CZ

41
= Z value at circle center
B63304EN/02
The system asks you the above questions sequentially by displaying these items on the CRT screen. Input only such dimensions as are known from the drawing. Depress
INPUT
key
only, if a corresponding dimension is not found on the drawing. (d) If data are insufficient or if an invalid numerical value was input, KEY IN AGAIN is displayed. (e) The system asks you the following question when a profile figure transfers from a straight line to circular arc or from a circular arc to a circular arc. SELECT START POINT or END POINT (: RIGHT : LEFT : ABOVE : BELOW) The parts figure input comprises two methods when a profile figure transfers from a straight line or a circular arc. When keys were depressed;
The start point is either right side or upper side.
The start point is either left side or lower side.
When
keys were depressed;

The start point is either left side or upper side.
The start point is either right side or lower side.
When the system asks you SELECT START POINT to identify the following two possible methods from each other, you have to select the right side (), left side (), above () or below () by the , , , or key.
Chamfering
C C , which indicates the capital of
Chamfering is designated by
chamfer. (a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES = Answer C when the system asks you the above question.
42
B63304EN/02
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR = marks indicating the surface roughness Input the number of when the system asks you the above question. (c) CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C = Input the chamfering amount for the above question. (d) The chamfering amount is figured as shown below. Straight line and straight line Straight line and circular arc Circular arc and circular arc
Straight line and straight line
Straight line and circular arc
Circular arc and circular arc
(e) The chamfering is displayed on CRT screen as shown below.
Rounding
Rounding is designated by R , which indicates capital of rounding. (a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES = Input R when the system asks you the above question. (b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR = Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness when the system asks you the above question. (c) RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = Input the radius value for rounding when the system asks you the above question.
43
B63304EN/02
(d) Rounding is done as follows.
Straight line and straight line
Straight line and circular arc
Circular arc and circular arc
(e) Rounding is displayed as a figure on the CRT screen as shown below.
CAUTION Keys ,
and
R should be selectively used for
specifying a circular arc as described below. D (1) A tangential circule being caught by 2 straight lines, (2) a tangential circule being caught by a straight line and a circular arc, and (3) a tangential circle being caught by circular arcs can be specified by
key as a figure element key, if their
radiuses are known, as illustrated above. D If the coordinate values of a circular arc center, a start point and an end point are written on a drawing, the rounding can be specified by using or key.
44
B63304EN/02
Threading
Threading is designated by T , which indicates the capital of thread. (a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES = Input T when the system asks you the above question.
(b) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . EE = On which element is (0: LAST 1: NEXT) threading done? LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Length of thread LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead of thread MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads of screw The system asks you these questions, starting with the top item by displaying them on CRT screen. (c) ON NEXT ELEMENT or ON LAST ELEMENT?
T is input before and after arrows, in general.

It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be input or on the last figure element already input. ON NEXT ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 1. ON LAST ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 0. Identify ON NEXT ELEMENT and ON LAST ELEMENT from each other in the following illustration.
In case of the next element In case of the next element
In case of the last element
In case of the last element
45
B63304EN/02
Reversing screws can be machined by selectively specifying either on the next element or on the last element. If the rotating direction of the blank is the same and the cutting direction is reversed in the previous figure, screws are threaded reversely. CAUTION When chamfering was made by C , the length of thread can be calculated from the intersection of linear element before chamfering.
(d) Lead length, pitch, and number of thread The lead is defined as the Zaxis direction length when a screw returns to the original angle after turning once. In case of a onethread screw, the pitch coincides with the lead. In case of a threethread screw, 1/3 of lead corresponds to the pitch. The lead of a taper screw is also calculated in the Zaxis direction.
(e) Depth of thread Together with the prompt on the depth of thread DT, the following soft keys are displayed on the screen:
DT=_
ESCAPE BACK PAGE OUTER INNER SQUARE THREAD THREAD THREAD CURSOR CURSOR " # NEXT PAGE
If one of the soft keys is pressed, the depth of thread DT is automatically calculated. The calculation is defined as follows: Pitch = LD (lead)/NT (number of threads) OUTER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter No.174), initial value 0.7578 INNER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter No.125), initial value 0.6495 SQUARE THREAD: Pitch/(2 NT (number of threads)) If the value obtained by automatic calculation is unsatisfactory, modify the data manually. For a trapezoidal thread, enter the data manually. After the depth of thread (DT) has been automatically calculated and specified, the cursor is repositioned to the first prompt.
46
B63304EN/02
Grooving
Grooving is designated by G , which indicates the capital of groove. (a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . ES = Input G when the system asks you the above question. (b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . SR = marks indicating the surface roughness Input the number of when the system asks you the above question. (c) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . EE = On which element is grooving made? DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Grooving direction WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Grooving width DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Grooving depth R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT) 1ST . . . . . . . KC = CV = 2ND . . . . . . KC = CV = Designation of groove 3RD . . . . . . KC = CV = shape 4TH . . . . . . . KC = CV = The system asks you these questions sequentially, starting with the top question by displaying them on the CRT screen. Input a numerical value for each question. (d) ON NEXT ELEMENT or ON LAST ELEMENT?
G is input before and after arrows, in general.

It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be input or on the last figure element already input. ON NEXT ELEMENT . . . . . . Input 1. ON LAST ELEMENT . . . . . . Input 0. Identify ON NEXT ELEMENT and ON LAST ELEMENT from each other in the following illustration.
47
B63304EN/02
(e) DIRECTION . . . . . . DN = (: RIGHT : LEFT : ABOVE : BELOW) Designate the grooving direction by the arrow such as right (), left (), above () or below () when the system asks you the above question.
(f) After inputting the width and depth, the system asks you the figure at groove corners. Numbers 1 to 4 area allocated to the corners of each groove in the sequence of figure input.
(Example)
Designate whether the figures of respective corners 1 to 4 are round (R), chamfered (C) or left unmachined according to the following questions being displayed on the CRT screen. R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT) 1ST . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 1st corner 2ND . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 2nd corner 3RD . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 3rd corner 4TH . . . . KC = CV = Figure at the 4th corner D For rounding, depress R for KC = question, and input a radius value for CV = question. D For chamfering, depress C for KC = question, and input a
chamfering amount for CV = question. D If a corner is neither rounded or chamfered, and it is left undone as it is, depress
INPUT
key only, or depress [NEXT PAGE] key to
proceed to the next CRT screen when the system asks you the question. Trapezoid grooving (Automatic process determination function B is required.) As with grooving, to select trapezoid grooving, specify G. (a) ON WHICH ELEMENT . . EE = Element on which a trapezoid groove is made (0: Last element, 1: Next element)
48
B63304EN/02
(b) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Direction of grooving Press the corresponding element symbol key ( ). (c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Distance between the shoulders of the groove
(d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of the groove
CAUTION If the line along which the width or depth of the groove is measured is parallel to the Xaxis ( or ), specify the width or depth with a radius. (e) R/C OF CORNER 1ST . . . . KC = CV = 2ND . . . . KC = CV = 3RD . . . . KC = CV = 4TH . . . . KC = CV = Specify the figures of the groove corners in the order in which they are defined.
49
B63304EN/02
When the above data is specified, a square groove is defined. To define a trapezoid groove, specify the following data. To define a conventional square groove, ignore the prompt and press the NEXT PAGE soft key. (f) WIDTH OF B. (1) . . . . W1 = Bottom width 1 of the groove (This need not be specified bottom angle 1 of the groove specified.) (g) WIDTH OF B. (2) . . . . W2 = Bottom width 2 of the groove (This need not be specified bottom angle 2 of the groove specified.) (h) ANGLE OF B. (1) . . . . A1 = Bottom angle 1 of the groove (This need not be specified bottom width 1 of the groove specified.) (i) ANGLE OF B. (2) . . . . A2 = Bottom angle 2 of the groove (This need not be specified bottom width 2 of the groove specified.)
if is
if is
if is
if is
In figure definition, the system does not check the validity of the specified bottom width (W*) and bottom angle (A*) of the groove. The operator must carefully observe the figure drawn after the figure is defined. The positions of bottom widths 1 and 2 and angles 1 and 2 of the groove depend on the direction of figure definition in the same way as they do for R/C OF CORNER.
50
B63304EN/02
[Reference] 1) Trapezoid grooving can be defined in the same way as conventional grooving. (Automatic process determination is also allowed.) 2) If bottom width 1 (W1), bottom width 2 (W2), bottom angle 1 (A1), and bottom angle 2 (A2) of a groove are specified, the width data has priority over the angle data. The system ignores the angle data. 3) To specify a trapezoid groove as shown in Fig. 3.2.2, do not define the bottom width and bottom angle on the side of the groove having a perpendicular wall.
Fig. 3.2.2 Defining a special trapezoid groove
Enter the bottom width or angle. Leave the bottom width and bottom angle of the perpendicular wall undefined.
51
B63304EN/02
4) It is recommended to specify the bottom widths when defining the shape of a trapezoid groove. The trapezoid groove can be defined with bottom angles, however, this definition may cause a small calculation error. 5) The figure element copy function is convenient for defining two or more identical trapezoid grooves.
Necking
Necking is designated by N , which indicates the capital of necking. (a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES = Answer N when the system asks you the above question. (b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR = marks indicating the surface roughness Input the number of when the system asks you the above question. (c) WIDTH . . . . . . . WT = DEPTH . . . . . . . DT = Necking width Necking depth
Input the necking width and depth for the above questions. The necking direction is always 45 with reference to Zaxis. The necking width and depth are as illustrated below.
(2) End of figure input Key in the software key END or INPUT only for the following question after ending the input of all machined figures: ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES =
52
B63304EN/02
Machine figure input before is drawn again on the CRT screen and the message SELECT SOFT KEY is displayed at the lower side of screen. Check to see if there is any mistake in the input of figure by comparing the drawing figure with that drawn on the screen. Press a software key depending on the status at that time. Meaning of software keys [ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . . It is used to return to the menu screen. [BACK PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to return to the previous screen (drawing and blank screen). [CORR.&ERASE] . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure drawn on the screen and ERASE to modify the machined figure. The modification method is described below. [CORRECTION] . . . . . It is used to modify the machined figure based on the machined figure drawn on the screen. The modification method is the same as CORR. & ERASE. [NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure on the screen and to input the figure again. All elements input previously are deleted. [LIST MODE] . . . . . . . It is used to display all data previously input. Modification can be performed similarly as in CORRECTION. [DRAWNG RANGE] . . It is used to perform enlargement and reduction of drawing. See Chapter 3 13 for the details. [CHAMFER] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the chamfer figure into all of angles of machined figure drawn on the screen. The details are described in the following. [CAXIS MENU] . . . . . It is displayed when the C axis FAPT function option is available. [YAXIS MENU] . . . . . Displayed when the Yaxis FAPT function is provided. [NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to move to the next page if there is no part modified.
53
B63304EN/02
When bit 1 of system parameter 19 is set to 1, the figure is displayed vertically.
(3) Changing the color of a part figure or blank figure when it is modified When a part figure or blank figure is modified (or created), the elements before and after the element on which the cursor is placed are displayed in different colors. As a result, the operator can easily tell which element is currently being modified on the drawing. System parameter 552 specifies the color of elements already determined and system parameter 586 specifies the color of elements to be determined.
Parameter No. 552 586 Value 1 3 Color Red Yellow Description Specifies color of elements already determined Specifies color of elements to be determined
Color Value
Red 1
Green 2
Yellow 3
Blue 4
Purple 5
Light blue 6
White 7
NOTE 1 If the GRAPH MODE soft key is pressed after modification of an original figure has been started by pressing the CORRECTION soft key, the original figure cannot be redrawn. 2 If the ELEMENT BACK soft key is pressed in a definition mode in which the end point of the previous element is determined by the current element, the element before these two elements is also drawn in the color of the elements to be determined.
54
B63304EN/02
3.2.3
Input and Modification of Part Figure Data
Arithmetic contents Addition 15
(1)
Arithmetic operation and function calculation
The arithmetic operation (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) and optional function calculations can also be executed when inputting dimensions.
Examples Remarks
Symbol
+
* *
27.75 + 4.8
Subtraction
178.5
* *
25.25
Multiplication
57.5
81.3
* indicates x. / indicates B.
/ T
Division tangent
128
/
23
3.5
T T
The unit of angle is degree. Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable inside parentheses. 23
(
15
)
The unit of angle is degree. Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable inside parentheses.
sine
S S
(
35
15
)
cosine
C C
( S S C S T
177
35
)
The unit of angle is degree. Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable inside parentheses. 0.25
arc sine
A A
0.25
(
0.37
)
arc cosine
A A
( (
0.37
) )
Parentheses are required without fail. A T (numerator and denominator). Optional arithmetic expressions are employable inside parentheses, if any.
A R
arc tangent
A R R
3, 5
square root
( ( (
177
) ) )
These examples mean 1.54 and 325, respectively.
square root
P P
1.5, 4 3, 25
55
B63304EN/02
D Parentheses
and
are employable quadruply or less.
D Arithmetic symbols are employable whenever a dimension is asked. They are employable by an optional number, until one line is fully filed. D An arithmetic expression may be used conveniently when a cutting condition is changed, for example. For setting the feedrate to 75%, multiply the displayed numerical value by 0.75. D It is recommended for using Symbolic FAPT to avoid mental calculation as much as possible, but use this arithmetic function. (2)
Input of incremental value
If the system asks you a dimension and you want to input an incremental value from the present position, press incremental value as shown below. incremental. (Example) With (3)
key after an
indicates the capital of
50.45 I INPUT
specification, the data in Xaxis direction is radius value.
Change of figure element symbols
Depress soft key when the system asks you the following question. ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
ELEMENT FORWRD
ELEMENT BACK ELEMENT DELETE
. . . . . . . . . . . Element advances . . . . . . . . . . . . Element retreats . . . . . . . . . . . . Element on the cursor is deleted.
The question place can be confirmed by a flickering figure element symbol at the upper part of the CRT screen. (Insertion example) When depressing R with ... When depressing C with Flickering Flickering ...
56
B63304EN/02
(Deletion example) When depressing

DEL
Depress with with
DEL
key ..
Flickering
When depressing
DEL
..
Flickering (Exchange) For exchanging figure symbols, (1) delete old one after inserting new one, or (2) insert new one after deleting old one. (4)
Change of numerical value
The system will ask you necessary numerical values after figure element symbols have been input. If a numerical value was input by mistake, a correct numerical value can be input again after moving the question place by depressing [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] CURSOR key. Select an optional question, and input a correct numerical value again. [CURSOR ] . . . Element advances [CURSOR ] . . . Element retreats NOTE If a figure element of data was corrected, press the software key END.
3.2.4
Blank Figure Input of Special Figure Blank
(1) Input of blank figure If a special figure is selected as the blank figure (BF = 3) and surplus thicknesses (TX, TZ) are not defined as shown below, the blank figure input screen is displayed after the data of the machining profile is entered.
57
B63304EN/02
On the blank figure input screen, the machining profile is initially drawn as the blank figure.
Select the software key CORRECTION or LIST MODE and NEW to prepare the blank figure referring to the machined figure and to prepare it newly, respectively. Similar to input of parts figure data, use a symbolic key for entry of blank figure. In this case, however, G, T and N keys cannot be used for parts figure difinition. Input a blank figure according to any one of the following three formats. (a) Start or end point is on the coordinate axis.
(Example 1) (Example 2)
(Example 3)
58
B63304EN/02
(b) Z axis coordinate values of start and end point are same.
(Example)
(c) Start and end point are same.

(Example)
(2) End of blank figure input When all of blank figure has been input, key in the software key END or INPUT if there is a question as shown below: ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES =
The element figure created so far is redrawn and the following message is displayed: Select software key Press the NEXT PAGE if there are no areas modified and when proceeding to the next process.
59
B63304EN/02
3.2.5
Part Figure Input (Directory Input System)
The parts figure input system includes the system of entering the definition data with displaying a defined figure, and the method of entering the definition data while displaying in the table format. The former is called Graphic input system (refer to para. 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 II) and the latter is called Directory input system. The Directory input system will be described here. (1) In the screen of the graphic input system, press the soft key LIST MODE. [LIST MODE] . . . . The figure element input screen of the directory input system is selected.
In this screen, select the element to be modified, using ELEMENT FORWARD and ELEMENT BACK soft keys. (when the element is inserted, it is inserted before the element is selected.) Next, press INPUT when changing the figure data. When it is desired to insert the element, key in the element symbol and press INPUT. When only checking the data without modifying it, check the objective element data, using ELEMENT FORWARD and ELEMENT BACK soft keys. (2) When the element is changed or inserted, the figure data input screen is selected. The inquiry is displayed under the figure data list display.
60
B63304EN/02
In this screen, all data on the figure data are inquired. Adjust the cursor to the data to be entered and input the data. Upon completion of keyingin operation, press NEXT PAGE soft key. (3) [NEXT PAGE] . . . . Again, the figure element input screen is selected. At this time, the modified data is registered on the list screen. [END] . . . If END is pressed when the data input or modification is completed, the display returns to the screen that the figure data input is completed. However, when an error is produced in the parts figure data, it will not return to that screen 1 but will become figure element input screen and the Key in Again message is displayed. In this case, modify the figure data of this element. [GRAPH MODE] . . Press GRAPHIC MODE soft key to return to the graphic input screen from the directory input screen. At this time the position of the element shown by the cursor will become the same position with the elements where the cursor was blinking in the directory input system. Drawing is also carried out up to its position from the beginning.
3.2.6
Batch Input Functions for Chamfering and Corner R
(1) Chamfering Normally, it is customary practice to chamfer a corner unless otherwise specified for the machined parts in the drawing. Unlike the specified chamfer, this chamfering is not described in the drawing, the chamfering amount is constant and many in most cases. Consequently, when the machined figure is prepared, it may be troublesome to enter many chamfering elements. This function inputs a given amount of chamfer exclusively to all corners to which no chamfer (element symbol C) is input yet after all machined figures are completely entered. After the machined figure for turning is entered, the following screen is displayed.
61
B63304EN/02
When the rightmost soft key [+] is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
If the CHAMFER soft key is pressed, the yellow cursor blinks at a corner of the machining profile whose chamfering data has not yet been specified. [CHAMFER]
At the same time, the question for the chamfering amount C and surface roughness SR is displayed. C = Input the chamfering amount. marks showing the surface SR = Input the number of roughness. When the control asks, input the chamfering amount and surface roughness. After keying in a required numeral, press [EXEC] soft key. Then, chamfering is applied to the lighting corner, and the initial screen is selected.
62
B63304EN/02
When no corner is present for the machined figure or chamfering is applied to all corners or no section to designate chamfering is present, the chamfering screen is not selected even when the soft key CHAMFER is depressed. For the machined figure composed of many elements, even when the soft key CHAMFER is depressed, the chamfer may not be entered. (2) Corner R The batch input function for corner R is similar to the batch input function for chamfering. The function specifies identical corner R data for corners whose chamfering data is left unspecified after the entire machining profile is specified. The batch input function for corner R cannot be used for 5700 series of 16T CAP II. After entering the turning figure, press the rightmost soft key [+]. Then, press the CORNER R key. The yellow cursor lights at the corner whose chamfering data has not yet been specified.
After entering the required data, press the EXEC soft key. The corner R data is specified for the lighted corner. Then, the original screen is displayed again.
63
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 As a standard for a corner to be chamfered, set the maximum angle to system parameter No.756. (Setting range 0 t Angle x 180) For example, if the angle is set to 100, the cursor lights up as a chamfering corner with 100 or less angle. No cursor lights up for the portion more than 100 angle. Example) when setting system parameter No.756 as 100:
NOTE 2 The initial value of Corner R amount can be set to system parameter No.755. For example, if 0.2 is set to system parameter No.755, when the control asks the chamfering amount, the numeral 0.2 is entered as the initial value. The inquiry for SURFACE ROUGHNESS can be omitted. (System parameter No.0010) When omitted, Standard Surface Roughness is adopted for surface roughness.
Related system parameter

#7 010 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 All surface roughness Bit 1 Surface roughness for corner C Bit 4 Surface roughness for corner R 0 : The inquiry is not omitted. 1 : The inquiry is omitted. NOTE 3 No neck or groove portion is chamfered. The corner for which thread cutting is designated is chamfered.
64
B63304EN/02
Example)
. .G. .
. .T. .
3.2.7
Pattern Figure Input Function
Pattern Figure refers to a given shape or specified shape. This is a convenient input method: a figure consisting of several elements can be defined promptly by just answering the minimum question required for its figure.
When the system asks ELEMENTS SYMBOL ES = , press PATTERN FIGURE: the screen display changes to the soft key layout showing the pattern figure input.
65
B63304EN/02
(1) Input of equal pitch/continuous groove This input function is used for defining a figure in which a plurality of grooves are arranged at an equal pitch. Press REPEAT GROOVE: the display as shown below will appear.
The meaning of each question is as follows. (a) END POINT . . . . . . . . EDX = EZ = Input the end point of a straight line subsequent to a continuous groove. When defining the groove arranged in parallel to the Zaxis, it is not necessary to input the end point value of X. In contrast to the above, when defining a groove arranged in parallel to the Xaxis, it is not necessary to input the Z end point value. (b) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . N = Input the number of grooves. (c) PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Input the space from the groove entrance to the next groove entrance. The following question is the same as in element G. (d) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . DN = WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Input the groove direction, width and depth. (e) R/C OF CORNER K1 = V1 = K2 = V2 = K3 = V3 = K4 = V4 = Designate each corner figure.
66
B63304EN/02
(f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR = Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness. This surface roughness is applied to all elements forming this figure. Further, it is also possible to skip this question by system parameter No.0010 bit 2 (surface roughness to G). When skipped, Standard Surface Roughness is adopted for the surface roughness. Meaning of a software key [ESCAPE] . . . . . The menu screen returns. [BACK PAGE] . The screen, called by the sign ES = , returns. When this software key is pressed, the input data will become invalid. [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor goes up and down. [EXEC] . . . . . . . A shape is formed in accordance with the set data. Example)
Method of defining a figure as shown above. a) For normal figure input: 1) Definition from the origin direction . . . GGG 2) Definition from the chuck direction . . . GGG Each element is defined. b) When the pattern figure input function is used: 1) Definition from the origin direction . . . 2) efinition from the chuck direction . . . . . After defining the above so far, press REPEAT & GROOVE. The setting of 1) above is as follows. End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 8 END POINT . . . . . . EDX = EZ = 36.0 QUANTITY . . . . . . N = 3 PITCH . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0 DIRECTION . . . . . DN = WIDTH . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0 DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0 R/C OF CORNER K1 = C V1 = 0.5 K2 = V2 = K3 = V3 = K4 = C V4 = 0.5
67
B63304EN/02
Press EXEC
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn. The setting of 2) above is as follows. End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 32 END POINT . . . . . . EDX = EZ = 0.0 QUANTITY . . . . . . N = 3 PITCH . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0 DIRECTION . . . . . DN = WIDTH . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0 DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0 Press EXEC R/C OF CORNER K1 = C V1 = 0.5 K2 = V2 = K3 = V3 = K4 = C V4 = 0.5
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn.
68
B63304EN/02
i) The figure defined by REPEAT GROOVE is defined as an element by the arrow and G element row. ii) Correct for each element. This is the same for the deletion. iii) The relation between the pitch and groove is as shown below.
When DN = When DN =
NOTE For pattern figure input, the end point value of the previous element should already be fixed. (2) Neck corner input It is possible to define 3 types of DIN Standard neck corners. If NECK CORNER is pressed, the display changes on the next screen. NECK CORNER
In response to the question TYPE =, enter the neck figure type number (13) for the type to be set. The meaning of soft keys ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen. BACK PAGE . . . . . . Returns to the ES = question screen.
69
B63304EN/02
1) Type 1: Neck grinding
The meaning of each question is as follows. a) DEFINE DERECTION . . . DD = (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV) Specifies the direction that defines the element. If the current point is PV and the PH direction is to be defined (vertical plane horizontal plane), input 0. Conversely, if the current point is PH and the PV direction is to be defined (horizontal plane vertical plane) input 1. b) END POINT P* . . . . . . . . . EDX = EZ = Inputting the end point value. If the define direction DD is 0, input the PH point. If the define direction is 1, input the PV point. c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = (automatic setting) input neck width. d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . DT = (automatic setting) input neck depth. e) CORNER R . . . . . . . R = (automatic setting) input the corner radius value. The standard values of width, depth and corner R are set automatically according to the diameter of the neck (PH point DX value). To change these to other values, place the cursor on the question and input the number. f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR = Inputting the number of the mark that displays surface roughness. This surface roughness is appropriate to all the elements that shape this figure. The standard setting value (value of system parameter No.205) is set at the beginning automatically. It is also possible to change to other values. By setting bit 1 of system parameter No.10 to 1, it is possible to skip this question. When it is skipped, the standard surface roughness setting value is used. The meaning of soft keys ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen. BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the neck type number selection screen. CURSOR CURSOR . . . . Moves cursor up and down. EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the data set.
70
B63304EN/02
2) Type 2: Neck grinding (with side depth)
The meaning of each question is as follows. a) SIDE DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . W1 = inputs the depth of side depth. The meaning of all other questions are the same as for Type 1. 3) Type 3: Neck threading
The meanings of the inquiries are: (a) LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Thread length (b) LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead (c) MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads (d) THREADING DEPTH . . . D1 = Threading depth For the meanings of the other inquiries, see the description of type 1. When the threading depth (D1) is entered, the following soft keys are displayed on the screen:
D1=
ESCAPE BACK PAGE OUTER INNER SQUARE THREAD THREAD THREAD CURSOR CURSOR
METRIC
EXEC
71
B63304EN/02
If the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or SQUARE THREAD soft key is pressed, the system automatically specifies the value of D1 (threading depth). The value is calculated using the following expression: Pitch = LD (LEAD) B NT (MULTIPLE) OUTER THREAD: INNER THREAD: Pitch (P) Constant (system parameter 174, initial value 0.7578) Pitch (P) Constant (system parameter 125, initial value 0.6495) NT (MULTIPLE))
SQUARE THREAD: Pitch (P) B (2
System parameters 125 and 174 specify the constants to be used when the elements of threading are manually defined. If the automatically specified value is not suitable, change it manually. To define a trapezoid thread, manually enter the data. After the value of D1 is entered, the system automatically specifies the values of WIDTH (WT), DEPTH (DT), and CORNER R (R). The values are calculated as shown below: WIDTH (WT): DEPTH (DT): WT = 3.5 (constant) DT = 1.2 (constant) Pitch (P) Threading depth (D1) Pitch (P)
CORNER R (R): R = 0.5 (constant)
NOTE 1 The threading depth (D1) can be automatically determined by pressing the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or SQUARE THREAD soft key only when the values of LD (LEAD) and NT (MULTIPLE) are specified. 2 If the value of LD (LEAD) or NT (MULTIPLE) is changed, the D1 (threading depth) and DT (depth) must be calculated again. Press the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or SQUARE THREAD soft key to have the system automatically specify suitable values.
72
B63304EN/02
4) Neck diameter (PH point DX value) and width, side depth, depth, corner R (DIN Standards)
Diameter (X axis) Depth (DT) Corner R (R) Width (WT) Side depth (W1)
Under 18 mm Under 0.7087 inch
.25 mm .6 mm 2.0 mm .1 mm .0098 inch .0236 inch .0787 inch .0039 inch
Above 18 mm below 80 mm .35 mm .6 mm 2.5 mm .2 mm 0.7087 to 3.15 inch .0138 inch .0236 inch .0984 inch .0079 inch Above 80 mm Above 3.15 inch Example .45 mm 1.0 mm 4.0 mm .3 mm .0177 inch .0394 inch .1575 inch .0118 inch
Method of definition when defining the figure of this illustration. a) Defining the figure by the existing method without using the pattern figure input method (1) Definition from zero point direction . . . RR (2) Definition from chuck direction . . . . . . . RR In this way, each element is defined one at a time. b) Defining the figure using pattern figure input (1) Definition from zero point direction . . . (End point PH) (2) Definition from check direction . . . . . . . (End point PV) Inputting elements in this way, after keying in the end point value (PH or PV), press neck corner. Input the following data with regard to each question for (1). NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . P = 1 Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and therefore the following data should be input. Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =1 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV) End point PV . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 60. EZ = 20. Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting) Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting) Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting) Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
73
B63304EN/02
When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn. Input the following data with regard to each question for 2. NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . P = 1 Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and therefore the following data should be input. Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =0 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV) End point PH . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 40. EZ = 0. Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting) Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting) Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting) Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting) When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn. i) The figure defined at neck corner input is separated and defined into direction arrow elements and R. ii) Carry out corrections and deletions one element at a time. NOTE 1 Definition is possible if the element directly in front of corner R is an element other than G/N/T, but the end point value directly in front must be decided. Furthermore, it is not possible to create it as the first element. 2 The neck is created in the corner of the vertical and horizontal plane. It is possible in the taper plane. 3 If define direction DD = 0 is input, the next end point symbol is displayed as PH. Conversely, if define direction DD = 1 is input, the next end point symbol is displayed as PV. Furthermore, the neck direction is decided automatically by the define direction and end point value. Examples: Illustrations type 2 for horizontal figures a) When define direction is 0 (PV: vertical plane PH: horizontal plane)
End point PH is upper left with regard to PV End point PH is upper right with regard to PV
End point PH is lower left with regard to PV
End point PH is lower right with regard to PV
74
B63304EN/02
b) When define direction is 1 (PH: horizontal plane PV: vertical plane)

End point PV is upper left with regard to PV End point PV is upper right with regard to PV
End point PV is lower left with regard to PH
End point PV is lower right with regard to PH
NOTE 4 As for the end point value, input the absolute values only. It is not possible to input the incremental value. 5 Input positive neck, depth and side depth values. 6 Input values smaller than the difference between the Z values of PV point and PH point for neck width. An alarm (END POINT OR NECK WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT) is displayed if a bigger value is input. Note that if a bigger depth or side depth value is input, it is possible that a figure other than a neck figure will be created.
3) Figure element copy function Having specified the start and end points of the figure to be copied, once the number of copies has been keyed in, it is possible to define the same figure repeatedly. This is useful when repeatedly inputting special groove figures and complicated circular figures.
75
B63304EN/02
In the case illustrated above, when the soft key PATTRN INPUT is pressed followed by FIGURE COPY, the following copy area specification screen appears. Note however that when the PATTRN INPUT key is pressed, the cursor must be next to the very last element, as illustrated above.When the cursor has been moved by corrections to element data etc., press the FIGURE COPY only after having made sure to move the cursor next to the very last element. If the FIGURE COPY key is pressed when the cursor is at an element other than the final one, an error message will be displayed saying CAN NOT USE THIS FUNCTION and the copy area specification screen will not appear.
a) The figure to be copied and the number of copies is specified in the copy area specification screen. Questions are as follows. REPEAT NO. . . . . . . . . N = Specifies the number of repeat copies. When the NUMBER INPUT is keyed in, the data is set for the number of repeats. When only INPUT is keyed in, the cursor point alternates between the copy start and copy end point. The meaning of soft keys ESCAPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen. STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the ES = question screen. If this key is pressed, the copy area and number of copies specified up until then will be invalidated. CURSOR BACK. . . . . . The flashing cursor moves in the reverse direction. CURSOR FORWARD . The flashing cursor moves in the regular direction. EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the specified copy area and the number of repeats. b) To specify the copy start point, align the cursor to the copy start point with the CURSOR FORWRD, CURSOR BACK key and press the INPUT key. When the copy start point has been specified, the message SPECIFY THE COPY END POINT will appear.
76
B63304EN/02
c) To specify the copy end point, align the cursor to the copy and point with the CURSOR FORWRD, CURSOR BACK key and press the INPUT key. When the copy end point has been specified, the message SPECIFY THE COPY START POINT will appear. d) When the soft key EXEC is pressed, the figure element will be copied repeatedly within the range specified by the copy start point and copy end point. Note however that when the number of repeats has not been defined, the message KEY IN REPEAT NO. will appear and the EXEC key should be pressed after having entered the number of repeats. Example) Illustration type = 2 Blank figure BF = 1 Blank dimensions Diameter D = 100 Length L = 105 Position of reference line ZP = 5
Number 1 element SDX = 0 SZ = 0 PE =1 DX = 20 Number 2 element Z = 10 Number 3 element DX = Undefined Z = Undefined TN = 0 A = 45 Number 4 element Z = 30 Z = 20 TN = 0 Number 5 element DX = 20 Number 6 element Z = 25 Number 7 element DX = 40 Number 8 element Z = 30 Number 9 element The following explanation is based on an example where the above mentioned data has been defined and one copy is required from No.3 element to No.8 element. By pressing the soft key ELEMENT COPY, the copy area specification screen will be displayed, set the repeat number to 1 and specify the No.3 element at copy start point and No.8 element at the copy end point.
77
B63304EN/02
Press the soft key EXEC.
One copy will be made from No.3 element to No.8 element based on the data set. When the figure that has been copied is to be corrected, change the data element by element as with previous corrections.
78
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 The final element of the figure must be a direction arrow and the end point defined, before pressing the FIGURE COPY key. Examples : Figure element number . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure configuration element . . . j The element here must be an direction arrow and the end point defined. a) When the element in front is not a direction arrow, if the soft key FIGURE COPY is pressed, the error message LAST END POINT IS ARROW will be displayed and the copy specification screen will not appear. b) When the end point of the element is not defined, if the soft key FIGURE COPY is pressed, the error message LAST END POINT IS UNDEFINED will be displayed and the copy specification screen will not appear. 2 Input a positive whole number between 1 and 10 in the repeat number. If any other data is keyed in the message KEY IN AGAIN will appear. 3 When there is incremental type data in the copy area, it will change to absolute type data when copied. 4 When the general element number has been exceeded during execution of figure copy, as many copies as is possible will be created. An error message indicating that the number of element is excessive will appear on the screen.
79
B63304EN/02
3.2.8
Function for Defining the Center of an Arc According to a Given Single Coordinate
In part figure definition, the system can define the center of an arc even if only one of the coordinates (X or Z) is given. This feature eliminates the need for manual calculation. (1) Operation As an example, consider the figure shown in Fig.1 (the drawing format is FANUC standard 2), which is defined as described below: 1) Specifying the material MATERIAL NO.: MN = 1 STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS: NR = 2 BLANK FIGURE: BF = 1 (Cylinder) BLANK SIZE, DIAMETER: D = 100 BLANK SIZE, LENGTH: L = 105 BASE LINE: ZP = 5
2) Defining a figure (entering a part figure) The four points of the figure are defined in the following order: A (start point), B, C, and D (end point). The figure can be defined only by entering the following data in the command specifying the arc from point A to C. Figure element 1) SR = 2 SDX = 20 SZ = 0 PE = 1 DX Z TL TN
80
= = = =
jjj jjj jjj jjj
R = 26 CDX = jjj CZ = 18
B63304EN/02
After the data is entered, the system can calculate the center of the arc. The system prompts the operator to select a desired center. On the screen, calculated centers are automatically scaled and indicated by graphic cursors. The system temporarily scales the centers so that the operator can easily select one of the centers. After the operator specifies the desired center, the original scale is restored. Selecting a center . . PC = j (: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down) The desired center is the intersection of auxiliary circle A (center (20, 0) and radius (R) 26) and the straight line of Z = 18. Since the circle and line intersect at two points (PC1 and PC2), the operator must specify either of them. (See the figure below.)
81
B63304EN/02
In response to the PC = j prompt, key in (INPUT). PC2 is selected. (: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down) Figure element 2) DX = jjj R = 70 Z = jjj CDX = jjj TL = jj1 CZ = jjj TN = jj1 Figure element 3) DX = 70 R = 15 Z = jjj CDX = 80 TN = jjj CZ = 33 As two end points are possible (PE1 and PE2), the operator must specify either of them. (See Fig.3.2.8.) On the screen, calculated end points are automatically scaled and indicated by graphic cursors. The system temporarily scales the two end points so that the operator can easily select one of them. After the operator specifies a desired end point, the original scale is restored.
Straight line of X = 70
Fig.3.2.8 Selecting an End Point
In response to the PE = j prompt, key in (INPUT). PE1 is selected. (: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down) After all the above data is specified, the arc is defined and the part figure is drawn on the screen.
82
B63304EN/02
(2) Notes NOTE 1 The system can define the center of an arc according to a given single coordinate when either of the following conditions is satisfied: The end point of the previous element is determined. The next element is known and the arc contacts the element. 2 The system can define the center of an arc according to a given single coordinate only when the coordinate (CDX or CZ) is specified with an absolute value.
83
B63304EN/02
3.3
MACHINE ZERO POINT AND TURRET POSITION
WARNING After entering machine zero point or turret position data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. When the figure has been defined, the screen asks about the Home position and Index position. The meaning of questions is as follows: HOME POSITION DXH = ZH = Input the coordinate value of home position of NC lathe. If a data has already been input properly, press the Cursor. Do not input data and leave it undefined when not starting from the home position. INDEX POSITION DXI = ZI = Input the coordinate value of turret revolution center position. If a data has already been input properly, press the NEXT PAGE. In the case of 15TTFB, 16TT CAP II, the question for home position and index position at the No.2 also appears. WARNING Input the distance from the programmed coordinate axis for both home position and index position. Let the sign of Z to positive whichever direction the Z axis of coordinate axis programmed faces. The home position is used to indicate the relationship between the program coordinate system and machine coordinate system. When the home position and index position is determined and it is troublesome to input these data every time, it is possible to set initial values to the system parameters 206 213. Also, it is possible to skip questions. For details, see Chapter 8 11. This screen does not appear when skipping the questions of home position and index position.
84
B63304EN/02
3.4
MACHINING DEFINITION
Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.

Start machining definition Yes New definition? No Select a mode (modify, create, etc.)
Select a process
Is automatic process determinationexecuted? No Yes Is machining definition completed? No Define a tool, machining start position, and passing point Cutting off Center drilling, bar feed
Yes
Execute automatic process determination
End
Outer surface machining, inner surface machining, grooving, residual machining, threading, C-axis machining Y-axis machining Is grooving, residual machining, C-axis/Y-axis machining executed? Yes Is there only one definition point?
No Specify the cutting start position Specify the cutting area and the direction or position of cutting
Define cutting conditions
Define cutting conditions
Is machining of another area defined with the same tool? No
Yes
NOTE The previous screen can be displayed by pressing the [BACK PAGE] key. When a subprocess is defined, however, the [BACK PAGE] key is disabled.
85
B63304EN/02
3.4.1
Selection of Kinds of Machining
WARNING No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made. Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in the machining definition includes any invalid process steps (inner surface machining without drilling, or finishing before roughing, for example), the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining machining, check the specified machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
When the machining definition soft key (No.4) is pressed on the initial screen, the following screen appears. On this screen, the manual machining definition item and the automatic process determination function can be selected.
[+]
[+]
Fig. 3.4.1 (a)
To select a machining type, press the soft key corresponding to a desired major category. The detailed machining menu is then displayed. From the menu, select the desired machining type. On this screen, the following functions can be used: Automatic process determination function Function for setting the tool data and tooling data
86
B63304EN/02
Soft keys for selecting major categories of machining types CENTER HOLE . . . . . . Displays the center drilling menu. TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the turning menu. GROOV. THREAD . . . Displays the grooving and threading menu. MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Caxis/Yaxis milling machining menu. Other soft keys ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the execution procedure menu. PROC. DELETE . . . . . . Deletes the process selected by the cursor. CURSOR , CURSOR . . . . Move the cursor in the process list. AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes automatic process determination. AUTO PROC . . . . . . . . Specifies the machining procedure for automatic process determination. TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the screen on which the tool data can be specified, modified, and deleted. TOOLING INFOR. . . . . Displays the screen on which the tooling data can be specified, modified, and deleted. NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . . Displays the next page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the soft keys on the next page.
87
B63304EN/02
When the CENTER HOLE soft key is pressed
[+]
When the TURN soft key is pressed
[+]
When the GROOV. THREAD soft key is pressed
[+]
[+]
[+]
Fig. 3.4.1 (b)
[CENTER DRILL] . . . [DRILLING] . . . . . . . . [REAMER] . . . . . . . . . [TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
Press this key for center drilling Press this key for drilling Select to perform reaming Select to perform tapping Press this key for sub cycle
88
B63304EN/02
Fig. 3.4.1 (c)
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . [SFIN O.D.] . . . . . [FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . [ROUGH I.D.] . . . . [SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . [FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . [BAR FEED] . . . . . [SUB CYCLE] . . . .
Press this key for roughing of outer figure Press this key for semifinishing of outer figure Press this key for finishing of outer figure Press this key for roughing of inner figure Press this key for semifinishing of inner figure Press this key for finishing of inner figure Press this key for bar feed machining. Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. 3.4.1 (d)
[GROOV. NECK] . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving or rough grooving and finishing are carried out by a single tool) or necking. [ROUGH. GROOVE] . . . . Press this key for rough grooving [FIN. GROOVE] . . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing [CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key is not displayed.) [THREADING] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting [SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle For example, press Rough O.D. when the soft key in Fig.3.4.1(c) is displayed; Roughing of outer figure will have been selected in process No.1. NOTE 1 The CUT OFF soft key is not displayed if system parameter 140 is set to 0. 2 For the automatic tool determination function, see Part XI. For setting the tool data and tooling data, see Part V.
89
B63304EN/02
3.4.2
Process Change and Correction
Fig. 3.4.2 (a)
When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining definition, the screen shown above will appear. [CORR.&OUT] . . . Press this key to correct a selected process and create the NC data of the corrected process. [CORRECTION] . . Press this key to modify or change part of the process. [NEW] . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when reinstructing the process from the start after all processes are cancelled. When CORRECTION is depressed, following screen appears.
[+]
[+]
Fig. 3.4.2 (b)
90
B63304EN/02
Each time Cursor or Cursor is depressed when the above screen appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table moves up and down. Press Cursor or Cursor to select an arbitrary Process No., and correct the machining contents. Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced. 1) Sample Insertion PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 04: To insert roughing of inner figure between processes 02 and 03, follow this procedure: 1 Press the CURSOR or CURSOR key to select the position of insertion (in this example, process 03). A specified process will be inserted immediately before the position selected by the cursor. 2 Press soft keys to select desired machining (for this example, press the TURN key, then press the ROUGH. I.D. key) and define the machining. The results are as follows. PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE (INSERTION) PROC 04: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 05: 2) Sample Deletion PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 04: 1 Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the process no. to be deleted (PROC. 02) 2 Press PROC DELETE. PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: PROC 04: 3) Replacement 1 Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one. 2 Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
3.4.3
Output of Only Single Process
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output. Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig. 3.4.2 (a) appears: the screen as shown in Fig. 3.4.2 (b) will appear. Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor * or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE. After the process is corrected, the NC data creation screen appears. This screen shows the NC data of the corrected process.
91
B63304EN/02
3.4.4
Tool Data
WARNING After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen changes and the tool information required for working definition is prompted.
Soft keys ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the menu screen. BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page. TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skips the system inquiry for the tool data and displays that for the machining start position. NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . Selects the ID of the next tool whose machining process type (KP) is specified. (The automatic process determination function is required.) TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the tool data list. The data can be specified and corrected. TOOLING INFOR . . . . Displays the tooling information list. The data can be specified and corrected. CURSOR , CURSOR . . . . Moves the cursor to a prompt. CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draws the tool figure. (The animated simulation function is required.) P.PNT SET . . . . . . . . . . Displays the section in which a passing point can be specified. NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . . Displays the next page. The system prompts the operator to specify the following tool data: 1 Tool number data 2 Tool figure data 3 Tool setting data
92
B63304EN/02
(1) Tool number data The system prompt the user to specify the following:
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . . TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . TL TN TM TM2 ID =J =JJ =JJ =JJ =JJ
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = Turret number The system prompts the operator to specify a turret number if the machine has two or more turrets. Specify the number of turrets in the following MTF:
No.1050: Number of turrets (1 or 2) 1: Twoaxis lathe (one turret) 2: fouraxis lathe (one spindle/two turrets)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . . TN = Tool selection number To use a tool whose tooling data is registered, enter the corresponding tool selection number.The other data is then automatically displayed. To enter a tool selection number greater than 99, modify the following MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified. The maximum tool number usable in menu No. 6 (animated simulation) is 255.
No.1104: Number of digits of the Tcode tool selection number (up to 3)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number To enter a tool offset number greater than 99, modify the following MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified.
No.1105: Number of digits of the Tcode tool offset number (up to 3)
A tool offset number can be specified for each cutting area. To perform individual tool offset for each of the specified cutting areas, specify the value for switching the offset numbers in the following system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool offset is: = 0: Not output. = 1: output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying tool offset for each cutting area, this prompt is made when the cutting condition data is entered. (For details, see Section 3.4.8.) TOOL OFFSET NO.2: TM2 = Specifies the tool offset number for the minor cutting edge of a grooving tool. If a grooving tool is used, a tool offset number can be specified for the minor cutting edge. To specify the tool offset number for the minor cutting edge, set the following system parameter (Warning):
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Before cutting with the minor cutting edge is started in grooving, the T code of the secondary tool offset is: = 0: Not output. = 1: output.
93
B63304EN/02
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . ID = Tool identification number When a tool identification number is entered, the registered tool figure data and tool setting data are displayed. To use a tool whose tool data is not registered, do not define the tool identification number. If the entered tool identification number is not registered, the NOT FOUND TOOL ID. NO. message is displayed. If the tool type corresponding to the selected tool identification number is not suitable for the current process, the TOOL TYPE DONT FIT THIS PROCESS message is displayed. WARNING If TOOL OFFSET NO.2 is specified, the T code of the secondary tool offset number is output before the minor cutting edge is moved for grooving. TOOL SELECT NO. = 01 TOOL OFFSET NO. = 01 TOOL OFFSET NO.2 = 02
94
B63304EN/02
(2) Tool figure data The tool figure data is shown below. For details of the tool figure data, see Section 2 in Chapter V. [Turning tools]
Center drill, drill NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN = DRILL DIAMETER . . . . DD = Tool for grooving and residual machining NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . RN = AC = AN = XN = ZN =
Tool for threading CUTTING EDGE . . . . . AC = NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN = VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . XN = ZN =
Generalpurpose tool NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . PROTECTION ANGLE . . . VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . RN = AC = AN = AP = XN = ZN =
Reamer TOOL DIAMETER . . . . DT = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . LT = PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . LE =
Tap TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . DT = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . LT = PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LE = PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
Finger VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . XN =
As the XN value of a finger bit, enter the dimensions shown below:
95
B63304EN/02
NOTE The system can be set so that it displays the tool figure data and does not allow modification. To do this, change the following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Specifies whether the tool figure data can be specified in machining definition. Cannot be specified. (The data is just displayed.) Can be specified.
= 0: = 1:
(3) Tool setting data [Setting data of a turning tool]

SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . AS =JJJJ . JJJ SETTING POSITION . . . . . XS =JJJJ . JJJ ZS =JJJJ . JJJ SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . SD =J HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . HL =JJ
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . . AS = Setting angle Enter the setting angle according to the drawing format. This line is not displayed when a center drill, drill, or finger bit is selected. SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = Setting position along the Xaxis, ZS = Setting position along the Zaxis SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . . SD = Direction of spindle rotation 0: Clockwise 1: Counterclockwise The following system parameter specifies whether the spindle direction can be specified for each tool:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Specifies whether the spindle direction can be specified for each tool. = 0: Cannot be specified. = 1: Can be specified.
HOLDER NO. . . . . HL = Holder number for animated simulation The system prompts the operator to enter the holder number if the animated simulation function is provided. If the specified holder is not defined, it is not drawn. * Warning and Note on tool data WARNING After the NC data is created, the tool data is first checked to see whether the figure is creates causes interference and then the offset data is calculated. The output NC data is correct only when the entered tool data is correct.
96
B63304EN/02
NOTE If the NEXT PAGE soft key is pressed to display the next screen when a tool with registered tool data is selected, the set data is registered as the tooling data.
For milling tools, see Chapter VIII. (4) When the machine has two turrets (TT model) When the machine has two turrets, a change in the turret number inverts the drawing of the tool figure.
Example of tool figures displayed when tools having an identical figure on different turrets are changed
NOTE 1 If the tool holder is not defined, only the tip is displayed. 2 The scale of the tip and holder cannot be changed.
3.4.5
Machining Start Position
WARNING After entering machining start point data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. When all tool data is entered, the system prompts the operator to enter the data of the machining start position.
MACHINING START POSITION: DXO = JJJJ. JJJ ZO = JJJJ. JJJ
DXO = X coordinate of the machining start position ZO = Z coordinate of the machining start position The machining start position can be automatically determined according to the turret turning position and tool setting position. DXO = DXI (turret turning position) XS (setting position) 2 ZO = ZI (turret turning position) ZS (setting position)
97
B63304EN/02
The following system parameter specifies whether the operator is prompted to enter the machining start position:
No.009: 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 Specifies whether the operator is prompted to enter the machining start position. = 0: Prompted. = 1: Not prompted.
3.4.6
Passing Point
WARNING After entering passing point data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. (1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after completion of the machining. When the rightmost soft key [ ] is pressed on the tool data screen, the following soft keys are displayed:
When the P.PNT SET soft key is pressed, the system prompts the operator to enter the data of the passing point.
Fig. 3.4.6 (a)
98
B63304EN/02
PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH: 1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA1 = ZA1 = 2ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA2 = ZA2 = Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from the machining start position at the time of machining start. PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE: 1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE1 = ZE1 = 2ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE2 = ZE2 = Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to the next machining start position upon completion of machining. WARNING The following system parameter specifies whether the operator is prompted to enter a passing point for each machining type:
Nos.105 to 115, 300 to 305: x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Specifies whether the operator is prompted to enter a passing point for each machining type. = 0: Not prompted. = 1: Prompted.
When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move. For example, in the absence of input on Zaxis coordinate value after inputting some data to Xaxis coordinate value, the tool moves to the specified position only for Xaxis, and Zaxis does not move.
Fig. 3.4.6 (b) Designation pf passing point
99
B63304EN/02
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start position using the following system parameters.
[Turning] Nos.105 to 115: 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0 Specifies the number of axes along which the tool approaches simultaneously. Specifies the number of axes along which the tool retracts simultaneously. = 0: Two axes = 1: One axis [Caxis machining] Nos.300 to 305: 0 0 x x x 0 0 0 Specifies the number of axes along which the tool approaches simultaneously. = 00: One axis = 01: Two axes = 10 or 11: Three axes Specifies the number of axes along which the tool retracts simultaneously. (Zaxis and Xaxis) = 0: Two axes = 1: One axis
3.4.7
Specifying the Direction and Area of Cutting
(1) Outer surface machining and inner surface machining
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted to specify a dividing direction:
100
B63304EN/02
Functions of the soft keys BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page. / / / . . . . . . . . . . Enter the cutting direction. CURSOR BACK/CURSOR FORWRD . . . Move the graphic cursor indicating the dividing point. CURSOR / CURSOR . . . . . . . Move the cursor in the data setting area. DRAWING RANGE . . Enlarges or reduces the size of the drawing. NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page (tool definition screen). 1) Specifying the cutting direction When outer surface machining or inner surface machining is selected, the operator is prompted to enter a cutting direction. In response to the prompt, enter a desired direction. The direction can be entered by pressing a key on the numeric keypad or a soft key. The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted to enter the cutting direction:
NOTE The operator is prompted to enter the cutting direction only when outer surface machining or inner surface machining is selected. If cutting off, grooving, threading, Caxis machining or Yaxis machining is selected, the operator is prompted to enter different data. 2) Specifying the cutting area The cutting area can be specified by graphic cursors (J) which are displayed on the machining profile. The screen displays the figure of the workpiece to be cut (broken line) and the machining profile (solid line). The operator is prompted to enter the dividing direction. On the screen, specify the machining start point and end point of the part figure, using the blinking graphic cursors. One cursor indicates the start point of the cutting area and the other cursor indicates the end point.
101
B63304EN/02
To select the start or end point, move the cursor along the part figure. Each time the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK key is pressed, the cursor moves forward or backward along the part figure. After entering the start and end points, specify a cutting area by pressing arrow keys corresponding to desired dividing directions in the blank figure. Specify the following directions by pressing the corresponding arrow keys:
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the start point DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the end point
Any one of the following eight directions can be selected: [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] 3) Sample divisions When an arrow key is pressed, an imaginary line is drawn from the position of the blinking cursor in the direction of the arrow. The cutting area is an area enclosed with the imaginary lines drawn by the arrow keys and the lines of blank figure and part figure (shaded area in figures below).
102
B63304EN/02
The cutting area can be displayed on this screen so that the operator can check the area specified by entering the dividing directions. Set the following system parameters so that the cutting area can be displayed:
No.670: No.671: No.704: Color in which the blank figure is filled in on the machining definition screen Color in which the cutting area is displayed on the machining definition screen x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 Specifies whether the cutting area is displayed on the machining definition screen. Specifies whether the blank figure is filled in on the machining definition screen.
The figure of the workpiece is still displayed on the screen after the specified area is cut off. Symbolic FAPT simulates all stages of machining on the screen. The operator can easily check whether the area to be cut remains. The shape of the tool determines the area it can cut. The system automatically checks the relationship between the tool shape and part figure and displays the area which the tool cannot cut. Specify another tool to cut the uncut area.
103
B63304EN/02
4) Specifying cutting of the remaining area
The above figure shows an example of an uncut area that results because of the relationship between the part figure and tool shape. To cut the uncut area, specify a tool having an inverted tool tip.
If an attempt is made to specify cutting of the uncut area with a tool having the wrong tip or wrong figure data, the system may not accept the area data. Once the area has been specified, the screen for specifying the cutting conditions for that area is displayed.
104
B63304EN/02
(2) Cutting off
Specify the start point of cutting off by pressing the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key. The tool path for cutting off is illustrated below.
Fig. 3.4.7 (a)
If the cursor is moved to specify the previous figure element as the start point, the tool path becomes as shown in Fig. 3.4.7 (b).
105
B63304EN/02
Fig. 3.4.7 (b)
System parameter 144 specifies whether the outer corner of the workpiece is chamfered. If chamfering of the workpiece is specified, the workpiece is chamfered after the cut off operation (Fig. 3.4.7 (c)).
Fig. 3.4.7 (c)
106
B63304EN/02
(3) Threading
Specify the position of threading. If the blinking cursor indicates the desired threading position, enter 1. To specify another threading position, enter 0. The threading position can also be entered by pressing the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key. (4) Residual machining
Specify the position of residual machining. If the blinking cursor indicates the desired position of residual machining, enter 1. To specify another position of residual machining, enter 0. The position of residual machining can also be specified by pressing the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
107
B63304EN/02
3.4.8
Function for Automatically Setting Area Division Points
(1) Overview Using the optional automatic process determination function enables the positions of area division cursors to be automatically set according to the cutting direction. The area division cursors are used to specify cutting areas for outer machining, inner machining, and grooving. This automatic setting function can reduce a considerable number of operations for moving the area division cursors, thus allowing more efficient definition of cutting areas. The automatic setting of the area division cursors is based on the area division method used by the automatic process determination function. For details, see Section 4.4, Area Division in Part XI, AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION. The area division cursors are graphic cursors that move along a machining profile to specify a cutting area. (2) Execution conditions The area division cursors are automatically set under the following conditions. 1) When any of the following machining processes is newly defined, the area division cursors are automatically set on the cutting area definition screen. a) Outer roughing b) Outer semifinish machining c) Outer finishing d) Inner roughing e) Inner semifinish machining f) Inner finishing g) Grooving (including roughing and finishing) For grooving, if no G elements are included in the parts figure, the area division cursors are initialized to the start and end points. 2) Once the cutting direction (CD) is changed on the cutting area definition screen, the area division cursors are automatically reset. (3) Warning and Notes WARNING For some machining profiles, the automatic setting function may not position the area division cursors correctly. If this occurs, use the [CURSOR FORWARD] or [CURSOR BACK] soft key to modify the area division cursor positions.
NOTE 1 For outer or inner machining, if an inverse process tool is set, the area division cursors are not set automatically. 2 The automatic setting of the area division cursors is applied to the entire machining profile. 3 To use this automatic setting function, the optional automatic process determination function must be used.
108
B63304EN/02
3.4.9
Cutting Conditions
WARNING The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Input the data of CUTTING CONDITION. (Example : ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE)
The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while monitoring the CRT screen. To display the next page, press the NEXT PAGE soft key. To use the tool to cut another area, display the area definition screen. Unless the tool is used to cut another area, display the tool list screen. If you want to change the feedrate to 75% of the displayed value, for example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75 as follows. (Example) F1 = 3 * 0 . 7 5
INPUT
* Outputting the T code specifying the tool offset for each cutting area The T code of the tool offset number, output for each process, can be output for each of the specified cutting areas.
109
B63304EN/02
Specify the value for switching the offset numbers in the following system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool offset is: = 0: Not output. = 1: Output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying the tool offset for each cutting area, the following prompt is displayed: TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number for each cutting area The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are described below according to machining data. (1) Center drilling TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm) (Default value is system parameter No.180) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm) SPINDLE SPEED . . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
110
B63304EN/02
(2) Drilling Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to the movement of a drill. CUTTING CONDITIONS 1 TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE. . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.181) CUT POINT. . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT. . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 0) SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CUTTING CONDITIONS 2 TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 0) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.121) RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch) SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
111
B63304EN/02
CUTTING CONDITIONS 3 TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling dearance CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter No.702 is 0) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.121) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.122) RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch) SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass (mm/rev or inch/rev)
112
B63304EN/02
WARNING D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method 3 As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as positive values.
Associated parameter
#7 702 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut 0 : Specifies with an incremental value 1 : Specifies with an absolute value
113
B63304EN/02
(3) Reaming TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Amount of clearance (mm or inches) (Default value is system parameter 181 [same as drilling]) CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate (Warning) SPINDLE SPEED . . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0 or underfined F2=F1 (value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance (mm or inches) (Default value is system parameter 196) CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate (Warning)
Workpiece face Threading part
114
B63304EN/02
WARNING A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be negative. Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis is always positive on the Machining definition screen of menu No.4. Specifications of the machining start points and intermediate points are all made in accordance with this system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing of outer figure (6) Roughing of inner figure TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.183) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.184) CZ2= Second clearance along the Zaxis (mm or inch) (The initial value is set in system parameter No.194) (Warning) FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.117) TZ = Finish allowance in Zaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.172) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return amount quantity (mm or inch)
115
B63304EN/02
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) F3 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) 1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside diameter roughing. Refer to the item (11). * First override in outer surface roughing In outer surface roughing, the depth and feedrate of the first cut can be overridden. To specify the override, set bit 7 of system parameter No.104 to 1
No.104: 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 Specifies whether the operator is prompted to enter an override value. = 0: Not prompted. = 1: Prompted.
Even if the operator is not prompted to specify the override, the data can be overridden by the value set in system parameter No.711.
No.711: Override value for the first cut in outer surface roughing (10% to 100%) Not defined: 100% n: n%
116
B63304EN/02
(7) Semifinishing of outer figure (8) Semifinishing of inner figure TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.185) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.186) CZ2= Second clearance along the Zaxis (mm or inch) (The initial value is set in system parameter No.194) (Warning) (P.115) FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.118) TZ = Finish allowance in Zaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.173) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (Warning) (P.125)
117
B63304EN/02
(9) Finishing of outer figure (10) Finishing of inner figure CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.187) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.188) CZ2= Second clearance along the Zaxis (mm or inch) (The initial value is set in system parameter No.194) (Warning) (P.115) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) for (mm/rev or FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev or F2 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev or F3 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev F4 = Feedrate or inch/rev) MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed WARNING The prompt on the second clearance along the Zaxis can be displayed. The clearance becomes valid when the tool approaches the workpiece during a process for inner surface machining. To display the prompt, set the following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The second clearance specified for inner surface machining becomes: = 0: Invalid. = 1: Valid.
118
B63304EN/02
Turret turning position
(11) Grooving/necking machining [GROOVING/NECKING] When a grooving tool is selected (TP = 3) (roughing type is 1) TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset number 2 for each cutting area) FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2) PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking (0: Not executed, 1: Executed) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finishing allowance for width (mm or inch) TB = Finishing allowance for depth (mm or inch) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in pecking (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in pecking (mm or inch)
119
B63304EN/02
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Feedrate in finishing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) NOTE If necking is specified, the operator is not prompted to enter TW, TB, and F2. When a versatile tool is selected (TP = 11) TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset number 2 for each cutting area) ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3) FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finishing allowance for width (mm or inch) TB = Finishing allowance for depth (mm or inch) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in type 2 or 3 of roughing (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) F3 = Feedrate in finishing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) [ROUGHING OF GROOVE] When a grooving tool is selected (roughing type is 1) TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset number 2 for each cutting area) PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking (0: Not executed, 1: Executed) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finishing allowance for width (mm or inch) TB = Finishing allowance for depth (mm or inch)
120
B63304EN/02
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in pecking (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in pecking (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Approach feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) When a versatile tool is selected TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset number 2 for each cutting area) ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finishing allowance for width (mm or inch) TB = Finishing allowance for depth (mm or inch) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in type 2 or 3 of roughing (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) [FINISHING OF GROOVE] When a grooving tool is selected TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset number for each cutting area) TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset number 2 for each cutting area) FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate in finishing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) When a versatile tool is selected FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
121
B63304EN/02
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F3 = Feedrate in finishing (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) The following figure shows the relationship between the clearance and finishing allowance in grooving.
Roughing can be executed in the following three ways:
Finishing can be executed in the following three ways:
122
B63304EN/02
When pecking is executed in roughing of a groove, the tool is moved as shown below:
NOTE The operator is not prompted to enter the data of pecking if finishing of a groove or necking is selected. In roughing and finishing, the first cut is made from the virtual tool tip side of the tool. The position of the virtual tool tip is determined by AC and AN of the tool data. If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90 for a tool for outer surface machining, the virtual tool tip is on the left side of the tool. Therefore, the first cut is made from the left side.
123
B63304EN/02
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90, the virtual tool tip is on the right side of the tool.
A specified cutting area must not contain two or more grooves or cuts. Divide the cutting area so that a single cutting area contains only one groove or cut.
(12) Threading CUTTING METHOD . . TP = 1 : Singleedge thread cutting with constant cutting amount 2 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting with constant cutting amount 3 : Singleedge thread cutting with constant cutting depth 4 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting with constant cutting depth CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = Clearance quantity (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.190) CS = Clearance quantity (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.191) CE = Clearance quantity (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.192) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) DL = Final depth of cut (mm or inch) (Default value is system parameter No.119) CUTTING SPEED . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
124
B63304EN/02
NOTE If the entered tool data includes tool tip width, no prompt is made for the CUTTING METHOD TP. In this case, singleedge thread cutting with constant cutting amount is used in machining.
WARNING The prompt to ask the maximum spindle speed is selected by system parameter No.702 bit 0. 0: No prompt. (The maximum spindle speed is set by system parameter No.128.) 1: The prompt for the maximum spindle speed is displayed on each stage of machining process. (Ignore the value of system parameter No.128.) However, the prompt is not displayed at the process where the constant tangential speed control is not used set in system parameter Nos.107 to 115. The value set in system parameter No.128 is output at these processes. If the same tool is used for more than one process, the prompt is not displayed. (13) Cutting off If system parameter 140 is specified so that cutting off is defined, CUT OFF is displayed on the screen which defines the type of machining. On this screen, the cutting off data can be specified.
125
B63304EN/02
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = (mm or inch) Specify the clearance from the blank figure along the Xaxis. (The initial value is set in system parameter 193.) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TZ = (mm or inch) Specify the finishing allowance for the workpiece subjected to cutting off. CUT OFF POS. . . . . . . . . CO = (mm or inch) Specify the distance between the cut off point and the inner surface or center of the workpiece. (The initial value is set in system parameter 141.) COND. RESET POS. . . . . CR = (mm or inch) Specify the distance between the point at which the cutting conditions are changed and the cut off point. (The initial value is set in system parameter 142.) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . RA = (mm or inch) Specify the retraction distance along the Xaxis of the tool from the point at which the cutting conditions are changed. (The initial value is set in system parameter 143.) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V1 = (m/min or feet/min) V2 = (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = (mm/rev or inch/rev)
126
B63304EN/02
For the example of cutting off shown in Fig. 3.4.9 (a), specify the cutting speed and feedrate from a to b and b to c with V1 and F1, respectively. Then specify the cutting speed and feedrate from c to d with V2 and F2 respectively.
Fig. 3.4.9 (a)
(14) BAR FEED The bar feed is the distance from the end of the workpiece after cutting off to the end of the workpiece defined by the blank figure. The system automatically calculates the bar feed.
Fig. 3.4.9 (b)
127
B63304EN/02
On the cutting conditions screen, the operator is first prompted to enter the machining type. TYPE . . . . . . BT = Type 1: Pullout mode 1 Type 2: Pullout mode 2 Type 3: Slidestop mode 1 Type 4: Slidestop mode 2 The subsequent inquiries depend on the machining type specified.
1) Pullout mode 1 CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm) (The initial value is set in system parameter 153.) GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm) (The initial value is set in system parameter 154.) ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted (mm) (The initial value is set in system parameter 155.) FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min) F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning) (mm/min) F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
128
B63304EN/02
2) Pullout mode 2 CLEARANCE . . . . CAX=Approach clearance (mm) (The initial value is set in system parameter 152.) GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm) FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min) F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning) (mm/min) F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
3) Slidestop mode 1 CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm or inch) ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm) (The initial value is set in system parameter 156.) FEED RATE . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate (for sliding) (mm/min)
129
B63304EN/02
4) Slidestop mode 2 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
(15) Cutting another area To cut another area with the current tool, input a value in response to the following prompt:
ANOTHER AREA? . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON) Enter either of the following: 1 INPUT: Yes (The tool is used to cut another area.) 0 INPUT: No (The tool is not used to cut another area.)
130
B63304EN/02
If 1 is entered, the CUTTING AREA screen is displayed to enable specification of the desired area. If 0 is entered, the process directory screen displaying prompts relating to the next machining is displayed.
3.4.10
Setting the Tool Data and Tooling Information
The tool data and tooling information can be set and all the tooling information can be deleted on the machining process list (shown in machining definition) or the tool data setting screen of a process. [Machining process list]
To set the tool data and tooling information on the machining process list, press the rightmost soft key [ ]. The following soft keys are then displayed.
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list screen is displayed: TOOL DATA : The tool data list is displayed. TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed. [Tool data setting screen]
131
B63304EN/02
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list screen is displayed: TOOL DATA : The tool data list is displayed. TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed. (1) Setting the tool data Press the TOOL DATA soft key.
List screen on which the tool data can be set
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed, the tool data list is displayed. On the list screen, the tool data can be set, modified, or deleted. NOTE When the tool DATA soft key is pressed on the machining process list screen, the tool list screen shows the data of turning tools. To set the data of a milling machining tool, press the MILLING TOOL soft key. When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed on the tool data setting screen of a process, the data of tools of the current process is displayed. If the current process is turning, the list of turning tools is displayed. If the current process is Caxis machining or Yaxis machining, the list of milling machining tools is displayed.
132
B63304EN/02
(2) Setting the tooling information Press the TOLING INFOR. soft key.
List screen on which the tooling information can be set
When the TOLING INFOR. soft key is pressed, the tooling information list is displayed. On the list screen, the tooling data can be set, modified, or deleted. For the TT model, the data of each turret is displayed.
133
B63304EN/02
(3) Initializing the tooling information To initialize the tooling information, press the rightmost soft key [+]. Different soft keys are then displayed.
NOTE The TURRET 1 DEL. and TURRET 2 DEL. soft keys are displayed only for the TT model. If the ALL DELETE, TURRET 1 DEL., or TURRET 2 DEL. soft key is pressed, the operator is prompted to specify whether to delete the data.
To delete the data, enter 1 INPUT. To not delete the data, enter 0 INPUT. The soft keys have the following functions: ALL DELETE: Deletes all tooling information cataloged in main memory. TURRET 1 DEL.: Deletes all TL1 tooling information cataloged in main memory. (Only for the TT model) TURRET 2 DEL.: Deletes all TL2 tooling information cataloged in main memory. (Only for the TT model) [+]: Displays the next group of soft keys.
134
B63304EN/02
3.4.11
Drawing a Cutting Area and Painting a Blank Figure
In machining definition, a blank figure can be painted and a cutting area can be drawn (line drawing) on the screen for setting an area or machining conditions. Set the following system parameters as shown below:
No.704: x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: The blank figure is not painted. 1: The blank figure is painted. 0: The cutting area is not drawn. 1: The cutting area is drawn. No.670: Color in which the blank figure is filled in (0 to 7) No.671: Color of the line which draws the cutting area (0 to 7)
NOTE The system parameters are valid only for turning. (1) Drawing a cutting area (line drawing) When bit 7 of system parameter 704 is set to 1, the cutting area is drawn on the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting screen, as shown below:
1) Drawing the area on the cutting area screen D Each time the start point, end point, or dividing direction is changed, the drawing is changed accordingly. D The area for which the tool angle is not checked is drawn. 2) Drawing the area on the cutting condition screen D Each time the finishing allowance is changed, the drawing is changed accordingly. D The area for which the tool angle is checked is drawn.
135
B63304EN/02
(2) Painting the blank figure When bit 6 of parameter 704 is set to 1, the blank figure is filled in on the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting screen as shown below: NOTE In 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, a blank figure cannot be Painted on the cutting area definition screen or cutting condition screen.
136
B63304EN/02
3.5
NC DATA PREPARATION 3.5.1
Preparations of NC Data and Registrations of Machining Memory
WARNING Even when the tool path and machining processes specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
Select 5
on the menu screen to display the NC data generation screen.
Horizontal lathe
Vertical lathe
137
B63304EN/02
Soft keys are displayed as shown below. (1) Setting of 1path lathe (MTF1050=1) with the animated simulation option
(2) Setting of 2path lathe (MTF1050=2) without the animated simulation option or Series 16TTA
The above soft keys are displayed, and the following message prompts you to input a program No. and comment. PROGRAM No. . . . . . . . . . Input 0 = program No. COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Input CM = comment. Comments are specified in alphanumerics or symbols of 16 characters or less. If 17 or more characters are input, only the first 16 will be valid. All keys other than round brackets, inverted commas and commas (,) can be used. Example) When 0 = 1234, CM = ABCD is input, 0 1 2 3 4 (ABCD); is registered in the machining memory.
If system parameter No.708 bit 2 is set to 1, the process name comment will be added automatically and output to the head of each process.
#7 708 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 2 Process name comment during NC format output: 0 : not output 1 : automatically output Example) The OD roughing process head NC format when system parameter No.708 bit 2 =1 is: (ROUGH. OF. OUT.) N002 GOTO202; ... ...
138
B63304EN/02
Automatically entered comments are as follows. Each type of machining has characteristic contents.
Machining type Center drilling Drilling OD roughing ID roughing OD semiroughing ID semiroughing OD finishing ID finishing Grooving/necking Threading Groove roughing Groove finishing Reamer Tap Machining type C axis center drilling C axis drilling C axis tapping C axis grooving Face milling Side milling Y axis center drilling Y axis drilling Y axis tapping Y axis pattern Y axis contouring Sub cycle Cut off Bar feed Output comment CENTER DRIL. DRIL. ROUGH. OF OUT. ROUGH. OF IN. SFIN. OF OUT. SFIN. OF IN. FIN. OF OUT. FIN. OF IN. GROV. OR NECK. THREAD. ROUGH. OF GROOVE FIN. OF GROOVE REAMER TAP Output comment CCENTER DRILL. CDRILLING CTAPPING CGROOVING CFACE MILLING CSIDE MILLING YCENTER DRILL. YDRILLING YTAPPING YPATTERN YCONTOUR SUB CYCLE CUT OFF BAR FEED
NOTE It is not possible to output the process name comment when NC format is outputted in main/sub format.
139
B63304EN/02
[ANIMATION] or [ANIMATION] This key determines whether or not to perform background animated simulation while NC data are being generated. Each time this key is touched, the setting alternates between [ANIMATION] and [ANIMATION]. Blank figures and part figures are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state. Blank figures are drawn in colored backgrounds. Machining is simulated during NC data preparation. Animated simulation performed in this state is called [BACKGROUND ANIMATION] and is distinguished from animated simulation specified on Menu No.6. (Animated simulation Specified on Menu No.6 is called [FOREGROUND ANIMATION].) Part figures alone are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state. Tool paths are displayed during NC data preparation. [TOOL PATH] or [TOOL PATH] This key appears only in the [ANIMATION] state. Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between [TOOL PATH] and [TOOL PATH]. In the [TOOL PATH] state, the path of the virtual tool position is always displayed in purple. No path is displayed in the [TOOL PATH] state. [SINGLE STEP] or [SINGLE STEP] Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between [SINGLE STEP] and [SINGLE STEP]. NC data is output continuously in the [SINGLE STEP] state. (Refer to Chapter VIII 1.4 NC Data Output by Single Step.) [PROC. STOP] or [PROC. STOP] Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between [PROC. STOP] and [PROC. STOP]. In the [PROC. STOP] state, NC data output is suspended temporarily at the specified position of each process. The half position is set by system parameters No.49 to No.57 and No.310 to No.314. (Refer to Chapter VIII 1.4 Single Step Output.) [NC DATA] or [NC DATA] Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between [NC DATA] and [NC DATA]. NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state. No NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
140
B63304EN/02
[START] Press this key to check the family program prepared anew. In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate machining while generating NC data preparation in the sequence of specification on the process list. Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how blank figures are cut. Simulation by animation is not performed in the [ANIMATION] state. NC data is generated in the sequence of specification on the process list, and tool paths are displayed on the screen. [REGISTER] Press this key to register NC data in the machining memory while checking the family program prepared anew. In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate NC data while generating the data in the sequence of specification on the process list. Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how blank figures are cut. In the [ANIMATION] state, NC data is prepared in the sequence of specification on the process list, and tool paths are displayed on the screen. [DRAWNG RANGE] Press this key to enlarge or scale down figures. [PROC. LIST] Press this key to display a list of machining periods and general machining periods of each process. [ESCAPE] Press this key to return to Main Menu.
3.5.2
Precautions to be Taken with Background Animated Simulation
(1) Background animated simulation is supported only by the 1path lathe, not by the 2path lathe. (2) Background animation drawing is valid only when the animated simulation function (option) is provided. (3) Chucks and tail stocks are not displayed. (4) Only linear interpolation, arc interpolation, and threading are simulated. (5) Background animated simulation is not performed with the vertical lathe. (6) Background animated simulation is not performed when single process output is selected. (7) Blanks are not cut in the bar feed process, threading process, and Caxis/Yaxis machining process. (8) Tool pictures do not appear in the bar feed process. (9) In the subcycle process, blank cutting, tool pictures, and tool paths are not drawn on the screen.
141
B63304EN/02
3.5.3
Display of Machining Time
After NC data is automatically created, ***PRESS SOFT KEY*** is displayed at the screen bottom. When PROCESS LIST is pressed then, a list indecating the machine time for each process and the total machining time is displayed. PROCESS LIST
These machining time are the theoretical values figured out when NC data was automatically created. The machining time is of course changed if feed rate override is effected in actual machining. NOTE When over 20 processes are defined, a bar graph is not displayed.
3.5.4
Process Editing Function (Only with 2path Control)
WARNING After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the workpiece, machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
(1) Summary In the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA PREPARATION, the operation sequence defined in Menu 4, MACHINING DEFINITION is displayed for each turret. Further it is possible to edit the S Code and operation sequence on this screen. In editing the S code, a surface speed defined with MACHINING DEFINITION can be reindicated with an other value.
142
B63304EN/02
In editing the operation sequence, each operation can be arranged by shifting up or down the operation sequence independently for each turret and a simultaneous operation by using both turrets is possible. When this function is used, M code for waiting is output automatically for use in preparation of the NC program. In Menu 4, MACHINING DEFINITION suppose we define the following operation sequence,
Process No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Kind of Machining Drilling Roughing of outer figure Roughing of inner figure Finishing of outer figure Finishing of inner figure Grooving (External) Grooving (Internal) Threading (External) Threading (Internal) Turret No. 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Namely, suppose we define the cutting operation sequence: 1. Drilling with a tool on the turret 1 2. Roughing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1 3. Roughing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2 4. Finishing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1 5. Finishing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2 6. Grooving with a tool on the turret 1 (External) 7. Grooving with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal) 8. Threading with a tool on the turret 1 (External) 9. Threading with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal) in order. When such cutting definition is executed, the following operation procedure in displayed on the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA PREPARATION.
143
B63304EN/02
Thus, cutting operations for each turret are displayed. For the section on spindle speed, N means spindle speed, V means cutting speed. For simultaneous operation; No.2 and 3, ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE and ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE, operation No.8 and 9, THREADING and DOWN (or set the cursor to No.3 and depress HEAD 2 UP), and then set the cursor to No.8 and depress the soft key, HEAD 1 DOWN (or set the cursor to No.9 and depress HEAD 2 UP) continuously. For changing the cutting speed of operation No.6, GROOVING, 125 m/min for instance, set the cursor to No.6 and input 125 through keys for the question, V (N) =. When performing such operations, the operation procedure is displayed as follows.
As for S code, an A code is output from either turret 1 or turret 2 when a simultaneous operation is executed. Which turret is used can be recognized by the speed indication on the upper screen. Whenever the soft key, S CODE SELECT is depressed the value of turret 1 and 2 is alternately displayed. (2) SOFT KEY The meaning of soft keys is as follows: [ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . . Processing of this screen is discontinued. [HEAD 1 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret 1 located with the cursor to go up by one step. [HEAD 1 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret 1 located with the cursor to go down by one step. [HEAD 2 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret 2 located with the cursor to go up by one step. [HEAD 2 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret 2 located with the cursor to go down by one step. [S CODE SELECT] . . . When under simultaneous operation, select the turret for which the S Code has priority. [CURSOR ] . . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position backward. [CURSOR ] . . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position forward. [NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . Advance to the next screen (screen inquires details of the program number.)
144
B63304EN/02
(3) Edition of the operation sequence As explained in paragraph Soft key, the operation sequence can be shifted upward or downward by depressing HEAD 1 UP, HEAD 1 DOWN, HEAD 2 UP and HEAD 2 DOWN, however, to shift the operation sequence by this handling is possible during only one step per operation. Shifting for two steps is not possible. The operation sequence of turret 1 cannot be transferred to turret 2. CAUTION 1 When G96 mode process and G97 mode process are simultaneously instructed, G97 mode process has priority. 2 If two G96 modes are simultaneously specified, the control changes to the G97 mode process. The spindle is controlled by the turret 1 side, but it is controlled by the turret 2 side when the S CODE SELECT soft key is pressed. (Example)
NO 1 HEAD 1 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE. ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE. FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE. GROOVING GROOVING HEAD 2 SPEED G96V145M03 (1) G96V150M03 (2)
3 4 5
G96V200M03 (1) G96V100M03 (1) G96V120M03 (2)
If the process editing is executed for the simultaneous operation of processes 1 and 2, and 4 and 5 the operation is performed as follows:
NO 1 2 3 4 5 FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE. GROOVING GROOVING G97V200M03 (1) G97V120M03 (2) HEAD 1 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE. HEAD 2 ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE. SPEED G97V145M03 (1)
145
B63304EN/02
(4) Changing of the operation sequence and correction After compelting to editing of the operation sequence, when performing correcting operations by selecting Menu 4, DEFINITION OF MACHINING and 2. CORRECTION due to addition of new operation sequence or partial correction of data of the operation sequence which is already defined, the editing results of the operation sequence performed up to this point are all reset to the state before editing. (5) S Code When both turrets are moved because of the state of simultaneous operation, select the soft key, S CODE SELECT and indicate whether which turrets S Code has priority. Concerning the indication on the display, when drilling or center drilling, the spindle speed, N is displayed and cutting speed, V is indicated for other cutting. The spindle speed, N and cutting speed, V can be input up to 5 digits. (6) M Code for waiting M code for waiting is output according to the following standard conditions. (a) When the current operation and the next operation are done with the same turret, M Code for waiting is not output. (b) When the current operation and the next operation are done with the different turrets, the same M Code for waiting is output at the end of the current operation sequence and the head part (next to the T Code command for tool exchange) for the next operation. (c) In simultaneous operation of both heads, a waiting M code is output at the head of both processes and at the block immediately before the T code cancel of one process near the end of a program. (Example) M105; Waiting M code N***G50X Z ; G00 T0303; T code selection G96 S M03; X Z ; Approach . . Cutting M106; G00 X ; Return relief X Z ; Waiting M code M107; T0300; M01; Whether a waiting M code is output before T code cancellation or not is switched by system parameter (No.704 bit 0). (d) Output at the operation ending part for each turret (after returning to the machine zero position.) The initial value of M Code for waiting can be set in 730 of a system parameter. In the NC program shown in Fig. below, M code for waiting are output as follows: (When the value of system parameter 730 is 100).
146
B63304EN/02
147
B63304EN/02
3.5.5
Special Block Output to both Programs
(1) Overview When a model having two turrets is used, the program of turret 1 or 2 contains only the NC data of processes which corresponds to the turret specified in machining definition. If outer surface roughing is programmed for turret 1 and inner surface roughing is programmed for turret 2, for example, the programs are output as shown below:
Turret 1 O0001; NC data of outer surface roughing M100; M100; NC data of inner surface roughing M101; M05; M30; % M101; M05; M30; % Turret 2 O0002;
The program for turret 2 does not contain the block corresponding to outer surface roughing of turret 1. The program for turret 1 does not contain the block corresponding to inner surface roughing of turret 2. A machine may require that the programs of the two turrets share NC data (such as M01) as shown below.
Turret 1 O0001; NC data of outer surface roughing M01; M100; M01; M100; NC data of inner surface roughing M01; M101; M05; M30; % M01; M101; M05; M30; % Turret 2 O0002;
This can be done by setting a function code to output M01; in MTF2045. MTF2045 specifies the special block to be output to the programs of both turrets at the end of each process.
148
B63304EN/02
(2) Examples of setting and output When the following machining is programmed, the programs are output as shown below:
Turret 1 Process 1 Outer surface roughing Inner surface roughing Outer surface finishing Inner surface finishing Turret 2 . . . . . . . . . Turret 1 only
Process 2
. . . . . . . . . Turret 2 only
Process 3
. . . . . . . . . Simultaneous operation of turrets 1 and 2
1) Example 1 for setting MTF MTF2011 (End of roughing process) MTF2013 (End of finishing process) 0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, Txx00 ; MTF2045 (Special block) 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, M01 ; 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, (3) NC data output for one tool post only If an outer surface rough machining process is defined only for tool post 1, for example, corresponding NC data is output as described below: The wait M code is output immediately before the end of the program (MTF function table No. 2001). NC data for tool post 1 NC data for tool post 2 0XXXX ; 0**** ;
Outer surface rough machining NC data TXX00 ; M01 ; M100 ; M05 ; M30 ; %
Wait M code output M100 ; End of the program (2001) M06 ; M30 ; %
NOTE The number enclosed in parentheses is the MTF function table number. The wait M code output in the above example is the wait M code initial value (system parameter No. 730).
149
B63304EN/02
NC data output After the end of each process (MTF2011, MTF2013), the special block (MTF2045) is output.
O0001 ; N1 G50 X_ Z_ ; G0 X_ Z_ ; (ROUGH OF OUT); N2 G50 X_ Z_ ; Txx00 ; M1 ; M100 ; . . . MTF2011 . . . MTF2045 . . . O0002 ;
M1 ; M100 ; N2 G50 X_ Z_ ; G0 X_ Z_ ; (ROUGH OF INNER) ; N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
N3 ;
M1 ; M101 ; (FIN OF INNER) ; N4 G50 X_ Z_ ; Txx00 ; M1 ;
MTF2011 . . . . . . MTF2045 . . .
Txx00 ; M1 ; M101 ; (FIN OF INNER); N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
. . . MTF2013 . . . . . . MTF2013 . . .
Txx00 ; M1 ; X_ Z_ ; M102 ; M5 ; M30 ; %
X_ Z_ ; M102 ; M5 ; M30 ; %
2) Example 2 for setting MTF MTF2011 (End of roughing process) MTF2013 (End of finishing process) 0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, Txx00 ; MTF2045 (Special block) Specify 0000 only. 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
150
B63304EN/02
NC data output Since 0000 is specified in MTF2045, no special block are output.
O0001 ; N1 G50 X_ Z_ ; G0 X_ Z_ ; (ROUGH OF OUT) ; N2 G50 X_ Z_ ; Txx00 ; M100 ; . . . MTF2011 M100 ; N1 G50 X_ Z_ ; G0 X_ Z_ ; (ROUGH OF INNER) ; N3 G50 X_ Z_ ; MTF2011 . . . . Txx00 ; M101 ; (FIN OF INNER) ; N3 G50 X_ Z_ ; Txx00 ; X_ Z_ ; M102 ; M5 ; M30 ; % M101 ; (FIN OF INNER); N4 G50 X_ Z_ ; . . . MTF2013 . . . . Txx00 ; X_ Z_ ; M102 ; M5 ; M30 ; % O0002 ;
151
B63304EN/02
(3) Warning and Notes WARNING 1 The special code of an auxiliary machining process is not output to the programs of the two turrets. The first sequence number of a process is output to the program of the turret on which the corresponding process is not executed. 2 In the programs of the two turrets, identical processes may have different sequence numbers at the beginning. For example, while the sequence number at the beginning of process 1 is N2 in the program of turret 1, the corresponding sequence number may be N1 in the program of turret 2. 3 If processes are edited on the process edit screen so that auxiliary machining and other processes are simultaneously executed on the two turrets, the total number of special codes in the NC data of the two turrets may differ.
NOTE The function to output the MTF2045 block is provided only for a lathe having two turrets. When MTF1050 is set to 1 (a lathe having only one turret is used), the block is not output.
3.5.6
Outputting the NC Data of a Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
1. Overview If the NC data for threading are created on a 15TFB or 16T CAP II, the threading path is generally created with G92. Depending on the setting of MTF, the NC data for G76 (multiple thread cutting cycle) can also be created.
Fig. 3.5.6 Cutting condition screen
152
B63304EN/02
If the multiple thread cutting cycle is used, the 16T CAP II displays a prompt relating to the depth of cut (DL). The 15TFB displays no prompts about DL. Soft keys [ESCAPE]: Returns to the FAPT menu screen. [BACK PAGE]: Returns to the previous page. [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ]: Moves the cursor up or down through the prompts. [DRAWING RANGE]: Enlarges or reduces the drawing. [NEXT PAGE]: Displays the next page. Threading methods Threading method 1: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant cutting amount Threading method 2: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant cutting amount Threading method 3: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant depth of cut Threading method 4: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant depth of cut
If the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is used with the 16T CAP II, the prompt relating to the threading method is not displayed. [Conventional NC data] . . (THREAD.) N002G50X100.Z100.; G0T0101; G97S0474M3; Z2.71; X64.; G92X59.45Z22.F2.; G0Z2.645; G92X54.222Z22.; G0Z2.594; . .
The threading path is repeated.
153
B63304EN/02
[NC data of the multiple thread cutting cycle] Sample output by the FANUC Series 15TFB . . (THREAD.) N002G50X100.Z100.; G0T0101; G97S0474M3; Z2.71; X64.; G76X56.968Z22.K1516D0228F2.A60P1; G0X100.; . . .
*** NC data format *** G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ I (i) K (k) D ( d) F_ _ _ A (a) P_ _ ; I: K: D: A: F: P: Thread radius (i) Thread height (k) Depth of the first cut ( d) Tool angle (a) (included angle of thread) Lead Specified cut method
Simple NC data can be created. Sample output by the 16T CAP II . . (THREAD.) N002G50X100.Z100.; G0T0101; G97S0474M3; Z2.71; X64.; G76P010060R0.2; G76X56.968Z22.P1516Q0228F2.; G0X100.; . . .
*** NC data format *** G76 PmmrraaR (d) G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ R (i) P (k) Q ( d) F_ _ ; P: mm: Number of times final finishing is repeated rr: Coefficient of incomplete thread aa: Tool angle R: Finishing allowance (d) R: Thread radius (i) P: Thread height (k) Q: Depth of the first cut ( d) F: Lead Simple NC data can be created.
154
B63304EN/02
2. Setting (1) Setting the MTF parameter The MTF1060 parameter determines whether the conventional threading cycle (G92) or multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is used.
No. 1060 Format 0, 1 Specify (eight bits) Initial value 10000000 Bit
7 6 5 0
Description
4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Bit 0 0: 1: Bit 1 0: 1: Bit 2 0: 1: Bit 6 0: 1: Bit 7 0: 1:
At the machine zero point, G50 is: Output. Not output. Movement from the machine zero point to the turret turning position is: Output. Not output. Movement from the turret turning position to the machine zero point is: Output. Not output. For threading, the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is: Not used. Used. For tapping by turning, the G code of a canned cycle is: Not used. Used.
(2) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to 1999 (15TFB)
No. 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 Format Character Character Character Character Character Character Initial value II KK DD AA PP RR Description Address specifying the difference in the radius of the thread Address specifying the thread height Address specifying the depth of first cut Address specifying the tool angle Address specifying the cut method Address specifying the finishing allowance (Not specified for the FANUC Series 15)
155
B63304EN/02
(3) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to 1999 (16T CAP II)
No. 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 Format Character Character Character Character Character Character Initial value RR PP QQ PP PP RR Description Address specifying the difference in the radius of the thread Address specifying the thread height Address specifying the depth of first cut Address specifying (Pmmrraa) the tool angle
Address specifying the cut method (Not specified for the FANUC Series 16) Address specifying the finishing allowance
(4) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999 (Function table, 15TFB)
No. Description Remarks
2060 Block 1 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) 2061 Block 2 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76)
Detail 2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 2061= 4B02, 1101, G76 X 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004 Z I K D F A P ;
Multiple thread cutting cycle
(5) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999 (Function table, 16T CAP II)
No. Description Remarks
2060 Block 1 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) 2061 Block 2 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76)
Detail 2060 = 4B02, 0E03, E401, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 2061= 4B02, 1101, G76 X 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000 Z R P Q F ;
Multiple thread cutting cycle
156
B63304EN/02
(6) Setting function codes

Loworder Highorder three digits, three digits, general detail category E 1 0 1
Function
Outputs the address specified in MTF1392. Thread radius (15TFB: I code) Thread radius (16T CAP II: R code) Outputs the address specified in MTF1393. Thread height (15TFB: K code) Thread height (16T CAP II: P code) Outputs the address specified in MTF1394. Depth of the first cut (15TFB: D code) Depth of the first cut (16T CAP II: Q code) Outputs the address specified in MTF1397. Finishing allowance (15TFB: Invalid) Finishing allowance (16T CAP II: R code) Outputs the address specified in MTF1395. Tool angle (15TFB: A code) Tool angle (16T CAP II: Invalid) Outputs the address specified in MTF1395. Tool angle (15TFB: Invalid) Tool angle + multiple parameters (16T CAP II: P code) Outputs the address specified in MTF1396. Specified cut method (15TFB: P code) Specified cut method (16T CAP II: Invalid)
(7) Setting system parameters

No. 230 231 Format Integer Integer Initial value 1 0 Description Remarks
Number of times final Valid only for the finishing is repeated (1 to 99) FANUC Series 16 Coefficient of incomplete Valid only for the thread (00 to 99) FANUC Series 16
157
B63304EN/02
(8) Setting other data This function causes no addition to, or modification of, the setting of the material data and tooling information. *** The threading methods that can be used depend on the NC specifications. ***
15TFB (Threading method 1) Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant cutting amount (Threading method 2) Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant cutting amount
16T CAP II
G92 G32 (Threading method 3) Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant depth of cut (Threading method 4) Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant depth of cut (Threading method 1) Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant cutting amount (Threading method 2) Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant cutting amount G76 (Threading method 3) Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant depth of cut (Threading method 4) Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and a constant depth of cut
158
B63304EN/02
3. Warning and Notes WARNING 1 To use the multiple thread cutting cycle with the FANUC Series 15TFB, create the corresponding NC data after setting identical values for the final depth of cut for threading in system parameter No.119 of FAPT and the finishing allowance in parameter No.6219 of the NC. 2 If the FANUC Series 16T is being used, restrictions are imposed on the tool angle that can be specified. (If an angle other than 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or 80 degrees is specified, P/S alarm 62 is output.) If the FANUC Series 15TFB is being used, the tool angle can be specified within a range of 0 to 120 degrees, in 1degree increments. 3 The thread radius, thread height, depth of first cut, and finishing allowance (in the format for the FANUC Series 16) are referenced with MTF1021 (Xaxis least input increment) and MTF1031 (number of decimal places of the Xaxis least input increment). The thread height and depth of first cut cannot be output with decimal places.
NOTE 1 To enable execution of the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76), the complex turning cycle function of the NC must be supported. 2 Face threading cannot be executed with the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76). For face threading, G32 is output as before, even if the multiple thread cutting cycle is selected.
159
B63304EN/02
3.6
CHECKING NC DATA (ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION)
WARNING Even when the tool path and machining processes specified in NC data are verified by the NC data check function, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program without mounting a workpiece on the machine. In 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, the animated simulation function has been improved. When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II. The function which allows a practical cutting simulation to take place by displaying the blank, chuck, tailstock and tool configuration is called an Animated Simulation Function. The manner in which a blank is being cut can be monitored by 1) selecting the screen on which animated simulation is done and 2) executing cycle operation under the machine lock condition and each time a T code is specified, the tool drawing changes.
3.6.1
Operating Instructions
(1) Prepare NC data by using the symbolic FAPT function, and enter it into the NC memory. (2) Set the coordinate system so that work coordinates of the tool may meet when a program is started. Alternatively move the tool manually or automatically until it is in the correct position. (3) Select Menu 6, CHECKING OF NC DATA and depress the soft key CHECK START. (4) Execute the NC program in Machine Lock Mode. The tool drawing moves according to the given commands and the manner in which the blank is cut can be monitored.
160
B63304EN/02
3.6.2
Flow of Animation Screen
Main menu screen
6 INPUT Animation screen
Setting of parameter Setting of parameter for animatedsimulation
CHUCK Standard chuck data setting screen
TAILSTOCK Standard tailstock data setting screen
TOOL HOLDER Tool holder number list
Number input
Number input
DATA SET
Special chuck data setting screen
Special tailstock data setting screen
Tool holder data setting screen
D Press the software key END on each screen to return to the previous screen. D Press the Menu screen software key to return to the main menu screen from any screen.
3.6.3
Starting an Animated Simulation
Select Menu 6 on the main menu screen. Blank figure is displayed.
The blank drawing is automatically proportionally scaled to a size that may be contained within the screen.
161
B63304EN/02
NOTE When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank drawing will be scaled to a magnification so that it will cover nearly all of the display. If this scale needs to be changed, it can be changed to various sizes of the drawing. For data of the blank drawing, use data of L and D input with the key of Menu 1, BLANK & PART (DRAWING & BLANK). The following procedure is used for the animated simulation: (1) Prepare conditions on the machine side 1) Set the coordinate system so that the work coordinates of the tool may meet its current coordinates at the start of the program or move the tool to the starting point of a program. 2) Execute the heading of the NC program. 3) Set to Machine Lock Mode. (2) Press the CHECK START key among the soft keys. START will then be indicated in the lower right section of the screen. (3) Put the machine in NC operation When a T Code is given, the tool drawing is represented and the situation of the blank being cut can be visually observed.
In the case of clash between tool and chuck, or tool and tailstock the interference check functions as an alarm, and then the situation is displayed on the screen. For 2path lathe the interference alarm is generated in the case of clash between tool and tool.
162
B63304EN/02
NOTE The interference check is performed only within the screen. Meaning of SOFT KEY [CHECK START] . . . . . Depress with the start of the animated drawing function. [ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . Exit to a blank drawing before cutting. [ACA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To use the function for automatically avoiding collisions (option supported only by 15TTFB), press the [ACA] soft key to highlight it. Once the [CHECK START] soft key is pressed. the [ACA] soft key is disabled. [TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . When TOOL PATH is displayed in reverse video, the tool path is displayed. [PARAMETER] . . . . . . Depress when setting parameters on animated drawings. [DRAWNG RANGE] . . Depress to enlarge or reduce shape. [END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit to a Main Menu screen. When bit 0 or 1 of system parameter 19 is set on, the operation of a vertical lathe is simulated on the screen.
163
B63304EN/02
When the vertical lathe is selected, turret 1 is shown to the right of the workpiece.
3.6.4
Setting of Parameters for Animated Simulation
Press [PARAMETER]
(1) CHUCK NO. Up to 21 chuck figures can be registered (No.116 is the standard figure, No.2125 is the special figure). This item select which chuck of them is drawn. (2) DEPTH OF CHUCKING, XPOSITION OF CHUCK This data is for fixing the chuck drawing position. When the chuck is an outer or inner claw one, and the blank figure is a round rod or hollow round rod, the chuck drawing position is determined only by DEPTH OF CHUCKING. In other cases (When the chuck is a special one or the blank figure is special), the chuck drawing position is determined by both DEPTH OF CHUCKING and XPOSITION OF CHUCK.
164
B63304EN/02
Example 1) For outer claw check and round rod
Example 2) For special chuck
(3) TAILSTOCK NO. Up to 7 types of tailstocks can be registered (1 and 2 indicate the standard figures, while 11 to 15 indicate special figures). This is used to indicate which tailstock is drawn. (4) POSITION OF TAILSTOCK This data is used to set the drawing position of tailstock. Input the distance from the work zero point. a) In the case of standard tailstock:
b) In the case of special tailstock: The figure is specified by point data. Drawing is made so that the distance between the point data 0 and work zero point is equal to ZT. NOTE Be careful since simulation of the machining state may not be conducted accurately if an excessively wide scale is adoped.
165
B63304EN/02
Return to the main menu screen. Screen for setting chuck figure appears. Screen for setting tailstock figure appears. Screen for setting tool holder figure appears. [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Press this to select the question items. [END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (animation drawing screen here). (5) Gradation animated simulation In the 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, the GRADATION GD= prompt on the animated simulation parameter setting screen requests the operator to specify whether to use gradation drawing in animated simulation (initially, no gradation drawing is selected). See Part XIII, Animated Simulation Function II, for detail.
[MENU SCREEN] . . . . [CHUCK] . . . . . . . . . . . [TAILSTOCK] . . . . . . . [TOOL HOLDER] . . . .
3.6.5
Setting of Chuck Figure
[CHUCK]
There are two types of chuck figures, namely standard figure and special figure. Up to 16 standard figures and up to 5 special figures can be registered. The numbers 116 and 2125 are assigned to the standard figure and special figure, respectively. (1) Setting of standard figure Set the data L, W, L1, and W1 by referring to the illustration diagram on the screen. When the cursor is at the TYPE position, either OUT or IN is displayed. Press either software key to select type. [MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen. [UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an undefined one. [NO. ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
166
B63304EN/02
(2) Setting of special figure When either value of 2125 is input while the cursor is at the NO position, the screen for setting the chuck data of special figure appears.
Designate the special chuck figure with 16 points. With P1 as the starting point, connect the values set to P2, P3 in sequence, using a line for drawing. When the control asks End Point P =, input the final point of the figure data. The point data after the end point number is not regarded as the figure forming data. [CHECK] . . . Draws a pattern, based on the input figure data. [ERASE] . . . . Erases the drawn pattern.
3.6.6
Setting of Tailstock Figure
At the parameter setting screen for animated simulation [TAILSTOCK]
There are two types of tailstocks as in chuck, namely standard and special figures. Up to 2 special figures and up to 5 special figures can be registered. The numbers 12 and 1115 are assigned to the standard figure and special figure, respectively.
167
B63304EN/02
1) Setting of standard figure Set the data D, D1, D2, D3, L, L1, and L2 by referring to the illustration diagram on the screen. [MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen. [UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an undefined one. [NO. ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line. 2) Setting of special figure When either value of 1115 is input while the cursor is at the NO position, the screen for setting the tailstock figure of special figure appears. As with special chuck profile designation, the profile is determined by the point indication to within 16 points. Set P1 as the starting point and set points P2, P3, ... in order and the profile is connected by lines to these points. Concerning the question, END POINT P = input the final point of the profile data. Point data described in the following numbers are not regarded as profile data. [CHECK] . . . A figure is drawn based on the input profile data. [ERASE] . . . . A drawn figure is erased.
3.6.7
Setting of Tool Holder Figure
In the parameter setting screen for animated simulation [TOOL HOLDER]
The tool holder number directry screen appears. Up to 32 tool holders can be set. [MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen. [SET DATA] . . . . . . . . . This is a software key for setting figure data. Move the cursor to the number to be set and then press this key. [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Press this key to select the number to be set. [END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (parameter screen for animated simulation).
168
B63304EN/02
[SET DATA] The tool profile is divided into the tip section and holder section. Input the holder profile data onto this screen. The setting procedure is performed with the point indication the same as for chuck and tailstock. Up to a maximum points of 16 points and used. (Example) Data in order to draw the holder profile as shown in the following figure is:
P1 X=0 Z=0 P6 X = 30 Z = 30 P2 X = 10. Z = 5. P7 X = 10. Z = 50. P3 X = 200. Z = 5. P8 to P16 No relation P4 X = 200. Z = 200. P5 X = 30. Z = 200.
END POINT P = 7
Press [CHECK]
169
B63304EN/02
3.6.8
Enlargement and Reduction in the Animated Screen
The enlargement and the reduction of the screen can be specified in the animated screen of the sixth menu (Check of NC data) by the cursor. (1) Operation 1) When the sixth menu is selected, it becomes the animated screen. Push the soft key DRAWING RANGE in this screen. 2) In the screen, the cursor appears and the following questions is asked. The drawing range is specified MAX (100/100) MAXX = MIN (100/100) 3) Move the cursor by pressing the soft key [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] and press value directly and press
INPUT
key in this question, or set coordinate key.
INPUT
4) Next, answer the question of MAXZ = like 3). 5) Next, answer MINX =, MINZ = similarly. 6) When the setting is ended, push the soft key EXEC. The screen which was enlarged or reduced after this operation, is displayed, 7) To display the original size screen, press
DEL
and
INPUT
keys in
the question screen. (2) Notes on enlargement and reduction 1) Leave the center line of the material profile in the screen if the material is cylinder. If the center line is extended beyond the screen for enlargement, the material profile can not be painted out. 2) If the material is hollow cylinder, leave the upper half of the material profile in the screen. If extended beyond the screen for enlargement, the material profile can not be painted out. 3) Leave a part of outline of the material profile in the screen after enlargement. If the outline of the material profile is beyond the screen, the material profile can not be painted out. 4) Designate the drawing range before soft key CHECK START is pushed. After the software key CHECK START is pushed, the screen can not be enlarged or reduced. 5) On Caxis FAPT animation screen, the screen can not be enlarged or reduced by the software key DRAWING RANGE.
170
B63304EN/02
3.6.9
Related System Parameters
#7 701 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 2 In case of 1, continue drawing even if an interference alarm occurs. Bit 3 In case of 1, animated drawing cutting simulation will operate even in Manual Mode. Bit 4 In case of 1, a center line is not drawn. Bit 5 In case of 1, the interference check is not executed. Bit 6 In case of 1, blank figure is redrawn when M30 is executed. Bit 7 In case of 1, setting the parameter for animation drawing is prohibited. 750 Drawing scale factor When the value is 1, the blank drawing is enlarged so that it will almost completely cover the CRT display.
Numbers, 751 through 754 are the parameters which indicate the size of the tool tip when drawn on. (L: parameter value) 751 Parameter for Drill Tools
In case of the tip angle is 180 752 Parameter for Grooving and Side Tools
753
Parameter for Threadcutting Tools
171
B63304EN/02
754
Parameter for General Purpose Tools
3.6.10
Input/Output of Graphic Data
This section covers the input/output procedure of graphic data (chuck data, tail stock data, and tool holder data) for animation drawing function. These data can be input to or output from a PPR and a bubble cassette in the same way as in other data. (1) Operation 1 Press DATA SET on the initial screen. 2 For the system asks you NO =, keyin 1 INPUT. 3 A menu of input/output for system data and setting is displayed. For outputting graphic data, select No.15. For inputting graphic data, select No.16. For collating graphic data, select No.17. (Example 1) For outputting graphic data to PPR, key in NO. = 15, P (Example 2)
INPUT
For inputting graphic data from a bubble cassette, key in NO. = 16, B
INPUT
(Example 3)
For collation between the graphic data and paper tape, key in NO. = 17, P
INPUT
(2) Tape format (a) Standard chuck N6001 L1*** P L ; P W ; P L1 ; P W1 ; No. 1: Outer claw 2: Inner claw (b) Standard stock N6001 L21** P P P No. P P P P D D1 D2 D3 L L1 L2 ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
172
B63304EN/02
(c) Special chuck, special tool stock, special holder N6001 L*0** E ; P X1 ; P Z1 ; ............. No. End point
1: 2: Tailstock 3: Holder (3) Error message (a) I/O NOT READY This message is displayed when an input or output device is not ready for operation. (b) TV ERROR INCLUDING When a block, in which the number of characters is an add, is used, this message is displayed. (c) ILLEGAL FORMAT DATA DETECTED When a block other than a format described in (2), is used or when a block other than that to be expected is used, this message is displayed. NOTE 1 When the chuck data is input, data is notreplaced. But, chuck data now being registered is initialized and input data is newly registered. 2 Data are not output at points larger than end data in the I/O of special chuck, special tail stock and holder data. Even if a block number exceeding the maximum point data is entered, the data is neglected without processing it as an alarm.
173
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
In the MACHINE DEFINITION screen of menu 4, by selecting SUB CYCLE, it is possible to create an NC message to call the macro body which haspreviously been created on the NC side.
174
B63304EN/02
4.1
SETTING OF SUB CYCLE
To prepare the sub cycle process in the definition of the machining, it is necessary to previously set the sub cycle pattern. In the definition of the machining, it is selected from among the sub cycle patterns set here. Sub cycle patterns are called sub cycle file. The flowchart below outlines the method of file preparation.
Initial screen
Depress [FAMILY PROGRAM]
Family program screen
INPUT
Sub cycle name setting screen
Sub cycle name input
Sub cycle detail setting screen
Data input
Depress [END]
175
B63304EN/02
(1) Family program screen 3. SUB CYCLE SETTING, 4. SUB CYCLE OUTPUT, and 5. SUB CYCLE INPUT are displayed on the family program screen menu.
The display shifts to the SUB CYCLE SETTING screen when the following is input. No. = 3
INPUT
(2) Sub cycle setting 3

INPUT
The sub cycle name is set on this screen. The sub cycle name is set when the following is input, and the display shifts to the sub cycle detail setting screen Sub cycle name
INPUT
The sub cycle name is to be set in up to 10 characters. A new sub cycle is inserted if the sub cycle name is input by bringing the cursor to an already set menu number. To delete a certain sub cycle pattern, bring the cursor to that menu number, and keyin as follows:
DEL
INPUT
176
B63304EN/02
(Soft keys) [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the menu number. [END] . . . This key is depressed when the sub cycle file has been created. The display returns to the family program screen. (3) Sub cycle detail setting pattern The display shifts to the following screen when the sub cycle name is set.
Set the calling G code, the program number, the address and the comment of the required argument on this screen. The G code must always be set. KEYIN AGAIN is displayed if it is tried to return to the menu screen without defining G code. The program number should be left undefined if the correspondence between the calling G code and the called program number is set by a parameter on the NC side. Up to 10 arguments are settable. Also the comment is settable in up to 6 characters. The arguments can be programmed by any addresses excluding G, L, N, O, and P. For I, J, and K only, they must be programmed in alphabetical order. (Soft keys) [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the question to be set. Such a method of feeding as to leave the address undefined and to define the comment only is impossible. [END] . . . This key is depressed when all the settings are over. The display returns to the preceding sub cycle menu screen.
177
B63304EN/02
4.2
INPUT/OUTPUT OF SUB CYCLE FILE
(1) Submemory/PPR/Memory cassette Input/output with the submemory/PPR/Memory cassette is possible by treating several sub cycle patterns that have been created as one file. The method of operation is totally the same as the input/output of the family program. (a) Input/output with submemory
Registering to sub-memory
Calling from to sub-memory
4, C or 4
INPUT
INPUT
5, C or 5
INPUT
INPUT
1, @File name or 1, R, @File name
INPUT
1, @File name
INPUT
INPUT
(b) Input/output with PPR

Output
Input
6, P
INPUT
7, P
INPUT
178
B63304EN/02
(c) Input/output with Floppy cassette, Handy File

Output
Input
4, B or 4
INPUT
INPUT
5, B or 5
INPUT
INPUT
1, I 1 1, A 1, @n
INPUT
1, I 1, @n
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
1, N
INPUT
INPUT
The input/output with the BC is the same as that of the family program. Refer to chapter V. (2) Automatic loading of sub cycle file If a sub cycle file exists in the submemory, it is possible to automatically load the sub cycle file into the main memory at power on by previously setting that file name in system parameter NO.770.
179
B63304EN/02
4.3
DEFINITION OF SUB CYCLE PROCESS IN DEFINITION OF MACHINING
WARNING No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made. Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in the machining definition includes any invalid process steps, the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining machining, check the specified machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
Sub cycle is displayed in soft key on the menu 4 MACHINING DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen when the following conditions are satisfied: D The sub cycle option is selected. D MTF NO.1080 is not in the main and sub format. The method of operation is as follows.
Kind of machining screen
Bring the cursor to the process number, and depress the soft key sub cycle
Sub cycle menu select screen
Menu number
INPUT
Sub cycle data pattern
Key-in at each question
Depress [NEXT PAGE]
180
B63304EN/02
(1) MACHINING DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen
If any of CENTER HOLE, TURN, GROOVE. THREAD, or MILLING in the machining definition is depressed, the soft key SUB CYCLE will be displayed. The sub cycle process will be selected by depressing SUB CYCLE. (2) Sub cycle menu select pattern
The list of the sub cycle names that have been set is displayed. The display shifts to the sub cycle data screen if the following is input in response to the question NO. = _ : Menu number
INPUT
To correct the sub cycle process that has already been defined, depress the soft key NEXT PAGE, since the menu number is displayed in the NO. = column, and the display will shift to the sub cycle data pattern. (Soft keys) [PAGE EJECT] . . . This key is depressed to see the menu which could not be displayed in one screen. [NEXT PAGE] . . . . This key is depressed to go to the sub cycle data screen while the menu number has already been set. [ESCAPE] . . . . . . . This key is depressed to return to the first menu screen.
181
B63304EN/02
(3) Sub cycle data screen
The repetition count and the other questions are asked on this screen. The inputtable values are within the ranges of 0 to 9999 for the repetition count, of 9999. to 9999. for the arguments and of 1 to 2 for Turret No. If the data is left undefined here, the NC data of that address is not output. (Soft keys) [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are depressed to select the question to be set. [NEXT PAGE] . This key is depressed when the data setting is all over. The display returns to the MACHINING DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen. [ESCAPE] . . . . . The display returns to the first menu pattern.
182
B63304EN/02
4.4
PROCESS EDITING OF SUB CYCLE (2PATH LATHE)
WARNING After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. The auxiliary machining process is also edited as well as other machining process. However, when an auxiliary machining is selected by S CODE SELECT, no data is displayed under spindle speed column. Actually control of the S code depends on the auxiliary machining macro prepared by MTB.
(1) Method for outputting the same auxiliary machining command to both tool posts When outputting the same auxiliary machining command to both tool posts, for example, for transferring the workpiece, use the following procedure. a) Define the auxiliary machining process for individual tool posts during machining definition. b) On the process edit screen, specify simultaneous operations, using the [HEAD UP] and [HEAD DOWN] soft keys. This procedure causes the same auxiliary machining command to be output to the program of each tool post. It also causes the same wait M code to be output before and after the auxiliary machining command.
183
B63304EN/02
D Example of manipulating the process edit screen No. (Tool post 1) (Tool post 2) 01 Outer surface rough machining 02 Auxiliary Auxiliary Specify simultamachining neous operamachining tions, using the [HEAD 2 UP] 03 soft key. 04 Outer surface rough machining D Example of outputting NC data (Program for tool post 1) (Program for tool post 2) L L M100 M100 (SUB CYCLE) (SUB CYCLE) G65 P4321 L1 G65 P4321 L1 M101 M101 L L
184
B63304EN/02
4.5
OUTPUT OF NC DATA
If the sub cycle process is defined in menu 4 Definition of machining, NC data in the following format is output to turret side in menu 5 NC DATA PREPARATION: G (Calling G code) P (Program number) L (Repetition count) [Argument assignment]; This is explained below by examples. Suppose the following three patterns are set in the sub cycle file: 1 ROUGHCYCLE G=65 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=DIA. C=WIDTH 2 G66ROUGH G=66 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=WIDTH 3 G67 G=67 (Example 1) The sub cycle only is defined in the definition of the cycle. If pattern number 1 (ROUGHCYCLE) is selected and it is set that TL=1, L=2 A=25.65 B=12.5 C=8.23, the NC data is output to turret 1 side as follows. % O0001; N0001 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23; M05; M30; % (Example 2) If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order of processes: Process 01 Process 02 Roughing of outer figure (TL=1) Sub cycle (TL=1)
the NC data is output as follows: % O0001; N0001 G50 X200. Z380.; G00 X0. Z180.; . . Roughing of outer figure . T0100; M01; G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23; M05; M30; %
185
B63304EN/02
(Example 3) If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order of processes: Process 01 Sub cycle Process 02 Roughing of outer figure the following NC data is output: % O0001; N0003 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23; N0002 G50 X0. Z180. S2000; G00 T0101; . Roughing of outer figure . . T0100; M01; X200. Z380.; M05; M30; % (Example 4) The modal call should be made in the following order: 1) Define the sub cycle in the definition of machining, and select pattern number 2 (G66ROUGH). 2) Then define the sub cycle in the next process, and select pattern number 3 (G67). The repetition count is asked in the sub cycle data screen. Depress the soft key NEXT PAGE by leaving the asked repetition count undefined. 3) Insert movement statements by outputting menu 5 NC DATA PREPARATION in a single step. % O0001; N0001 G66 P2000 A__ B__ ; Z100.; X100.; . Insert movement statements . . Z200.; G67; M05; M03; %
186
B63304EN/02
4.6
CAUTIONS AND NOTES
CAUTION 1 This function involves the creation of a macro call message. It is a precondition, therefore, that the macro body has previously been created on the NC side. 2 If the sub cycle process is to be corrected in the definition of machining, a sub cycle file which is completely identical to that during new creation must be existing in the main memory. 3 The family program does not include the sub cycle file which has been set. To correct the sub cycle process by inputting a family program including the sub cycle into the process, therefore, a sub cycle file which is completely identical to that during new creation must also be input.
NOTE 1 The tool locus is not drawn during the NC data preparation. 2 M01 is not output when the sub cycle ends even if 1 is set to MTF NO.1136 (to output M01 when the process ends). 3 The sub cycle does not stop in the single step of the process. 4 It is impossible to create NC data for the 4axis lathe or NC data in the main and sub format if the process includes a sub cycle.
187
5. EXTENDED SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
EXTENDED SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
188
B63304EN/02
5.1
OUTLINE
Following three new features are added on the conventional sub cycle function. (1) Japanese characters or European special characters can be used for comment messages for arguments of sub cycles by entering the specified character codes. (2) Softkeys are available in SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window which are used to get coordinate value of the current position of a specified axis and put it in specified argument. (3) Address word, the value of which is not defined in SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, can be output in a part program with the value of 0. In SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, a coordinate value of the current machine position can be acquired by the following procedure. D Select a sub cycle name, to be included in the output part program, from sub cycle menu. D Softkeys, which are used to acquire the current machine position of the primary turret (POS.1 MACHIN) or the secondary turret (POS.2 MACHIN), become active in the SUB CYCLE window. D These softkeys can be activated or inactivated according to the state of the system parameter No. 800 #1. But Pos.2 MACHIN softkey remains inactive in case of 1path lathe. D The number of the axis of which the position is to be acquired is specified by the system parameter No.713 and 714. D Select an argument to set data by putting the cursor on it, and press one of the softkeys after moving appropriate axis to the position which you want to acquire, then the coordinate value of the machine position is acquired and set in the argument.
Acquiring machine position
Output undefined argument
Whether an address word, the value of which is not defined in SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, is output in a part program or not, can be controlled by the system parameter No.800 #4. When the parameter is set to output the address word, the address word is output with the value of 0.
189
B63304EN/02
5.2
HOW A SUB CYCLE IS OUTPUT ON NC PART PROGRAM
Regarding how a sub cycle is output on a NC part program, refer to chapter III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT, section 4.5 Output of NC Data, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04. Maximum number of arguments, output on NC part program, is up to 33.
190
B63304EN/02
PROGRAMMING AND 6. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT (2PATH LATHE ONLY)
BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY)
WARNING No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made. Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in the machining definition includes any invalid process steps, the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining machining, check the specified machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Machining conducted in one process by the tools of both head 1 and head 2 is called balance cut. The balance cut FAPT function automatically generates NC data for balance cut. There are the following two types of balancecut machining. Type A: This type aims at machining thin and long works with a high precision. The two tools move in perfect synchronization with each other. Type B: This type aims at machining works more efficiently. After the tool on head 1 cuts the work, the tool on head 2 cuts it deeper, following the movement of the tool on head 1.
191
6. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING AND (2PATH LATHE ONLY) OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT
B63304EN/02
192
B63304EN/02
6.1
BALANCE CUTTING PROCESS
Balance cut can be used in the following processes. Type A: (1) Roughing of outer diameter (not edges) (2) Semifinishing of outer diameter (not edges) (3) Finishing of outer diameter (not edges) Type B: (1) Roughing of outer diameter Type A and Type B are distinguished by the value that is set for DELAY AMOUNT on the data screen. The delay amount determines how much the head 2 tool lags behind the head 1 tool during machining. Type A is selected by setting. DELAY AMOUNT to 0 (no delay), and type B by setting it to a positive value. When type B is selected, the tool of turret 2 follows the tool of turret 1 while maintaining the delay specified in revolving speed. (The S code is output to the program of turret 1.) System parameter No.707 specifies which process should be a balance cutting process and whether the machining type should initially be type A or type B.
#7 707 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
System parameter
Bit 0 Roughing of outer diameter Bit 1 Semifinishing of outer diameter Bit 2 Finishing of outer diameter 0 : Not a balance cutting process 1 : Can be a balance cutting process when conditions are met Bit 7 Roughing of outer diameter by balance cutting 0 : Sets the value of system parameter No.757 as the initial value of the DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool data screen. This selects type B. 1 : Sets 0 as the initial value of the DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool data screen. This selects type A. System parameter
757
Initial value of DELAY AMOUNT on the tool data screen [Unit] rev NOTE If the MTF1051 and MTF1052 values differ from each other, the balance cutting process cannot be performed (no prompt is made for the balance cutting process during machining definition).
193
B63304EN/02
6.2
SPECIFICATION METHOD
(1) If system parameter 707 is set to 1 for a process, the BC = prompt appears on the corresponding TOOL DATA setting screen displayed by selecting 4 or machining definition from the menu.
If 1 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, the screen on which a tool of the second turret can be set for balance cutting appears.
If 0 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, or if the tool of the second turret is left undefined, balance cutting is not executed for the process.
194
B63304EN/02
CAUTION 1 Set the same tool tip radius (RN) for both tools. The system does not check the data other than the radius of the tool tip. It is recommended to use tools having an identical tip figure. If tools having different tip figures are used, the workpiece may vibrated during actual machining and the tool tip may interfere with the workpiece. 2 A negative value cannot be specified as the delay (DA). The operator is prompted to specify the delay only when outer surface roughing is selected. The system accepts 0 or a positive integer. If 0 is specified, type A is selected. If a positive integer is specified, type B is selected. 3 The turret numbers (TL) of the two tools must be different. Specify turret 1 (TL = 1) for the first tool and turret 2 (TL = 2) for the second tool. 4 Select tools having an identical direction of spindle rotation (SD). Unless the above instructions are observed, the system gives a warning and prohibits display of the next screen. (2) On the machining process list screen which is the first screen of Menu No.4 (MACHINING DEFINITION), the balance cutting process is represented by (B) following the T code. PROC. 01 ROUGH. OF CUT. T0909 (B) X200. Z200. When the process is not a balance cutting process, (1) or (2) is displayed after the T code. (1) means cutting by head 1 while (2) means cutting by head 2. (3) In the balance cutting process, points whose X coordinate value is 0 must not be specified as the start or end point of the cutting area.
195
B63304EN/02
6.3
USING THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION
(1) In a process where system parameter No.707 is set to 1 (balance cutting is possible), the system tries to select appropriate tools from both heads. Only when tools suited to this process are found in both heads, the system designates the process as a balance cutting process. When two or more tools are available, the system does not try to select the optimum one. It searches the tooling file from the top and uses the one it finds first. (2) The cursor always stops at the DELAY AMOUNT prompt, so you can change it to any desired value. (3) When an appropriate tool is found only in either head, the concerned process becomes a normal process, not a balance cutting process. (4) When the X coordinate value of the start or end point of the cutting area is 0, the concerned process cannot be a balance cutting process.
196
B63304EN/02
6.4
PROCESS EDITING SCREEN
Suppose the following process is defined. NO. 1 2 3 4 KIND OF MACHINING ROUGH. OF CUT. FIN. OF CUT. GROOVING THREADING HEAD NO. 1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE B) 1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE A) 1 2
At this time, the following data appears on the process editing screen. NO. 1 2 3 4 (HEAD 1) (HEAD 2) SPINDLE SPEED ROUGH. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G97 V120 M03 (1) FIN. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G96 V115 M03 (1) GROOVING G96 V90 M03 (1) THREADING G96 V130 M03 (2)
The soft keys for moving up and down the process (HEAD 1 UP, etc.) are not valid in the balance cutting process.
197
B63304EN/02
6.5
NC DATA
The following NC command data is output.
198
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1040 (override cancel ON) is output. 2 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1041 (override cancel OFF) is output. 3 When type B is selected, the initial value of a waiting M code is set using system parameter No. 735. 4 The delay time of the tool on head 2 is calculated based upon the delay amount (DA) and the surface speed. 5 Balance cut (type A) start G code. 6 Balance cut (type A) end G code.
199
B63304EN/02
6.6
RELATED PARAMETERS
(1) System parameter No.707, 735, and No.757 are related. Refer to the concerned sections for the meaning of these parameters. (2) MTF (1) No.1140: M code for turning on override cancel (for type B) This code is not output when 1 is set. (2) No.1141: M code for turning off override cancel (for type B) This code is not output when 1 is set.
6.7
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL FOR BALANCE CUT B
Whether to exercise constant surface speed control for the balance cut B function depends on the setting made for system parameter No. 707. When constant surface speed control is exercised, a waiting M code is output at the cut point; in addition, a turret waiting M code is output at the position to which the tool is retracted, by the return escape amount, from the end point of the cutting path.
200
B63304EN/02
6.8
CAUTION AND NOTES
Be careful of the following when using type B balance cut. CAUTION When the delay amount (DA) is too large, machining of the second tool may not complete while the first tool is moving to the next machining position (indicated by the dotted line in the figure below). In this case, a new S code is output for the next machining of the first tool. This may affect the machining of the second tool.
New S code output Path of the first tool Path of the second tool
NOTE 1 When there are two or more pocket areas, balance cutting is not performed from the second pocket. Balance cutting is performed by head 1 and 2 tools in the first pocket. In the second pocket and after, only the tool on head 1 is used for machining.
Balance cut of type B is not performed. Balance cut of type B is performed.
2 During pocket machining, the second tool may follow the path of the first tool.
Path of the first tool Path of the second tool
201
7. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY)
B63304EN/02
AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY)
The auto collision avoidance function makes use of the interference check according to animated simulation function. The auto collision avoidance function is a function to automatically alter the program which can evade that interference if the turrets interfere each other in the simulation according to the animation drawing. Basically, this function automatically edits the NC program which is programmed at FAPT side to evade the interference of the turrets. Refer to the next explanation at the time of the use actually because it happens that it is not possible to edit correctly in some case.
202
B63304EN/02
7.AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY)
7.1
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
(1) General This function can edit the program to prevent the interference around the same position by inserting the waiting M code automatically to the executing program when the two turrets interfere with each other. Algorithms of the insertion of the waiting M code is as follows. (a) The operator decides which of the turret is prior when the interference occurs. (A turret of either one side can be always made to take priority according to the setting of the system parameter.) (b) The program which the turret has priority inserts the waiting M code next to the executing block (which executes when the interference occurs). The program which the turret has no priority inserts the waiting M code before the executing block. (c) When the executing block is the waiting M code at the side of the posterior program, it is invalid to insert the waiting M code before the executing block as two waiting M codes continue. (d) Two waiting M codes continue as a result of the insertion of the waiting M code, the first waiting M code is deleted to simplify the program. After deletion, the waiting M code of the same number is searched and deleted in another turret program. However, the actual machining does not have quite the effect if the waiting M code is not deleted and continue. (2) Example The following programs are thought. Program for the turret 1 Program for the turret 2 . . . . N100 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N200 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; . . . .
Fig. 7.1 (a)
203
B63304EN/02
Turret 1
Turret 2
Fig. 7.1 (b)
(a) When the turret 1 executes the N102 block, the turret 2 executes the N202 block, suppose that the interference occurs. At this time, the animation drawing screen becomes as Fig.7.1(b). When the turret 1 is prior to the turret2 (the priority is specified at FAPT side screen), the waiting M code is automatically inserted next to the N102 block and before the N202 block. The program is edited as follows. In the following example, the initial value of the waiting M code is set to M500. Program for the turret 1 Program for the turret 2 . . . . N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Insertion M 500 ; Insertion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; . . (b) Opposite to (a), when the turret 2 is prior to 1, the waiting M code is automatically inserted before the N102 block and next to the N202 block. Program for the turret 1 Program for the turret 2 . . . . N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Insertion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Insertion N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; . . The interference occurs at once as this, M code is automatically inserted. However, NC operation cannot be continued. At the time of when M code is inserted, the program is rewound automatically and executes from the lead again.
204
B63304EN/02
(c) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of execution from the beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference occurred while executing N103 and N202 blocks. When the turret 1 is prior to 2, the waiting M code M501 is inserted next to the N103 block at the side of the turret 1. M501 is inserted before the N202 block at the side of the turret 2. However, M500 is deleted because M500 and M501 continue. M500 is deleted from the program for the turret 1 if M500 is deleted in the program for the turret 2 and becomes in the following. Program for the turret 1 . . N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Deletion N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 501 ; Insertion . Program for the turret 2 . . N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Deletion M 501 ; Insertion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; .
(d) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of executing from the beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference occurred because the turret 1 is moved by M102 block to the turret 2 which stops according to the waiting M code M500. When the turret 1 is prior to the 2, the waiting M code (M501) is inserted next to the N102 block at the side of the turret 1. M501 is inserted before N201 block at the side of turret 2 according to algorithms of item (1) (c). Consequently, M500 is deleted because M500 is deleted from program for the turret 2 if M500 is deleted in program for the turret 1 and becomes in the following. Program for the turret 1 . . N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 501 ; Insertion M 500 ; Deletion N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; .
Turret 1
Program for the turret 2 . . M 501 ; Insertion N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; M 500 ; Deletion N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ; .
Turret 2 Fig. 7.1 (c)
(3) Completion condition of the auto collision avoidance function

205
B63304EN/02
(a) Normal end (i) When the execution of M02 or M30 of both programs is ended, judge the interference does not occur and end the program normally. (ii)In the case of the setting that the use of this function is only once, end normally at the time of the occurrence of the interference in the tools each other. (b) Abnormal end (i) The end by the alarm There is possibility that the alarm occurs by the reason described as follows while executing this function. The processing of this function is interrupted at the time of the alarm occurrence. 1) In the case that the error in the editing occurs. When the waiting M code continues, an old waiting M code is deleted and the corresponding M code does not exist in the program of other turret side. 2) In the case that the interference occurs while executing subprogram or custom macro statement. 3) In the case that after the program of one side executing M02 or M30, the interference occurred. The alarm display PS000: SEARCHED DATA NOT FOUND is done in the above cases. (ii)The end except the alarm During the execution of this function, the process is interrupted by the next operations. 1) In the case of switching from the memory mode to other mode. 2) When the cycle is started, one side of turret select signal (IHEAD 1 and IHEAD 2) is not HIGH. (Make both turret selected signal HIGH when the auto collision avoidance function is used.) 3) In the case of the resetting state.
206
B63304EN/02
7.2
OPERATION
(1) Confirm the setting of the parameter of the auto collision avoidance function correctly. (2) Make or read the program to be checked. (3) Set the memory mode. (This function is not used by the manual mode, by the automatic mode except the memory mode. Set the memory mode without fail.) (4) Suit the operating condition to the real processing as possible. However, make machine lock signal turning. (5) Display the screen of animated simulation press the software key (ACA ON/OFF) and make the state of Turning of ACA. (6) Press the soft key CHECK START. (7) Simulation of the real processing is started by turn on/turn off of the cycle start signal. (8) If the interference of the tools occurs, it works by the setting of the system parameter in the following. 1 When No.710 is 0, the question of the priority turret is displayed in the screen. Input 1 or 2. 2 When the No.710 is 1 or 2, the turret which is set is treated as the priority turret. (9) The waiting M code is inserted automatically to a desired position if the priority turret is decided. (10) In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 0, the beginning of the program is executed again. In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 1, the program is rewound and performed.
207
B63304EN/02
7.3
SYSTEM PARAMETER
A parameter, necessary for the auto collision avoidance function is as follows. Both of these are set on FAPT screen. (1) Specification of the priority turret System parameter No.710 (An initial value 0) 0: At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the operator sets. 1: The turret 1 takes priority. 2: The turret 2 takes priority. (2) An initial value of the waiting M code which is inserted automatically System parameter No.731 (An initial value 200) Setting range: 100 999 (3) Setting whether the auto collision avoidance function is used repeatedly until the interference does not occur. System parameter No.704#2 (An initial value 0) 0: Repeatedly the auto collision avoidance function is used. If the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, and executed from the beginning of the program again. 1: the auto collision avoidance function is used only once. Once the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, the program is rewound and ended.
208
B63304EN/02
7.4
NOTES
NOTE 1 During executing undermentioned NC program, this function does not work correctly. (1)Continuous thread cutting (2)Multiple repetitive cannot cycle (3)Balanced cutting (4)Highspeed machining (5)Macro statement (6)Subprogram If the interference occurs when (1) (4) is being executed, the waiting M code is inserted near of that block unconditionally. If it occurs when (5), (6) is being executed, it becomes the error as described at item 6.1 (3) (b). 2 At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the resetting signal is output from NC side. 3 After CHECK START of the soft key is pressed, the soft key of ACA ON/OFF is invalid. Press the software key of ACA ON/OFF after ORIGINAL if alter the state from ACA ON to ACA OFF after CHECK START is pressed or are oppsite state of that. 4 If any interference already occurs at the time of the press of CHECK START of the soft key, this function is invalid. 5 If animation drawing was discontinued by pressing ORIGINAL of the soft key etc. in FAPT screen after the cycle start, this function is ended at atheat time. However, the memory operation is continued. 6 If the interference except tool 1 and tool 2 occurs, this function is ended at that time. However, the memory operation is continued. 7 When the operator specifies the priority turret, specify the same side turret in the program which the interference occurs around the same place. If not, there is the possibility that the program is not edited correctly. 8 The program of the same program number can not be executed by both turrets. The interference of the tools with each other occurs if executed, but the waiting M code is not inserted.
209
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA
B63304EN/02
VARIOUS FILE AND DATA
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
MEMORY COMPOSITION
213
B63304EN/02
1.1
MAIN MEMORY AND SUBMEMORY
The external input/output device means the Handy File, for instance. The term input/output (registering, calling) of files is used with reference to the main memory. Namely, input of *** (registering) means the input from submemories or external I/O device to the main memory. Output of *** (calling) means the output from the main memory to the submemory or the external I/O device. Data cannot be directly be transferred among an submemory or an external I/O Device. For example, to enter data of the external I/O device to the submemory, data must pass through the main memory. Work of this type can be done as follows: (1) Input (call data of the external I/O device to the system memory. (2) Output (Register) the data from the system memory to the file area.
1.1.1
Submemory
The submemory is divided into the following: 1) System area 2) File area In the system area, system parameters, machine tool files (MTF) setting data, tool data and animation drawing data resident. The file area can be used freely by the user to store some files, such as family program, material file, tooling file, and sub cycle file. Since the contents of the submemory are retained even when the power is off, they can be input (called) to the main memory immediately after the power is turned on.
214
B63304EN/02
1.1.2
Main Memory
Multiple family programs, material files, and sub cycle files can be written and stored in the file area. If specific file names are set in the following system parameters, they are loaded from the file area to main memory automatically when the power is turned on: System parameter No.16: Material data file name System parameter No.17: Tooling information file name System parameter No.770: Sub cycle file name
215
B63304EN/02
1.2
DISPLAY OF SUBMEMORY FILE NAME AND FILE DELETION
The family program, material data, and tooling information and sub cycle file can be stored with file names in the submemory. The name of the file stored can be displayed on the CRT or a file can be deleted by the operation described below.
Initial screen
Press [FAMILY PROGRAM] key.
Press [DATA SET] key.
** FAMILY PROGRAM ** Menu screen
** PARAMETER&DATASET ** Menu screen
Press [FILE NAME] key.
File name list stored in submemory
Not only the file names of the family programs, but also the file names of material datas, tooling informations and sub cycle files are displayed.
File to be deleted?
NO
YES
Search number by [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ]
Press [END] key. several times.
DEL
INPUT
YES (delete) Delete that file really?
NO (do not delete)
INPUT
INPUT
216
B63304EN/02
1.3
ADDITIONAL PARAMETER OF SUBMEMORY
File area capacity is 64 k bytes (standard). If additional submemory option is provided, the capacity is extended up to 128 k bytes. If option parameter was changed, turn off the power once, turn on power again, and initialize the submemory. To initialize the submemory, select [AUXILIARY] in the initial screen, input CFINT INPUT to the question, REQUEST = . For details, see CHAPTER VII AUXILIARY JOB.
1.4
NO. OF FILES REGISTERABLE IN SUBMEMORY
The standard values for the number of files able to be registered in submemory are: When there are no additional submemory: 30 When there are additional submemory: 40 However, it is possible to change these values when initializing submemory, after pressing the CFINT to initialize submemory. After pressing the CFINT to initialize submemory, the following message will appear on the screen: KEY IN OK OR NO EXECUTION = OK <,NUMBER OF MEMBER > EXECUTION = Usually 1 only is typed, however by using the EXECUTION = 1, numeral , it is possible to register up to 99 files in submemory, as long as the space remaining in the submemory is sufficient. The amount of space in the submemory can be determined by displaying a list of stored file names.
217
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA
B63304EN/02
INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA
CAUTION Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered commands on the screen. Operating the machine using an invalid command may result in a loss of data.
218
B63304EN/02
2.1
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH SUBMEMORY 2.1.1
System Parameter, MTF, Setting Data
The above data are output (registered) to the submemory by displaying the setting screen of each data and pressing the [SAVE END] soft key. Input from the submemory is done without any operation, because it is automatically load to the main memory when power is turned on. NOTE How to display the setting screen of each data is explained later.
2.1.2
Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information Sub Cycle File
In the screen displaying xxx INPUT (calling) or xxx OUTPUT, registering key in, No. = Numeral, C
INPUT
to the question NO. =. (The , C can be omitted. See (Note 1).) EF = will be questioned for input or output to/from the prescribed file, so specify the file name, and perform the input/output. When inputting, take out file from the specified submemory, and input (call) in to the main memory. When outputting, add the specified file name, and output (register) it to the submemory.
219
B63304EN/02
For example, when inputting (calling), family program from the submemory, input as following. 2, C
INPUT
or 4, C
INPUT
(Photo A)
When outputting (registering) material file to the submemory, input as following. 4, C

INPUT
. (Photo B)
(1) Output to the submemory (registering) The following question will be displayed. EF = OK < , REP > , @ File name EF = _ (1 : OK, 0 : NO, R : REP) Input as following for this message. 1, @ File name
INPUT
. . . . . . . Write in the file next to the last file of the submemory. . . . . If the file specified here is already in
1, R, @ File name
INPUT
the submemory, delete the file, and write it newly. If the file name is not in the memory, simply add the file. (2) Input from the submemory (calling) The following question will be displayed. EF = PK < , File name or NXT > EF = _ (1 : OK, 0 : NO, N : NXT) Input as following for this message. 1
INPUT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read the head file of the submemory.

INPUT
1, @ File name
. . . . Read the file with specified file name.
220
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Submemory or memory cassettes are used for storage of the family program, material file and tooling file, sub cycle file. Use of the submemory or the memory cassette can be designated with system parameter No.0015.
System parametre
0015 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 3 0 2 0 1 0 0
Output device 0: External I/O device 1: File area
Input device 0: External I/O device 1: File area
In both input and output devices, the initial value is 1 (sub memory). In general, the input/output device is selected by changing the setting of parameter No.0015. However, it is also possible to use the other device without changing the parameter. Instead of keying in 1 INPUT, key in 1, B INPUT to set input/output with respect to the memory cassette, or key in 1, C INPUT to set input/output to the submemory. (When , B or , C is omitted, the device set at parameter No.15 is applied.) 2 Each file name must be put when entering family program, material data, tooling information or sub cycle file to submemory. The file name may be either numeric or alphanumeric, but must be within 15character long. 3 You may have family program, material data, tooling information and sub cycle file entered in a file area at the same time. If this case, however, it is impossible to mistake, for example tooling file for family program. The same is true to the procedure of memory cassette.
(3) Replacing files 1) Key in the following when replacing the file registered on the sub memory by the data on the main memory as described in (1): 1, R, @ file name INPUT 2) Then, the following question appears, meaning Is replacing actually performed ?: REPLACE OK searched file name (1: OK 0: NO) REP = 3) Key in 1
INPUT
and 0
INPUT
when performing replacement
with the searched file name or when not performing it for this question, respectively.
221
B63304EN/02
It is possible to specify a file name in abbreviated from on replacement. Even if it is specified in abbreviated form, the actually replaced file name becomes that searched. Example 1) Suppose there are two files within the sub memory, namely ABC and XYZ. At this time, it is possible to specify either 1, R, @A or 1, R, @AB INPUT when performing replacement with the ABC file. If there are plural number of file names corresponding to the file name (character string) keyed in on replacement, a message for Perform keying in again is output and no replacement processing is carried out. Example 2) Suppose there are three files within the sub memory, namely ABC, A2, and XYZ. At this time, if the 1, R, @A INPUT is specified, the perform keying in again message is displayed and no replacement processing is performed since there are two file names corresponding to A (character string) and it is not possible to distinguish which was specified. Specify 1, R, @A2 INPUT in full name when performing replacement of file, namely A2. (4) Recording and reading family data automatically With this function, family data can be retained when the power is turned off while the user is programming. As a result, the user can continue programming after turning on the power again. Family data is a collection of data that makes up a family program. The following data is recorded automatically as it is input during programming: Blank figure data Cutting condition data Material data Part figure data Machining data Tooling information Caxis figure data Yaxis figure data Process editing data etc. When the power is turned on, the recorded family data is arranged in order and restored. Note that, however, the family data is not read when the power is turned on while one of the following keys is being pressed: 1) When the power is turned on while the SP key is being pressed 2) When the power is turned on while the I key is being pressed (In this case, all family data is cleared.) 3) When family data is not recorded correctly
222
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 When a figure is defined, the warning message WARNING CHECK INPUT DATA may be displayed. If this message appears turn off the power, then turn on the power again while holding down the I key. This warning message is generated when approximately 50 elements are entered successively in incremental mode. 2 When a software edition has been upgraded, turn on the power while holding down the I key. 3 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data, then loads specific files automatically. This means that the automatically loaded data takes precedence over the other data. 4 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data, then system parameters. If the program contents differ from the system parameter settings, care must be taken. For example, if the initial values for the drawing format and part direction specified in the program are different from the values of the corresponding system parameter Nos.200 and 240, respectively, the original system parameter values are used immediately after the power is turned on. 5 Immediately after the power is turned on, the priority of the common data varies depending on bit 0 of system parameter No.708.
2.1.3
File Protection
When a file is registered in submemory, the file can be protected so it is not deleted by mistake. (Provide protection for those files that should not be deleted, such as files to be loaded automatically.) 1. A password is used for protection. Before protection can be provided, a password must be set in system parameter No.739. System parameter No.739 = jjj Example : System parameter 739 = 123 (Set the file protection password, using a 3digit number.) 2. Creating a file Select 1. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT on the family program input/output screen. Then, the following prompt is appears on the screen. (No guidance message about protection appears on the screen.)
EF WRITING. KEY IN OK OR NO EF = OK <, REP>, @FILE NAME EF = (1: OK 0: NO R: REP)
223
B63304EN/02
In response to this message, enter one of the following: 1, @file name . . . . . . . . . . Writes the file immediately after the last file in submemory. 1, R, @file name . . . . . . . . If the specified file name is already present in submemory, the existing file is erased, and the new file is written without protection. If the specified file name is not present in submemory, the file is just added to submemory. 1, P, @file name . . . . . . . . Provides protection for the specified file, and writes the file immediately after the last file in submemory. 1, R, P, @file name . . . . . . If the specified file name is already or L 1, P, R, @file name . . . . present in submemory, the existing file is erased,and the new file is written with protection. If the specified file name is not present in submemory, the file is just added to submemory. 3. When a file is registered with protection, a list of submemory capacities appears as follows: *** REGISTERED FILE NAME *** (MAX 128KB) NO. FILE NAME USED MEMORY 1 P AUTOMAT 1.25 % 2 ASAHIKOGYO 5.32 % 3 P TOOLINGDATA 3.14% 4 FUJIYAMAKIKAI 8.08 % 5 WORKDATA 1.02 % . . . The files marked with P are being protected. . . . 4. Deleting a protected file (1) On the submemory file directory screen, move the cursor to the number of the file you want to delete, then enter DEL (INPUT). (2) The following message is displayed for confirmation: FILE NO. (1: OK 0: NO) DEL = _ Enter 1 (INPUT). The specified file is then deleted. (3) If the file to be deleted is protected, the following message appears: THIS FILE IS PROTECTED IF YOU WANT TO DELETE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD PLEASE PW = _ Enter the threedigit number set in system parameter No.739 (123 in example 1.).
224
B63304EN/02
To cancel the deletion of the file, just enter (INPUT). Then, the previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed. If an incorrect password is entered, the deletion is canceled, and the previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed. If the correct password is entered, the file is deleted. 5. Replacing a protected file (1) When replacement is specified, the following message apperas: REPLACE OK? [file name searched for] (1: OK 0: NO) REP = _ Enter 1 (INPUT). Then, the file is replaced with the data in main memory. (2) If the file to be replaced is protected, the following message appears: THIS FILE IS PROTECTED IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD PLEASE PW = _ Enter the threedigit number set in system parameter No.739 (123 in the example 1.). To cancel the replacement, just enter (INPUT). Then, the previous submemory input/output screen is redisplayed. If an incorrect password is entered, the replacement is canceled, and the previous submemory input/output screen is redisplayed. If the correct password is entered, the file is replaced. NOTE 1 If the auxiliary operation, SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION, is executed, all files including protected files are deleted. 2 If no password is defined (system parameter No.739) or if the password does not consist of three digits, protected files cannot be deleted.
225
B63304EN/02
2.1.4
Function for Automatically Registering Parameters and Data in Submemory
System parameters, MTF data, and setting data read from an external storage device can be registered in submemory, without having to press the [REGST.] soft key on each setting screen. For example, in case that calling a system parameter from the FANUC Floppy Cassette adapter.
(1) 3, B, S
(INPUT)
Submemory registration command (2) 1, @5 (INPUT) By entering the above text, the fifth file on the Floppy Cassette is called as a system parameter and stored into main memory, then automatically registered in submemory.
226
B63304EN/02
2.2
COLLATION AND INPUT/OUTPUT WITH FLOPPY CASSETTE 2.2.1
System Parameter, MTF, Tool Data, Setting Data, Drawing Data
In the screen displayed with *** INPUT (calling), *** OUTPUT (registering), or *** COLLATING, key in, No. = Numeral, B
INPUT
to the question NO. =.
For example, when inputting (calling) system parameter from the floppy cassette or the Handy File, key in, No. = 3, B
INPUT
When outputting MTF to the floppy cassette or the handy file, key in, No. = 6, B
INPUT
A question, BC = will be given to perform data input/output or collation, so answer must be given. (1) Output to the floppy cassette, the handy file The following question will be given. Set BC, and key in OK or NO. BC = OK < , INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO. > BC = _ (1 : OK 0 : NO A : ADD) For the above message, specify where data is to be stored in the floppy cassette from the keyboard.
227
B63304EN/02
1, I 1
INPUT
. . . . . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from the head of the volume. . . Writes data to the cassette from the end of the last file.
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
1, @ n
INPUT
. . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from file n. Thus, file n and subsequent files are replaced by the new file. (n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...)
(a) 1, I
INPUT
(b) 1
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
New file (No. 4)
(c) 1, @ n
INPUT
INPUT
The yellow LED of floppy cassette adapter lights alternately during writing data. (2) Input (call) from the floppy cassette, the handy file and collation The following question will be given. Set BC, and key in OK or NO. BC = OK < , @ FILE NO. OR NXT > BC = _ (1 : OK 0 : NO N : NXT) For the above message, specify which file is to be read from the floppy cassette.
228
B63304EN/02
NL
. . . . . Reads the first file on the volume.

NL
1, @ n 1, N
NL
. Reads file n. (n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...) . . . Reads the file next to the one previously read.
The green LED of adapter lights alternately during reading data. (3) Note NOTE When the handy file is used, it must be controlled by following the operations explained in (1) and (2) above. Do not operate the handy file directly.
2.2.2
Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information, Sub Cycle File
In the screen displaying *** INPUT (calling) or *** OUTPUT (registering), key in, No. = Numeral, B
INPUT
to the question, NO. =. (, B can be omitted. See (Note 1) of item 2.1.2.) Operations hereafter will be done in the same method as shown in the previous section. The files cannot be collated.
2.2.3
Handling of Floppy Cassette and Adapter
(1) Contents and status of floppy cassette A unit of input/output data for a floppy cassette is called a file.
More than one file can be stored on one cassette volume, and a single file can extend over more than one cassette, as shown in the above figure.
229
B63304EN/02
(a) File number Files stored on a floppy cassette are numbered sequentially starting from file number 1. Thus, files are numbered in sequence of storage in the cassette. That is, file 3 is the third file stored if the beginning of a cassette is the beginning of a file like the cassette 1 case. When file number k+1 is specified for the volume 1, file numbers are extended to volume 2 in which the file k+1 is searched, judging that file k+1 is not on volume 1 or the remaining data in the last file on the volume 1 is continued to on volume 2. In this case, the system notifies to the operator to replace volume 1 with volume 2 by flickering the red and green light emitting diodes (LEDs) alternately. However, if volume 2 where the beginning of a cassette is not the beginning of a file is mounted first, the first file on the volume (in this case, the remaining data for file k on volume 2) is ignored if a file is searched. If file number 1 is specified, for example, file k+1 on volume 2 is searched. If volume 1 is replaced by volume 2 during the file search and a new file number i is specified, the ith file from the file positioned next to the remaining data file is searched. (b) Status of floppy cassette When a floppy cassette is ready for operation, the operator is notified by the display LEDs on the floppy cassette adaptor. (2) Notes for family program input Each file is initialized when data are read from the floppy cassette after specifying the family program input. Accordingly, if the floppy cassette is disconnected during read or if a data other than family program is read (No data is read as a result.), the file contents in the 15TF main memory are broken. Particularly be careful with the selection of input/output, accordingly. (3) When floppy cassette was fully loaded If the floppy cassette was fully occupied with data during data loading, the red and green lamps alternately flicker in the memory cassette adapter. Set a new memory cassette. (4) Mixing of files The family programs, material files, tooling files, and sub cycle files can be mixedly loaded into the same floppy cassette. In this case, a tooling file cannot be read being regarded as family program, for example. (5) Document For operation of the floppy cassette/adapter, refer to the operator s manual for FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (B66040E).
230
B63304EN/02
2.3
FAPT I/O INTERFACE
Three reader/puncher interfaces can be used at symbolic FAPT side, which interface is used is determined by the value of setting data No.900. Baud rate and stop bit values can be changed by setting data No.901 and 902. No.900 The reader/puncher interface number (1 3) No.901 Setting of baud rate
Setting value Baud rate
1 50
2 100
3 110
4 150
5 200
6 300
7 600
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
No.902 Setting of stop bit =1: Stop bit 1 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . =2: Stop bit 2 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . =5: Stop bit 1 (Other than FANUC Unit) . =6: Stop bit 2 (Other than FANUC Unit) .
DC code is used. DC code is used. No DC code is used. No DC code is used.
NOTE 1 In FANUC units, DC code is always used. In other than FANUC units, DC code cannot be used. 2 When inputting and outputting various data, using I/O devices other than a FANUC unit, key in , P INPUT.
Example: When outputting a family program: When the system asks No. = 0 on the family program I/O screen, key in as follows: NO. = 1. P
INPUT
When the baud rate and stop bit setting are not adequate, the baud rate, stop bit value and the use of DC code are set automatically to the following values. The preset value on the CRT display screen remains unchanged. Baud rate= 4800 bauds Stop bit = 2 bits DC code = Used NOTE 3 The NC control side is also provided with an Interface No. and a parameter for setting the baud rate and stop bit, but since NC control and FAPT control are of independent processing, it is not necessary to set these values to the same level in particular. However, when using the same interface number part for both NC data I/O and FAPT data I/O, using the same equipment, set the same value for baud rate and stop bit. 4 NC data I/O and FAPT data I/O cannot be executed at the same time.
231
B63304EN/02
2.4
REGISTRATION OF FILE NAME ONTO FLOPPY CASSETTE, HANDY FILE (OPTION)
(1) Method 1) When outputting data onto a floppy cassette it is normal to respond to the question NO = by inputting a numeral followed by B. When naming a file, however, F should be entered in place of B. (Example) In order to output a system parameter with a file name key in: NO = 2, F 2) Responses to the following questions remain unchanged: SET BC, AND KEY IN OK OR NO. BC = OK <, INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO.> BC = (1:OK, 0:NO, I:INT, A:ADD) 3) Now specify file name STANDARD FILE NAME: FAPTSYS.PARAM. KEY IN THE FILE NAME. PRESS INPUT KEY ONLY, IF YOU ACCEPT STANDARD FILE NAME FILE NAME = _ The following files names will first be displayed automatically depending on the data to be output: a) System parameter . . . . . FAPTSYS.PARAM. b) MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTMTF c) Setting data . . . . . . . . . . FAPTSETTING d) Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTTOOL e) Graphic data . . . . . . . . . FAPTGRAPHIC f) Family program . . . . . . FAPTFAMILY g) Material data . . . . . . . . . FAPTMATERIAL h) Sub cycle file . . . . . . . . FAPTSUB.CYCLE i) Tooling information . . . FAPTTOOLING If the standard file name is acceptable then press the INPUT key. If you wish to register an alternative file name then specify your preferred name up to a maximum of 17 characters. @ cannot be used in a file name. (2) Method of displaying file names Refer to OPERATORS MANUAL for CNC 15T or 16T. (3) File input When reading in a file which has been output in this way the correct response to the question BC = is to key in a numeral and then B as before. (4) Limitations 1) Two files with the same name cannot be registered on the same cassette. 2) When specifying a file name: a) If 18 or more characters are keyed in, only the first 17 characters of the name specified will be registered as the file name. b) If @ is used for part or all of a file name then the error message key in again will be displayed on the monitor screen. Since File name = has not yet disappeared from the screen it is still possible to specify and register a correct file name.
232
B63304EN/02
2.5
FILE DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
Tooling information and material data can be punched out from the external equipment in a specific format using ISO/EIA code. In addition, data which is created on the computer beforehand can be read. This function cannot be used for 5700 series of 16T CAPII. NOTE With the 16T CAP II, EIA code cannot be input/output.
2.5.1
Parameter
708 #7
(1) The file data input/output function is enabled only when bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is on.
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 4 0 : Tooling information and material data are input/output in binary form (conventional specification). 1: Tooling information and material data are input/output using the ISO or EIA code (new specification). (2) Whether the ISO code or EIA code is used depends on the setting in system parameter No.1. NOTE In the 16T CAP II, the ISO code is always set for input/output.
2.5.2
Screen
The conventional screen display for input/outout has not been changed. If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is 1, however, a comment is added as follows:
Initial screen
DATA SET
=*= PARAMETER & DATA SET =*= 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT SETTING DATA CORRECTION MATERIAL DATA CORRECTION MATERIAL DATA OUTPUT MATERIAL DATA INPUT TOOLING INFORMATION CORRECTION TOOLING INFORMATION OUTPUT TOOLING INFORMATION INPUT
For example, to punch material data on the external equipment, enter the following in response to NO =: NO = 4, B (For the floppy cassette or handy file), or NO = 4, P (for PPR or input/output equipment manufactured by someone other than FANUC)
233
B63304EN/02
2.5.3
Input/Output Data Format
(1) Material data M01S45C; T1; N11VvFf1; N12VvFf1; N13VvFf1; N14Vv; N21VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; N22VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; N23VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd; N31VvFf1; N32VvFf1; N33VvFf1; N41VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; N42VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; N43VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4; N51VvFf1Af2; N52VvFf1Af2; N53VvFf1Af2; N54VvFf1Af2; N55VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; N56VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; N57VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd; N61VvDd; N62VvDd; N63VvDd; N71UvVv2Ff1Af2; C1; N1VvTft; N2VvTft; N3Vv; N4VvRfrTft; C2; N1VvTft; N2VvTft; N3Vv; N4VvRfrTft; M02SCM; T1; . . Name of the first material CCD for the turn process (Center drilling) (Drilling) (Reaming) (Tapping) (Face rough cutting) (Outer rough cutting) (Inner rough cutting) (Face semi finishing) (Outer semi finishing) (Inner semi finishing) (Face finishing) (Outer finishing) (Inner finishing) (Face grooving) (Outer grooving) (Inner grooving) (Necking) (Face grooving 2) (Outer grooving 2) (Inner grooving 2) (Face threading) (Outer threading) (Inner threading) (Cutting off) CCD for the Caxis Process, Yaxis Process (High Speed Tool) (Center drilling) (Drilling) (Tapping) (End milling) CCD for the Caxis Process, Yaxis Process (Carbide Tool) (Center drilling) (Drilling) (Tapping) (End milling) Name of the second material CCD for the turn process
(same as above)
234
B63304EN/02
(2) Tooling information Tooling information has the same format as tool data. (3) Notes NOTE 1 When undefined data is to be punched out, only its address is output, and no data is output. 2 When data is read, all data on memory is replaced by the new data. 3 If an invalid address is read during the data read operation, no error occurs, and the address is ignored. 4 If the same address appears twice consecutively in the same block when data is read, the second data is regarded as valid.
2.5.4
File Name Registration in the Floppy Cassette or Handy File
If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is on, the following standard file names are used when file names are registered in the floppy cassette: Material data . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIAL Tooling information . . . . . TOOLING
235
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA
B63304EN/02
SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA
1. MATERIAL DATA
MATERIAL DATA
WARNING Material data, described below, varies with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If material data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user may result.
239
1. MATERIAL DATA
B63304EN/02
1.1
MATERIAL DATA AND MATERIAL FILE
When the power supply was input, 17 kinds of materials and machining conditions, which are being preset in the system, are loaded together, so that the machining conditions are automatically determined by specifying materials. However, it may be desiredto store additional machining conditions according to the circumstances of works, machines, and machining methods. In such a case, the entire data on all 17 kinds of materials and machining conditions can be named collectively and registered into an external file. This file is called material file. Since this material file can store many files, various machining conditions data can be called simply by specifying the name of required material file. Preparation of material files results in the accumulation of know how data.
240
B63304EN/02
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.2
SETTING AND DATA WHICH CAN DISPLAYED
1) Cutting condition for turning

Cutting speed V CENTER DRILLING DRILLING REAMING TAPPING ROUGH FACING ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE SEMIFINISHING FACING SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE FINISHING FACING FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE GROOVING FACING GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE THREADING FACING THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE THREADING OF INNER FIGURE CUT OFF f f f f f Feed rate F1 F2 F3 F4 f f f f f f Cutting depth D f
Division
f f (2 kinds)
2) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining

Cutting speed V Center drill Drill Tap End mill (*) f f f f Feed amount (*) FR (Diameter direction) f FT (Axis direction) f f f
Division
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill. 3) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining. It is the same as (2). CAUTION The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or feet/min. The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev. The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
241
1. MATERIAL DATA
B63304EN/02
1.3
OPERATION METHOD 1.3.1
Method of Registration
Initial screen DATA SET =0= PARAMETER & DATA SET =0= Menu screen
3 INPUT
*** PARAMETER & DATA SET *** MATERIAL NO. 1 2 3 4 5 SAMPLE OF MATERIAL S45C SCM FC AL SUS
Directory of registered material name
Register the number by CURSOR or CURSOR
Material name to be registered INPUT (Note 1)
End
(1) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 1) Set various conditions on questions. BACK PAGE NEXT PAGE
(2) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 2) End BACK PAGE NEXT PAGE
End
(3) Cutting condition page with high speed tool for Caxis machining BACK PAGE NEXT PAGE
End
(4) Cutting condition page with carbide tool for Caxis machining
NOTE Material name shall be within 10 characters. If a material name is already registered at the position shown by the cursor, the material name newly input is inserted to the cursor position. Then the material name at the cursor position or subsequent shifts lower one by one.
242
B63304EN/02
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.3.2
Method of Modification
Modification method of the material data is almost the same as the method of the registration. It is possible to do by the next procedure.
The page can be selected from (1), (2), (3), (4) to (1) of the next material when NEXT PAGE is pushed. The page can be selected for (4), (3), (2), (1) to (4) of the pressed, the same page of the next material can be selected. When the LAST MATERIAL is pressed, the same page of the previous material is selected.
243
1. MATERIAL DATA
B63304EN/02
1.3.3
Method of Deletion
The deletion method of the material data is almost the same as registration and modification. Only input DEL INPUT in place of entering new name or pressing DATA SET.
244
B63304EN/02
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.4
INPUT/OUTPUT OF MATERIAL DATA
For details on operation, see CHAPTER IV.
1.5
NOTES ON MATERIAL FILES
(1) When the power is turned off after data is modified, the data is erased. So before turning off the power, be sure to register the data in submemory. (2) To perform automatic loading of a material file, set the name of the file in system parameter No.16.
245
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION
B63304EN/02
TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION
246
B63304EN/02
2.1
TOOL DATA, TOOLING INFORMATION
Tool data corresponds to the tool ledger. All the information about tools is registered in it. Only 1 tool data is held in the submemory (involatile memory). As the tool data, it is possible to store tool configuration data and setting data for copying to the tooling information and each tool is assigned the tool management number (ID). Up to 200 turning tools and up to 100 milling tools are registerable. Tooling information specifies at which position of the turret and in which manner to set the tool according to the working process to be executed. Registration of the tool from tool data to tooling information is called tooling. The tooling information is held as part of the family program. At the beginning of the tooling information is the tool selection number (TN) implying the turret position. And the tool management number (ID), setting data, etc. are stored. It is possible to register tools of the same tool management number (ID) at the positions of more than 1 tool selection numbers (TN). In the Symbolic FAPT execution, the working program is created based on the setting data registered in the tooling information.
TOOLING INFORMATION and TOOL DATA
(1) Tool Data Creation Correction and new setting are performed on the tool data setting screen. The new tool data created here is written directly in the submemory, so the data is held even if the power is switched off and then on. Also it is possible to register tool data in the external memory by an input/output device such as the FANUC cassette, etc. and to call it any time. (2) Tooling Information Creation Normally tooling information is automatically created as Item 4 Working Definition is followed in the FAPT execution. Creation and correction are also possible on the tooling information setting screen. AS tooling information is part of the family program, the tooling information is also replaced as the family program is called to the main memory.
247
B63304EN/02
2.2
TOOL DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING
WARNING The tool data, described below, varies with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If tool data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter and data setting menu screen will be displayed. 2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 1, INPUT, and the system data setting menu screen will be displayed. 3) NO = will be prompted, so key in 9, INPUT, and the tool data list screen will be displayed.
On the tool data list screen, the tool management number and the tool type are shown per list number. Meaning of Soft Keys MILLING TOOL . . . . . . The milling tool list screen is displayed. SEARCH NO . . . . . . . . . Used to search for a list number. In response to the prompt NO = in the lower part of the screen, input the value of the list number of the tool to be searched for and then press SEARCH NO, and the cursor will move to that number. DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . The tool data detail setting screen is displayed. CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor indicating the list number CURSOR moves up/down. END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The system data setting screen is returned to. Press the SET DATA soft key. Then, the tool data detail setting screen appears.
248
B63304EN/02
On the tool data detail setting screen, tool configuration data and setting data prompts are displayed. Also an automatic process decision function data (KP) prompt is displayed. The tool figure is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T CAP II. (1) Turning tools
249
B63304EN/02
Tool management number . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool tip radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutter angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool tip angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID = TP = KP = RN = AC = AN =
Tool tip width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WN/DD = Virtual tool tip position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XN = ZN = Cutter protective angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP = Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XS = ZS = Xmirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM =
1: center drill; 2: drill; 3: grooving/necking; 4: thread; 5: general; 8: finger; 9: reamer; 10: tap Automatic process decision function prompt Pitch it tap Tool tip width if grooving tool Drill diameter drill Tool diameter if reamer, tap Cutter length if reamer, tap Biting length if reamer, tap Setting prompts below
Tool rest type XM = 0 ordinary lathe XM = 1 Xaxis reversible lathe (chasing tool rest, etc.) Animationdrawing function prompt
Spindle rotating direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD = Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
CAUTION The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200 drawing format.
(2) In case of the milling tool See the chapter about the Caxis FAPT function in Part VIII. (Functions of the soft keys) [COPY ID.No.] . Used when copying contents of tool data already set. First set the tool identification number of the data to be copied. Check that the tool identification number is correctly set, and press this soft key. [UNDEFINE] . . Used to delete all tool data already set. When data must be partially undefined, key in
DEL
INPUT
If this soft key was pressed by mistake, set the former tool identification number only, and press the COPY (ID. NO.) soft key. [LAST TOOL] [NEXT TOOL] . The screen changes to the data setting screen of the tool preceding the current tool ID number or of the tool following the current tool ID number.
250
B63304EN/02
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . . . Used to select question of the setting tool data. [CHECK] . . . . . Displayed when the animated simulation function option is provided. A tool picture is displayed based on the currently displayed data. [END] . . . . . . . . Used when all setting has ended. When pressed, it returnes to the list of tool data screen.
251
B63304EN/02
2.3
INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF TOOL DATA
As mentioned in the previous section, the tool data can be set and corrected via the MDI & CRT keys. They can also be input/output or collated with the floppy cassette or FA card. (Operation)
Initial screen DATA SET ... PARAMETER & DATA SET Menu screen
INPUT
*** SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT *** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETER OUTPUT SYSTEM PARAMETER INPUT SYSTEM PARAMETER COLLATING MTF SETTING MTF OUTPUT MTF INPUT MTF COLLATING TQOL DATA SETTING TQOL DATA OUTPUT TQOL DATA INPUT TQOL DATA COLLATING
13. 14. 15. 16. 0.
SETTING DATA OUTPUT SETTING DATA INPUT GRAPHIC DATA OUTPUT GRAPHIC DATA INPUT END
Output
Input
Collation
10, B or 10, F
INPUT
11, B
INPUT
12, B
INPUT
INPUT
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
252
B63304EN/02
2.3.1
Tool Data Input/Output Format
(Turning tools) Nfff P__ ; tool management number Nfff P__ ; tool type Nfff P__ ; tool tip radius/pitch Nfff P__ ; cutter angle Nfff P__ ; tool tip angle Nfff P__ ; tool tip width or drill diameter/tool diameter Nfff P__ ; virtual tool tip position (Zaxis)/biting length Nfff P__ ; virtual tool tip position (Xaxis)/cutter length Nfff P__ ; setting angle Nfff P__ ; setting position (Zaxis) Nfff P__ ; setting position (Xaxis) Nfff P__ ; cutter protective angle Nfff P ; Nfff P ; Nfff P__ ; working process type 1 Nfff P__ ; working process type 1 Nfff P__ ; working process type 1 Nfff P__ ; tool information Nfff P__ ; holder number Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(ID) (TP) (RN/PT) (AC) (AN) (WN/DD/DT) (ZN/LE) (XN/LT) (AS) (ZS) (XS) (AP) (KP1) (KP2) (KP3) (FLAG) (HL)
Bit 0 Tool rest type 0 : ordinaly lathe 1 : Xaxis reversible lathe Bit 3 Spindle rotating direction 0 : forward 1 : reverse
253
B63304EN/02
(Turning tools) Nfff P__ ; tool management number Nfff P__ ; tool type Nfff P__ ; cutting diameter Nfff P__ ; cutter length Nfff P__ ; tool tip angle Nfff P__ ; tool diameter Nfff P__ ; biting length Nfff P__ ; pitch Nfff P__ ; setting position (Yaxis) Nfff P__ ; setting position (Zaxis) Nfff P__ ; setting position (Xaxis) Nfff P__ ; number of tools Nfff P__ ; tool material Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; Nfff P__ ; tool information Nfff P__ ; holder number Nfff P__ ; tool information 2 Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(ID) (TP) (DS) (LT) (AT) (DT) (LE) (PT) (YS) (ZS) (XS) (NT) (MT)
(FLAG) (HL) (FLAG2)
Bit 0 Rotating direction (TR) 0 : forward 1 : reverse Bits 1 and 2 Spindle direction (CP) 00 : side working 01 : front end working 11 : back end working
254
B63304EN/02
2.4
TOOLING INFORMATION DISPLAY AND SETTING
WARNING After setting tooling information, check the data relating to the actual tool number, tool offset number, and tool figure. Failure to set correct tooling information may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. 1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter and data setting menu screen will be displayed. 2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 6, INPUT, and the tooling information list screen will be displayed.
On the tooling information list screen, such typical setting data as the tool management number (ID), the tool type (TP), the setting angle (AS) (the setting direction (CP) if the milling tool), the setting position (XS, ZS), the tool rotating direction (SD/TR), the holder number (HL), etc. is displayed per tool selection number (TN) and it is possible to change data. If the tool management number (ID) is input in response to ID =, the tool registered in the tool data is tooled. Setting data is copied from the tool data. As the tool offset number (TM), the same number as the tool selection number (TN) is automatically set. If the input tool management number (ID) is not registered in the tool data, n message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed. It is also possible to set/correct other data by moving the cursor. Meaning of Soft Keys DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . Used to display the detailed data setting screen for the tool indicated by the cursor. DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to delete the tool management number (ID) indicated by the cursor from the tooling information. PAGE PAGE . . . . . Displays the next page or previous page. TN NUMBER X . . . . . . . The cursor moves the tool management TN NUMBER Y number (ID) up/down.
255
B63304EN/02
CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves the setting data to the CURSOR right/left. NEXT TURRET . . . . . . . Displayed if there are more than 1 tool rests. Displays the tooling information of the next tool rests. END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The parameter and data setting screen is returned to. When the SET DATA soft key is pressed, the tooling information detail setting screen appears. As the tool configuration data, the data in the tool data is displayed from the input tool management number (ID). Also the content of the displayed data differs according to the tool type. Tool offset number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM = Tool management number . . . . . . . . ID = (Note) NOTE The tool management number (ID) to be input must have been registered in the tool data. If a number not registered in the tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed. Also the registered ID is deleted from the tooling information if DEL, INPUT are keyed in. Input TM within 2 digits and ID within 3 digits.
If the tool management number (ID) is input, the tool registered in the tool data is tooled and tool configuration data and setting data are set. The tool figure as shown below is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T CAP II. (1) Turning Tools
(Center drill) Tool type Tool tip angle Drill diameter
TP; center drill AN; DD;
256
B63304EN/02
(Drill) Tool type Tool tip angle Drill diameter (Reamer) Tool type Tool diameter Cutter length Biting length (Tap) Tool type Tool diameter Cutter length Biting length Pitch (Groove/Neck) Tool type Tool tip radius Cutter angle Tool tip angle Tool tip width Virtual tool tip position
TP; drill AN; DD;
TP; reamer DT; LT; LE; TP; tap DT; LT; LE; PT;
TP; grooving/necking RN; AC; AN; WN; XN; ZN;
(Thread) Tool type Cutter angle Tool tip angle Virtual tool tip position
TP; thread AC; AN; XN; ZN;
(General) Tool type Tool tip radius Cutter angle Tool tip angle Cutter protective angle Virtual tool tip position
TP; general RN; AC; AN; AP; XN; ZN;
(Finger) Tool type Virtual tool tip position
TP; finger XN;
257
B63304EN/02
Setting Data Prompts (Common to all tool types) Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (Caution) Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS = ZS = Xmirror image . . . . . . . . . . . XM= Tool resEt type XM=0 ordinary lathe =1 Xaxis reversible lathe (chasing tool rest, etc.) Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD = Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note) CAUTION The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill, finger tool.
NOTE The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available. Tool figure of reamer tool, tap tool
(2) Milling tools See the chapter about the Caxis FAPT function in Part VIII. Meaning of Soft Keys LAST TOOL . . . Used to display the data setting screen of the last NEXT TOOL tool management number (TN) or the next tool management number to the current display. CURSOR . . . . . Used to move the prompt cursor up/down. CURSOR END . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The tool data list screen is returned to.
258
B63304EN/02
2.5
INITIALIZATION OF TOOLING INFORMATION
Tooling information can be initialized on the tooling information list screen.
When the [+] soft key at the right on the tooling information list screen is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
When the ALL DELETE soft key is pressed, the system prompts the user to confirm whether the data is to be deleted.
When 1 is entered, all the tooling information in main memory is deleted. Meanings of the soft keys ALL DELETE . . . . . . . . Deletes all the tooling information registered in main memory. TURRET 1 DEL. . . . . . . Deletes all the TL1 tooling information registered in main memory (only for the TT specifications). TURRET 2 DEL. . . . . . . Deletes all the TL2 tooling information registered in main memory (only for the TT specifications). + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The displayed soft key menu changes cyclically.
259
B63304EN/02
2.6
TOOL FIGURE DATA AND SETTING METHOD 2.6.1
General Lathe Setting Method
(1) When the turret is set at the rear side. In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures, irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or rear face of the cutting tool. The AC plus direction is counterclockwise around the major cutting edge as the center, while the AN plus direction is clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
260
B63304EN/02
261
B63304EN/02
262
B63304EN/02
263
B63304EN/02
264
B63304EN/02
CAUTION For the button tool, as shown in the example below, specify a sufficiently smaller nose angle.
CAUTION The display is made up to the second place past the decimal point.
265
B63304EN/02
(b) Setting method AS, ZS and XS indicate the setting direction and setting position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method. Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool figure in an optional direction as it is. The AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
(2) When the turret is set at the front side. In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or rear face of the cutting tool. The AC plus direction is counterclockwise around the major cutting edge as the center, while the AN plus direction is clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
266
B63304EN/02
OD cutting
OD cutting (reverse)
267
B63304EN/02
268
B63304EN/02
AN: for threading along center of thread.
AN: for threading along center of thread.
269
B63304EN/02
270
B63304EN/02
CAUTION For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle, sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
CAUTION Display is done down to two places of decimals.
271
B63304EN/02
(b) Setting method AS, ZS and XS indicate the setting direction and setting position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method. Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool figure in an arbitrary direction as it is. The AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
272
B63304EN/02
2.6.2
Vertical Lathe Setting Method
(1) When drawing format is 1 or 2.
(a) Tool figure Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures, irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or rear face of the cutting tool. The AC plus direction is counterclockwise around the major cutting edge as the center, while the AN plus direction is clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
273
B63304EN/02
274
B63304EN/02
275
B63304EN/02
276
B63304EN/02
AN: for threading along center of groove.
AN: for threading along center of groove.
277
B63304EN/02
278
B63304EN/02
CAUTION For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle, sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
279
B63304EN/02
280
B63304EN/02
(b) Setting method AS, ZS and XS indicate the setting direction and setting position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method. Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool in an optional direction as it is. AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
(2) When drawing format is 3 or 4.
281
B63304EN/02
(a) Tool figure Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or rear face of the cutting tool. The AC plus direction is counterclockwise around the major cutting edge as the center, while the AN plus direction is clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
282
B63304EN/02
Facing
Facing
283
B63304EN/02
OD button tool cutting
OD button tool cutting
OD threading
OD threading (reverse)
284
B63304EN/02
ID cutting
ID grooving
ID button tool cutting
ID button tool cutting
285
B63304EN/02
ID threading
ID threading (reverse)
286
B63304EN/02
ID facing (reverse)
Grooving
287
B63304EN/02
Threading
Threading (reverse)
CAUTION For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle sufficiently small as show in the following examples.
AC=0.00001 AN=0.00002
AC=90.00001 AN=0.00002
288
B63304EN/02
(b) Setting method AS, ZS and XS indicate the setting direction and setting position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method. Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool figure in an optional direction as it is. The AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
289
3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
B63304EN/02
SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data, described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
290
B63304EN/02
3.1
DISPLAY AND SETTING
(1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The screen of parameter and data setting will appear. (2) To the question, NO. = , key in, NO. = 2
INPUT
and the setting data list screen will appear. For system parameter and MTF, key in, NO. = 1
INPUT
in this screen. (3) The screen will change, and another NO. = will be questioned, so key in, NO. = 1 or NO. = 5
INPUT INPUT
(System parameter)
(MTF)
and the screen with a list of system parameter or MTF will appear. (Function of the soft keys) [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor proceeds or retreats. [SEARCH NO.] . . . Used to select the setting number. Key in the searching number and press this soft key without pressing INPUT, to the question, and the cursor moves to the number of the input number. If INPUT is pressed then, the data will be replaced. [END] . . . . . . . . . . . Pressed when all setting has ended. [SAVE END] . . . . . Press SAVE END to save the data in the submemory.
291
B63304EN/02
3.2
OUTPUT/INPUT AND COLLATION
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
292
B63304EN/02
3.3
FORMAT OF PARAMETER TAPE
(1) Punch %, LF for the ISO code or ER, CR for the EIA code at the beginning of the tape. (2) After the End of Block code (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code), designate address N followed by a data number within 4 digits. (3) Punch the data to be set following address P. The data must, of course, correspond to the parameter number punched with address N. When many pieces of data are set for machine tool file parameter, divide the data by ,. Example: N2000 P0300, 0104, ... (4) Punch the End of Block code. Repeat (b), (c) and (d) as required. The head of one block must be the data number following address N. (5) Finally, punch LF, % for the ISO code or CR, ER, for the EIA code. When this code is read, data input from the tape is finished. Parameters undesignated on the tape do not change even when the parameter setting tape is read.
293
B63304EN/02
3.4
ERROR DISPLAY MESSAGE
(1) Data format error The data format error is displayed when a parameter tape with an erroneous format is read.
(2) Collate error When an error occurs in parameter collation, the data in the main memory and the input data are displayed.
NOTE When a data format error or the collate error occurs, the system stops as shown above. Press the software key END to interrupt processing, and the software key CONTINUE to continue processing. When a data format error occurs, the corresponding block is ignored. (3) TV error After reading a tape completely, the following error is displayed if there is TV error on that tape.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
294
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS
B63304EN/02
AUXILIARY JOBS
Press the AUXILIARY soft key in the initial screen, and the following special process is performed. (1) Submemory initialization (2) Conversion of unit systems (3) Changing the number of registered tools
297
1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
AUXILIARY JOBS
B63304EN/02
SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
To the question, REQUEST =, key in: REQUEST = CFINT INPUT To the question; EXECUTION = OK <, NO OF REGISTERABLE FILES> EXECUTION = Key in, EXECUTION = 1 INPUT and the submemory can be initialized. (1) The system parameters, MTF, and setting data on main memory are registered in the system area. (2) The FANUC standard data is registered in the system area. (3) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared. (4) The file area is cleared. When the power is turned on while the SP key is held down, the following processing is performed to initialize submemory: (1) The FANUC standard system parameters, MTF, tool data, and setting data are registered in the system area. (2) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared. (3) The file area is cleared. Submemory must be initialized when: (1) Submemory has been replaced (2) Submemory has been added (3) The submemory backup battery is replaced while the NCs power is off.
298
B63304EN/02
AUXILIARY JOBS
2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH)
CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH)
WARNING When the system of units is changed, the system parameters and MTF data may also be changed. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. In Symbolic FAPT, the input data unit is coincide with the output NC tape unit. If a blank dimension or a parts figure was input in the mm unit, for example, all other data should be input in the mm unit. Also, an NC tape is output in the mm unit. However, if a drawing is written in the inch unit and employed in a mm system machine tool, you can prepare an inch unit NC tape by the Symbolic FAPT function and operate the machine tool by the inch/metric conversion function of the NC machine tool. When the metric system is converted to the inch system or the opposite conversion is done, answer to request of REQUEST = as follows. REQUEST = UNIT _T _M INPUT The command in can be omitted. 1) REQUEST = UNIT INPUT When entering like the abovementioned, the unit system of system parameter and MTF changes. (As the present specification). For details, see (e) in (2) Notes on conversion of unit. 2) REQUEST = UNIT_T INPUT When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes that the unit system of the current tooling information is different from the current unit system, it is converted to the current unit system. 3) REQUEST = UNIT_M INPUT When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes that the unit system of the current material data is different from the current unit system, it is converted to the current unit system. 4) REQUEST = UNIT_T_M INPUT When entering like the abovementioned, tooling information and material data are converted.
299
AUXILIARY JOBS
B63304EN/02
(1) Data to be converted The object of the conversion is data on the main memory. Transfer the data stored in submemory to main memory, convert and restore in submemory. (a) System parameters Description data separated miri specification from inch specification in System parameter list. (b) MTF Description data separated miri specification from inch specification in Machine file list. (c) Tooling information List of converted data Drilling tool 1. 2. Drill diameter Fixing position DD XS ZS RN XN ZN WN XS ZS DT DS LT LE PT XS ZS (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch)
General purpose tool 1. 2. 3. 4. Nose radius Imaginary tool nose position Tool nose width Fixing position
In the case of milling tool 1. Tool diameter 2. Cutting diameter 3. Cutter length 4. Bite length 5. Pitch 6. Installation position (d) Material data List of converted data In the case of turning condition 1. 2. 3. Center drill Drill
Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min) Feed amount 1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min) Feed amount 1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (m/min) (feet/min) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm) (inch)
Rough machining Cutting speed Feed amount 1 Feed amount 2 Feed amount 3 Cutting depth Semifinish
4.
Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min) Feed amount 1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev)
300
B63304EN/02
AUXILIARY JOBS
5.
Finish
Cutting speed Feed amount 1 Feed amount 2 Feed amount 3 Feed amount 4
(m/min) (feet/min) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev)
6.
Grooving
Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min) Feed amount 1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) Feed amount 2 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min) Cutting depth (mm) (inch) Cutting speed Feed amount FT Cutting speed Feed amount FT Cutting speed Cutting speed Feed amount FR Feed amount FT (m/min) (feet/min) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (m/min) (feet/min) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (m/min) (feet/min) (m/min) (feet/min) (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (mm/rev) (inch/rev)
7.
Threading
In the case of conditions for milling machining 1. 2. 3. 4. Center drill Drill Tap End mill
(2) Cautions regarding to system changing (a) Whenever a family program is input, the system unit system must be set to the unit system at the output time without fail before executing the program input. (b) If the NC machine tool does not provide the inch/metric conversion function, enter dimensional values by utilizing the arithmetic function of Symbolic FAPT. For processing a drawing in the inch unit by using a metric system output NC tape, for example, enter data as follows. d * 25.4 INPUT (d: Dimension described in drawing) (c) For the surface speed in the inch system, give data in the feet/min unit. (d) There is no method to know in which unit system the data in the main memory was prepared. Therefore, operator must manage the unit system responsibly. For instance, when the tooling information and the material data made in the metric system are converted to the inch system, do as follows after setting system parameter and MTF to the inch system. REQUEST = UNIT _T _M INPUT Furthermore, be careful when instructing repeatedly as follows because the data changed in inch unit is converted to the data in inch unit repeatedly. REQUEST = UNIT _T _M INPUT Moreover, display, confirm and modify correctly the data after conversion because the error accumulates if the data converted repeatedly. Besides, output to the submemory or external devices the data of which the unit system converted. When the power supply is cut, the data on the main memory disappears.
301
AUXILIARY JOBS
B63304EN/02
(e) To convert the input units of the system parameters and MTF parameters, select the special data for metric input or inch input in submemory.
The details of the data conversion depend on the operation, as described below: (1) Normal poweron
302
B63304EN/02
AUXILIARY JOBS
(2) Registration (SAVE)
(3) UNIT command
303
AUXILIARY JOBS
B63304EN/02
(4) Poweron by pressing the BS key
(5) Specifying CFINT
If metric input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the unbroken lines is executed. If inch input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the dotted lines is executed.
304
B63304EN/02
AUXILIARY JOBS
3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS
CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS
When the Caxis option or Yaxis option is provided, the ratio of the registered number of turning tools to milling tools can be changed. (1) Changing the number of tools In response to REQUEST =, enter TFING INPUT. Then, enter the ratio of turning tools to Caxis tools. The current ratio is displayed. To leave it unchanged, enter 0. In response to EXECUTION =, enter a value from 0 to 4. (If only INPUT is entered, the system does not accept it.) INITIALIZE TOOL DATA CURRENT TOOL MAP: 1 (200100) EXECUTION = (1:200100 2:150150 3:100200 4:50250 0:NO) If 0 is entered, the current setting is left unchanged. If 1 is entered, 200 turning tools and 100 milling tools are registered (2:1). If 2 is entered, 150 turning tools and 150 milling tools are registered (1:1). If 3 is entered, 100 turning tools and 200 milling tools are registered (1:2). If 4 is entered, 50 turning tools and 250 milling tools are registered (1:5). The number of turning tools and the number of milling tools in both main memory and submemory are initialized to the standard data of the new ratio. In each case above the total number of registered tools is 300. (2) Tool data compatibility Tool data tape punched out before the tool ratio is changed can be read after the tool ratio is changed. In this case, however, the data for the turning tools and milling tools is read starting at the beginning of the respective data. So, note that some data in ignored.
Example :
When tool data is output, data for any tool is not ignored, as usual.
305
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
B63304EN/02
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
309
B63304EN/02
1.1
SKIP FUNCTION OF PAGE AND QUESTION
When the same data like standard surface roughness, for example, is input in the FAPT execution process, you can preset these data and execute FAPT, while skipping these preset pages during practical execution stage of FAPT. You can skip the following questions. (a) Question of standard surface roughness (b) Question in drawing format (c) Question of home position (d) Question of index position (e) Question of machining start position (f) Question of surface roughness These pages can be set by system parameter. (To act (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) use parameter No.9, for (f) use parameter No.10). For skipping the page, observe the following procedure. (1) Data setting of system parameter Set the data for the pictures to be skipped to system parameters No.200 and Nos.205 to 213. No.200: Drawing format No.205: Standard surface roughness Nos.206 to 209: Home position Nos.210 to 213: Index position (2) Designation of skip page (System parameter No.0009) Respective bits of system parameter No.0009 correspond to the pages to be skipped as follows. If you want to skip a certain page, set 1 to the corresponding bit. Set 0 to the corresponding bit, if you dont want to skip the page. Be sure to set 0 to the bits which dont correspond to pages to be skipped. Details of system parameter No.9.
0 Question of the index position Question of the home position Question of the machining start position (Caution 2) (Caution 3) Prompt relating to the Yaxis turret turning position and machine zero point (Note) Question of the drawing format Question of the standard surface roughness
Vacant (Caution 1)
Vacant
1: Corresponding page is skipped. 0: Corresponding page is not skipped.
310
B63304EN/02
CAUTION 1 This bit corresponds to the question for selecting materials, but you cannot select the material in advance. By setting 1 to this bit, you can skip this page while keeping the material undefined. 2 When skipping the question of machining start position, skipping is performed at every specified page of machining start position. Since the machining start point is determined by the turret turning position and the tool mounting position, all data about the turning position of turret and tool mounting position must be set for skipping the page. 3 If the value of MTF parameter No.1055 (setting of turret type) is set to 1 (Xaxis reversible lathe), the page of the machining start point is not skipped, because the system asks you whether you want to reverse the Xaxis sign on the page of the machining start point in addition to the machining start point, and you have to answer the question.
NOTE This bit is effective if the Yaxis function is supported. (3) Designation of skip (system parameter number 10) It is required to input Surface roughness every time the figure element symbol ( etc.) is input in inputting the machining figure. This question can be skipped partly or entirely. Description of system parameter number 10
0 0 0 Entire surface roughness Vacant Vacant Surface roughness for C Surface roughness for G Surface roughness for N Surface roughness for R 1: Skip the corresponding question 0: Do not skip the corresponding question
Vacant
When the Entire surface roughness is set to 1, the setting of skip of other surface roughness does not have any meaning. The standard setting value is 00011110. The question of surface roughness for C/G/N/R is skipped.
311
B63304EN/02
1.2
INCREMENTAL DESIGNATION
The incremental designation becomes effective for part figure data input such as the end point of a figure element and the center of a circular arc. The start point of the figure element must be defined in any case. (1) Straight line When the end point of a straight line having a definite start point is input by the incremental value, you have only to input an increment without any need of taking its sign into consideration, since the system judges the arrow direction.
(Example)
End point DX = 10I Z = 30I or End point DX = 30 Z = 30I
Assume that a lower rightward arrow was inserted at point A in the above figure. End point B is located in the minus () direction with reference to the start point in both X and Z directions. Also, the radius value is input to X. NOTE It is rather troublesome to input an X value by the incremental value in a case as shown in the above figure. In such a case, the Z value only can be input by the incremental value. (2) Circular arc The incremental value can be specified for inputting the end point and center of the circular arc. Unlike in a straight line, the end point direction as viewed from the start point changes according to the length of circular arc, and its direction cannot be determined automatically. Accordingly, a signed numerical value must be input. The sign is taken into consideration in the defined coordinate system.
(Example) (Example)
End point DX = 10I or 100 Z = 10I
Center
CDX CZ
= 13I = 17I
312
B63304EN/02
A signed numerical value must be input, unlike in the incremental designation to a straight line. (3) Incremental designation in continuous groove input It is possible to perform incremental designation for both X and Z directions. However, since the direction marked by an arrow is not determined, it is necessary to consider the symbol.
(Example)
313
B63304EN/02
1.3
EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY
The input parts figure or tool path can be expanded or contracted in display.
1.3.1
Designation Method
The expansion or contraction question appears on CRT when the [DRAWNG RANGE] softkey is depressed. For expanding or contracting a graphic display, specify two diagonal corners of a desired display area by shifting the flickering cursor. It is also possible to directly specify the area by coordinate value. This method will be illustrated below.
The shadowed area in the left figure specified by the cursor is displayed to meet the graphic display area (frame bounded by an dotted line in the right figure specified on the CRT). To restore original size, press the soft key [ORIGINAL] at the request for expansion or contraction. (1) Operation method The operating method will be described, referring to the input of parts figure (menu No.2). (a) Depress [DRAWNG RANGE] key in the following graphic display appearing when the entry of parts figure was completed.
314
B63304EN/02
(b) The question appearing at the lower part of CRT is replaced with the following expansion/contraction question. DESIGNATE THE DRAWING RANGE MAXX = MAX (123.45/67.89) MIN (0.0/0.0) The cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MAX on the CRT concurrently with the above question. By depressing the [CURSOR FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK] key, this cursor shifts in the Xaxis direction. [CURSOR FORWRD] . . . . Upward [CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Downward Depress
INPUT
key when the cursor has reached the specified
position on the Xaxis. (c) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with MAXZ =, and the cursor shifts in the Zaxis direction. [CURSOR FORWRD] . . . . Rightward [CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Leftward The Zaxis position is determined by depressing the
INPUT
key.
(d) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with MINX =, and the cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MIN. (The cursor corresponding to MAX disappears.) Determine the Xaxis position by shifting the cursor in the same manner as in step (b). (e) The question is replaced with MINZ =. Determine the Zaxis position by the same operation as in (c). (f) The question is reset to MAXX = in (b), and the cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MAX. Shift the cursor, if correction of the cursor position is necessary. (g) When the [EXEC] key is depressed, the question returns to the original NO =, and an expanded or contracted graphic display appears in the graphic display area specified by the cursor positions. The [EXEC] key is effective for all questions in (b) to (e).
315
B63304EN/02
(2) Cautions on operation (a) Calculate the magnification for expansion or contraction so that the area specified by the cursor is limited within the following range.
When the figure of blank is long in the lateral direction;
When the figure of blank is long in the longitudinal direction.
A tool path exceeding the above frame is not erased in case of expansion. Accordingly, the question may overlap a figure as the case may be. (b) If the cursor overshoots one end of the CRT when it is shifted, it appears again from the opposite side. (c) The coordinate values can be directly specified when the system asks a question. The cursor shifts to the position corresponding to the input coordinate values. (The X coordinate value indicates a diameter value, while the Z coordinate value is always positive in the right direction.) (d) If you want to return an expanded or contracted graphic display to its original size, depress ORIGINAL key. (e) Since the tool path outside the graphic display area of CRT is also processed in the expansion mode, it takes a long display time, if a narrow areas is specified aimlessly. When KILL is depressed, display operation is stopped. (f) The cursor shifts 6.4 mm (standard), each time the cursor key is depressed once. This move amount is changeable by using system parameter No.0014. The assignable is a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive.
316
B63304EN/02
1.4
NC DATA OUTPUT BY SINGLE STEP
By this function, the calculation of NC data can be stopped each block or each process and the output data can be confirmed or an optional NC data can be inserted from the keyboard. WARNING Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data, thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
1.4.1
Single Step of Block
If the [SINGLE ON] is displayed when producing NC data, processing is stopped before outputting one block of NC data. The contents of the block to be output are displayed in the second line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen. The [SINGLE OFF] is displayed by depressing [SINGLE ON]. Also, the tool path is displayed when the block concerns the movement. The following CRT screen shows the stopping state in the single step.
In this case, the following operation can be done. (1) If the

INPUT
key only is depressed, data being displayed in the second
line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is output, and the Symbolic FAPT returns to the execution to be ready for the next block. (2) NC data can be output from the keyboard by optional blocks under this condition. When the INPUT key only is depressed finally, the display data in the second line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is output. (3) When deleted. (4) Input
SP
DEL
and
INPUT
keys are input, displayed data output can be
SP,
INPUT
keys for outputting EOB code only.
AS a result, a space and EOB are output.

317
B63304EN/02
1.4.2
Single Step of Process
When [PROC. ON] is displayed during the preparation of NC data, the NC data output can be stopped every machining process. An optional data can be entered from the keyboard in the same manner as in the single step of block. The [PROC. ON] and [SINGLE ON] are different from each other as specified below. [PROC. ON] . . . Single step in each process. System parameter setting is required. [SINGLE ON] . . Single step in each NC data block. This key is always effective. The operation after stop is identical in respective cases. Parameter setting method Set the stop position in each process to system parameter No.0049 to No.0057, No.0310 to No.0314, and No.0410 to No.0414.
0 Process start Just before approach Just before return relief
When the value is 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is not stopped. When the value is 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped.
The stop position corresponds to the above setting as follows.
Start of process . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying the first data (coordinate system setting G50 block usually) in the process. Just before approach . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying the first movement from the turret turning position to the workpiece. A tool number (T code) and spindle rotation command are normally output before this block. Just before return relief . . . NC data output is stopped just before the tool returns to the turret turning position after machining ends in the process.
318
B63304EN/02
Parameter numbers in each process are as specified below.

Parameter No. 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 310 311 312 313 314 410 411 412 413 414 Bar feed process Center drill process Drill process Rough cutting process Semifinish cutting process Finish cutting process Grooving process Threading process Cut off process Caxis center drilling process Caxis drilling process Caxis tapping process Caxis grooving process Caxis cut off machining process Yaxis center drilling process Yaxis drilling process Yaxis tapping process Yaxis pattern process Yaxis contouring process Process
319
B63304EN/02
1.5
REOUTPUT OF NC DATA BY EACH PROCESS
WARNING Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data, thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. This function is provided to correct one process only (if required) and output to NC data of the process only after preparing all processes. (1) Specification method (a) Selection of functions Select menu No.4 MACHINING DEFINITION and the following message will be displayed on the soft key. NEW CORRECTION CORRECTION & OUTPUT This function is selected by pressing correction and output. (b) Selection of process All processes already defined are displayed in the page next to the specification of [correction and output]. Select a desired process by cursor key, and depress [NEXT PAGE] or [INPUT] key. (2) Processing The system sequentially asks questions about the specified process preparation processing by the above specification. The process preparation is completed after corresponding correction as required. After this process preparation, processing automatically proceeds to prepare NC data normally.
320
B63304EN/02
(3) Warnings WARNING 1 If NC requires a program number (by MTF setting, No.1080), the program number in the output process is displayed by the program number + corresponding process number value. If a change of this number is desired, specify a new number. However, this number is not stored. It is, therefore, necessary for correcting and outputting the same process again to input a new number each time. If this function is employed when NC data have not been prepared at all in all processes, the program number always remains undefined. Specify program No. each time in such a case. 2 Data in the preparation process being with the turret turning position, and returns to the turning position. 3 If the subprogram format is used together, the subprogram part only is output. 4 When using this function, must define the machining start point.
321
B63304EN/02
1.6
OUTPUT IN MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBPROGRAM FORMAT
WARNING Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data, thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
Output data from Symbolic FAPT can be output in main program and subprogram formats by setting 2 to MTF No.1080. (1) Output format A main program is output first, and then, a subprogram called by the main program is output. Subprograms are formed every input process, and the main program sequentially calls these subprograms. Program numbers with address 0 at the start of subprograms are sequentially output one by one from main program number (operator input). (Examples)
% O0123 N0001M98P0124 M98P0125 M98P0126 M30 O0124 N0002G50X200000Z200000S20000 . . . . M01 M05 /M99 M30 O0125 N0003G50X200000Z200000S2000 . . . . M30 O0126 N0004G50X200000Z200000S2000 . . . . T0100 M01 M05 /M99 M30 %
Main program
First process subprogram
Second process subprogram
Third process subprogram
322
B63304EN/02
(2) No.2000s parameters referred

2100: Referred at the start of main program 2101: Referred at the end of main program 2102: Referred at the start of subprogram FEED, 0_, etc. 2103: Referred at the end of subprogram M99, M30, FEED, etc. 2104: Subprogram call block M98P_ Initialization of above parameters. 2100: 0603 program number 2101: 0703 Final T code ; output 2102: 0100 1x20: feed 2103: 0205 Spindle stop M50 0004 ; 0004 0505 0004 Program end M30 ;
0603 0004 Program ; number 0004 0805 Sub ; program return M code 0004 ;
0204 0505 0004 0100 Block M30 1*20: end ; feed with/ (optional skip)
2104: 0705 0803 Sub P code program call
(3) No.2000s parameters to be changed resultantly

Parameter No. 0300 2000 Program number is not output (Program start). 0104 2001 M05, final T code, M30, and feed output are discontinued, and %* only is output (at the end of program). 2002 to 2008 2009 to 2015 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0104 Difference between new setting and standard setting 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Feed output is discontinued (at the start of process). 0003 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000
M01 output is discontinued (at the end of process).
In the case of 4axis lathe specification, NC data of main program/subprogram format can not be created.
323
B63304EN/02
1.7
S CODE OUTPUT
WARNING When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. (1) Setting of parameters It is required to set the following parameters for outputting the S code. 1) MTF
Parameter number Description Processing method for constant surface speed control 1 or 0: NC unit without constant surface speed control function 1 or 3: NC unit with constant surface speed control function See the following System parameters for the difference between 1 and 3. 1102 1110 to 1113 1114 to 1121 Number of S code digits Range selection M code Set it as needed. Spindle maximum/minimum speed Set it as needed. However, always set it if data is set to 1110 1113. Change rate of S code output Change rate = (S code output this time S code output last time)/S code output last time If the change rate calculated within the system exceeds the value of parameter number 1122, the obtained S code is output.
1085
1122
2) System parameters
Parameter number Description Bit 0 = 0: Constant surface speed control function is not used 1: Constant surface speed control function is used Relationship with the MTF 1085: (1) When bit 0 is equal to 0: The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1 or 3. (2) When bit 0 is equal to 1: The G96 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1. The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 3. This parameter is valid only when the MTF 1085 is equal to 1 or 3. Spindle maximum speed 0128 If the S code value calculated by the system exceeds the value of parameter number 128, it is clamped by this value.
0107 to 0115
324
B63304EN/02
(2) Calculation of S code The speed calculated by the system is set as follows:
S =[Smin + Smax]/2 = = KV = 2Xmax + = KV = 2Xmin /2
In the case of mm system: K = 1000 In the case of inch system: K = 12 V: cutting speed X max, X min: radius value
325
B63304EN/02
1.8
SIMULTANEOUS 1 AXIS MOVEMENT IN APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF 1.8.1
Setting of Parameters
The tool can be moved simultaneously 1 axis in approach and return relief by parameter setting for machine tool file (MTF). (In general, it is simultaneous 2 axis movement.) And, the moving sequence can be set when the simultaneous 1 axis movement in approach and return relief is specified.
WARNING When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. (1) Specification of simultaneous 1 axis movement Set 1 to the parameter No.0107 to 0115 corresponding to each process. (2) Specification of moving sequence If the simultaneous 1 axis movement is specified in the parameter No.0107 to 0115, the MTF No.1084 is referred. The moving sequence can be set to the MTF No.1084.
Parameter No. 1084 Description Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis (Effective when the simultaneous one axis is specified by system parameters No.0107 to 0115.) 0: Xaxis always moves first during approach. Zaxis always moves first during return relief 1: Inner diameter, and face Approach . . . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis Return relief . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis Outer diameter Approach . . . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis Return relief . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis 2: Reverse sequence as compared with set value 1 (standard setting) 3: Zaxis always moves first during approach.
326
B63304EN/02
1.8.2
NC Data Format
For the NC data format in simultaneous 1 axis movement such as M code, the parameters with parameter No.2000s are referred. Approach First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . 2031 Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . 2032 Return relief First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . 2033 Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . 2034 WARNING 1 Parameter 2018 (approach) or 2019 (return relief) is referred to when 2 axes at a time control is specified. 2 Initialize parameter for 2031 and 2032 is equal to the parameter for 2018. Initialize parameter for 2033 and 2034 is equal to the parameter for 2019. 3 An axis, to which data are output, is determined by MTF 1084 parameter. The following figure shows the reference timing of each parameter.
Approach
Relief
As the result of decomposing the moving of approach or return relief, if there is no movement X or Z axis (that is, tool changing point and one axis coordinate value of approach point is corresponding), the NC data output to the axis movement depends on parameter No.1002.
Parameter No. 1002 Meaning 0: MTF 2000s numbers are not referred to when no movement is made for approach or return relief. 1: MTF 2000s numbers are referred to even if no movement is done. Standard value 0
327
B63304EN/02
Example: If the axes are decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one axis at a time control when the X axis only moves for return relief, the X axis does not move in the 2nd motion, but it moves in the 1st motion only.
When MTF 1002 = 0 Tool changing point MTF 2033 When MTF 1002 = 1 Tool changing point MTF 2034 MTF 2033 If MTF 2033 and 2034 are set as shown in example below: G28.00; is output
MTF parameter No. 4102 2033 G28 4102 2034 G28 U0 W0 U0 DD01 W0 CC01 DD01 CC01
Setting value
0004 EOB 0004 EOB
When the axes were decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows. G28 U0; G28 W0; When the axes are decomposed in the order of Z axis and X axis in one axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows. G28 W0; G28 U0;
328
B63304EN/02
1.9
UTILIZATION OF DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE
WARNING When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. The NC data, which are fitted for operation utilizing the direct input of tool offset value, can be output. In this case, the coordinates of home position must be set. If this is not set, the block for positioning to the index position will not be output. (1) NC Tape format The following NC data for direct input of tool offset value is available, if 00000101 is set to MTF 1060 and settings of MTF 2000s is changed. However, if reference point return is not required, the data correction for MTF 2000 and 2001 is not necessary. O1234 G28U0 }Reference point return G28W0 G50S2000 Coordinate system setting is not output. G00T0100 }Turret G00X200Z200T010M08 }Approach, Tool offset start, Coolant on . . . . G00X200Z200T0100M09 }Return, relief, Tool offset cancel, Coolant off G28U0W0 }Reference point return M30
329
B63304EN/02
(2) Setting of parameters (example) Setting of MTF No.2000, 2001, 2016, 2018 and 2019 is changed as follows.
Number Set value 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0004, 4107, 0107, 0004 (EOR EOB O EOB G28 U0 EOB G28 W0 EOB is output at reader part of NC data.) 0205, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0107, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0104, 0004 (M05 EOB G28 U0 W0 EOB M30 EOB EOR EOB is output at the trailer part of NC data.) 4402, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 (G50 s EOB G00 T EOB is output at the start of process. In standard setting, G50X Z is output. In this setting, the independent G50 block is output at the start of a process which does not employ any constant surface speed control. 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 (G90 G00 X Z T0101 M08 EOB is output at the time of Approach.) 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0003, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 (G90 G00 X Z T0100 M09 EOB is output at return relief.)
2000
2001
2016
2018
2019
(3) Warnings WARNING 1 For MTF No.2000 and 2001, maximum 10 parameters only can be set, respectively. In case of a setting sample in (2), neither feed at the start and end of a program not T code (MTF No.1106) at the end of the program is output, although these feed and code are output in standard setting. 2 If the setting is changed as the following example, the approach and return relief should be specified simultaneous two axes. And the system parameter No.0107 to 0115 should be set so as to output tool offset cancel.
System parameter
#7 0107 to 0115 #6 #5 #4 0 #3 0 #2 1 #1 #0
Bit 2 Tool offset cancel is output. Bit 3, 4 Approach and return relief should be specified simultaneous 2 axes.
330
B63304EN/02
1.10
APPLICATION FOR NC CHASER LATHE
WARNING When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. The functions for preparing NC tape for chaser lathe are provided. The major functions are as follows. 1) It is no longer necessary to define the tool by reversing it, if the tool is at the rear side. 2) The tool can be replaced by drawing the Z axis only to the specified position. The above functions will be detailed below. (1) Setting of parameters Set the following MTF parameters No.1051 (Turret position) . . . . . . Set whether the standard tool is positioned on this side or on the counter side. No.1055 (Turret type) = 1 No.1084 (Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis) . . . . . . Set the moving sequence of return relief and approach. No.1105 (Number of digits of T code and offset number) . . . . . . Set 0 if T code is not divided into tool number and offset number. Others, the MTF and system parameter is set according to the needs. (2) Specifications of index position The X value is not specified, but the Z axis only is specified at the index position. The tool can be retracted only in Z axis at tool change, by this specification. (3) Setting of tool data The specification method of data differs according to whether 1 or 2 is specified or 3 or 4 is specified as the drawing format. This concept is the same as in ordinary turret lathes. (i) When 1 or 2 is specified; The drawing format is the same as in the case that the opposite side is specified as +X. This will be explained, referring to the outer diameter cutting, as an example.
331
B63304EN/02
Assuming that cutting edge angle (AC), tool nose angle (AN), mounting angle (AS), and reference point are determined out of tool data as shown in the above figure, the mounting position (XS, ZS) is as shown in the following table. (Example)
AC T01 T02 85 85 AN 80 80 AS 180 180 XS + ZS + +
(ii)When 3 or 4 is specified;
332
B63304EN/02
The following table shows the same example.

AC T01 T02 85 85 AN 80 80 AS 180 180 XS + ZS + +
(4) Question about cutting start position The cutting start position is automatically calculated from the index position, XS and ZS values are displayed. Since the X value at the index position is undefined, the X value at the cutting start position also remains undefined. Specify the cutting start position X in the first process without fail. The cutting start position X in the second and higher processes are kept undefined. Thus, the tool is replaced by pulling the Z axis only to the index position without returning the tool to the index position. (5) Inversion of X coordinate signs The system asks whether the X coordinate signs are inverted or not in the same way as in setting the cutting start position. Input 1 for the tool which cuts on the X side. In the example shown in the above figure, T02 corresponds to drawing format 1 or 2, while T01 corresponds to drawing format 3 or 4. (6) Explanation by definite example The execution method will be described definitely, referring to an example.
333
B63304EN/02
(a) Define the parts figure on the Xaxis plus side. (b) Set the turret position to (ZI) when T01 is the reference tool. (Undefined for value of X axis). (c) Define the rough cutting process of outer diameter (Tool: T01) Input
INPUT
only when the system asks you the following question
after setting the machining start position in X and Z axis direction. INVERT X COORDINATE? INVX =_ (1: YES 0: NO) Define the machining area of outer diameter. (d) Roughly cut the inner diameter on the Xaxis minus side by using T02 tool. Dont set the value to the question for Xaxis machining start position. Input 1
INPUT
to indicate that the workpiece is cut on the Xaxis
minus side during this process to the question as same as (c). Define the machining area of inner diameter. (e) Prepare NC data. (7) Warnings and Notes
WARNING 1 Be careful with the setting of the spindle rotating directions of system parameters No.0107 to 0115.
7 not used 6 5 4 0/1 3 0/1 2 0/1 1 0/1 0 0/1
Spindle rotating direction when cutting is done on Xaxis plus side Spindle rotating direction when cutting is made on Xaxis minus side Set values mean as follows. 0 : M code No.MTF1130 (standard M03) 1 : M code No.MTF1131 (standard M04)
2 The results of answering the system question about the Xaxis inversion are as specified below according to the setting of MTF No.1051 (turret position). MTF No.1051 should be interpreted whether the reference tool is positioned on the Xaxis plus side or on the Xaxis minus side.
MTF No.1051 setting
Answer to question of Xaxis inversion 0: No Output on Xaxis plus (+) side Output on Xaxis minus () side 1: Yes Output on Xaxis minus () side Output on Xaxis plus (+) side
1 1
334
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 If, on the tool data setting screen for machining definition, the answer to the prompt asking whether to invert the Xaxis is set to 1 (yes), a machining area is not automatically set, even when the automatic process determination option is enabled. The cutting direction and dividing direction should be defined manually. 2 The automatic process determination function cannot be used to define a process in which the Xaxis is to be inverted. (Using the automatic process determination function generates those processes in which the Xaxis is not to be inverted.) 3 On menu 5, the [ANIMATION] soft key does not appear. When an NC data is prepared, only those machining operations indicated by line drawing are shown. 4 In 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, gradation display is disabled for animated simulation on menu 6. 5 In the following cases, the prompt asking whether to invert the Xaxis does not appear on the tool data setting screen for machining definition. (1)When C or Yaxis machining is specified (2)When the back machining function is set (3)When the workpiece inversion function is set
335
B63304EN/02
1.11
INTERFERENCE CHECK 1.11.1
Interference Check by Tool Shape and Machining Shape
The interference check between tool shape and machining shape or between tool path and machining shape is strengthened in Symbolic FAPT TURN.
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket only by using a reversible tool.
NOTE For actual operations, refer to item 3.4.7 of chapter III.
1.11.2
Interference Check in Approach and Return relief
A function of checking the interference of tool and blank in approach and return relief movement during cutting process of workpieces is provided. The interference is basically examined according to whether the straight line connecting from the present position to the next position intersects the blank or not during the approach or return relief movement.
For cutting the area (B) in the above figure, convexed part (A) must be avoided, otherwise the interference occurs. Accordingly, the return relief movement is done to the position were a clearance margin is added to the blank as illustrated.
336
B63304EN/02
If the tool moves outside the blank like in the return motion to the turret position, the system examines the interference up to the position of the maximum blank size before moving the tool. Then, the movement of the turret position is output.
Turret position
Maximum blank figure
If the tool directly moves to the turret position from point (A), the tool interferes with the convexed part. In such a case, the tool moves to the turret position after it has retreated up to point (B) at the blank end. Whether the return relief movement is done on the simultaneous two axes or one axis only is determined by system parameters No.0107 to 0115. It should be carefully noted that the tool referred to here is defined as nose R (nose circle) only, and it does not include any other tools. In other words, the system checks the tool nose angle, but it does not check such an interference as the blank touches a shank or other part other than specified above in the following figure, for example.
Such a conditions as illustrated here is not checked. (The nose angle and nose R are set to a correct cutting position.)
WARNING In case of threading tool the system checks the interference by the nose R specified by the virtual tool position. If an undesirable tool path is output, specify the opposite nose R by the virtual tool position.
337
B63304EN/02
1.11.3
Grooving when the Tool Width and Groove Width are the Same
(1) Definition of grooving tool The grooving tool is checked to see if twice the tool nose radius R is not more than the tool width. If RN x 2 y WN, it is treated as an error.
(2) Interference check during approach If a wall of a groove is extended when tool width = groove width, the specification of cutting area is the same in the following examples (part (A) and (B)).
338
B63304EN/02
(3) Dimensional check of the tool width and groove width at groove inlet The tool width and groove width are checked at the groove inlet to see if groove inlet width > tool width. If this relation is not satisfied, an alarm is issued as an error. This dimensional check does not apply to the innermost of the groove.
The dimensional check as illustrated here is not done. Be careful since the opposite side of the cutting edge causes interference.
1.11.4
Approach and Relief to Inner Diameter
If an inner diameter contains a convexed part halfway, it cannot be machined because of the interference with the convexed part during approach and return relief. It is possible to solve the interference by the simultaneous 1 axis movement. (For details, refer to Sec. 1.8.)
339
B63304EN/02
1.12
INITIAL SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION
System parameter
#7 708
The userspecific figures and characters can be displayed on the initial screen. In addition, the region within a closed curve can be filled in. This function is enabled when bit 3 of system parameter No.708 is 1.
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Bit 3 0 : This function is not used. 1 : This function is used.
1.12.1
Screen Flow
Because the word external here implies input to RAM, saving the input to nonvolatile memory requires that soft key [SAVE END] on the Check (initial screen drawing) screen be pressed.
340
B63304EN/02
1.12.2
Setting Initial Screen Display Data
Enter 18 INPUT on the SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT screen. Then, the screen for setting initial screen display data appears. On this screen, set screen display data using appropriate G codes. Up to 432 lines can be set. If an attempt is made to set data beyond 432 lines, an alarm is issued. (1) Coordinates Coordinates are represented in two ways: Dotbased representation, and characterbased representation.
Dotbased Characterbased
When characters are displayed, they are input at coordinates corresponding to the character positions on the 14inch CRT (screen) (27 lines by 74 columns) (figure above). Characters can be displayed anywhere within the screen area (24 lines by 64 columns) except in the right NC display area and soft key display area at the bottom. Thus, characters can be displayed at the following coordinates: First line: Character addresses 0 to 63 Second line: Character addresses 74 to 137 Third line: Character addresses 148 to 211 Fourth line: Character addresses 222 to 285 Fifth line: Character addresses 296 to 359 Sixth line: Character addresses 370 to 433 Seventh line: Character addresses 444 to 507 Eighth line: Character addresses 518 to 581 Ninth line: Character addresses 592 to 655 10th line: Character addresses 666 to 729 11th line: Character addresses 740 to 803 12th line: Character addresses 814 to 877 13th line: Character addresses 888 to 951 14th line: Character addresses 962 to 1025 15th line: Character addresses 1036 to 1099 16th line: Character addresses 1110 to 1173 17th line: Character addresses 1184 to 1247 18th line: Character addresses 1258 to 1321 19th line: Character addresses 1332 to 1395 20th line: Character addresses 1406 to 1469 21st line: Character addresses 1480 to 1543
341
B63304EN/02
22nd line: Character addresses 1554 to 1617 23rd line: Character addresses 1628 to 1691 24th line: Character addresses 1702 to 1765 (2) G codes for displaying figures
G code G01 G02 G03 G204 G206 G240 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 Function Draws a straight line. Draws an arc clockwise. Draws an arc counterclockwise. Argument X, Y X, Y, I, J X, Y, I, J G code type Modal Modal Modal Singleshot Singleshot Singleshot Singleshot
Displays a rectangular frame. X, Y Fill command. Specifies a color. Sets a drawing start point. Displays a character string. Specifies a line type. Character mode. string X, Y P X, Y
P, Character string Singleshot P Singleshot
display P, Character string Modal Singleshot
Cancels the character string display mode.
When these G codes and arguments are specified, no space must be inserted. 1) G01 Draws a straight line. G01X_Y_; (Specify X and Y in incremental mode.) X: 512 to 512, dotbased Y: 384 to 384, dotbased NOTE An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y arguments cannot be omitted at the same time. 2) G02 Draws an arc clockwise. G03 Draws an arc counterclockwise G02/G03X_Y_I_J_; (Specify X, Y, I, and J in incremental mode.) X, I: 512 to 512, dotbased Y, J: 384 to 384, dotbased NOTE An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y arguments cannot be omitted at the same time.
342
B63304EN/02
3) G204 Displays a rectangular frame. G204X_Y_; (Specify X and Y in incremental mode.) X: 512 to 512, dotbased Y: 384 to 384, dotbased
Specify a rectangular frame with incremental values relative to the current position.
NOTE The current position remains unchanged after a rectangular frame is drawn. 4) G206 Fill command G206X_Y_; (Specify X and Y in incremental mode.) With this command, the area enclosed in a closed curve, including (X, Y), can be filled in. (X, Y) must be located inside the curve. If (X, Y) lies on the curve, the area cannot be filled in. X: 512 to 512, dotbased Y: 384 to 384, dotbased Example : G01X__ Y__ ; . . . G02X__ Y__ ; G206X__ Y__ ;
Draws a closed curve. Fills in the area enclosed in the closed curve.
The same color must be used for the boundary and the inside.
343
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 If X or Y is not specified, the current coordinates are assumed. 2 After the area is filled in, the coordinates immediately before the specification of G206 are displayed again. 3 The area is filled in with the last color specified. 5) G240 Specifies a color. G240P_; Specifies the color of line segments and character strings. If a negative value is specified for P, characters are displayed in reverse video. P = 1: Red, = 2: Green, = 3: Yellow, = 4: Blue, = 5: Purple, = 6: Light blue, = 7: White 6) G242 Specifies a drawing start point. G242X_Y_; Specify a drawing start point with absolute values in the dot coordinate system. The next drawing starts at the specified point. X: 0 to 512, dotbased Y: 0 to 384, dotbased 7) G243 Displays a character string. ; G243P_, Character string (alphanumerics, , .) P: Addresses 0 to 1997 at which the character string is to be displayed 8) G244 Specifies a line type. G244P_; Specifies the line type of the straight line or arc to be drawn. P= 0: Solid line 1: Dotted line 2: Dotanddash line 3: Doubledotanddash line 9) G245 Enters the character string display mode. G246 Cancels the character string display mode. G245 is the continuousstate form of the character string display command (G243). G245P_ , Character string ; Character string display mode P_ , Character string ; P_ , Character string ; G246 ;
344
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Be sure to specify G246 in a separate block. 2 G codes other than G240 must not be placed between the G245 and G246 blocks. G245P_ , ; G01X_Y_,_ ; This specification is illegal. G246 ; 3 G240 (color specification) can be specified between the G245 and G246 blocks. G245P_ , ABC ; G240P_ ; Changes the color of characters P_ , XYZ ; (XYZ). G246 ; 4 The following specification is permitted: G245P_ , ABC; P_ ; A character string (ABC) is displayed repeatedly. (3) Soft keys The meanings of the soft keys displayed on the screen are as follows: CHECK . . . . . Checks set data. If no error is found, the drawing screen is displayed for drawing operation. NEW . . . . . . . . Pressed when new data is created. If this soft key is pressed, and the END soft key is pressed with no data entered, the previous data is maintained. DELETE . . . . . Deletes the line indicated by the cursor. To erase all the data, use this soft key, and delete data line by line. INSERT . . . . . Inserts entered data to just above the line indicated by the cursor. If the keyin buffer line contains no data, nothing occurs when this soft key is pressed. PAGE . . . . . . Displays the previous page. PAGE . . . . . . Displays the next page. There are a maximum of 12 pages. CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor backward. CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor foreward. END . . . . . . . . Redisplays the SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT screen.
1.12.3
Check Screen
When the CHECK soft key is pressed on the data setting screen, the drawing screen appears unless any error is found. On this screen, the user can check the drawing to see if the desired picture is obtained. The meaning of the soft key displayed on this screen is as follows: SAVE END Data is saved to submemory, then the SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT screen reappears. After this soft key is pressed, switching the power off and then on again causes the figure displayed here to appear on the initial screen. EDIT SCREEN Returns the display to the previous edit screen. This soft key is pressed when the display contents need to be corrected.
345
B63304EN/02
1.12.4
Error Messages
If entered data is erroneous, one of the following error massages appears: (1) G CODE IS ILLEGAL Example 1: A G code that cannot be used is specified. G00X100Y200; Example 2: A space is placed before a G code. G01X200; Space (2) ILLEGAL DATA FORMAT Example 1: G code contains a space. G242X 100Y200; G242 X100Y200; Example 2: Decimal point is set in G code. G242X100.Y200; Example 3: G code contains more than one sign. G242X+100; Example 4: Arguments are specified in reverse order. G242Y200X100; Example 5: An argument is omitted. G245; Example 6: An argument that cannot be used is specified. G204X100Y200P5; Example 7: An argument value exceeds the maximum. G204X1234; G243P2038, ; When the INPUT key is pressed, error checking is performed. (3) DRAWING IMPOSSIBLE Example 1: A G code other than G240 is specified between G245 and G246. G245; G01X100; Illegal G246; Example 2: G246 is specified alone, without G245. When the CHECK soft key is pressed, these errors are detected. If an error occurs, the cursor blinks on the illegal line. (4) NO DATA If there is no drawing data, this error message appears when the CHECK soft key is pressed. (5) DATA AREA OVERFLOW Up to 432 lines of data can be set on the initial screen display data setting screen. If an attempt is made to insert data beyond 432 lines, this message appears. (6) TOO MANY GRAPHIC SPECIFICATIONS If the work area provided for graphic display overflows, this message appears. (7) TOO MANY CHARACTERS If the work area provided for character display overflows, this message appears.
346
B63304EN/02
1.12.5
System Parameters
The following system parameters are provided for this function: (1) System parameter No.670 Explanation: Specifies the color in which input data is to be displayed on the data setting screen. 1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White (2) System parameter No.708 Explanation: To use this function, set bit 3 to 1.
347
B63304EN/02
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC DATA IN THE FS15T/16T FORMAT 1.13.1
MTF Setting
For NC data with different formats between the 15T and the 16T, the values in the following MTF machine file and function tables are modified before output as NC data. Only FS16T format NC data can be output for 5700 series of 16T CAP II.
(1) Machine file (MTF Nos. in the range 1000 to 1999) WARNING The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below are different from those used for a production run. Actual setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
Parameter No 1262
Format Integer
Description G code to return to the initial point (*1)
16T/TT initial value 1
15TFB/TTFB setting 1
1350
Integer
Miscellaneous function M code (*2) for rigid tapping preparation
29
1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366
Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number
Drilling cycle dwell off, front Drilling cycle dwell off, side Drilling cycle dwell on, front Drilling cycle dwell on, side Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3), front Real number Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3), side Real number Highspeed (machining type: 2), front peck drilling cycle
83. 87. 83. 87. 83. 87. 83.
81. 81. 82. 82. 83. 83. 83.1
348
B63304EN/02
Parameter No 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1380 1381 1382 1390 1391
Format Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Integer Single character
Description Highspeed peck drilling cycle (machining type: 2), side Tapping cycle, front Tapping cycle, side Reverse tapping cycle, front Reverse tapping cycle, side Rigid tapping cycle, front Rigid tapping cycle, side Rigid reverse tapping cycle, front Rigid reverse tapping cycle, side Start/cancellation of cylindrical interpolation Start of polar coordinate interpolation Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation Output format of canned cycle R code (*3) Canned cycle repetitive code
16T/TT initial value 87. 84. 88. 84. 88. 84. 88. 84. 88. 107. 112. 113. 1 K
15TFB/TTFB setting 83.1 84. 84. 84.1 84.1 84.2 84.2 84.3 84.3 7.1 12.1 13.1 0 L
*1 If MTF No.1260 is 94, the conventional system outputs G98, assuming G code system B or C. In the new system, MTF No.1262 is newly provided so that an arbitrary value can be output as the initial point return G code for G code system B/C. Normally, set 98 in MTF No.1262. *2 MTF No.1321 is referred at the time of rigid tapping cycle output. However, it is not required when output is performed in the 15T format. So, be sure to set MTF No.1321 to 1. Note that MTF No.1321 is referred for 5700 series of 16T CAP II. *3 As the canned cycle reference position (R code), an absolute value is output if parameter No.1390 is set to 0; an incremental value is output if the parameter is set to 1.
349
B63304EN/02
(2) Function tables (MTF Nos. in the range 2000 to 2999)

******** 16TA/TTA format initial values ******** <Existing table> 2059 =5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 G98 G84 X Z R F ; G99 G88 2203 =5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R P F K G99 G87 2204 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 2205 =5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F K G99 G87 2206 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 2207 =5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R M?? S M03 G99 G88 2208 =0503, 0B03, 0004, 0000 F K ; 2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000 G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G107 C ; G19 2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 G107 C ; Tapping cycle command block (turning)
Drilling cycle command block
Peck drilling cycle, or highspeed peck drilling cycle command block
Tapping cycle, or rigid tapping cycle command block (Caxis)
Cylindrical interpolation start block Cylindrical interpolation cancel block
* The underlined function codes have been changed for the new function. (See (2) of Section 2.2.) <New table 2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000 G112 ; 2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000 G113 ; Polar coordinate interpolation start block
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
350
B63304EN/02
*** 15TFB/TTFB format settings *** <Existing table> 2059 =5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000 G17 G98 G84 X Z R F ; G19 2203 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R P F G19 2204 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2205 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F G18 G99 G83.1 G19 2206 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2207 =5702, 5802, 6002, G17 G98 G98 G18 G99 G19 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G84 X Z C R Q F G84.1 G84.2 G84.3 Tapping cycle, reverse tapping cycle, rigid tapping cycle, or rigid reverse tapping cycle command block (Caxis) Tapping cycle, or reverse tapping cycle command block (turning)
Drilling cycle command block
Peck drilling cycle, or highspeed peck drilling cycle command block
2208 =0B03, 0004, 0000 L ; 2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000 G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G7.1 C ; G19 2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 G7.1 C ; <New table> 2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000 G12.1 ; 2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000 G13.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation start block Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block Cylindrical interpolation start block Cylindrical interpolation cancel block
351
B63304EN/02
(3) Function codes

Three highorder digits, detailed classification 6 6 6 0 1 2 0 0 0 One loworder digit, major classification 2 2 2 Function Outputs G code set in MTF No.1262. (15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: outputs G98 only when MTF No.1260 = 94.) Outputs G code set in MTF Nos.1360 to 1363. (15TF/TTF: Outputs G81 or G82. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G83 or G87.) Outputs G code set in MTF Nos.1364 to 1367. (15TF/TTF: Outputs G83 or G83.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G84 or G88.) Outputs G code set in MTF Nos.1368 to 1375. (15TF/TTF: Outputs G84 or G84.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: DDDD (newly provided)) Outputs G code set in MTF No.1380. (15TF/TTF: Outputs G7.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G107.) Outputs G code set in MTF No.1381 (newly provided). Outputs G code set in MTF No.1382 (newly provided).
6 6 6
4 5 6
0 0 0
2 2 2
0 0
9 B
0 0
3 3
Outputs R code in format set in MTF No.1390. (15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle R code) Outputs address set in MTF No.1391. (15TF/TTF: Outputs canned cycle L code. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle K code)
Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321. (15TF/TTF: DDDDD (newly provided) Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321.)
1.13.2
Supplementary
(1) When MTF data in the old system is read into the new system via the floppy cassette or another external storage device, only the MTF data having the conventional MTF Nos. is rewritten. In this case, change the settings in the function tables whose contents have been changed for this new function, by referencing the initial values in the function tables given previously. (2) Among the optional processes for machining definition in menu 4, the following six processes are subject to format conversion: Tapping Caxis center drilling Caxis drilling Caxis tapping Face milling Side milling
352
B63304EN/02
1.14
FUNCTION FOR PREPARING THE NEXT TOOL
This function is used to define the tool change method in NC data so that the corresponding tool to be used in the next process will be called. This function is applied to all machining processes except sub cycles. This function is an optional function. (1) Programming Programming is performed in the same way as for normal programming. (2) System parameter
Parameter No. 706 Format Specificatio n of 0 or 1 Initial value 00000000 Description Bit 5 = 0: The next tool is not called for turret 1. 1: The next tool is called for turret 1. Bit 6 = 0: The next tool is not called for turret 2. 1: The next tool is called for turret 2.
(3) MTF 1) MTF1xxx The following parameters have been added:

No. 1355 1400 Format Integer Twocharac ters Initial value 6 BB Description Tool calling M code value Next tool calling command address (the same two characters are specified)
2) MTF function table The following function table has been added:
2066 (setting the next tool calling block) 1203, 0004, 0A05, 0004, 0103, 0004, 1303, 0004, 0000, 0000 B ; M06 ; T ; B ;
3) Function code The following function codes have been added:

Higher three Lowest digit digits Major Detailed classification classification 1 1 0 2 3 A 0 0 0 3 3 5
Function
Outputs the address specified with MTF1400. (Tool number used in the first block) Outputs the address specified with MTF1400. (Tool number used in the next process) Outputs the M code (M06) specified with MTF1355. (Tool calling)
353
B63304EN/02
NOTE The value of MTF1104 (the number of tool number digits) should be used as the number of digits of the B code for specifying the next tool. (4) Example of output NC data block The following NC data are prepared (when the NC data are prepared for three processes).
0_ ; G50X_ Z_ ; G0X_ Z_ ; (First process start) B01 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the first process M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change T0101 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation B02 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (second) process G50X_ Z_ ; . . T0100 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel (First process end) (Second process start) M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change T0202 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation B03 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (third) process G05X_ Z_ ; . T0200 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel (Second process end) (Third process start) M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change T0303 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation G05X_ Z_ ; . . T0300 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel (Third process end)
CAUTION 1 For the first process, the tool number to be used in the process is output before M06 (tool change). 2 For the last process, no next tool number is output.
354
B63304EN/02
1.15
OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR INTERPOLATION RIGID TAPPING
In programming for C or Xaxis machining, this function is used to output those NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation rigid tapping. A set of NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation rigid tapping is referred to as an interpolation rigid tapping cycle. Those macros that perform interpolation rigid tapping must have already been registered in the NC. Example output
G28H0. ; G50X150. Z150. C0.; G0T0101; X40. ; Z92. ; C45. ; G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2M68 ; G380. ; G0Z150. ; X150. ; T0100 ; M1 ;
(1) Programming Programming for outputting an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is performed in the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid tapping cycle. 1) Machining type On the machining definition screen, select CAXIS TAP. or YAXIS TAP. as the machining type. 2) Tool data Use the tapping tool for milling. 3) Cutting conditions On the definition screen, shown below, enter each data item.
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP=2 The rigid tapping type is specified(*1). CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . C1 =JJJJ The initial value is set to the value of system parameter No.363 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 435 for the Yaxis. C2 =JJJJ The initial value is set to the value of system parameter No.364 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 436 for the Yaxis. CUTTING SPEED . . . . N =JJJJ V*1000/DT*PAI(*2) (V = cutting speed value set in the material data, DT = tool diameter value set in the tool data)
*1 When machining type 1 is selected, a general tapping cycle is output. When machining type 2 is selected, a normal rigid tapping cycle or an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output, depending on the system parameter setting (see (2) below). *2 The value for millingrelated tapping set in the material data should be used as the initial speed value.
355
B63304EN/02
4) Automatic process determination The automatic process determination function selects 1 for the machining type, not 2 (rigid tapping). 5) Animated simulation during NC data preparation Animated simulation during NC data preparation is performed in the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid tapping cycle. (2) System parameter To enable this function, set bit 7 of system parameter No. 706 to on.
Bit 7 of system parameter No. 706 0: Outputs a normal rigid tapping cycle. 1: Outputs an interpolation rigid tapping cycle.
(3) MTF 1) MTF1xxx The following parameters have been added:

No. Format Initial value 68 69 1 2 384 380 FF TT Description Caxis clamping M code Caxis unclamping M code Xaxis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle Zaxis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping cycle Pitch command address for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle Cutting direction command address for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1351 Integer 1352 Integer 1353 Integer 1354 Integer 1383 Integer 1384 Integer 1398 Two characters 1399 Two characters
356
B63304EN/02
2) MTF function table The following function tables have been added:
2240 (Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block 1) 8002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103, 1605, 0004 G384 X Z C F R S T M68 ; 2241 (Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block 2) 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 2242 (Block for canceling a Caxis interpolation tapping cycle) 8002, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 G380 ; 2243 (Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block 1) 1605, 0004, 8002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103 M68 ; G384 X Z Y F R S T 2244 (Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block 2) 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 2245 (Block for canceling a Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle) 8102, 0004, 1705, 0004, 0000, 0000 G380 ; M69 ;
3) Function code The following function codes have been added:

Higher three Lowest digit digits Major Detailed classification classification 8 8 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 3
Function
Outputs the G code (G384) specified with MTF1383. Outputs the G code (G380) specified with MTF1384. Outputs the address specifies with MTF1398. (For the pitch when an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is specified)(*1) Outputs the address specifies with MTF1399. (For the cutting direction when an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is specified) (*2) Outputs the M code (M68) specified with MTF1351. Outputs the M code (M69) specified with MTF1352.
1 1
6 7
0 0
5 5
*1 The value set in the tool data prepared during machining definition is output as the pitch value. *2 TI (value of MTF1353) for the Xaxis cutting direction, or T2 (value of MTF1354) for the Zaxis cutting direction, is output.
357
B63304EN/02
(4) Example of output NC data block 1) Caxis end tapping

90 78 90
40 180 0
270 . . G28H0. ; G50X150. Z150. C0. ; G0T0101 ; X40. ; Z92. ; C0. ; G384Z80. F1.5R0. S2000T2M68 ; G384C90. ; G384C180. ; G384C270 ; G380. ; G0Z150. ; X150. ; T0100 ; M1 ; . .
G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle F . . . . . . . . . . Pitch T . . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction (T1: Xaxis direction/T2: Zaxis direction) S . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed M68 . . . . . . . Caxis clamping M code Rigid tapping cancel
358
B63304EN/02
2) Yaxis end tapping

90 78 90
40 180 0
270 G50X200. Z200. Y0. C0. ; G0T0101 ; G17C90. ; X40. ; Y0. ; Z92. ; M68 ; G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2 ; G384X0. Y20. ; G384X40. Y0. ; G384X0. Y20. ; G380. ; M69 ; G0Z150. ; X150. ; Y0. T0100 ; M1 ; .
Caxis clamping M code G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle F . . . . . . . . . . Pitch S . . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed T . . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction (T1: Xaxis direction/T2: Zaxis direction) Rigid tapping cancel Caxis unclamping M code
359
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT
B63304EN/02
CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT
360
B63304EN/02
2.1
TOOL FIGURE AND SETTING METHOD
If you know by what processing the tool figure and setting method are defined when tool data were input to the Symbolic FAPT system, you will be able to program these tool more securely. Data employed by the system for checking the cutting direction, cutting edge angle, and other tool figures are angles indicating the tool nose directions in the NC data coordinate system.
In the NC data coordinate system, the counterclockwise angle as viewed from the plus (+) Z direction shows a positive (+) angle, while the clockwise angle shows a negative () angle.
For example, 135 and 225 or 180 and 180 have the same meanings, respectively.
Two cutting edges are present normally. They are called major cutting edge and minor cutting edge. These cutting edge directions are called major cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle.
In the above figure, the major cutting edge direction angle is 240 or 120 , while the minor cutting edge direction angle is 165 or 195. Now, the process or determining the tool figure and setting methods in the Symbolic FAPT will be described in regular sequence, referring to the above description.
361
B63304EN/02
1st step: Positive direction and negative direction of input data (1) The turret is mounted on the front side or on the rear side, depending upon the types of NC lathes. If the turret is mounted on the rear side, imagine a cutter located at a symmetric position on the front side, obtained by turning the cutter around the Z axis as the rotation center by a half turn.
(2) If the cutter is mounted inside out, grip a tool while erecting its shank so that the cutting edge faces downward, and cutting edge faces upward in other cases.
Assume a straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just downward. The following figure shows examples typical figures of cutters and the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just downward based on the presumption.
362
B63304EN/02
(3) The major cutting edge angle AC is defined as the angle formed by the major cutting edge angle and the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just downward. Cutting edge angle AN is also defined as the angle formed by the major cutting edge and minor cutting edge. The counterclockwise angle is specified as the positive direction angle as shown in the following figure.
(4) If the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just downward is presumed as a straight line which passes the virtual tool position, you will be able to understand the meanings of the following question asked on the CRT screen by the system. VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . . XN = ZN = Input the distance from the virtual tool position to the center of cutting edge as XN and ZN.
(5) Setting angle AS indicates the setting direction of a tool. Input the setting angle to the selected drawing format, irrespective of whether the turret is located on the front side or on the rear side, and presume that the tool is set on the upper side of the CRT screen if menu number 1 or 2 was selected, or on the lower side of the CRT screen if menu number 3 or 4 was selected, for drawing format. The upward direction of the straight line passing the tool nose edge employed in (2) (direction from the base of the tool to the tool nose) is employed for indicating the tool direction. Input the clockwise direction as a negative () angle from the right side of the abscissa of the CRT screen and also input the counterclockwise direction as a positive (+) angle.
363
B63304EN/02
2nd step: Calculation of the direction angles of major cutting edge and minor cutting edge There are certain items to be input by an operator according to questions from the CRT screen. The following three factors are used to determine the cutting edge direction angles. CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . AC = (Cutting edge angle) NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AN = (Tool nose angle) SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . AS = (Setting angle) The following procedure shows the process of calculating the cutting edge direction angles inside the system based on the above three pieces of information. (1) Assume AC be the major cutting edge angle and AN be the tool nose angle.
(2) Calculate the minor cutting edge angle by AC = AC + AN. (Example) AC = 30 + 45 = 75 (3) Convert setting angle AS according to the selected drawing format. This is because that the system uses the value which is converted in the first quadrant, irrespective of the specification of drawing format. D If the selected drawing format is 1 or 2, AS is kept unchanged. D If the selected drawing type is 3 or 4, AS is converted into AS (AS = AS). (4) Calculate the major cutting edge and minor cutting edge direction angles, respectively. A = AS AC (major cutting edge) A = AS AC (minor cutting edge)
364
B63304EN/02
Lets confirm, referring to the following examples, that the major cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle are obtained as desired, irrespective of the drawing format. (Example 1) When drawing format is 1 or 2; Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = 90
Internal processing;
A = ASAC = 120 ... . . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle A = ASAC = AS(AC+AN) = 165 . . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
Result;
365
B63304EN/02
(Example 2)
When drawing format is 3 or 4; Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = 90
Internal processing;
AS = AS = 90 A = ASAC = 120 . . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle A = ASAC = AS(AC+AN) = 165 . . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
Result;
366
B63304EN/02
2.2
CUTTING DIRECTION AND CUTTING EDGE ANGLE
For the cutting direction vector (A) as viewed from the tool tip, and the cutting edge angle vector of major cutting edge (B) and the cutting edge angle vector of minor cutting edge (C) as viewed from the tool tip by taking the cutting edge protective angle (standard value: 3) into consideration, D an error is produced, if the rotating direction from A to B does not meet the rotating direction from B to C, and also D an error is produced if A meets B. Example when the cutting direction is ;

When cutting is made at the minor cutting edge, consider the above explanation by exchanging vectors B and C.
367
B63304EN/02
2.3
ROUGH CUTTING DIRECTION
Rough cutting is made by linear cutting (parallel to X axis or parallel to Z axis). Specify the medium finish cutting several times repeatedly, if an output of a profiling mold is desired. For number of pockets in rough cutting area, ten or less pockets are present in one machining area.
368
B63304EN/02
2.4
JUDGEMENT OF POCKETS
The pockets to be judged by the Symbolic FAPT are defined as concaved parts as viewed from the cutting direction out of them. The same profile may be judged as a pocket or not judged as a pocket, depending upon the cutting directions as shown in the following example.
The concaved portion (indicated by the slanting lines) in the left figure is judged as a pocket when the cutting direction is and it is not judged as a pocket when the cutting direction is .
The concaved portion which was not judged as a pocket is not cut in the corresponding process. When the above portion is cut in the direction;
When the above portion is cut in the
direction;
If a pocket is shallower than the next cutting position in rough cutting process, it is cut by the rough cutting.
369
B63304EN/02
If system parameter No.0101 is 0 (no pocket is cut), the pocket is kept uncut, irrespective of the above condition.
370
B63304EN/02
2.5
DIVISION OF MACHINING AREA
The arrows indicating the division direction are input for specifying the area based on the following principle. Outer diameter side Inner diameter side Edge face side , , (selective use)
Refer to the following cautions when specifying the dividing directions of the machining area.
(1) Dividing direction of area Specify the dividing direction of the machining area toward the blank profile.
(2) Dividing direction and part figure Dont overlap the dividing direction of the machining area and the part figure each other.
371
B63304EN/02
(3) Machining start point and end point coincide No machining is possible, if the start point of part figure coincides with the end point and these points are located on a blank profile (blank figure).
Z axis judges it as the profile figure of a blank.
In case of the above figure, machining becomes possible, if a dummy figure element of about 0.01 mm in length is inserted.
372
B63304EN/02
(4) Difference of tool paths according to dividing direction of area When the end face or outer diameter is continuously machined in the medium finish cutting or finish cutting process, the cutting method differs according to the specification of the dividing directions of the cutting area. (Refer to the following finish cutting as an example.)
NOTE Fi: Feedrate by the specification of surface roughness Fj: Feedrate by the specification of standard surface roughness (5) Concept of area in semifinish and finish cutting In the semifinish and finish, cutting is made along the part figure only, while neglecting the blank figure. The profile in the arrow direction specified when dividing the machining area is regarded as a part of the part profile.
373
B63304EN/02
(6) If the cutting area in outer surface roughing is divided midway through the tapered section No check is made on the tool nose angle (minor cutting edge angle) on the border line from the area division point to the blank figure. If the minor cutting edge angle is smaller than the angle made by the Zaxis and the border line, therefore, the rear surface of the tool may interfere with the blank figure. To avoid this interference, specify the border line for area dividing in such a way that it will not interfere with the minor cutting edge of the tool. After changing the division start point from point A to point B shown in Fig. 2.5 (a), changing the direction of dividing to R causes a check to be made on the tool nose angle within the cutting area, so interference with the blank figure will not occur. However, use an inverseprocess tool so that no uncut portion is left in area C.
Y No check is made on the tool nose angle on this line. Direction of cutting B
J
A
Area C
Fig. 2.5 (a)
374
B63304EN/02
(7) If the last cut exceeds a depth of cut in inner surface roughing (No. 1) If the cutting area is divided as shown in Fig. 2.5 (b), an arrow of division at the division start point (DS) overlaps with the contour of the blank figure in some portion (portion A). In this portion, a normal cutting area may not be created when compensation with respect to a finishing allowance, nose R, or clearance is being performed for a specified cutting area.
Part DS
DE
Blank figure
Portion A
Fig. 2.5 (b)
In this case, divide the cutting area in such a way that the arrow diving the cutting area will cross the contour of the blank figure, as shown in Fig. 2.5 (c).
Part DS
DE
Blank figure
Fig. 2.5 (c)
375
B63304EN/02
(8) If the last cut exceeds a depth of cut in inner surface roughing (No. 2) In inner surface roughing in which a cutting area is divided as shown in Fig. 2.5 (d), the blank figure is cut in such a way that the last tool path goes along with the figure of the part. If the taper angle of the figure is large, the last cut may exceed the depth of cut made by one cut. This occurs under the following conditions: At the cutting area division point (DS), part elements before and after the division point intersect at an acute angle. The arrow dividing the cutting area overlaps with the blank figure. For these conditions, take either of the following measures: Make a slight chamfer at the division point (DS) (as a measure for condition ). Divide the cutting area in outer surface machining, which precedes inner surface machining, as shown in Fig. 2.5 (e) (as a measure for condition ).
Blank figure Part DE
DE
DS
DS
Fig. 2.5 (d)
Fig. 2.5 (e)
376
B63304EN/02
(9) If a tool path goes too far in grooving, which follows inner surface finishing If the dividing direction DE1 at the end point of the cutting area in the first subprocess in inner surface finishing does not coincides with the dividing direction DE2 at the end point of the cutting area in groove cutting, which follows the inner surface finishing, a wedgeshaped portion, shown by hatching in the following figure, is left uncut. In some cases, cutting this wedgeshaped portion disables a correct tool path from being created. In these cases, make the dividing direction DE1 at the end point in inner surface finishing coincide with the dividing direction DE2 in grooving.
DS2
DE2 DE1 DS1 A wedgeshaped portion is left uncut.
Fig. 2.5 (f)
377
B63304EN/02
(10) If the tool cuts in the groove in outer surface finishing for an end surface that contains a groove figure A tool path that extends into a groove may be created if the following three conditions are satisfied. A step occurs in portion A in the blank figure because the finishing allo wance differs between outer surface roughing and inner surface roughing. The cutting area is not continuous because grooving has been performed before. In outer surface finishing, clearance value CX is not equal to clearance value CZ.
Part figure Blank figure
Division start point Division end point Portion A
Fig. 2.5 (g)
In this case, make clearance values CX and CZ equal to each other so that condition , which does not affect machining, is eliminated.
378
B63304EN/02
(11) If a portion on the outer surface is left uncut in outer surface roughing followed by end surface roughing Fig. 2 shows a cutting area with the division start point DS and its vicinity enlarged when the cutting area is specified for the outer surface (Fig. 2.5 (h)). Small taper elements and appears one after another at or around a portion where the dividing arrow meets the blank figure. For the specified cutting area, compensation regarding a finishing allowance, clearance, and nose R is made before a tool path is created. If small taper elements appear one after another as shown in Fig. 2.5 (i), the compensated cutting area may contains an unnecessary projection (circled) as shown in Fig. 2.5 (j). If this projection occurs, it makes it impossible during tool path creation to determine whether the entire cutting area has been processed. In this case, specify the dividing direction in such a way that the cutting area does not contain element or as shown in Fig. 2.5 (k), because elements and shown in Fig. 2.5 (i) will not actually undergo outer surface machining.
Part Blank figure
J
Dividing direction
Fig. 2.5 (h)
Fig. 2.5 (i)
Part Blank figure
J
Dividing direction
Fig. 2.5 (j)
Fig. 2.5 (k)
379
B63304EN/02
(12) If the tool gets on the inner surface in end facing An uncut portion can be avoided by internally creating a cutting area in which a specified blank figure element portion is enlarged by an amount of nose R and defining a tool path according to that cutting area. If the dividing arrows of the cutting area overlap with the blank figure as shown in Fig. 2.5 (l) or the interval between the elements that form the blank figure and dividing arrows is not larger than [nose R x 2], the internal cutting area has a concave figure as shown in Fig. 2.5 (m). In this case, define the blank figure as shown in Fig. 2.5 (n).
Part Tool path Blank figure Dividing arrow Original part Original blank figure Cutting area
Fig. 2.5 (l)
Fig. 2.5 (m)
Fig. 2.5 (n)
380
B63304EN/02
(13) If the cutting area is initialized in machining definition If the number of elements that form a part figure is increased or decreased, it is determined that because the final part figure has been changed, it is dangerous to keep using the previously set cutting area, the cutting area in an affected process is initialized (the end and start points of the cutting area are set with the start and end points of the part figure, respectively), thus prompting the operator to reset up the correct cutting area. The number of elements that form a part figure may be increased or decreased in the following two cases: An element of the part figure is added or deleted, resulting in a change to the total number of elements of the part figure. In machining definition, a specified cutting area is compensated by a cutting edge angle check or an overhang check. (In this case, the number of elements of the part figure increases because the part figure is divided internally. This is intended to clearly indicate the start and end points of the cutting area when another tool is used on a portion that is left after compensation.) The following description uses case as an example. In outer surface finishing, setting the start and end points of a cutting area at positions A and B shown in Fig. 2.5 (o) defines the portion indicated by hatching as the cutting area before compensation. Compensation changes the portion indicated by hatching as shown in Fig. 2.5 (p), thus dividing part figure element c at point C (so, the number of elements increases by one). To the contrary, if the cutting area is divided into two as shown in Fig 2.5 (q), no compensation is made on the specified cutting area, thus keeping the number of elements of the part figure unchanged. This way, changing the number of part figure elements by changing the start and end points of the cutting area causes the cutting area used in the subsequent processes to be initialized. In this case, it is necessary to reset up an appropriate cutting area.
Cutting area
Cutting area
Cutting area
Element c Part figure A
C A Part figure A
Part figure
Fig. 2.5 (o)
Fig. 2.5 (p)
Fig. 2.5 (q)
381
B63304EN/02
(14) If there is a portion left uncut when a pocket with a curved bottom is finished using a button tool Dividing the cutting area shown below causes an area on the bottom of the pocket to be lost when the cutting area shown in is created internally if the following conditions are satisfied: D The division point for the cutting area is on the concave surface. D The clearance value is smaller than the nose R. In these cases, set the clearance to a value larger than the nose R of the button tool.
CD2
CD1
DS2 Blank figure
DS1
Part
DE2 DE1
CD*: Cutting direction DS*: Division start point DE*: Division end point
Fig. 2.5 (r)
(15) If a curved tool path is created in end facing for linear elements End facing for linear elements may result in a curved tool path being created if the following conditions are satisfied: D An arrow at the division end point DE crosses the curved portion of the blank figure in the Xaxis direction as shown in Fig. 2.5 (s). D The finishing allowance TZ for the subsequent end facing is larger than the finishing allowance TZ for the previous inner surface machining. In these cases, tilt down the arrow at the division end point DE as shown in Fig. 2.5 (t).
DS
DS
DE
DE
Part Blank figure Fig. 2.5 (s) Fig. 2.5 (t)
382
B63304EN/02
(16) If unnecessary motion is created in roughing because of a depth of cut If the cutting area in roughing contains a unique portion, like portion A in Fig. 2.5 (u), where lengths a and b are not equal and are smaller than the nose R of the tool, unnecessary motion may occur at or near portion A. In this case, divide the cutting area at the portion (A) as shown in Fig. 2.5 (v).
Part
Portion A
a DS Z
Fig. 2.5 (u)
DE1
DE2 Part
DS1
DS2 Z
Fig. 2.5 (v)
383
B63304EN/02
(17) If the tool moves as if it almost rubbed the wall of the workpiece in semifinishing The tool may move along the wall of the workpiece while being separated the finishing allowance away from the wall in portion in semifinishing in a case shown in Fig. 2.5 (w). (No interference occurs.) In this case, if you want to retract the tool obliquely upward and then move it horizontally, define a minute dummy linear element as shown in Fig. 2.5 (x), and divide the area on the wall rather than at the corner.
Tool path Blank figure Part DS
Here is a minute linear element (dummy element).
DS X Z DE DE
Fig. 2.5 (w)
Fig. 2.5 (x)
(18) If a portion to be left uncut is larger than the specified finishing allowance in end facing A portion to be left uncut may become larger than the specified finishing allowance in end facing if the following conditions are satisfied: Outer surface element is tapered, and there is a minute chamfer between and end face element . (Fig. 2.5 (y)) Outer surface roughing is performed before end surface roughing. The cutting area is divided as shown in Fig. 2. In this case, cause the DS to face obliquely upward as shown in Fig. 2.5 (z).
Z DE DS Blank figure Fig. 2.5 (y) Part X DE DS
Blank figure
Part
Fig. 2.5 (z)
384
B63304EN/02
(19) If roughing is carried out without cutting into a concave portion The cutting area is defined as an entire range where a specified tool can move safely after the cutting edge angle of the tool is checked as shown in Fig. 2.5 (aa).
X Pocket Part figure
Blank figure
Cutting area Z Fig. 2.5 (aa)
Tool
In this case, use either of the following methods if you want to leave the pocket uncut. Specify angle A made by cutting edge protection angle AP and the minor cutting edge (Fig. 2.5 (ab)).
Minor cutting edge Cutting direction A Main cutting edge A Tool
Fig. 2.5 (ab)
Set up system parameter No. 101 = 0 so that pocketing is disabled. Use this method if the pocket is not to be cut in roughing. Even if this method is used, the pocket can be roughed by specifying the division point for the cutting area as shown in Fig. 2.5 (ac).
X Cutting area Part figure
Blank figure Z Fig. 2.5 (ac)
385
B63304EN/02
(20) If NC data for end face roughing is not output normally If the cutting area for end face machining is divided as shown in Fig. 2.5 (ad), a cutting area that temporarily has two closed areas (portions A and B) is created internally as shown in Fig. 2.5 (ae) when compensation related to the finishing allowance or nose R is performed. Then, portion B is removed, and only portion A is left as the cutting area. As a result, NC data that cuts only portion A is output. In this case, change the dividing direction as shown in Fig. 2.5 (af). Changing the dividing direction creates an appropriate cutting area rather than the one shown in Fig. 2.5 (ae).
Blank figure Part Portion A
Portion B
Fig. 2.5 (ad)
Fig. 2.5 (ae)
Fig. 2.5 (af)
386
B63304EN/02
(21) If the tool escapes to the position blank figure inner surface + clearance in inner surface roughing If the cutting end point (point C in Fig. 2.5 (ag)) is on the blank figure, the specification states that the tool is to escape to the position blank figure inner surface + clearance in the Xaxis direction. This is intended to keep the tool from interfering with the workpiece. In other words, the tool is moved in the xaxis direction because it is determined that if the cutting end point is on the blank figure, the tool interferes with the blank figure when it escapes in the Zaxis direction. Even if the cutting end point is on the blank figure, moving the tool in the Zaxis direction will output a tool path where the tool crosses the blank figure in the case shown in Fig. 2.5 (ah).
X Part figure
Tool path Point A Blank figure Z
Fig. 2.5 (ag)
Part figure
X Tool path
Point A Blank figure Z
Fig. 2.5 (ah)
387
B63304EN/02
(22) If the tool cuts into a neck If finishing is performed for portions A and B on a neck of a part figure shown in Fig. 2.5 (ai) in the ( and ( directions, respectively, an area for portion B is specified to be cut using the same tool as for portion A after an area for portion A is specified. In this case, NC data may direct the tool to cut into the end surface if rather than in Fig. 2 is selected as the area end point for portion B.
Portion B Portion A
Fig. 2.5 (ai)
Finishing allowance
Fig. 2.5 (aj)
If system parameter No. 101 = 1 (pocket and overhang machining methods), selecting in Fig. 2.5 (aj) as the area end point defines the basic cutting area as shown in Fig. 2.5 (ak) because the portion below the overhang is not cut. Applying offset processing to this area causes the tool to cut in as shown in Fig. 2.5 (al).
Cutting area The figure is inverted at this portion. Offset cutting area
Dividing direction
Fig. 2.5 (ak)
Fig. 2.5 (al)
In this case, take either of the following measures: Specify in Fig. 2 as the area end point for the end face. Set up system parameter No. 101 = 2 to cut the overhang.
388
B63304EN/02
2.6
SURPLUS THICKNESS 2.6.1
Finish Allowance and Surplus Thickness
(Example)
Dont give any finish allowance (in rough cutting and medium finish cutting) larger than or equivalent to the surplus thickness, otherwise the blank figure may be deformed to unfavorably affect the subsequent machining.
If the surplus thickness is as illustrated in the left figure, for example, the following finish allowance cannot be given. Finish allowance in X direction 5 mm Finish allowance in Z direction 5 mm
2.6.2
Surplus Thickness and Blank
Dont give such a surplus thickness as may exceed a blank dimension in a special blank. It is recommended to give a relatively large blank dimension so that the surplus thickness does not exceed the blank figure, even if it is added to the machining figure.
389
B63304EN/02
2.6.3
Closed Part
If a special blank with a constant surplus thickness is used, a closed part figure can also be defined. The constant surplus thickness cannot be defined for 5700 series and version 1 of 5710 series of 16T CAP II.
2.6.4
Definition of Optional Blank Figure
If there is problem as shown in item 2.6.2, define the blank figure as mentioned in item 3.2.4 (CHAPTER IV).
390
B63304EN/02
2.7
GROOVING 2.7.1
Tool Path
Grooving is made by the following three steps. D Apply the tool to the center of the groove. D Drive the tool in such a manner as the groove is cut by the reference side cutting edge of the tool. D Drive the tool in the opposite direction.
If the groove width is equal to the tool width, the tool is applied to the groove center once.
391
B63304EN/02
2.7.2
Interference Check
Refer to item 1.11.3.
2.7.3
Blank Figure in Grooving Area
If the blank figure at the entrance of the groove is not parallel to the X axis or Z axis in case of grooving, give care to the following note.
WARNING In the case of grooving tool, interruption is checked at virtual tool position by the designated nose R. If a bad tool path is output by this process, designate the other side of nose R at virtual tool position.
2.7.4
Groove Bottom Figure
The groove bottom must be flat.
The flat portion must be equal to or larger than the flat portion of the tool nose.
392
B63304EN/02
2.7.5
Concaved Parts in Groove
If a groove contains two or more concaved portions, it cannot be machined by one process only. However, it can be machined by dividing it into two or more portions.
Cannot be grooved.
Grooving is possible when the groove is divided into A and B portions.
(Special example) AS a special case, grooving becomes impossible when two or more concaved parts exist in a groove, depending upon the dividing directions of the groove, even if the groove figure is normal.
If
and are specified as the dividing
If
is specified as the dividing direction,
directions as illustrated in the above figure, threeconcavedparts (1), (2), (3) are produced in the grooving area, causing the grooving to be impossible.
only one concaved part exists, and grooving is possible without any trouble.
393
B63304EN/02
2.8
DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN DRILLING
The depth of cut is determined in the way that the drill shoulder is positioned at the place where the drill is driven by depth D from the intersection of the blank figure profile at that time (Blank figure changes as machining advances) and the tool diameter employed.
No intrusion to part is checked. Judge it, while monitoring the CRT screen.
394
B63304EN/02
2.9
THREADING 2.9.1
Threading Direction
A tool is driven along an angle to which the minor cutting edge faces in threading.
If you desire to determine the threading direction, irrespective of the tool figures, you have only to define it to allow the minor cutting edge to face the threading direction when defining the tool.
Tool nose angle 30
When defining the virtual tool figure, dont define it in such a way as the minor cutting edge bites into the major cutting edge side. The allowable threading is limited up to the direction parallel to the X axis.
Minor cutting edge
395
B63304EN/02
2.9.2
Threading Depth
D1: Di: Dk: D:
First threading depth (Absolute quantity: Material file) ith threading depth (Absolute quantity) Threading depth once before the last Last threading depth (Incremental quantity: system parameter)
Since Dk is not calculated by the above equation, it is possible that Dk becomes an increment smaller than D.
2.9.3
Depth of Screw Thread
The thread depth is calculated using the formula: Pitch * constant 0.6495 (system parameter No. 0125 = variable). As a result, the root diameter is determined. Both external and internal threads are calculated using the same method. For internal threads, therefore, obtain their thread depth from the thread pitch and constant 0.6495 to determine the internal thread to be entered as a figure element. When asking of screw thread depth, automatically calculated contents which is displayed on CRT can be changed.
(Example) M20, P: Pitch Minor diameter of internal thread is calculated by the following equation. Inner dia. = 20 (P x 0.6495)
CAUTION Even in the case when the depth of screw thread is input from keys (not automatically calculated value), recalculation is executed by inputting multiplier or pitch. In this case, the required depth of screw thread must be input from keys.
396
B63304EN/02
2.10
CUTTING OVERHUNG PORTION
The overhung section can be cut as follows, using system parameter No.0101. System parameter No.0101 = 0: No pocketing is carried out. 1: Pocketing is carried out. 2: The bottom of overhung portion is machined.
D For system parameter No.0101 = 0 or 1
D For system parameter No.0101 = 2
However, when system parameter No.0101 = 2, if the following machining is defined, using a tool with a larger tool nose radius than the surplus thickness, the portion remaining uncut occurs. First cut the outer diameter portion. . . . . . . . . (1)
397
B63304EN/02
Cut the wall portion, using the same tool. . . . . . . . (2)
The tool path is as follows, and the portion remaining uncut occurs.
398
B63304EN/02
2.11
ERROR WHEN NC DATA IS PREPARED
When the machining is defined (Menu No.4) or NC data is prepared (Menu No.5), the following error message may be displayed: I CANNOT RUN ANY FARTHER. CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL OR CUTTING AREA. In the following cases, this error may be produced. (1) When roughing, semifinishing and finishing: 1) When the designation of dividing direction is not correct in the designation of machining area: Example)
2) When the dividing direction such that the area to be cut is not present as a result in the designation of machining area is designated: Example 1) When the dividing direction was designated, the start and end points were set to the same position and the same direction was designated.
Example 2) The already finished place was designated as a cutting area.
399
B63304EN/02
Example) When roughing or semifinishing, a larger machining allowance than the surplus thickness was designated.
(2) When thread cutting 1) When the designated threaded position cannot be cut, using the specified tool.
When an attempt is made to machine the threaded portion as illustrated, using tool 2, an error is produced. 2) When THREADING was designated in defining the machining although T is not specified in the parts figure. (3) When necking 1) When the specified tool nose is not parallel to the groove bottom: Example)
2) When NECKING was designated in defining the machining although N was not designated in the parts figure: (4) Grooving 1) When the groove bottom is not flat. 2) When the tool width is larger than the groove width. (5) When bar feeding 1) When there is inconsistency in setting the system parameter for bar feed.
400
B63304EN/02
(6) When cutting off 1) When the nose of tool used is not parallel to X axis.
(7) Others 1) When the right and left positions are confused for the inquiry (PE=_) of parts position when the figure is defined. 2) When an attempt is made to prepare NC data when the machining definition is not completed. Example) The tool data and machining condition data have undefined data. Or no machining start position is fixed.
401
B63304EN/02
2.12
OTHER PRECAUTIONS 2.12.1
Chucking Position
In the Symbolic FAPT, the left side of a blank is chucked as a precondition.
However, if you set Z axis to execute the counter rotational output by machine tool file parameters No.1001, NC data output only can be executed with Z axis (minus).
2.12.2
Cutting Start Position and Others
WARNING Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data, thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
(1) Function to skip XS and ZS questions when the turret turning position is fixed (inputtable), the cutting start position is inputtable, and also tool lengths XS, ZS are unknown. System parameter
#7 0104 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 0 : Non skip 1 : Skip NC data to return to the start point at return relief is prepared by designating 1. When 1 is specified; 1) The start point cannot be kept undefined. 2) The turret turning position is determined XS, ZS, and start point, if it is undefined. If both XS and ZS are also undefined, the turret turning position is obtained, assuming that XS and ZS are zero.
402
B63304EN/02
(2) Operation required when parameter No.0104 is 0. (a) If the turret turning position was changed, the cutting start position of the entire process is recalculated from the previous turret turning position and tool length (XS, ZS). When process definition or NC data preparation is selected, recalculation is executed actually. (b) Return either Z axis or X axis only to the turret turning position. (Example) When Z axis only is returned to the turret turning position D Keep the X axis undefined at the turret turning position. D Keep the X axis undefined at the cutting start position in the second and higher process. (Define the X axis in the first process.) Return the Z axis only to the turret turning position. If you desire to return the X axis only, read Z as X, while read X as Z in the above example. WARNING If the machine home position is specified when the X axis start position in the first process is undefined, the machine home position value is used as the first cutting start X axis value; provided that the undefinition of the machine home position causes an error.
NOTE The start point cannot be undefined, if the software key CORRECTION & OUTPUT of menu No.4 PROCESS DEFINITION is selected.
2.12.3
Method of Stopping the Tool on Z Axis
If the division direction (direction which intersects the Z axis) at the bottom end of the end face is specified downward when the parts figure is perforated, the tool path is presently prepared up to the position exceeding the Z axis by a clearance (CX).
403
B63304EN/02
2.12.4
Tool Path in Finish Cutting and Semifinish Cutting
The tool path has been modified to be output to finish all specified range including already finished parts in finish cutting and semifinish cutting, if there is no interference with tool path. But can not specify the range that all of them already finished.
2.12.5
Cautions for Using the 2path Lathe Mode
A family program created in the 1path lathe mode cannot be read for use in the 2path lathe mode. WARNING If an attempt is made to read and use, in the 2path lathe mode, a family program created in the 1path lathe mode, NC data is not created correctly. If incorrect NC data is used in machining, the tool may interfere with the workpiece or machine or behave unnaturally, possibly leading to tool or machine breakage, or injury.
404
VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
407
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
1.1
KIND OF MACHINING
NC tape for the following machinings can be prepared by Caxis FAPT function. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) End face drilling Side drilling End face grooving (Caxis rotation direction) End surface grooving (X direction) Side grooving (Circumference direction) Side grooving (Longitudinal direction) Face milling Cylindrical groove
Three kinds of drilling can be processed. (a) Center drilling, (b) drilling, (c) tapping
408
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1.2
SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING
After data of the turning section of a part figure input is completed, the turning figure input up to now reappears on the CRT screen, and displays the message press the soft key.
When you press the soft key CAXIS MENU on this screen, a screen for Caxis machining appears if the system is equipped with the Caxis FAPT option. When you press soft key NEXT PAGE, a screen for menu 3 (HOME POSITION & INDEX POSITION) appears.
409
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
1.3
DESIGNATION OF CAXIS FIGURE DATA
Menu screen for Caxis Machining
Input Type No. (1 to 8) of the machined figure when Figure Type = is questioned. Input the number: the graphic data input screen is selected. NOTE For the spindle position method (MTF 1306 = 1), the 2. FACE GROOVE 1, 6. SIDE GROOVE 2, 7. FACE MILLING and 8. SIDE MILLING help diagram is not displayed. ESCAPE: Returns the mode to the program menu screen. PART FIGURE: Displays the part figure definition screen for turning. ALL DELETE: Deletes all data related to C axis figure already defined. NEW: Press this key when cancelling the data as to C axis figure already defined and defining C axis figure newly. CHECK ALL: Draws the figure in accordance with the defined data. CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward. CURSOR NEXT PAGE: Selects the data setting screen as the place which the cursor points to. Adjust the cursor to the place of the undefined number and press this soft key. The display will return to the program menu screen.
1.3.1
Inserting or Deleting Caxis Figure Data
(1) When inserting: No. FIGURE TYPE 01 FACE HOLE 02 SIDE HOLE 03 SIDE GROOVE 1 04 Normally, a new figure type is registered in No.04. 1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the point to be modified.
410
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2) Input the figure to be inserted, using Menu No. (1 to 8). (For example, adjust the cursor to 03 and key in 2 INPUT.) As a result, the figure type is inserted as follows. No. FIGURE TYPE 01 FACE HOLE 02 SIDE HOLE 03 FACE GROOVE Inserted 04 SIDE GROOVE 1 05 (2) When deleting 1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR and select the figure to be deleted. 2) Press DEL INPUT.
1.3.2
Details of Caxis Figure Data
411
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
The graphic data input screen is as shown below except Face Milling and Side Milling.
ESCAPE:
Returns the display to the program menu screen. (The input data becomes valid.) BACK PAGE: Returns the display to C axis machining menu screen. When this key is depressed in the cursor of data setting, the already input data becomes invalid. (It becomes valid when CHECK is pressed, however.) CHECK ALL: Draws the figure according to the input data. (All Caxisrelated figures having the figure numbers that are lower than the one currently being defined are drawn.) CHECK: Draws the figure according to the input data. (Only patterns defined here are drawn.) CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward. CURSOR : NEXT PAGE: C axis machining menu screen proceeds. (1) Insert screen for end face hole machining
POSITION (XAXIS) . DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLE DIAMETER . . . CENTER DRILL . . . . .
DX = Hole position (X coordinate value) DT = Depth of a hole WT = Diameter of a hole CG = 1 to perform the center drilling; 0 not to perform the center drilling.
412
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
THROUGH HOLE . . . . TH = 1 for through hole; 0 for hole with bottom PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Tapping pitch Left undefined if tapping is not done. INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural holes are drilled, set interval of hole positions to be fixed or variable. (0:FIXED 1:VARIABLE) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of holes (in case of fixed interval, up to 100 holes can be specified.) For 5700 series of 16T CAP II, up to 16 holes can be specified along fixed interval. INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of hole (Angle. Angle of the first hole in case of plural holes) ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Position of the 2nd hole (in case of variable interval) A3 = Position of the 3rd hole (in case of variable interval) A4 = Position of the 4th hole (in case of variable interval) A5 = Position of the 5th hole (in case of variable interval) FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last hole when plural holes are drilled. If uneven spacing is specified, holes are made in the following sequence: A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 AE As can be seen from this, up to six positions can be specified for unevenly spaced holes. NOTE Specify the angle with an absolute value. Incremental value cannot be specified. Example) In case of A1 = 30, AE = 210, AB = 0 (fixed interval) and AC = 4, 4 holes are specified at 30 degrees, 90 degrees, 150 degrees and 210 degrees.
413
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(2) End surface grooving (Caxis rotation direction) input screen
POSITION (XAXIS) . DX = Groove value)
position
(X
coordinate
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove GROOVING WIDTH . . WT = Diameter of a groove GROOVING ANGLE . . AG = Angle of a groove INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled, set interval of groove position to be fixed or variable. (0: FIXED 1: VARIABLE) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves (in case of fixed interval, up to 100 holes can be specified.) Fro 5700 series of 16T CAP II, up to 16 holes can be specified along fixed interval. INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Cutting start angle. Angle of the first groove in case of plural grooves) ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Cutting start angle of the 2nd groove (in case of variable interval) A3 = Cutting start angle of the 3rd groove (in case of variable interval) A4 = Cutting start angle of the 4th groove (in case of variable interval) A5 = Cutting start angle of the 5th groove (in case of variable interval) FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Cutting start angle of the last groove when plural grooves are drilled. If more than one groove is specified, all grooves will have the same length (value specified at AG).
414
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTE If VARIABLE is selected in response to the INTERVAL prompt, it is necessary to specify that the angles A1 to AE rotate in the same direction. If this requirement is not satisfied, a Necessary data missing error is detected. (3) End surface grooving (X direction) input screen
GROOVING LENGTH . . . XG = length of the groove The other items are the same as those for end surface grooving (Caxis rotation direction). (4) Insert screen for side hole machining
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . . LZ = Hole position (Z coordinate value) Other questions are the same as for the end face hole.
415
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(5) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . . LZ = Position of groove (Z coordinate value) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove GROOVING WIDTH . . . . WT = Diameter of a groove GROOVING LENGTH . . ZG = Length of a groove INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled, set interval of grooves to be fixed or variable. (0: FIXED 1: VARIABLE) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves (in case of fixed interval, up to 100 holes can be specified.) INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Angle. Angle of the first groove in case of plural grooves) ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Angle of the 2nd groove (in case of variable interval) A3 = Angle of the 3rd groove (in case of variable interval) A4 = Angle of the 4th groove (in case of variable interval) A5 = Angle of the 5th groove (in case of variable interval) FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last groove when plural grooves are drilled.
416
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(6) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . . LZ = Position of groove (Z coordinate value) Other question are the same as for the end face grooving. (7) Face Milling XC face view is drawn, and the element symbol request screen is selected. As in the conventional figure input, here, define a figure, using a symbolic keys. The element symbols which can be entered include: , , , , , , , , , , R, C For the value of C in XC face view, input it in length (radius designation), not in angle. Input X value in diameter designation. Example) For the face milling figure in Fig.1, input as follows. Assume that point A is the starting point:
Z=80 X0=50 C0=25 CP=1 C=25 R R=5 DX=50 C=25 R R=5 DX=50
417
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
CP request is displayed only for the 1st element. The PE request asks which side should be cut for the element moving direction. For 0, the right side is cut, and for 1, the left side is cut, and for 2, the part on the line is cut.
(a) Defining figures 1) When defining notching figures, after the first figure has been defined (definition of a single stroke figure), the following prompt will be displayed: ES = In response, select either INPUT or the NEXT PAGE software key. The following question will appear on the screen: DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES 0: NO) When there is only one figure defined as a single stoke figure, press the 0 (no) key; the C axis menu will reappear on the screen. For two or more single stroke figures, press the 1 (yes) key; the prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be displayed. Normally, the prompt for the starting point is displayed after the element symbol has been entered, but in this case the starting point is displayed beforehand. However, when the end point for the last element has not been confirmed, even if
INPUT
key or the [NEXT PAGE] software key is
selected in response ES = , an error will result; the THE LAST FIGURE ELEMENT HAS NOT END POINT error message will appear and the next screen will not be displayed. 2) Starting points for figures should be designated as absolute values. Starting points for the second and subsequent figures cannot be designated as incremental values that follow the final coordinate of the previous figure. 3) When defining multiple figures, a period (.) will be displayed between figures.
418
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4) Deleting and inserting figure elements: (i) Deleting elements Move the cursor to the element to be deleted and select the ELEMENT DELETE software key. However, it is not possible to delete the periods between figures. Any attempt to do this will result in a THIS IS A NULL AND VOID KEY NOW message. (ii)Inserting elements Inserting single elements is the same as the normal operation to define part figures. When inserting another figure between multiple figures that have already been defined, the procedure is as follows: 1 Move the cursor to the period between the figures. 2 Select the [INSERT FIGURE] software key. 3 The prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be displayed; enter the proper data. Subsequent operation are the same. (b) Display of element symbols 1) Element symbols
The group of elements that can drawn as a single stroke figure will be displayed as a single figure, with periods marking the boundaries between the figures. It is not possible to enter or delete these periods directly from the keyboard. 2) The starting point of the first element for the first figure will be the starting point for machining during the NC text creation, so this should be taken into account when defining part figures. Workpieces will be machined in the order in which the figures were defined. 3) When defining the second and subsequent figures, first set the data for the starting point and then press the key for the element symbol. This is the only process that is different from defining the first figure (when defining the first figure, the element symbol is entered first and then the prompt for the starting point data will appear).
419
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
4) List mode displays
(c) Notes NOTE When defining multiple single stroke figure, the following limitations are applicable: (i) It is not possible to change element directions (CP) for single figures. (ii) Figures with level differences cannot be defined. (per one definition) (iii) It is not possible to program front and rear simultaneously. Due to the above, from among the prompts for the starting point element for the second and subsequent figures, the following prompts are not mode: (i) Element direction (CP) (ii) Z axis value for starting point (d) Creating NC text 1) NC text is created for machining figures (defined in menu 2) in the order in which they were defined. 2) When machining of one figure has been completed, the tool will move away before heading toward the starting point for the next figure (at fast feed speed). The direction of this initial movement is as follows: (i) When cutting elements to the left or right, the tool moves in the X axis direction. (ii)When cutting elements, the tool moves in the Z axis direction.
420
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(8) Side milling The expansion diagram of the part face is drawn and the element symbol question screen appears. Define the figure using the symbolic key in the same way as milling figure input. The element symbols that can be input are as follows: , , , , , , , , , , R, C The circular expansion diagram horizontal axis is the length of the part figure at Z. The vertical axis is the length of the circle in the cylindrical diametervalue at C. The value of C is input in degrees (deg). The expansion diagram vertical horizontal ratio depends on the cylindrical diameter value. In the case of a new definition the expansion diagram vertical horizontal ratio initialvalue is 1 to 1 until the numerical value is set in the cylindrical diameter question. In correction mode, if the cylindrical diameter is changed the message EXECUTING flashes briefly while the ratio of the expansion diagram is being changed.
An example of a cylindrical figure
Fig. 1.3.2 (a)
421
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Expansion diagram)
Fig. 1.3.2 (b)
The Figure 2 cylindrical figure is input as follows. If point A is made the start point: Number 1 element start point CD = 0. Z = 15. Cylindrical diameter DX = 30. (Groove bottom diameter value that executes inter polation) End point C = 120. Number 2 element R Radius R = 10. Number 3 element End point Z = 50. C = 240. Number 4 element R Radius R = 10. Number 5 element End point C = 480. (120 + 360) Number 6 element R Radius R = 10. Number 7 element End point Z = 15. C = 600. (240 + 360 Number 8 element R Radius R = 10. Number 9 element End point C = 720. (360 + 360)
422
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Program the center of the groove. programmed the element.
When machining, cut having
NOTE 1 Cylindrical expansion diagram type differs according to the round cutting figure drawing format. a) When the drawing format is 1 or 3.
Expansion diagram
423
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
b) When the drawing format is 2 or 4.
Expansion diagram
NOTE 2 Only one cylindrical groove figure, which is drawn as a single stroke figure, can be defined; two or more cylindrical groove figures cannot be defined. However, specifying a C value of 360 or more (degrees) enables a figure with one or more turns to be defined. 3 The following are not permitted for cylindrical groove figure definition: (1)Incremental input of the C value (2)Specification of TL (tangent to the last figure) or TN (tangent to the next figure) (3)Specification of the radius value for a circular element (4)Definition in list mode
424
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1.4
MILLING IN MULTIPLE PLANES
Milling operations performed in different machining planes can be programmed. In the following figure, milling is performed in different machining planes.
(1) Part figure definition 1) Up to 10 different milling figures can be defined. 2) The Z plane (place in which milling is performed) can be set for each milling figure. (2) Machining definition 1) For a milling process, a screen for specifying a desired figure to be milled is provided (cutting area screen). 2) On the cutting area screen, a figure to be milled is selected using the cursor. 3) In a milling process, multiple figures can be milled successively with the same tool.
425
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
1.5
CAXIS MACHINING WITH A MACHINING PLANE SPECIFIED
As shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), a program which used Caxis machining to machine (cut, drill, etc.) the same area of the workpiece twice can be created.
Fig. 1.5 (a)
(1) System parameter To execute this function, the system references the following parameter:
System parameter
309 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0
0: Does not set any machining plane value. 1: Sets a machining plane value. 0: Performs feed operation in the safety mode (mode 1). 1: Performs feed operation in the efficiency mode (mode 2).
(2) Part figure definition 1) When a Caxis machining figure is entered, the system prompts the operator to input the Z or X plane to be machined. In the example shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), plane Z = a is entered as the machining plane. 2) If no data is input in response to the prompt (Z = undefined), as with the conventional system, a turning part figure is assumed as the machining plane, and the Caxis machining figure is created. In Fig. 1.5 (a), the machining plane is Z = b. 3) The prompt for the machining plane can be skipped by parameter setting. If it is skipped, the turning part figure is used as the machining plane.
426
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Figure definition screen (example: holes in Caxis end surface)
(3) Machining definition 1) As with the conventional system, a figure to be machined is specified using the cursor on the cutting area screen. 2) When determining the process sequence, care must be taken. In the example shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), milling must be performed before drilling. Suppose that the feed operation is performed in mode 2 (see (4) below). In this case, if drilling is specified before milling, the resultant NC data causes the tool to move in rapid traverse and strike against the workpiece. (4) NC data creation One of the following two feed modes can be selected by parameter setting: 1) In mode 1, cutting feed is performed from the blank and surface. 2) In mode 2, the tool moves in rapid traverse until it reaches the machining plane specified in part figure definition, then cutting feed is performed. Mode 2 is valid in the following processes: a) Caxis center drilling b) Caxis drilling c) Caxis tapping d) Caxis grooving
Mode 1 (safety mode)
Mode 2 (efficiency mode)
427
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(5) Warnings WARNING 1 Be careful not to make the setting shown in Fig.1.5(b), where a Caxis machining figure is on a plane which is not machined. The system does not regard such setting as being illegal. If feed mode 2 is selected, the tool may strike against the workpiece when holes b, c, and d are cut.
Area cut by milling a
Fig. 1.5 (b)
2 If the part figure definitions contain a Caxis part figure for which a machining plane is entered, the process sequence of machining definition must be determined carefully. In Fig. 1.5 (a), for example, drilling must be specified after milling. Even if drilling is programmed before milling, the system does not regard this sequence as being illegal. 3 Whenever a machining method (2, 3) including pecking is selected, and feed mode 1 is used for a Caxis drilling process, pecking starts from the approach point, regardless of the value set for the machining plane.
428
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4)
MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4)
429
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
2.1
SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING DEFINITION 2.1.1
Kind of Caxis Machining Specification
In menu 4 Machining Definition, press soft key MILLING MACHINING.
When MILLING MACHINING button is pressed, the soft key for selecting the kind of Caxis machining is displayed. NOTE For the spindle positioning method (MTF 1306 = 1), the FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software keys are not displayed.
CAXIS C.DRIL . . . drilling. CAXIS DRILL . . . . CAXIS TAP. . . . . . . CAXIS GROOV. . . CAXIS F.MILL . . . CAXIS S.MILL . . . SUB CYCLE . . . . . .
Press this key to perform Caxis center Press this key to perform Caxis drilling. Press this key to perform Caxis tapping. Press this key to perform Caxis grooving. Press this key to perform face milling. Press this key to perform side milling. Press this key to perform a sub cycle.
2.1.2
Tool Data for Caxis Machining
WARNING After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be used is displayed.
430
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . TOOL SELECT NO. . . TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . .
TL = TN = TM = ID =
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
NOTE 1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than 1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in No. MTF 1050. 2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been registered in tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool ID number (ID) not registered in tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number having a tool type not compatible with the present process is input, a message The tool type of this ID is not compatible with the present process. is displayed. The registered tool ID number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as DEL INPUT.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input. In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID number (ID) is input. Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are displayed only; they cannot be changed. (Center Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . .
431
TP; Center drill (M) MT; DT = DS = LT = AT =
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . (Tap) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (End mill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP; Drill (M) MT; DT = LT = AT = TP; Tap (M) MT; DT = LT = LE = PT = TP; End mill (M) MT; DT = DS = LT = NT =
NOTE 3 The setting of tool figure data can be disabled, and the data can be displayed only. To do this, change the following parameter setting:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Specifies whether tool figure data can be set in m chining definition. = 0: Tool figure data cannot be set. (Only the display is enabled.) = 1: Tool figure data can be set.
Prompts on data of setting (Common to all tool types) SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining, 1: End machining) SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = ZS = ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards) HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note 4) NOTE 4 The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animation drawing function is available. 5 When a tool registered in the tool data is used, the set data is registered as tooling information when the user proceeds to the next screen by pressing the NEXT PAGE soft key.
432
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
WARNING When NC data are created, the interference check or offset calculation is performed for the tool data according to the tool figure. If tool data is not input correctly, correct NC data cannot be output.
2.1.3
Machining Start Position
When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start position. MACHINING START POSITION X coordinate values . . . . . DXO = Z coordinate values . . . . . . ZO =
2.1.4
Cutting Conditions
WARNING The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. (1) Center drilling DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . CLEARANCE . . . . . . . RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEED RATE . . . . . . . . .
D= C1 = N= FT =
Depth of cut (mm or inch) Clearance (mm or inch) Tool rotation speed (rpm) Feed amount per tool rotation (mm/rev)
433
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(2) Drilling TYPE 1 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch) DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =Specifies whether to perform dwell at the bottom of the hole. (0:Does not performs dwell, 1: Performs dwell) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool rotation (mm/rev)
TYPE 2 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = C2 = RETURN AMOUNT . . U = DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
Clearance 1 (mm or inch) Clearance 2 (mm or inch) Return amount (mm or inch) Depth of cut (mm or inch) Tool rotation speed (rpm) Feed amount per tool rotation (mm/rev)
434
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
TYPE 3 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = C2 = C3 = DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
Clearance 1 (mm or inch) Clearance 2 (mm or inch) Clearance 3 (mm or inch) Depth of cut (mm or inch) Tool rotation speed (rpm) Feed amount per tool rotation (mm/rev)
TYPE 4 (G85/G89 boring cycle) CLEARANCE . . . . . C1 = J The initial value is set to the
value of system parameter No. 332 (clearance 1 in drilling 1).
C2 = J The initial value is set to the

value of system parameter No. 333 (clearance 2 in drilling 2).
DWELL ON/OFF . . DW = J When dwell is set to on, the dwell time set in system parameter No. 320 is output during NC data preparation. RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = J V*1000/DT*PAI (V = cutting speed value set in the material data, DT = tool diameter value set in the tool data) FEED RATE . . . . . . FT = J The initial value is set to the value of feed amount/FT in the material data.
435
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
C1
C2
In 16/18TC, 16i/18i/21iTA, and 16i/18i/21iTB, the return speed in is twice the cutting speed in . In 15TFB and 15TTFB, the return speed in is the same as the cutting speed in . Reverse spindle rotation is not performed at the bottom of the hole. Note) The machining time is calculated, assuming that the return speed in is twice the cutting speed in .
(3) Tapping TYPE . . . . . . . . TP = Type of tapping (1: Tapping cycle, 2: Rigid tapping cycle) CLEARANCE . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
436
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(4) Grooving CLEARANCE . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . FR = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool radial direction (mm/rev) FT = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool axial direction (mm/rev)
Side (in the Z direction) Side (in the C direction)
Caxis rotation
End surface
Caxis rotation
NOTE For machining or , FR is subjected to unit conversion to deg/min, then output to the NC data.
437
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(5) Face milling Two types of face milling can be performed: face milling with infeed machining and face milling without infeed machining. When CAXIS F. MILL is selected on the machining type screen, the cutting condition screen appears with the prompt DRIVE...DR = (1: on 0: off) displayed. To perform infeed machining, set 1 for DR. For details of infeed machining, see Chapter 7, INFEED MACHINING BY CAXIS NOTCHING. TYPE 1: ROUGH CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TS = Finish allowance at roughing (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool diameter direction (mm/rev) FT = Feed amount per blade in the tool axis direction (mm/rev) APPROACH TYPE . . . . . SM = Approach type (1 or 4) (Note 1) ESCAPE TYPE . . . . . . . . EM = Escape type (1 or 4) (Note 1) TYPE 2: FINISH CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool diameter direction (mm/rev) FT = Feed amount per blade in the tool axis direction (mm/rev) APPROACH TYPE . . . . . SM = Approach type (1 or 4) (Note 1) ESCAPE TYPE . . . . . . . . EM = Escape type (1 or 4) (Note 1) TYPE 3: ROUGH D > FINISH CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch) FINISH. ALLOWANCE . . TS = Finish allowance at roughing (mm or inch) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool diameter direction (mm/rev) FT = Feed amount per blade in the tool axis direction (mm/rev) APPROACH TYPE . . . . . SM = Approach type (1 or 4) (Note 1) ESCAPE TYPE . . . . . . . . EM = Escape type (1 or 4) (Note 1) For face milling types 1 and 3, roughing is performed around a defined part figure with a clearance for the finish allowance.
438
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
CAUTION Whether to perform contour milling on an outer or inner surface depends on the specified cutting position (CP) as viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements for the part figure advance. Outer surface contour milling: Lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements advance Inner surface contour millimg: Righthand side as viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements advance When cutting is performed on the element line, differentiating between outer surface contour milling and inner surface contour milling is unnecessary.
NOTE Approach/escape type The approach type and escape type for milling can be selected from the following four patterns: 1) Direct approach (escape) 2) Tangent approach (escape) 3) Normal approach (escape) 4) Circular approach (escape) When cutting is performed on an element, the system does not prompt the user to enter the approach and escape types. Selection of approach/escape type is not valid for 5700 series of 16T CAP II.
439
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
1) Direct approach (escape) SM = 1 (EM = 1) Cutting is started by moving the tool from the approach point directly to the machining start position. 2) Tangent approach (escape) SM = 2 (EM = 2) The following prompt is returned:
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line (mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the tool moves (CP = 0) 3) Normal approach (escape) SM = 3 (EM = 3) The following prompt is returned:
LENGTH . . . . . . DN = Distance along the normal line (mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/righthand side viewed in the direction in which the tool moves (CP = 0) 4) Circular approach (escape) SM = 4 (EM = 4) The following prompt is returned:
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line (mm or inch) DN = Distance along the normal line (mm or inch)
440
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Offset in FAPT/lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the tool moves (CP = 1) [Additional information] 1) An undefined input for the approach method or retraction method is not accepted. An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not accepted, either. 2) If this function is added, approach for notching is always made from the end face (Z plane). The approach point is obtained by adding a clearance to the notching start point. 3) If finishing is executed after roughing, the tool is retracted by an amount equal to the clearance along the Zaxis once roughing has been completed. Then, finishing is started. 4) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF 1305 is set to 1) and if approach or retraction along a tangent line or circle is specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is referenced when the movement is inserted. New system parameter
No. Format Initial value 1.0 371 Real number 0.1 Description Extension for approach or retraction along a tangent line or circle during Caxis notching or Yaxis contouring Unit: mm or inch
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a positive value for this parameter. The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following operation, depending on the approach/retraction method: D Direct approach/retraction The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or retraction method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF 1305 has been set to 1, the CORRECT KEYIN error message is displayed. The attempted input is not accepted. If bit 0 of MTF 1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/retraction has been defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the NC data. The NC data cannot be created.
441
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
D Tangent approach/retraction For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the extension is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
SPA : Cut start point SPA : Cut start point for starting the compensation SP : Cutting start point EP : Cutting end point EPE : Retraction end point EPE : Retraction end point for ending the compensation Continuous line: Programmed tool path Dotted line: Actual tool path D Normal approach/retraction For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the extension amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
442
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
D Approach/retraction along a tangent circle For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the extension is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
443
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
5) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF 1305 is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path. Example: Cutting with normal approach/retraction on the right side of a blank outline
2.1.5
Specifying the Cutting Position for Caxis Machining
After the cutting condition screen, the screen to specify the cutting position appears.
POS = (1: YES 0: NO) Specify the figure to be cut using the cursor. For a figure that can be cut, the cursor blinks. The cursor is moved by pressing CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK or by entering 0. After selecting a desired figure with the cursor, press NEXT PAGE, or enter 1. When a figure to be cut has been specified, the system prompts the user to specify whether to cut another area with the same tool. ANOTHER AREA ? . . . . . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON) If 1 is entered, the cutting condition screen is displayed again. If 0 is entered, the machining type selection screen is displayed again.
444
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2.2
BLIND HOLE AND THROUGH HOLE
(1) The blind hole and through hole settings The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole machining is restricted to through holes. (2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below for different hole machining processes. Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
2 Drilling
Center sink machining
Blind hole tapping
Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2 before the depth of the hole.
445
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6)
For the 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, the animated simulation function has been improved. When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II.
446
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3.1
OUTLINE
Simulation of turning and Caxis machining can be done by selecting menu No.6 CHECKING OF NC DATA. An XZ side view is located at the left of the screen and an XC front view is located at the right. The manner of machining can be checked to see the tool movement and the workpiece being cut on the screen.
447
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
3.2
SPECIFICATION 3.2.1
Caxis FAPT Animated Screen
When the following two conditions are filled, it is possible to display Caxis FAPT screen in place of conventional animated screen. The screen where an XZ side view and an XC front view are located at the left and the right respectively is called the Caxis FAPT animation screen. 1. The option of Caxis FAPT is provided. 2. The part figure data for Caxis machining is defined in Part figure definition screen of the menu 2. When the Caxis FAPT option is not provided or when no Caxis part figure is defined even if the option is provided, the animation drawing of only XZ side view appears. Even when the Caxis FAPT animation drawing conditions are satisfied, conventional animation screen can be selected by the setting on the animation parameter screen. (1) Screen 1) XZ side view The workpiece is painted out for drawing as usual. The machined contour part by the Caxis is not drawn. 2) XC front view The final contour including Caxis machining part is drawn, similarly on the part figure definition screen in the menu 2. The workpiece is also painted out.
Fig. 3.2.1 (a)
448
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(2) Animated simulation a) Turning process 1) XZ side view As usual, the tool and the tool path are drawn and the manner how to the tool cut the painted out workpiece is displayed. 2) XC front view Simulation of turning process is not done in the XC front view. b) Caxis machining 1) XZ side view The tool and the tool path are drawn in the same way as the turning process. However, the machined part is not cut. 2) XC front view The Caxis machining is drawn by the tool moving on the workpiece contour. The outline of the tool is left over in the machined part. (Paint drawing is not done for the workpiece. A front view is not rotated.) The simulation of the machining of part A in Fig. 3.2.1 (a) is shown in the Fig. 3.2.1 (c).
Fig. 3.2.1 (b)
Fig. 3.2.1 (c)
449
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
For vertical lathes, the screens shown in Figs. 3.2.1 (d) and (e) are displayed.
Fig. 3.2.1 (d)
Fig. 3.2.1 (e)
450
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(3) Tool figure for milling machining The following four patterns are prepared as the shape pattern of the rotation tool for milling machining.
1) Drawing of a tool holder is done only in XZ side view. 2) The center drill and the drill tool are drawn by pattern 2 and pattern 4. Tap and end mill tool are drawn by pattern 1 and pattern 3. 3) The painted out length of the tool tip on the XZ side view is LT value set to the tooling data. (In case of tapping tool, the length is LT + LE.)
3.2.2
Parameter Screen for Animated Simulation
The next screen is displayed when the soft key PARAMETER is pushed in Caxis FAPT animated screen.
The question Drawing type C = is displayed, when the condition in Caxis FAPT animated screen explained in 3.2.1 is filled. C = 1: Caxis FAPT animated screen C = 0: Animated screen only by XZ side view
451
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
452
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.1
MATERIAL DATA
(1) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining

Feed amount (*) Cutting speed Division V f f f f FR (Diameter direction) f FT (Axis direction) f f f
Center drill Drill Tap End mill
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill. (2) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining. It is the same as (1). NOTE The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or feet/min. The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev. The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch. Refer to material data in chapter VI 1. for methods to set and display the data.
453
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
4.2
TOOL DATA 4.2.1
Tool Data
The questions of milling machining tool data are as follows. TOOL ID. NO. . . . . . . . . . NO = TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . MT = 1: HIGH SPEED 2: CARBIDE 3: SPECIAL TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . TP = 1: CENTER DRILL 2: DRILL 3: TAP 4: END MILL HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (Not used in 16TA) HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . HL = Holder No. for animated simulation ROTATE DIRECTION . . . TR = 0: NORMAL 1: REVERSE TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . DT = CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT = NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT = CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT = No. of blades of end mill tool PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . LE = Peck depth of tapping tool PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Pitch of tapping tool SETTING DIRECTION . . CP = 0: SIDE 1: FACE SETTING POSITION . . . XS = ZS = HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (16TTA only)
454
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.2.2
Input and Output of the Tool Data and Collation
It is possible to input and output the tool data and collate it in the conventional way. The input and output format of the tool data for milling machining is as follows. CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP; CINOOOP; CINOOOP; CINOOOP; CINOOOP; CINOOOP; CINOOOP CINOOOP CINOOOP ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Tool ID number Tool type Cutting diameter Tool length Tool tip angle Tool diameter Peck length Pitch Setting position (Yaxis) Setting position (Xaxis) Setting position (Zaxis) No. of blades Tool material (ID) (TP) (DS) (LT) (AT) (DT) (LE) (PT) (YS) (XS) (ZS) (NT) (MT)
; ; ;
Tool imformation Holder No. Tool information 2
(FLAG) (HL) (FLAG 2)
Meaning of tool information 2 (FLAG 2)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR) 0 : Normal rotation 1 : Reverse rotation Bit 1 Installation direction (CP) 0 : For side machining 1 : For end face machining
455
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
4.2.3
Displaying and Setting of Tooling Informations
The display method of the tooling information list screens is as usual. The screen moves to the tooling information setting screen when the soft key DATA SETTING is pushed on this screen. The screens of four kinds are prepared by the tool type. TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID = (Note 1)
NOTE The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been registered in tool data. If a number not registered in tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed. The registered ID is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as DEL INPUT.
When the tool ID number (ID) is input, the tool registered in tool data is tooled and the data of the tool configuration and that of setting are set.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are displayed only; they cannot be changed.) (Center Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . (Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . .
456
TP; Center drill (M) MT; DT = DS = LT = AT = TP; Drill (M) MT; DT = LT = AT =
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(Tap) TOOL TYPE TP; Tap (M) TOOL MATERIAL MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT = PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . LE = PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = (End mill) TOOL TYPE TP; End mill (M) TOOL MATERIAL MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT = CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . DS = CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT = CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT = Prompts on data setting (Common to all tool types) SETTING DIRECTION . . . . CP = (0: Side machining, 1: End machining) SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = ZS = ROTATION DIRECTION . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards) HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note) NOTE The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animation drawing function is available.
457
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Tool figure of milling tool
458
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
MTF
WARNING When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
459
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
5.1
MTF SETTING WHEN CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS USED
(1) FANUC standard preset value for MTF 2200 (The servo motor control system is standard)
MTF 2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; G28 H0 ; 2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000 TXX00 ; M01 ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G50 X Z C ; G00 TXXX; 2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F G18 G99 G82 G19 2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F G18 G99 G83.1 G19 2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03 G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R F L G18 G99 G84.1 G19 2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 2209 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Not used) 2210 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Not used) 2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
460
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
(2) Setting precautions In preparing NC data for Caxis machining, the MTF setting differs, depending on the Caxis control system. The modification shown on the following for standard data is required. (a) Servo control system
MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2005 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2006 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2007 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 1105, M05 1105, M05 1105, M05 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 1005, MXX 1005, MXX 1005, MXX 0004 ; 0004 ; 0004 ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01,0503, 0004, 0000 G90 G00 X Z C F ; G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z C M08 ; G91 G01 G99
461
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(b) Spindle positioning system (Semifixed angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000 G90 G00 X Z F ; G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G50 X Z ; G00 TXXXX ; 2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F G18 G99 G82 G19 2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503 G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F G18 G99 G83.1 G19 2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03 G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L G18 G99 G84.1 G19 2211 = 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000 MXX ;
462
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
(c) Spindle positioning system (Arbitrary angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000 G90 G00 X Z F ; G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000 G90 G00 G98 X Z M08 ; G91 G01 G99 2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED ; M05 ; MXX ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G50 X Z C ; G00 TXXXX ; 2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z R P F G99 G82 G18 G19 2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503 G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z R Q F G18 G99 G83.1 G19 2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03 G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L G18 G99 G84.1 G19 2211 = AA01,0004, 0000, 0000 C ;
463
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
5.2
NC DATA OUTPUT
(1) Servo motor control system Specific Example:

Assume that the MTF has been set as follows. 1300 = CH 1313 = 13 1314 = 14 1315 = 18 1316 = 17 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; M17 ; 2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; M17 ; 2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004 FEED ; M05 ; M17 ; 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503, G90 G00 X Z C F G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, G90 G00 X Z C M08 G91 G01 2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, G90 G00 X Z C M08 G91 G01 2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, G90 G00 X Z C M08 G91 G01 2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, FEED ; M05 ; M18 ; 2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000 TXX00 ; M01 ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, G50 X Z C ; G00 2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z G18 G99 G82 G19 2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, G17 G98 G98 G83 X Z G18 G99 G83.1 G19 2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; 2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z G18 G99 G84.1 G19 2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ;
0004, 0000 ; 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000 G28 H0 ;
0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 TXXXX ; AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 C R P F
AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503 C R Q F
AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03 C R F L
2003 2008 are set to the same as 2002. The others are standard setting. System parameter standard setting (Refer to the another sheet)
464
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Machining definition Process 1: Outside diameter roughing Process 2: Outside diameter finishing Process 3: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Center drilling) A Process 4: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Drilling) A Process 5: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Tapping) A Process 6: Caxis machining (Grooving end face) B Process 7: Caxis machining (Drilling side: Drilling) C Process 8: Caxis machining (Grooving side face) D Machining shape
465
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
The outputted NC data becomes as follows. NOTE NC data of the process 1 2 is omitted.
%; O01: G50X400.Z400.; M05; M18; G28H0; G50X300.Z300.C0; G00T0101; G97S2000M13; X40.; Z92.; G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; C90.; C180.; C270.; G00Z300.; X300.; T0100; M01; G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0202 ; G97S1393M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; C0 ; G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; C90. ; C180. ; C270. ; G00Z300. ; X300. ; T0200 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0303 ; G97S159M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; C0 ; G84Z76.R92.F318. ; C90. ; C180. ; C270. ; G00Z300. ; X300. ; T0300 ; M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0404 G97S2000M13 ; X87. ; Z92. ; C60 ; Z42. ; G01Z35F26. ; C120.F65. ; G00Z42. ; Z92. ; C240. ; Z42. ; G01Z35.F26. ; C300.F65. ; G00Z42. ; Z92. ; Z300. ; X300. ; T0400 ; M01; G50X300.Z300.C300.; G00T0505; G97S1393M13; Z25.; X104.; C0; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.; C180.; G00X300.; Z300.; T0500; M01; G50X300.Z300.C180.; G00T0606; G97S2000M13; Z50.; X104.; C90; X79.; G01X70.F26.; Z66.F65.; G00X79.; X104.; Z50.C210.; X79.; G01X70.F26.; Z66.F65.; G00X79.;
466
X104.; Z50.C330.; X79.; G01X70.F26 .; Z66.F65.; G00X79.; X104.; X300.; Z300.; T0600; M01; X400.Z400.; M01; M05; M30; %
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
2) Spindle positioning method a) Halffixed angle indexing Definite example Assume MTF are set as follows:
1300 = 1306 = 1308 = 1313 = 1314 = 1317 = 1318 = 1319 = 1320 = 2002 = 2035 = 2036 = 2017 = CH 1 0 13 14 50 60 20 45 0100, 0004, FEED ; 0100, 0004, FEED ; 0100, 0004, FEED ; 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 0100, 0004, FEED ; 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 4402, 1101, G50 X 5702, 5802, G17 G98 G18 G99 G19 0B03, 0004, L ; 5702, 5802, G17 G98 G18 G99 G19 0B03, 0004, L ;
1105, M05 1105, M05 1105, M05 1101, X
0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0001, Z
1405, M60 1405, M60 1405, M60 0000,
0004 ; 0004 ; 0004 ; 0503, 0004, 0000 F ;
2018 =
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1105, M05 0605, M01 0001, Z 6002, G98 0004, ; 0004, ; 0000, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M50 ; 0000, 0000 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G00 TXXXX ; 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503 Z R P F
2031 =
2032 =
2200 = 2201 = 2202 = 2203 =
0004, ; 6102, 1101, G81 X G82
2204 = 2205 =
0000, 0000 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G98 G83 X Z R Q F G83.1 0000, 0000
2206 =
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03 G17 G98 G98 G84 X Z R F L G18 G99 G84.1 G19 2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 2211 = 1205, 0004, 0000, 0000 M2X ;
The others are standard setting. 2003 2008 are set to the same as 2002. The system parameters are standard setting.
467
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Machining definition Process 1: Outside diameter roughing Process 2: Outside diameter finishing Process 3: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Center drilling) Process 4: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Drilling) Process 5: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Tapping) Process 6: Caxis machining B (Drilling side face: Drilling) Process 7: Caxis machining C (Grooving side face) Machining shape
468
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
%; O10: G50X400.Z400.; M05; M50; G50X300.Z300.; G00T0101; G97S2000M13; X40.; Z92.; G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; M21; M21; M21; G00Z300.; X300.; T0100; M01; G50X300.Z300.; G00T0202 ; G97S1393M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; M21 ; G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; M21 ; M21 ; M21 ; G00Z300. ; X300. ; T0200 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300. ; G00T0303 ; G97S1593M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; M21 ; G84Z76.R92.F318. ; M21 ; M21 ; M21 ; C00Z300. ; X300. ; T0300 ; M01 ;
G50X300.Z300. ; G00T0404 ; G97S1393M13 ; Z25. ; X104. ; M22 ; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139. M23 ; G00X300. ; Z300. ; T0400 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300. ; G00T0505 ; G97S2587M13 ; Z50. ; X104. ; M24 ; X79. ; G01X70.F26. ; Z66.F65. ; G00X79.; X104.; Z50.; M24.; X79.; G01X70.F26.; Z66.F65.; G00X79.; X104.; X300.; Z300.; T0500; M01; X400.Z400.; M01; M05; M30; %
469
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
3) Arbitrary angle indexing Definite example Assume that MTFs are set as follows: 1300 = 1306 = 1308 = 1313 = 1314 = 1317 = 1318 = CH 1 1 13 14 50 60
1105, M05 1105, M05 1105, M05 1101, X 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0001, Z 1405, M60 1405, M60 1405, M60 0000, 0004 ; 0004 ; 0004 ; 0503, 0004, 0000 F ;
2002 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2035 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2036 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2017 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2031 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2032 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2200 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2201 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, G50 X 2203 = 5702, 5802, G17 G98 G18 G99 G19 2204 = 0B03, 0004, L ; 2205 = 5702, 5802, G17 G98 G18 G99 G19 2206 = 0B03, 0004, L ; 2207 = 5702, 5802, G17 G98 G18 G99 G19
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M08 ; 1105, M05 0605, M01 0001, Z 6002, G98 0004, 1305, ; M50 0004, 0000, ; AA01, 0004, C ; 6102, 1101, G81 X G82 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 0000 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G00 TXXXX ; 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503 Z R P F
0000, 0000 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G98 G83 X Z R Q F G83.1 0000, 0000 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03 G98 G84 X Z R F L G84.1
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 2211 = AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000 C ;
The others are standard setting. 2003 2008 are set to the same as 2002. The system parameters are standard setting. The machining definition is identical with (2).
470
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
%; O10: G50X400.Z400.; M05; M50; G50X300.Z300.C0; G00T0101; G97S2000M13; X40.; Z92.; G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.; C90.; C180.; C270.; G00Z300.; X300. ; T0100 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0202 ; G97S1393M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; C0 ; G87Z75.R92.P80.F139. ; C90. ; C180. ; C270. ; G00Z300. ; X300. ; T0200 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0303 ; G97S159M13 ; X40. ; Z92. ; C0 ; G84Z76.R92.F318. ; C90. ; C180. ; C270. ; G00Z300. ; X300. ; T0300 ; M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ; G00T0404 ; G97S1393M13 ; Z25. ; X104. ; C60 ; C45 ; G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139. C225 ; G00X300. ; Z300. ; T0400 ; M01 ; G50X300.Z300.C225. ; G00T0505 ; G97S2000M13 ; Z50. ; X104.; C90.; X79.; G01X70.F26.; Z66.F65.; G00X79.; X104.; Z50.; C315.; X79.; G01X70.F26.; Z66.F65.; G00X79.; X104.; X300.; Z300.; T0500; M01; X400.Z400.; M01; M05; M30; %
471
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Caxis Machining MTF Setting Example The setting of MTF is described below when creating the NC program for Caxis machining shown as in the following. (Example) % O100; : : : : : : M05; Mjj; G28H0. ; G50X_ Z_ C_ ; G00T0101; G97S2000M??; : : : T0100; M01; : : : G50X_ Z_ C_ ; G00T0303; : : : T0300; M01; : : : G50X_ Z_ C_ ; G00T0505; : : : T0500; M ; M01; M05; M30; %
Lathe turning machining process
Caxis clutch on First Caxis machining process Approach, machining, and escape
The ith Caxis machining process
Final Caxis machining process Caxis clutch off
472
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Set the MTF parameters as shown below:

Number 1313 1314 2024 Meaning Tool positive rotation M code value Tool negative rotation M code value Spindle speed command block or tool speed command block Setting Value Set the corresponding M code value. Set the corresponding M code value. 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, 0000 G00 M05 ; M?? ; G97 S M03 ; M04 M?? M?? 0000, 0000 or less 0003, 0004, 0705, 504F, 1F41, 0004 T??00 ; M98 P 8001 ; 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0103, 0004, 4402, 1101, 0001, 0004 M98 P 8000 ; T??? ; G50 X Z ;
2200 2201 2202
Caxis machining starting part Caxis machining ending part Caxis machining coordinate system setting Tool selection T code command
Actually output NC program is as shown below: % O100; : : : : : : M98P8000; T0101; G50X_ Z_ ; G0; G97S2000M??; : : : T0100; M98P8001; : : :
Lathe turning machining process
First Caxis machining process Approach, machining, and escape
473
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
M98P8000; T0303; G50X_ Z_ ; : : : Y0300; M98P8001; : : : M98P8000; T0505; G50X_ Z_ ; : : : T0500; M98P8001; M05; M30; %
The ith Caxis machining process
First Caxis machining process
NOTE No NC programs with program numbers 8000 and 8001 can be output in the FAPT. Thus, manually create them beforehand. O8000; M05; Mjj; G28H0. ; G50C0. ; M99; O8001; M ; M01; M99;
Caxis clutch on
Caxis clutch off
474
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
5.3
RIGID TAPPING NC DATA INPUT
For both general tapping and rigid tapping processes, select the Caxis tapping process. Whether general tapping or rigid tapping is to be performed is set in the cutting conditions. (1) Cutting conditions In response to the prompt TYPE, set either 1 (general tapping) or 2 (rigid tapping).
(2) Examples of NC data output TYPE 1: General tapping G50X150.Z150.CO. G00T0101 G97S0159M13 X50. (Warning 1) Z2. G98G84(G88)Z13.R0.F239 C90. C180 TYPE 2: Rigid tapping G50X150.Z150.CO. G00T0101 X50. Z2. G98G84(G88)Z13.R0.M29S0159M13F239. C90. (Warning 2) (Warning 1) C180
WARNING 1 An M code is output only for forward spindle rotation. So, the value set in MTF No.1313 is output. In the above example, MTF No.1313 is set to 13. 2 M code specifying the rigid mode. In the above example, the value set in MTF No.1350 is output.
475
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(3) MTF Setting 1) Define the value of the M code for specifying the rigid tapping mode in MTF No.1350. 2) MTF function tables 2207 and 2208 are used for both general tapping and rigid tapping. FANUC standard MTF 1350=29 ... 2207=5802,6602,6302,1101, 0001,AA01, 0903,1505, 0203,0005 G98 G98 G84 X Z C R MXX S Mxx G99 G88 2208=0503,0B03, 0004, 0000 F K ; CAUTION When rigid tapping is to be performed, set an F code after the S code setting in MTF function table Nos.2207 and 2208. If the F code is specified before the S code, the F code and its value are not output.
New function code

Three high-order digits One low-order digit Function Preparation
Outputs M code M code set in MTF that specifies rigid No.1350 tapping.
476
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
5.4
FACE MILLING
Fig. 5.4 (a)
Data for face milling shape in Fig. 5.4 (a) are as follows: (1) ELEMENT SYMBOL POSITION START POINT CUTTING POS. EBD POINT ANGLE FROM C (2) ELEMENT SYMBOL END POINT (3) ELEMENT SYMBOL END POINT (4) ELEMENT SYMBOL END POINT ANGLE FROM C (5) Figure element END POINT (6) Figure element END POINT DX = 80 C=0 DX = 40 DX = 40 A = 30 DX = 80 C=0 DX = 40 Z = 70 X0 = 80 C0 = 0 PE = 0 DX = 40 A = 30
477
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Set the cutting condition data and tool data as follows: (1) CUTTING CONDITIONS RPM N = 689.7 FEED RATE FR = 0.025 FT = 0.035 CLEARANCE C1 = 2 (2) TOOL DATA TOOL DIAMETER DT = 30 CUT WIDTH DS = 30 CUT LENGTH LT = 30 CUT COUNT NT = 10 SETTING DIRECTION CP = 1 Output NC data becomes as follows: OXX; . . . G50X_ Z_ C_ ; G00T___ ; G97S0690; N100 X154.Z70.; C98.056; G12.1; N101 G01 X107.037 F172.; N102 X70.668C45.135; N103 X42.842C53.168; N104 X113.51C8.033; N105 X70.668C45.135; N106 X42.842C53.168; N107 X113.51C8.033; N108 X107.037C0.; G13.1; . . .
478
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Fig. 5.4 (b) Tool path by output NC data
479
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
First cutting point and approach point The cutting point always starts from a point where the tool is offset normal to the starting element when the right and left of an element is cut.
Fig. 5.4 (c)
Bit 0 of MTF 1305 is used to switch between NC data created with consideration for cutter compensation at the FAPT side, and NC data created using the cutter compensation function at the NC side.
MTF1305
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Cutter compensation: 0 : Performed by FAPT (G40/41/42 not output) 1 : Performed by NC (G40/41/42 output)
1) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 0: NC data with cutter compensation at the FAPT is output when cutting on the left side of the defined figure as well as when cutting on the right side. Cutter is not considered when cutting on the element.
480
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Example 1: Cutting on the right of the element N1 X134. : N2 Z5. ; N3 C52.063 ; N4 G12.1 ; N5 G1 X115.015 F78. ; N6 X28.07 C55.769 ; N7 X32.703 C64.974 ; N8 G13.1 ; N9 G0 Z150. ; N10 X150. ;
2) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 1: NC data is created using the cutter compensation start block MTF 2212, but cancel block MTF 2213 is also accessed. With standard settings, NC data such as the following is created. Example 2: When cutting on the right of a defined shape, output the G code (G42) set in cutter compensation start block MTF 1232 and the G code (G40) set in cutter compensation cancel block. N1 X134. : N2 Z5. ; N3 C45. ; N4 G12.1 ; N5 G1 G42 X100. F78. ; N6 X0. C50. ; N7 G40 C67. ; N8 G13.1 ; N9 G0Z150. ; N10 X150. ;
481
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
3) When cutting on the element, the result is as shown below, regardless of the value of MTF 1305 bit 0. Example 3: When cutting on the element N1 X100. : N2 Z2. ; N3 C45. ; N4 G12.1 ; N5 G1 Z5. F31. ; N6 X0. C50. F78. ; N7 Z2. ; N8 G13.1 ; N9 G0 Z150. ; N10 X150. ;
482
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
5.5
SIDE MILLING
Example of cylindrical figure
Expansion diagram
Programming of the above cylindrical figure is the following below. 1) Figure element Start point CO = 0 Z = 40 Cylinder diameter DX = 90 End point C = 40 2) Figure element End point Z = 80 C = 140 3) Figure element End point C = 220 4) Figure element End point Z = 40 C = 320 5) Figure element End point C = 360
483
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Tool data and cutting condition data are set as given below. (Tool data) TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING DIRECTION . . . . .
DT = 10 DS = 10 LT = 30 NT = 4 CP = 0 (face use)
(Cutting condition) SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = 4138 FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FR = 0.025 FT = 0.01 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = 2 Sample MTF setting No.1305 = 00000000 No.1340 = 0 No.1341 = 0
No.2209 = 0102, 5702, 0170, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000 G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G7.1 C ; G19 G107 No.2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 G7.1 C ; G107
The following NC data are output: G0 T0808; G97 S2000 M13; Z40.; X104. ; C0; G1 G18 W0 H0 ; G7.1 C45000 ; X90. F80. ; N1 C40. F200.; N2 X80. C140. ; N3 G3 C220. R50.862; N4 G1 Z40. C320.; N5 C360. ; G7.1 C0; G0 X104.;
Start of cylindrical interpolation
End of cylindrical interpolation
484
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Parameters for side milling 1) System parameter (1) Side milling machining process parameter
Bit 305 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Unused Bit 1 Coolant 0 : not used 1 : used Bit 2 Tool compensation cancel 0 : not output 1 : output Bit 3, 4 Approach (X, Z, C axis) 00: simultaneous 1 axis 01: simultaneous 2 axis 11, 10 : simultaneous 3 axis Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis) 0 : simultaneous 2 axis 1 : simultaneous 1 axis Bit 7 Transit point setting screen 0 : not displayed 1 : displayed (2) Side milling machining process single step
Bit 315 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Process start Bit 1 Prior to approach Bit 2 Prior to return relief (3) Side milling machining process track color
No .585 2 Initial value (green)
485
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
2) MTF
No. 1305 Format BIT Initial value Description
00000000 Bit 1: Specifies whether to output the radius for cylindrical interpolation with or without a decimal point. 0: Without a decimal point. 1: With a decimal point. 0 0 0: The Caxis is parallel to the Xaxis. 1: The Caxis is parallel to the Yaxis. 0: Match the number of fractional digits of the Xaxis least input increment in MTF No.1030. 1: Match the number of fractional digits of the Zaxis least input increment in MTF No.1031. Start of cylindrical interpolation End of cylindrical interpolation
1340 1341
Integer Integer
2209 2210
Function table Function table
Function code
Three high-order digits One low-order digit Function Outputs a G code FS15: G7.1 for cylindrical FS16: G107 interpolation.
CAUTION 1 If MTF No.1340 is 0 (the Caxis is parallel to the Xaxis), G18 is output as the plane selection command at the start of circular interpolation. In this case, a lefthanded coordinate system is used. If 1340 is 1 (the Caxis is parallel to the Yaxis), the plane selection command is G19, and righthanded coordinate system is used. 2 For the G1 move command at the start of cylindrical interpolation, dummy values W0 and H0 are a output. This means that approach takes place before the start of cylindrical interpolation. 3 The cylinder radius specified in the cylindrical interpolation command is output in the least input increment for the axis specified in MTF No.1341. 4 If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 0, the cylinder radius specified in the cylindrical interpolation command is output without a decimal point. If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 1, the radius is output with a decimal point. (MTF No.1305 is also referenced for the C0 value output at the end of cylindrical interpolation.)
486
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
5.6
G85/G89 BORING CYCLE
To generate a G85/G89 boring cycle for Caxis machining, select CAXIS DRILL for the machining type on the machining definition screen. Once TYPE 4 is selected on the cutting condition screen, then the cutting conditions are set, a G85/G89 boring cycle is output during NC data preparation.
5.6.1
MTF
(1) Machine tool file (1xxx)

Parameter No. 1376 1377 Format Real number Real number Description Boring cycle: front face Boring cycle: side face Initial value for Initial value for 16/18 CAP II 15TFB/15TTFB 85 89 89 89
(2) Function table (2xxx) The following blocks are referenced during NC data preparation. 1) For 16/18TC and 16i/18iTA
2216 =5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03 G98 G98 G85 X Z C R P F K 2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 ;
Repeat count Feedrate (feed per revolution) Dwell time at the bottom of the hole Distance between the initial point and the reference point
2) For 15TFB/15TTFB
2216 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G89 X Z C R P F G18 G99 G19 2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ;
Repeat count
Feedrate (feed per revolution) Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Distance between the initial point and the reference point
NOTE A new function code, 6702, has been provided to enable output of a boring cycle G code.
487
6. CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT
488
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
6.1
SIMULTANEOUS AXIS MOVE CONTROL OF APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF 6.1.1
Setting of Parameter
The setting of the number of simultaneous moving axes in the approach and the return relief can be specified by 0300 0304 system parameters. The simultaneous 1 axis, 2 axes or 3 axes can be specified at the approach. The simultaneous 1 axis or 2 axes can be specified for X and Z at the return relief.
6.1.2
Specification of Move Order at the Time of the Approach
1) Simultaneous 1 axis specification The move order of Caxis always becomes last. The order of Xaxis and Zaxis is set by MTF 1084. 2) Simultaneous 2 axes specifications i) When MTF 1307 is set to 1, the axes move according to the setting of MTF 1084. For instance, when MTF 1084 is set to 1, the order becomes as follows: Approach in end face: ZCaxis to Xaxis Approach in outside diameter: XCaxis to Zaxis ii) In case MTF 1307 is 0, the Caxis moves after the move of XZaxis.
6.1.3
Type of NC Data
The meaning of undermentioned MTF changes because Caxis machining is added. The 2018th: Simultaneous 3 axes approach The 2031st: First motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach First motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach The 2032nd:2nd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach 3rd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach 2nd motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach
489
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
6.2
SPINDLE POSITIONING METHOD
The approach in Caxis machining should be done in order of simultaneous one axis and simultaneous 2 axes of XZ to C axis. The rotating direction at the halffixed indexing is determined by + or setting the indexing angle. If the spindle cannot move by the indexing angle during the halffixed indexing, an error is generated. When the halffixed indexing is used, set the machine zero point coordinate value of the Caxis to 0.
490
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
7. INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS
INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS
Infeed machining can be performed toward a face milling with the cutting width defined in the X axis direction. In addition, infeed machining can be performed toward an interpolated plane with the cutting depth defined in the Z axis direction.
491
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
7.1
FIGURE DEFINITION
A figure can be defined in the same way as a face milling defined in (7) of Section 1.3.2 of this part, except for the following restrictions: (1) If multiple face millings are defined in a single definition, this function is not supported. (2) If cutting on an entity is defined, this function is not supported.
492
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
7.2
MACHINING DEFINITION
Machining type Select CAXIS F. MILL process from the machining definition screen. Tool data Use an end mill tool for milling. Cutting conditions The DRIVE ...DR= prompt is displayed on the cutting condition screen before the prompt for the machining method. To perform infeed machining, define 1. Otherwise, define 0. When a cutting condition is newly defined, initial values are defined. When a family program that has been created using an earlier version is loaded, 0 is defined. Select and define one of the following three types of infeed machining methods.
DRIVE...DR = (1: on 0: off) Infeed machining methods ... TP = Select one of the following machining types. (initial value: 2) 1: Roughing 2: Finishing 3: Roughing finishing
If infeed machining is defined, the following prompts are displayed. Define a value for each prompt.
Cutting allowance ... RX = Cutting allowance in the X axis direction (initial value: undefined) RZ = Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction (initial value: undefined) Cutting width ........... W1 = Depth of a single cut in the X axis direction (initial value: tool diameter DT * value in system parameter No. 372) * If another cutting method is selected, the initial value is resumed. Cutting depth ........... D1 = Depth of a single cut in the Z axis direction (initial value: undefined) Finishing allowance ... TX = Finishing allowance in the X axis direction (initial value: value in system parameter No. 368) TZ = Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction (initial value: value in system parameter No. 373)
Note the following when defining data for cutting conditions: (1) If multiple face millings are defined upon figure definition, or if cutting on the entity of a face milling is defined, infeed machining cannot be defined. If an attempt is made to make such definitions, an error occurs (correct key input is required) and another input is not accepted. (2) When infeed machining is performed with the method specified by machining type 2 (finishing), the prompts for cutting allowance (RZ) and cutting depth (D1) are not displayed. (3) If an attempt is made to input a negative value in any of the prompts for the cutting width (W1), number of cuts (N1), cutting depth (D1), and finishing allowance (TX/TZ), an error occurs (correct input is required) and another input is not accepted.
493
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
When defining data other than the above, there is no difference from the conventional definition. However, note the following points when defining data because they are not checked upon the creation of an NC format. CAUTION 1 When cutting a face milling from the outside diameter, setting too great a cutting allowance results in an excess air cut. 2 When cutting a pocketed face milling from the inner surface, setting too great a cutting allowance may result in excessive cutting of a parts figure. Automatic process determination When a face milling is defined using the automatic process determination function, method 2 without infeed machining is set. Therefore, to use this function, modification is required on the cutting condition screen.
494
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
7.3
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
The following system parameters have been added.

No. 372 Format Real number Initial value 0.2 Description Rate of cutting along the X axis upon Caxis notching (rate to the tool diameter)
373
Real number
0.5 (mm specification) Finishing allowance along the 0.02 (inch specification) Z axis upon Caxis notching
7.4
MTF
No MTF parameter is added to this function. Use conventional MTF parameters. (Bit 0 of MTF parameter No. 1305 can be used as usual to specify whether to create NC data with the conversational program by considering cutter compensation or to create NC data by using the NC cutter compensation function.)
495
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
7.5
TOOL PATH DRAWING
(1) Roughing (a) Tool path viewed from an end face Operation is as follows:

Face milling parts figure
W1 (Cutting width)
TX+DT/2 (Finishing allowance along the X axis direction + tool diameter/2)
1) Performs the operation that is set using approach. . . . . . (The above figure shows an example of normal direction approach.) 2) Performs the first cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At this time, if the tool path is drawn outside a blank, air cut results. 3) Cuts the figure by the specified cutting width (W1). . . . 4) Cuts the figure with the finishing allowance (TX) left uncut. ............. 5) Performs the escape operation set using the escape method. ............. (The above figure shows an example of normal direction escape.)
496
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(b) Cutting order viewed from a side face

TZ (Finishing allowance) RZ (Cutting allowance) X D1 (Cutting depth)

W1 (Cutting width) DT/2 (Cutter radius) TX (Finishing allowance)
RX (Cutting allowance)
Z Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed. 1) Portions and to be cut off are subject to the machining explained in Tool path viewed from an end face. At this time, machining cannot be performed in reverse order. Cutting must always be executed sequentially, in the direction toward the face milling. 2) When cutting along the Z axis is performed, the approach and escape methods are the same. The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined by subtracting the Zaxis clearance (C1) from the position of the blank where the end face has a maximum size before the figure is cut off by roughing. 3) When a figure is cut along the Z axis, after the final cutting in the previous stage ends and the tool retracts in the Z axis direction, polar coordinate interpolation is canceled. Then, the first approach point is positioned in the next stage by means of rapid traverse with the Zaxis coordinate unchanged, and polar coordinate interpolation is restarted. 4) For portions and , then and , machining is performed in the same way as shown in the tool path for portions and . 5) The number of cuts along the X axis is calculated as follows: Cutting allowance (RX) Cutting width along the X axis (W1) The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed as the amount of the final cut along the X axis.
497
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
6) The number of cuts along the Z axis is calculated as follows: Cutting allowance (RZ) Cutting depth along the Z axis (D1) The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed as the amount of the final cut along the Z axis. (2) Finishing Cutting order viewed from a side face
X TZ (Finishing allowance)
TX (Finishing allowance)
Z Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed. 1) The finishing allowance along the Z axis (TZ) is cut off in the order of portions then . When the machining defined with machining type 3 is performed, the cutting width and number of cuts along the X axis is the same as for roughing. 2) Finally, the finishing allowance along the X axis (TX), indicated by , is cut off. 3) The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined by subtracting the Zaxis clearance (C1) from the position of the blank where its end face has a maximum size before the figure is cut off by roughing. When machining defined with machining type 3 is performed, the approach and escape methods are the same as for roughing.
498
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(3) Sample program Using Caxis notching infeed machining enables simplified pocketing. This example machines a circular pocket, 50 mm in diameter, and centered at X0 = 200 and C0 = 100 on a circular blank figure with a turning figure diameter of 400 mm.
X
X0=200. C R=200 C0=100.
Caxis notching figure ES= Interpolation plane value . Z= 5. Start position . . . . . . . . . . . X0=200. C0=50
Cutting position . CP=0 (Which side of element is to be cut? 0: Right, 1: Left, 2: Top) Radius . . . R=50. Center . . . CDX=Undefined CC=Undefined
End position . . . . . . DX=200. C=150. Tangent to this side . . . . TL=0 Tangent to the next . . . . TN=0 ES= End position . . . . . . DX=200. C=50. Tangent to this side . . . . TL=0 Tangent to the next . . . . TN=0
Radius . . . R=50. Center . . . CDX=Undefined CC=Undefined
499
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
This example specifies the tool figure and cutting conditions for preparing a hole 20 mm in diameter at the center of a circular pocket, and machining the pocket using a tool with a cutting diameter of 16 mm. Tool figure Tool diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting orientations . . . . . . . Cutting diameter . . . . . . . . . . . Number of cutting blades . . . . Cutting conditions Infeed machining . . . . . . . . . Cutting method . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finishing allowance . . . . . . . . Cutting allowance . . . . . . . . . . Cutting width . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of rotations . . . . . . . . Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approach method . . . . . . . . . . Escape direction . . . . . . . . . . . DR=1 TP1 C1=2 TX=0.5 TZ=0.5 RX=40. RZ=5. W1=8. D1=5. N=1000 FR=0.1 FT=0.1 SM=3 (in normal direction) DN=10. EM=3 (in normal direction) DN=10. DT=16. LT=10. CP=1 DS=16. NT=4
The following tool paths are prepared using the above conditions.
X
500
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
0001(CFACE) ; (CFACE MILLING) ; N0001G28H0. ; G50X400.Z100.C0. ; GOTO01 ; G97S1000 ; X283.551 ; Z12. ; C44.857 ; G112 ;
Polar coordinate system interpolation start block (MTF No.2214) G1Z4.5F4000. ; Rapid traverse and cutting feed move command (MTF No.2017) X269.373C7.053 ; (1) G2X296.31C6.348R9.5 ; (2) Arc interpolation move command (MTF No.2021) X269.373C7.053R9.5 ; (3) G1X258.031C12.696 ; (4) G2X307.652C11.991R17.5 ; (5) X258.031C12.696R17.5 ; (6) G1X246.69C18.339 ; (7) G2X318.994C17.634R25.5 ; (8) X246.69C18.339R25.5 ; (9) G1X235.348C23.982 ; (10) G2X330.336C23.276R33.5 ; (11) X235.348C23.982R33.5 ; (12) G1X224.006C29.624 ; (13) G2X341.678C28.919R41.5 ; (14) X224.006C29.624R41.5 ; (15) G1X238.183C22.571 ; (16) Z12. ; G113 ; Polar coordinate system interpolation cancel block (MTF No.2215) G0Z100. ; X400. ; TO100 ; M1 ; M5 ; M30 ; %
NOTE 1 When a pocket is bored from an inner surface contour, caution is required to avoid specifying too large a cutting allowance for the pocket, the parts figure may be overcut. 2 An alarm may by issued if the defined pocket figure is complicated and cannot be cut using the specified tool diameter.
501
8. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B
502
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
8.1
SPECIFICATIONS
The CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B option adds following three new CAxis Machining capabilities the CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. (1) Specifying end face holes along a circle with arbitrary center position.
(2) Specifying reaming process.
(3) Specifying boring process.
503
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
8.2
PROGRAMMING 8.2.1
Part Figure Definition
(1) Specifying end face holes along a circle with arbitrary center position. In addition to the end face hole machining function of the CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION, end face holes along a circle with arbitrary center position can be specified in the following manner. Select FACE HOLE in the CAXIS FIGURE window of the Menu No.2. In the Face Hole definition (CAXIS FIGURE 1) window,additional new parameter, CIRCLE CENTER CD=, appears. If 1(Specify arbitrary center position) is selected for this parameter,following parameters appear subsequently so that arbitrary center position can be specified for the circle along which holes are placed.
C.CENTER (XAXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . CDX= C.CENTER (CAXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . CC= PLANE (ZAXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PZ=
NOTE 1 To specify the diameter of the circle with arbitrary center position, enter the diameter value in the parameter POSITION (Xaxis)...DX=. 2 Specify the CAXIS value of the center of the circle in length (of radius designation), not in angle.Specify the Xaxis value in diameter designation.
Specify with the parameter POSITION (Xaxis)...DX=.
Center (CDX,CC)
504
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
8.2.2
Machining Definition (Menu 4)
(1) Selection the CAXIS machining process By the CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION Boption, additional machining processes of CAXIS REAMINGand CAXIS BORINGbecome available. Press the [MILLING] softkey in the kinds of machineng windows of Menu 4.Then CAXIS machining processes appear on the softkeys at the bottom of the screen.With CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION option, additional machining processes of [CAXIS REAMER] and [CAXIS BORING] also appear on the softkey.
CAXIS CAXIS TAP. GROOV. CAXIS F.MILL CAXIS CAXIS CAXIS S.MILL REAMER BORING
CAXIS C.DRILL
CAXIS DRILL
[CAXIS REAMER] . . . . Press to select CAXIS REAMING. [CAXIS BORING] . . . . . Press to select CAXIS BORING. (2) Tool Data Specify reamer for CAXIS REAMING or boring tool for CAXIS BORING both from milling tool list. TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL= TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . TN= TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . TM= TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . ID= When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling information file, simply specify the TOOL SELECT NO. (NT) .Then the rest of the parameters are automatically filled in. In case of new registration, specify the TOOL ID NO. (ID) .Then the data of the tool registered in the tool data is read and set onto appropriate parameters.Followings are the parameters displayed on each tool data window for CAXIS REAMING tool and CAXIS BORING tool. (REAMER) TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . TP;REAMER (M) TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT= CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT= PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . LE= (BORING) TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . TP; BORING (M) TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT= CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT= PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . LE=
505
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Following parameters, related to the setting of the tool, are common for both CAXIS REAMING tool and CAXIS BORING tool. SETTING DIRECTION . . . . CP= () 0:SIDE 1:END) SETTING OPTION . . . . . . . . XS= ZS= ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . TR= (0:NOMAL 1:REVERS) HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL= MACHINING START POSITION: DX0= Z0= Tool data definition method for other type of tools is the same as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. (3) Cutting Area Definition Definition method of the cutting area is the same as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. When CAXIS REAMING or CAXIS BORING is selected as the machining type, the cursor blinks on one of the figures listed bellow which can be machined by these machining methods.Move the cursor by pressing CURSOR FORWARD or CURSOR BACK softkey or by entering 0 (zero) and select the desired figure to be machined. CAXIS REAMING and CAXIS BORING can be defined for the following figures. End face holes defined as CAXIS figure. Side face holes defined as CAXIS figure. (4) Cutting Condition Definition method of cutting conditions for machining processes other than CAXIS REAMING and CAXIS BORING is the same as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. Cutting condition parameters for CAXIS REAMING and CACIS BORING are explained here. (a) CAXIS REAMING Enter the following cutting conditions.
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . C1= Clearance 1 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.390 is set as initial value.) C2= Clearance 2 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.391 is set as initial value.) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N= Tool Rotational Speed (rpm)
FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . FT= Feed amount per revolution of the tool (mm/rev or inch/rev)
506
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(1) In case parameter TH (Through hole) is set to 0
NOTE Retracting feed rate is calculated as follows. FT x [Override value for retracing feedrate of CAXIS REAMING. (System Parameter No.392)] (b) CAXIS BORING Two cutting types of BORING and FINE BORING, which are distinguished by the cutting type parameter TP, are available for CAXIS BORING. BORING
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP= 1 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . C1= Clearance 1 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.393 is set as initial value.) C2= Clearance 2 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.394 is set as initial value.) DWELL ON/OFF . . . . . . . DW= Dwell at the bottom (=1) or not (=0) . RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N= Tool Rotational Speed (rpm)
507
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Whether fixed cycle is used in the generated NC data or not is determined by the MTF parameter No.1304. 2 When the parameter DW is set to 1, Dwell is programmed at the bottom of the hole.Dwell Time is specified by the system parameter No.395. 3 Retracting feed rate is calculated as follows. FT x [Override value for retracing feedrate of CAXIS REAMING. (System Parameter No.392)]
508
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
FINE BORING
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP= 1 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . C1= Clearance 1 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.393 is set as initial value.) C2= Clearance 2 (mm or inch) (The value in the system parameter No.394 is set as initial value.) SHIFT VALUE . . . . . . . . . . SH= Tool shifting distance while retracting (mm or inch) Shifting value along Xaxis for end face boring. Shifting value along Zaxis for side face boring. DWELL ON/OFF . . . . . . . DW= Dwell at the bottom (=1) or not (=0) . RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N= Tool Rotational Speed (rpm)
509
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 In case of FS 15TFB/TTFB, whether fixed cycle is used in the generated NC data or not is determined by the MTF parameter No.1304. 2 Initial value of SHIFT VALUE parameter is calculated as follows by using tool data. SH=[ (Cut Width DsTool Dia.DT) /2] /2 3 KEY IN AGAIN error occurd, if a value greater than (Cut Width DsTool Dia.DT) /2 is entered in the parameter SH. 4 When fixed cycle is not used, whether the shift value SH is programmed by using the address Q or I/K is determined by the MTF parameter No.1342. 5 When fixed cycle is not used, the direction of the shift value programmed as discrete NC data is determined by the MTF parameter No.1342. 6 When the parameter DW is set to 1 , Dwell is programmed at the bottom of the hole.Dwell Time is specified by the system parameter No.395. 7 Retraction feed rate can switched between rapid traverse feed rate and cutting feed rate, according to the MTF parameter No.1342. 8 Retracting feed rate is calculated as follows. FT x [Override value for retracing feedrate of CAXIS REAMING. (System Parameter No.396)]
8.2.3
NC Data Creation
The creating method of NC data is the same as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. Followings are the examples of NC data created for the new machining features of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B. (1) End face holes along a circle with arbitrary center position CAXIS end face figure
510
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
POSITION (XAXIS) . . . . . . . . DX= 20. DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT= 15. HOLE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . WT= 10. THROUGH HOLE . . . . . . . . . . . TH= 0 CIRCKE CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . CD= 1 C.CENTER (XAXIS) . . . . . . . . CDX= 40. C.CENTER (CAXIS) . . . . . . . . CC= 20. PLANE (ZAXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . PZ= 20. INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB= 0 QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC= 4 INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . A1= 0. FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . AE= 270. Following NC data is created for drill holes of above parameters. Similar NC data is also created for other machining types of Center Drilling, Tapping, Reaming or Boring. CAXIS Drilling type 1 (Using fixed cycle) (CDRILLING) ; N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1500M13; X72.111; MTF2017 (rapid traverse, cutting feed move Z2.; command block) is referred to. C33.39; G98G83Z38.282.R0.P1000F150; MTF2203, 2204 (Drill cycle) is referred to. (G17GG98G82Z38.282R2.P1000F150.) *see note C56.31; MTF2203, 2204 (Drill cycle) is referred to. X44.721C63.435; C26.565; G0Z150.; X150.; T0200; M1;
NOTE This command block is replaces by the next command block in parentheses in case of FS15TFB/TTFB.
511
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(2) REAMING/BORING
CAXIS end face figure POSITION (XAXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . DX= 70. DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT= 15. HOLE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT= 10. THROUGH HOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TH= 0 CIRCLE CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD= 0 INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB= 0 QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC= 4 INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1= 45. FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AE= 315. An example of NC data, created for above CAXIS figure machining by CAXIS REANING or CAXIS BORING, is shown below.
512
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
a. CAXIS REANIN (CREAMER); N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1300M13; X70.; MTF2031,2032(approaching in one axis at a time)is referred to. Z2.; C45.; Z18.; G1Z33.F40.; MTF2017(rapid traverse,cutting feed move command block)is referred to. Z18.F200.; F=[Cutting Feed Rate] X [Value in system parameter No.392.] G0C135.; G1Z33.F40.; Z18.F200.: G0C225.; G1Z33.F40.; Z18.F200.; G0C315.; G1Z33.F40.; Z18.F200.; G0Z2.; Z150.; X150.; 0T0200; M1; b. CAXIS BORING type 1 (Using Fixed Cycle) (CBORING) ; N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1200M13; X70.; MTF2031, 2032 (approaching in one axis at a time) is referred to. Z2.; C45.; Z18.; G98G85Z38.R0.P1000F120.; MTF2216, 2217 (Fixed boring cycle 1) is referred to. *see note (G17GG98G89Z33.R18.P1000F120.) C135.; MTF2216, 2217 (Fixed boring cycle 1) is referred to. C225.; G0Z2.; Z150.; X150.; T0200; M1;
NOTE This command block is replaced by the next command block in parentheses in case of FS15TFB/TTFB.
513
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
c. CAXIS BORING type 1 (Not using Fixed Cycle) (CBORING) ; N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1200M13; X70.; Z2.; C45.; Z18.; G1Z33.F120.; MTF2017 (rapid traverse, cutting feed move command block) is referred to. G4U0.001; Z18.F240.; F=[Cutting Feed Rate] X [Value in system parameter No.396.] G0C135.; G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; MTF2027 (Drill cycle) is referred to. Z18.F240.; G0C225.; G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; Z18.F240.; G0C315.; G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; Z18.F240.; G0Z2.; Z150.; X150.; T0200; M1; d. CAXIS BORING type 2 (Using Fixed Cycle) This example is valid for FS15TFB/TTFB only. (CBORING) ; N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1200M13; X70.; MTF2031, 2032 (approaching in one axis at a time) is referred to. Z2.; C45.; Z18.; G178G98G86.1Z33.R18.Q2000P1000F120.; MTF2218, 2219 (Fixed boring cycle 2) is referred to. *see note (G17GG98G86.1Z33.R18.12.P1000F120.) C135.; C225.; MTF2218, 2219 (Fixed boring cycle 2) is referred to. C315.; G0Z2.; Z150.; X150.; T0200; M1;
514
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTE This command block is replaced by the next command block in parentheses in parentheses when MTF 1342#1=1. (Specify the shift value by the address word I and K.) e. CAXIS BORING type 2 (Not using Fixed Cycle) (CBORING) ; N0004G28H0.; G50X150.Z150.C0.; G0T0202; G97S1200M13; X70.; MTF2031, 2032 (approaching in one axis at a time) is referred to. Z2.; C45.; Z18.; G1Z33.F120.;. G4U0.001; MTF2027 (Dwell) is referred to. M19; MTF2250 (Spindle orientation) is referred to. X72.F240.; F=[Cutting Feed Rate] X [Value in system parameter No.396.] Z18.; M13; MTF2251 (Spindle restart) is referred to. G0X70.C135.; MTF2017 (rapid traverse, cutting feed move command block) is referred to. G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; M19; X72.F240.; Z18.; M13; G0X70.C225.; G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; M19; X72.F240.; Z18.; M13; G0X70.C315.; G1Z33.F120.; G4U0.001; M19; X72.F240.; Z18.; M13; G10Z2.; Z150.; : :
515
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
8.2.4
Animated simulation
Select MENU 6 to perform animated simulation of the created NC data.Operation of the Animated Simulation is the same as that of Caxis FAPT FUNCTION. Refer to chapter VIII CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION, section 3 ANIMATED SIMULATION, of the OPERATORs MANUAL for CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, B61804E2.
8.2.5
Material and Tool Data
(1) Material data Material data necessary for CAXIS REAMING and CAXIS BORING can be specified in the same manner as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. Specify the following machining conditions marked with f in the table below for high speed tool and/or carbide tool.
Tool type Cutting Speed V Feed amount FR (Radial direction) FT (Axial Direction) f f
Reamer Boring tool
f f
NOTE 1 The unit of the cutting speed is m/min or feet/min.The unit of feed rate is m/rev or inch/rev. 2 When SPECIAL is selected for TOOL MATERIAL (MT), actual machining conditions are calculated by multiplying override value in the system parameter No.321, 322 to the given machining conditions for carbide tool.
For the details of the definition method,refer to chapter V section 1, MATERIAL DATA, ofthe OPERATORs MANUAL for CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, B61804E2. (2) Tool Data Tool data necessary for CAXIS REAMING and CAXIS BORING can be specified in the same manner as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. To define tool data for CAXIS REAMING or CAXIS BORING, specify REAMER or BORE for the parameter, TOOL TYPE, respecitively. TOOL TYPE TP= 5: REAMER 6: BORING
Enter following tool shape parameters for Reamer and Bore.

516
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(REAMER) TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP;REAMER(M) TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . DT= CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . LT= PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . LE= (BORING) TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP; BORING (M) TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . MT; TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . DT= CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS= CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . LT= Enter other parameters in the same manner as other milling tools. Refer to chapter V section 2.2, Tool Display and Setting, of the OPERATORs MANUAL for CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, B61804E2, for detailed procedure. (3) Tooling Information Tolling data necessary for CAXIS REAMING and CAXIS BORING can be specified in the same manner as that of CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION. Refer to chapter V section 2.4, Tooling Information Display and Setting, of the OPERATORs MANUAL for CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, B61804E2, for detailed procedure.
517
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
8.3
PARAMETERS 8.3.1
System Parameters
No. 0316 Format 0,1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00000000 Description Single Step parameter for CAXIS REAMING
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Process parameters
Remarks
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0: 1: 0317 0,1 designation (8 bits) 00000000
Start of process Just before approach Just before return relief Do not stop. Stop
Single Step parameter for CAXIS REAMING (Same as parameter No.316)
(2) Machining Parameters

No. 0380 Format 0,1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00100100 Description CAXIS REAMING PARAMETER
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Remarks
Bit 1 Coolant 0 : Do not use 1 : Use Bit 2 Cancel tool offset 0 : Do not output 1 : Output Bit 3,4 Approach 00 : 1 axis at a time 01 : 2axis simultaneously 10 : 3 axis simultaneously Bit 5 Return relief (X,Z axis) 0 : 2 axis simultaneously 1 : 1 axis at a time Bit 7 Setting window for passing point 0 : Do not show 1 : Show 0381 0,1 designation (8 bits) 00100100 CAXIS REAMING PARAMETER (Same as parameter No.380)
518
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(3) Cutting condition parameters

No. 0390 0391 0392 0393 0394 0395 0396 Format Real Number Real Number Real Number Real Number Real Number Real Number Real Number Initial value 2.(mm) 0.08(inch) 2.(mm) 0.08(inch) 5. 2.(mm) 0.08(inch) 2.(mm) 0.08(inch) 0. 2. Description Clearance value for CAXIS REAMING (C1) Unit: mm or inch Clearance value for CAXIS REAMING (C2) Unit: mm or inch Retracing feed rate override for CAXIS REAMING (1.010.0) Clearance value for CAXIS BORING (C1) Unit: mm or inch Clearance value for CAXIS BORING (C2) Unit: mm or inch Dwell time for CAXIS BORING Retracing feed rate override foe CAXIS BORING (1.010.0) Note 1 Note 1 Remarks Note 1 Note 1
NOTE When saved into the submemory, these data are stored in appropriate place which corresponds to the current setting of the increment system.
(4) System Parameters concerning Color Display

No. 0591 0592 Format Integer Integer Initial value 2 2 Description Color of the Machining path of CAXIS REAMING Color of the Machining path of CAXIS BORING Remarks Green Green
8.3.2
MTF Parameters
No. 1304 Format 0,1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00000011
(1) Machine Tool File

Description Used fixed cycle or not. (for C/YAXIS only) 0 : Do not use 1: Use fixed cycle for corresponding process.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Center Drilling Drilling CAXIS Boring 1313 1314 Integer Integer 1 1 Mcode for forward tool rotation Mcode for reverse tool rotation
519
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
No. 1342
Format 0,1 designation (8 bits)
Initial value 00000000 CAXIS BORING options

Bit 7 6 5 4 3
Description
Bit 0 0: 1: Bit 1 0: 1: Bit 2 0: 1: Bit 2 0: 1: 1356 1376 Integer Real Number 19 89. 85. 1377 Real Number 89. 89. 1378 Real Number 86.1 1 1379 Real Number 86.1 1 1401 1402 1403 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters QQ KK II
Feed rate for the retracting motion of FINE BORING, when fixed cycle is mot used. (MTF 1304#4=0) Rapid traverse feed Cutting feed with override Address for the SHIFT motion of FINE BORING when fixed cycle is used. (MTF 1304#4=1) (valid for FS15TFB/TTFB only) Address Q Address I, K Direction of the SHIFT motion of FINE BORING along XAXIS positive direction (+) negative direction () Direction of the SHIFT motion of FINE BORING along ZAXIS positive direction (+) negative direction ()
Mcode Spindle Orientation FS15TFBTTFB FS16TA, S16/18TB, FS16/18TC, FS16i/18iTA FS15TFB/TTFB FS16TA, S16/18TB, FS16/18TC, FS16i/18iTA FS15TFB/TTFB FS16TA, S16/18TB, FS16/18TC, FS16i/18iTA FS15TFB/TTFB FS16TA, S16/18TB, FS16/18TC, FS16i/18iTA Address for the SHIFT command of Fixed Boring Cycle 2 (specify 2 identical letters) Address for the SHIFT motion along Zaxis (specify 2 identical letters) Address for the SHIFT motion along Xaxis (specify 2 identical letters) Gcode for the fixed boring cycle 2 (FINE BORING) (Side face) Gcode for the fixed boring cycle 2 (FINE BORING) (End face) Gcode for the fixed boring cycle 1 (Side face) Gcode for the fixed boring cycle 1 (End face)
520
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(2) Function Table

No. 2216 2217 2218 2219 2226 2227 2236 2237 2250 2251 Description FIXED BORING cycle 1 (NO.1) FIXED BORING cycle 1 (NO.2) FIXED BORING cycle 2 (NO.1) FIXED BORING cycle 2 (NO.2) Start of CAXIS REAMING Start of CAXIS BORING End of CAXIS REAMING End of CAXIS BORING Spindle orientation Spindle restart Referred to for CAXIS BORING type 2 (Not using fixed cycle). BORING BORING FINE BORING FINE BORING FS16/18TC, FS16i/18iTA CAP II only Remarks
D Default settings for MTF22162251

MTF 2216= 5702, 5802, 6002,6702,1101, 0001, AA01, 0903,0C03,0503 G17 G98 G98 G89 X Z C R P F G18 G99 G19 MTF 2217= 0B03, 0004, 0000,0000,0000 L ; K MTF 2218= 5702, 5802, 6002,6702,1101, 0001, AA01, 0903,1603,1803 (5E00 SERIES) G17 G98 G98 G86. 1 X Z C R Q I G18 G99 G19 MTF 2219= 1703, 0C03,0503,0B03,0004,0000, 0000, 0000 (5E00 SERIES) K P F L ; MTF 2226= 0100, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000 (5900, 5F00 SERIES) FEED MTF 2227= 0100, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000 (5900, 5F00 SERIES) FEED MTF 2236= 0100, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000 (5900, 5F00 SERIES) FEED MTF 2237= 0100, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000 (5900, 5F00 SERIES) FEED MTF 2250= 1805, 0004, 0000,0000,0000,0000 M19 ; MTF 2251= 0005, 0004, 0000,0000,0000,0000 M03 ; M04
Settings of MTF2216/2217/2218/MTF2219 for the SERIES other than 5E00 are as follows.
MTF 2216= 5802, 6002, 6702,1101,0001,AA01, 0903, 0C03,0503,0B03 G98 G98 G85 X Z C R P F L G99 G78 K MTF 2217= 0004, 0000, 0000,0000 ; MTF 2218= 0000, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000, 0000, 0000,0000,0000 MTF 2219= 0000, 0000, 0000,0000,0000,0000, 0000, 0000
521
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(3) Function Code a. Gcode

3MSDs LSD Function Output Gcode specified by MTF1376, 1377 (default G89) Output Gcode specified by MTF1378, 1379 (default G86.1) Remarks BORING
FINE BORING (FS15TFB/TTFB only)
b. F,S,T or other code

3MSDs LSD Function Output address word specified by 1 6 0 3 MTF1401 (default address word Q) Output address word specified by 1 7 0 3 MTF1402 (default address word K) Output address word specified by 1 8 0 3 MTF1403 (default address word I) Remarks Address for the SHIFT motion used in Fine Boring Fixed Cycle (FS15TFB/TTFB only) Address for the SHIFT motion along Zaxis used in Fine Boring Fixed Cycle (FS15TFB/TTFB only) Address for the SHIFT motion along Xaxis used in Fine Boring Fixed Cycle (FS15TFB/TTFB only)
c. Mcode
3MSDs LSD Function Output Gcode specified by MTF1356 for spindle orientation Remarks
522
B63304EN/02
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
8.4
RESTRICTIONS
Following machining processes are not supported by the Automatic Process Determination Function. 1) CAXIS REAMING 2) CAXIS BORING
523
IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
The Yaxis FAPT function is provided as an option. The following Yaxis machining can be programmed by using this function.
527
1. OVERVIEW
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
1.1
DRILLING
Center drilling (CENTER DRILL), drilling (THROUGH HOLE), and tapping (TAP) on a side face and end face can be programmed.
Both on a side face and end face, hole figures can be specified on a circumference (CIRCLE HOLE), line (LINE HOLE), or at a desired position (RANDOM HOLE).
528
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW
1.2
MILLING
The following machining can be programmed: 1) Machining a pattern On a side face and end face, a rectangle with rounded corners, like that shown below, can be programmed as a pattern.
This pattern can be used to perform the following machining:
529
1. OVERVIEW
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
2) Machining a desired figure A desired figure can be input by using the arrow keys. The tool path can be specified on the right side, left side, or center of the input figure. The following machining can be programmed:
530
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW
1.3
ROTATING THE MACHINING PLANE
If the Caxis angles (phase) of the desired machining planes are specified, as well as the figure to be machined, the figure can be machined on the specified planes. The following figure shows holes of identical figures machined on plane A (0), plane B (90), plane C (180), and plane D (270). Only a single hole figure is programmed for this machining.
531
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
532
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2.1
SPECIFYING A YAXIS MACHINING PROFILE
After the figure of a part to be turned is input using menu 2, the following soft keys are displayed on the screen.
Press the [YAXIS MENU] soft key. The menu screen for programming a Yaxis machining profile is displayed.
Upon the display of the FIGURE TYPE = prompt, input the number of the desired machining profile (1 to 10). The detailed data input screen is displayed. NOTE Up to 10 profiles can be input.
533
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Soft keys ESCAPE: PART FIGURE: ALL DELETE: NEW: CHECK ALL: CURSOR CURSOR : NEXT PAGE: Returns the display to the program menu screen. Displays the figure definition screen for turning. Deletes all defined data for a Yaxis figure. Cancels the defined data for a Yaxis figure. Press this key to define a new Yaxis figure. Draws a figure according to the defined data. Moves the cursor forward and backward. Displays the data setting screen selected by the cursor. If this soft key is pressed after the cursor has been positioned to an undefined number, the program menu screen is displayed.
534
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2.2
SPECIFYING THE YAXIS FIGURE DATA
535
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
The data input screen, featuring a figure for Yaxis machining (excluding the machining of a figure on a side face or end face) is configured as shown below:
Soft keys ESCAPE: Returns the display to the program menu screen. (The input data becomes valid.) BACK PAGE: Returns the display to Y axis machining menu screen. When this key is depressed in the course of data setting, the already input data becomes invalid. (It becomes valid when CHECK is pressed, however.) CHECK: Draws the figure according to the input data. (Only patterns defined here are drawn.) CURSOR CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward. NEXT PAGE: Y axis machining menu screen proceeds. (1) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the end face
Specify the following values: PLANE (ZAXIS): DEPTH: THREADING DIA:

536
PZ = Position of the drilling plane DT = Hole depth WT = Hole diameter
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
THROUGH HOLE: CENTER DRILL: TAPPING: (YAXIS): CIRCLE RADIUS: INTERVAL:
TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining CY = Center of the circumference (radius) RD = Radius of the circumference AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at regular intervals (0 for regular intervals, 1 for irregular intervals) AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at irregular intervals) A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the first hole if multiple holes are to be drilled) A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes are drilled
C.CENTER (XAXIS): CDX = Center of the circumference (diameter)
HOLE QUANTITY:
ANGLE:
POS.QUANTITY: POSITION ANGLE:
NG = Number of phases (up to 6) G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
537
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
NOTE If VARIABLE is selected in response to the INTERVAL prompt, it is necessar y to specify that the angles A1 to AE rotate in the same direction. If this r equirement is not satisfied, a Necessary data missing error is detected. This holds true also for phase angles. (2) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the end face
Specify the following values: PLANE (ZAXIS): PZ = Position of the drilling plane DEPTH: DT = Hole depth THREADING DIA: WT = Hole diameter THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole CENTER DRILL: CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TAPPING: TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining POSITION (YAXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius) INTERVAL: AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at regular intervals (0 for regular intervals, 1 for irregular intervals) HOLE PITCH: PH = Interval between holes when drilled at regular intervals (radius) HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at irregular intervals) HOLE POSITION: DX1=Hole position (X coordinate, the position of the first hole when multiple holes are drilled) DX2=Position of the second hole (diameter, for drilling at irregular intervals) DX3=Position of the third hole (diameter, for drilling at irregular intervals)
538
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
SHIFT COUNT: SHIFT VALUE: POS.QUANTITY: POSITION ANGLE:
DX4=Position of the fourth hole (diameter, for drilling at irregular intervals) DX5=Position of the fifth hole (diameter, for drilling at irregular intervals) DX6=Position of the last hole if multiple holes are drilled (diameter) NS = Number of rows of holes to be drilled SH= Interval between rows if multiple rows of holes are drilled (radius) NG = Number of phases (up to 6) G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
(3) Screen for specifying holes at desired positions on the end face
Specify the following values: PLANE (ZAXIS): PZ = Position of the drilling plane
539
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
DEPTH: THREADING DIA: THROUGH HOLE: CENTER DRILL: TAPPING: HOLE QUANTITY: HOLE POSITION:
DT = Hole depth WT = Hole diameter TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining AC = Number of holes (Up to 6) DX1=Position of the first hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y1 = Position of the first hole (Y coordinate, radius) DX2=Position of the second hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y2 = Position of the second hole (Y coordinate, radius) DX3=Position of the third hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y3 = Position of the third hole (Y coordinate, radius) DX4=Position of the fourth hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y4 = Position of the fourth hole (Y coordinate, radius) DX5=Position of the fifth hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y5 = Position of the fifth hole (Y coordinate, radius) DX6=Position of the sixth hole (X coordinate, diameter) Y6 = Position of the sixth hole (Y coordinate, radius) NG = Number of phases (up to 6) G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
540
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(4) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the side face
Specify the following values: PLANE (XAXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (radius) DEPTH: DT = Hole depth THREADING DIA: WT = Hole diameter THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole CENTER DRILL: CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TAPPING: TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining C.CENTER (ZAXIS): CZ = Center of the circumference (YAXIS): CY = Center of the circumference (radius) CIRCLE RADIUS: RD = Radius of the circumference INTERVAL: AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at regular intervals (0 for regular intervals, 1 for irregular intervals) HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at irregular intervals) ANGLE: A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the first hole when multiple holes are drilled)
541
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes are drilled NG = Number of phases (up to 6) G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
(5) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the side face
Specify the following values: PLANE (XAXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter)
542
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
DT = Hole depth WT = Hole diameter TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TAPPING: TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining POSITION (YAXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius) INTERVAL: AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at regular intervals (0 for regular intervals, 1 for irregular intervals) HOLE PITCH: PH = Interval between holes if they are drilled at regular intervals HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at irregular intervals) HOLE POSITION: Z1 = Hole position (Zcoordinate, the position of the first hole if multiple holes are drilled) Z2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) Z3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at irregular intervals) Z6 = Position of the last hole if multiple holes are drilled SHIFT COUNT: NS = Number of rows of holes (up to 6 rows) SHIFT VALUE: SH = Interval between rows if multiple rows of holes are drilled POS.QUANTITY: NG = Number of phases (up to 6) POSITION ANGLE: G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
DEPTH: THREADING DIA: THROUGH HOLE: CENTER DRILL:
543
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(6) Screen for specifying the positions of holes on a side face
Specify the following values: PLANE (XAXIS): PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter) DEPTH: DT = Hole depth THREADING DIA: WT = Hole diameter THROUGH HOLE: TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole CENTER DRILL: CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other machining TAPPING: TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining HOLE QUANTITY: AC = Number of holes (Up to 6) HOLE POSITION: Z1 = Position of the first hole (Z coordinate) Y1 = Position of the first hole (Y coordinate, radius) Z2 = Position of the second hole (Z coordinate) Y2 = Position of the second hole (Y coordinate, radius)
544
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Z3 = Position of the third hole (Z coordinate) Y3 = Position of the third hole (Y coordinate, radius) Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (Z coordinate) Y4 = Position of the fourth hole (Y coordinate, radius) Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (Z coordinate) Y5 = Position of the fifth hole (Y coordinate, radius) Z6 = Position of the sixth hole (Z coordinate) Y6 = Position of the sixth hole (Y coordinate, radius) NG = Number of phases (up to 6) G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
545
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(7) Screen for specifying a pattern on the end face
Specify the following values: PLANE (ZAXIS): PZ = Position of the cutting plane DEPTH: DT = Cutting depth T.CENTER (XAXIS): SDX=Center of the rectangle (diameter) (YAXIS): SY = Center of the rectangle (radius) TRACK WIDTH: U = Width of the rectangle (radius) TRACK LENGTH: V = Length of the rectangle (radius) ROUNDNESS: R = Radius if the corners are rounded (Indicate nondefinition if no corner is to be rounded.) POS.QUANTITY: NG = Number of phases (up to 6) POSITION ANGLE: G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
546
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(8) Screen for specifying a pattern on a side face
Specify the following values: PLANE (XAXIS): PDX=Position of the cutting plane (diameter) DEPTH: DT = Cutting depth T.CENTER (ZAXIS): SZ = Center of the rectangle (YAXIS): SY = Center of the rectangle (radius) TRACK WIDTH: W = Width of the rectangle TRACK LENGTH: V = Length of the rectangle (radius) ROUNDNESS: R = Radius of rounding if the corners are rounded POS.QUANTITY: NG = Number of phases (up to 6) POSITION ANGLE: G1 = Position of the first phase (angle) G2 = Position of the second phase (angle) G3 = Position of the third phase (angle) G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle) G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle) G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)
547
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(9) Screen for checking a figure
When the [CHECK] soft key is pressed on the detailed figure data setting screen, the figure is drawn according to the data set as shown above. If a figure has been programmed with symbolic keys, the figure is drawn simultaneously. The screen used for programming a figure does not have the [CHECK] soft key. (See (12) and (13) below.) The figure above shows the hole figures on the side face. The side view on the left shows the hole positions in the YZ plane. The front view, on the right, shows the position of the upper end of the hole with a dotted line. If hole figures on the end face are displayed, the front view, on the right, indicates the hole positions in the XY plane with circles (f). The side view, on the left, uses a dotted line to indicate the upper end of the hole. (10) Screen for checking an entire figure
When the [CHECK ALL] soft key is pressed on the Yaxis figure definition menu screen, the figure selected with the cursor is drawn as shown above. To draw another programmed figure, press the [LAST FIGURE] or [NEXT FIGURE] soft key.
548
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(11) Screen for specifying a figure on an end face
The XY plane is drawn and the prompts relating to the figure elements and coordinates are displayed. Input a desired figure, using symbolic keys. The following figure elements can be specified: RC Program a diameter as an X coordinate and a radius as a Y coordinate. When the first element is specified, the CP = prompt is displayed. In response to the prompt, specify the side to be cut, viewed from the start point of the element. CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element Two or more singlestroke figures can be input. After a single figure (singlestroke figure) has been defined, the ES = prompt is displayed. In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key. The DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? prompt is displayed. In response to this prompt, enter 1, INPUT. Then, repeat the procedure used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of a second figure, enter 0, INPUT. Up to ten singlestroke figures can be programmed. (See additional information 1.) NOTE Figures cannot be defined in directory mode.
549
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(12) Screen for specifying a figure on a side face
The YZ plane is drawn and prompts relating to figure elements and coordinates are displayed. Input a figure, using the symbolic keys. The following figure elements can be specified: RC Program a radius as both a Y coordinate and Z coordinate. The rest of the procedure is the same as that for specifying a figure on an end face. When the first element is specified, the prompt CP = is displayed. In response to this prompt, specify the side to be cut, as viewed from the start point of the element. CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element Two or more singlestroke figures can be input. After a single figure (singlestroke figure) has been defined, the prompt ES = is displayed. In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key. The DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? prompt is displayed. In response to this prompt, enter 1, INPUT. Then, repeat the procedure used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of the second figure, enter 0, INPUT. Up to ten singlestroke figures can be programmed. (See additional information 1.)
550
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTE A figure cannot be defined in directory mode.
[Additional information 1] (a) Defining a figure 1) Once a desired figure (singlestroke figure) has been defined, the following prompt is displayed: ES = In response to the prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key. Then, the following prompt is displayed: DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES, 0: NO) To define only one singlestroke figures, enter 0 (NO). The Yaxis menu screen is displayed. To define tow or more singlestroke figures, enter 1 (YES). The prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is displayed. (Usually, the prompt relating to the start point is displayed after the first figure element has been entered. In this case, however, the prompt is displayed before any figure elements have been entered.) If the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key is pressed in response to the ES = prompt, before the end point of the last element has been determined, the NO END POINT OF THE LAST FIGURE error message is displayed. The subsequent screen is not displayed. 2) Specify the start point of each figure with an absolute value. The start point of the second or subsequent figure cannot be specified with an incremental value relative to the coordinates of the end point of the previous figure. 3) If multiple figures are defined, a dividing point between figures is represented by a period (.). 4) Deleting and inserting a figure element (i) Position the cursor to the element to be deleted and press the [ELEMENT DELETE] soft key. A period (.), which is used as the element to divide figures, cannot be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a period, the THE KEY IS INVALID message is displayed. (ii)To insert a figure element, simply follow the procedure for defining a part figure. To insert a figure between alreadydefined figures, follow the steps described below: (1) Position the cursor to the period (.) dividing the existing figures. (2) Press the [FIGURE INSERT] soft key. (3) A prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is displayed. In response to this prompt, enter the necessary data. Then, follow the procedure for defining a part figure.
551
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(b) Displaying figure elements 1) Displaying figure elements
A group of figure elements that can be drawn by a single keystroke is displayed as a single figure and separated by a period. The period cannot be directly entered nor deleted by using the operation keys. 2) The start point of the first element of the first figure becomes the machining start point when the NC data are created. Bearing this in mind, define the part figure. The figures are machined in the order in which they are defined. 3) To define a second or subsequent figure, specify the data of the start point, then key in the figure element. This step differs from the corresponding step for defining the first figure. (To define the first figure, enter the figure element. Then, the prompt relating to the start point is displayed.) (c) Notes The following restrictions are imposed on the definition of multiple singlestroke figures: NOTE 1 The side to be cut (CP) cannot be changed for each individual figure. 2 A stepped figure cannot be defined. (For each definition)
552
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3)
SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3)
On the HOME & INDEX POSITION screen of menu 3, the following prompts are displayed. Program a diameter as the X coordinate and a radius as the Y and Z coordinates. Home position DXH = ZH = YH = DXI = ZI = YI =
Index position
The initial values can be specified in system parameters 0207 to 0229. These prompts can be skipped if bit 3 of system parameter 0009 is specified accordingly.
553
4. DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4)
The following describes the Yaxis machining that can be programmed using this function. This function is optional.
554
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.1
MACHINING DEFINITION MENU
Center drilling, drilling, and tapping can be programmed for side and end faces.
To select Yaxis machining on menu 4 MACHINING DEFINITION, press the [MILLING] soft key.
The soft keys of (a), below, are displayed. Select the desired type of Yaxis machining. If the rightmost soft key [ ] is pressed, the subsequent sets of soft keys are displayed in the following order: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (a) Yaxis machining
(b) Caxis machining
555
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(c) Center drilling/drilling
(d) Turning
(e) Grooving/threading
NOTE 1 Pattern machining on an end face or side face is defined. 2 Machining of a figure on an end face or side face is defined.
556
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.2
TOOL DATA
1) Tool data
A rotary tool is always used for Yaxis machining. a. Yaxis center drilling: Use a center drill (M)(Note 1). b. Yaxis drilling: Use a drill (M). c. Yaxis tapping: Use a tap (M). d. Yaxis pattern machining: Use an end mill (M). e. Yaxis contouring: Use an end mill (M). NOTE 1 (M) represents a rotary tool for milling 2 Use the same tool data and material data as that used for Caxis machining. For details, see the chapter on the Caxis FAPT function.
Enter the following tool figure data: Center drill TOOL DIAMETER: DRILL SIZE: CUT LENGTH: NOSE ANGLE: Drill TOOL DIAMETER: CUT LENGTH: NOSE ANGLE: Tap TOOL DIAMETER: CUT LENGTH: TECH LENGH: PITCH: End mill TOOL DIAMETER: CUT WIDTH: TOOTH LENGTH: NUMBER OF TEETH:
557
DT = DS = LT = AT = DT = LT = AT = DT = LT = LE = PT = DT = DS = LT = NT =
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Enter the tool setting position, as follows: SETTING POSITION XS = (radius) ZS = (radius) YS = (radius) 2) Machining start position Enter the following data: MACHINING START POSITION X coordinate DX0 = (diameter) Z coordinate Z0 = (radius) Y coordinate Y0 = (radius) 3) Passing points Enter the following data. Program a diameter as an X coordinate and a radius as a Y and Z coordinate. Passing points to start machining First point XA1 = ZA1 = YA1 = Second point XA 2 = ZA2 = YA2 = Passing points to end machining First point XE1 = ZE1 = YE1 = Second point XE2 = ZE2 = YE2 =
558
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.3
CUTTING AREA
When two or more figures are machined in a single process, the cutting area definition screen is displayed. On this screen, the target figures are drawn as shown above. Press the [LAST FIGURE] or [NEXT FIGURE] soft key to select the desired figure.
559
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
4.4
CUTTING CONDITIONS
WARNING The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
1) Cutting conditions Enter the following cutting conditions for the machining: a. Yaxis center drilling DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm) CLEARANCE: RPM: FEEDRATE: b. Yaxis drilling b1. Drilling method 1 CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) DWELL ON/OFF: DW =1 for dwell at the bottom of the hole, 0 for no dwell RPM: FEEDRATE: b2. Drilling method 2 CLEARANCE: RETRACTION: RPM: FEEDRATE: b3. Drilling method 3 CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) C3 = Clearance 3 (mm) DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm) RPM: FEEDRATE: N= Tool rotational speed (rpm) FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool (mm/rev) C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) U= N= Retraction distance (mm) Tool rotational speed (rpm) DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm) FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool (mm/rev) N= Tool rotational speed (rpm) FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool (mm/rev) C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) N= Tool rotational speed (rpm) FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool (mm/rev)
560
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
c. Yaxis tapping c1. Tapping method 1 CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) RPM: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm) c2. Tapping method 2 (rigid tapping) CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) RPM: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm) c3. Tapping method 3 (rigid tapping with pecking): FANUC Series 15TFB/TTFB only CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm) RPM: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm) d. Yaxis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing) d1. Machining method 1 (See 2) Cutting patterns.) CUTTING DIRECTION: CD =Cutting direction (See (*) Cf1 below.) DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut (See (*) Cf1 below.) CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance (mm) (See (*) Cf2 below.) DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm) ROTATION SPEED: N = Tool rotational speed (rpm) FEEDRATE: FT = Feed amount for each tooth in the transverse direction of the tool (mm/rev) FR = Feed amount for each tooth in the longitudinal direction of the tool (mm/rev) d2. Machining method 2 (See 2) Cutting patterns.) CUTTING DIRECTION: CD =Cutting direction (See (*) Cf1 below.) DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut (See (*) Cf1 below.) CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm) C2 = Clearance 2 (mm) FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance (mm) (See (*) Cf2 below.) DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
561
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
ROTATION SPEED: FEEDRATE:
N=
Tool rotational speed (rpm)
FT = Feed amount for each tooth in the transverse direction of the tool (mm/rev) FR = Feed amount for each tooth in the longitudinal direction of the tool (mm/rev)
e. Yaxis contouring (machining a desired figure) MACHINING TYPE: CLEARANCE: TP = Machining type 1, 2, or 3 (See (*) Cf3 below.) C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
(FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance (mm). This prompt is displayed when machining type 2 is selected.) ROTATION SPEED: FEEDRATE: N= Tool rotational speed (rpm) FT = Feed amount for each tooth in the transverse direction of the tool (mm/rev) FR = Feed amount for each tooth in the longitudinal direction of the tool (mm/rev) APPROACH METHOD: SM = Approach type (See (*) Cf4 below.) DT = Length in the tangent direction (mm) DN = Length in the normal direction (mm) ESCAPE METHOD: EM = Escape type (See (*) Cf4 below.) DT = Length in the tangent direction (mm) DN = Length in the normal direction (mm) (*) Cf1. CD =, DR =: Set the direction, using an arrow key (, , or ). (*) Cf2. TS = 0 or an undefined value: Finishing is not performed. (*) Cf3. TP = 1: Only roughing is performed. TP = 2: Only finishing is performed. TP = 3: Finishing is performed after roughing has been completed. (*) Cf4. SE/EM = 1: Direct approach/escape SE/EM = 2: Tangent approach/escape SE/EM = 3: Normal approach/escape SE/EM = 4: Approach/escape along a tangent circle
562
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
2) Cutting patterns a. Yaxis center drilling
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
b. Yaxis drilling b1. Drilling method 1
b2. Drilling method 2
563
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
b3. Drilling method 3
c. Yaxis tapping c1, c2. Tapping methods 1 and 2
c3. Tapping method 3 (15TFB/TTFB only)
564
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
d. Yaxis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing) d1. Machining methods Machining method 1 Cutting is made in a single direction as shown below. Upon the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed along the contour except when the finishing allowance is set to 0 or is not defined. (See d3 below.)
Machining method 2 Cutting is performed in both directions, as shown below. Upon the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed along the contour except if the finishing allowance is set to 0 or is not defined. (See d3 below.)
565
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
d2. Clearance For machining method 1 or 2, specify the following clearances: (1) In safety first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309 is set to 0)
Blank figure
When safety first mode is selected, the tool is moved to a position determined from the maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode during approach/beginning of cutting. From this position, the tool is moved in cutting feed mode to start cutting. At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is returned to the position determined from the maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode.
566
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(2) In efficiency first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309 is set to 1)
Blank figure
When efficiency first mode is selected, the tool is moved through a position determined from the maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, to a position determined by the dimension of the cutting plane, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode at approach/beginning of cutting. From that position, the tool is moved in the cutting feed mode to start cutting. At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is moved back through the position determined from the dimension of the cutting plane, plus clearance C1, to the position determined from the maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode.
567
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Top view (Machining method 1)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting EP: Position of end of cutting/escape TS: Finishing allowance D1: Depth of cut C2: Clearance
568
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(Machining method 2)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting EP: Position of end of cutting/escape TS: Finishing allowance D1: Depth of cut
569
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
d3. Direction of cutting in finishing Finishing is started from the position at which roughing (machining method 1 or 2) ended. The tool is manipulated to cut off the finishing allowance.
The direction of finish cutting is determined from the shortest of the direction of cut and the direction of cutting.
Direction of feed
Direction of feed
570
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
d4. Corner rounding The position of approach depends on whether the corners are rounded. (Escape is the reverse of an approach operation.)
e. Yaxis contouring (machining a figure) Cutting on side face Cutting on end face
571
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
e1. Roughing/finishing Roughing for contouring of type 1 or 3 is executed to leave a finishing allowance around the defined part figure.
Position of the tool used for roughing
Tool path : Left side viewed from the start point of figure definition
Tool path : Right side viewed from the start point of figure definition Contour produced by roughing
WARNING The cutting position (CP), viewed from the point at which the definition of a part figure element is started, represents the difference between outer surface contouring and inner surface contouring. Outer surface contouring: The cutting position is on the left, viewed from the start point of figure definition (CP = 1). Inner surface contouring: The cutting position is on the right, viewed from the start point of figure definition (CP = 0).
If cutting is performed for the contour of a defined figure element, outer surface contouring cannot be differentiated from inner surface contouring. e2. Approach/escape method The following four approach/escape patterns are supported for contouring: (1) Direct approach (escape) (2) Tangent approach (escape) (3) Normal approach (escape) (4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle
572
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
The prompt relating to the approach/escape method is not displayed if cutting is performed for the contour of the defined figure. (1) Direct approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1) A cut is directly made from the approach point to the machining start position. (2) Tangent approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1) The following prompt is added:
LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch)
Cutting start point
Machining start point
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed from the start point (CP = 1) (3) Normal approach (escape): SM = 3 (EM = 3) The following prompt is added:
LENGTH: DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
Part figure
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Right side viewed from the start point (CP = 0)
573
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
(4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle: SM = 4 (EM = 4) The following prompt is added:
LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch) DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed from the start point (CP = 1) [Additional information] 1) An undefined input for the approach or escape method is not accepted. An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not accepted, either. 2) If finishing is performed after roughing in end facing, the tool is returned by an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the Zaxis at the end of roughing. (In side facing, the tool is returned by an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the Xaxis.) Then, finishing is started. 3) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF1305 is set to 1) and if approach or escape along a tangent line or circle is specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is referenced when the movement is inserted. System parameter
No. Format Initial value 1.0 371 Real number 0.1 Description Extension for approach or escape along a tangent line or circle during Caxis notching or Yaxis contouring Unit: mm or inch
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a positive value for this parameter. The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following operation, depending on the approach/retraction method:
574
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
31) Direct approach/retraction The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or escape method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF1305 has been set to 1, the CORRECT KEYIN error message is displayed. The attempted input is not accepted. If bit 0 of MTF1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/escape has been defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the NC data. The NC data cannot be created. 32) Tangent approach/escape For approach or escape, a linear movement equal to the extension is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
SPA: Cut start point SPA: Cut start point for starting the compensation SP: Cutting start point EP: Cutting end point EPE: Escape end point EPE: Escape end point for ending the compensation Continuous line: Programmed tool path Dotted line: Actual tool path
575
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
33) Normal approach/retraction For approach or escape, a linear movement equal to the extension amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
34) Approach/escape along a tangent circle For approach or escape, a linear movement equal to the extension is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
576
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF1305 is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path. Example: Cutting with normal approach/escape on the right side of a blank outline
577
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6)
In 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, the animated simulation function has been improved. When using CAP II of the above models, see Part XIII, Animated Simulation Function II. Yaxis machining is simulated for the YZ and XY planes. 1) The following planes are displayed as the side view and front view for turning, Caxis machining, and Yaxis machining:
side view Turning and Caxis machining Yaxis machining XZ plane YZ plane Front view XC plane XY plane
2) 3)
4)
5)
* The names of the current coordinate systems are displayed on the screen. (See Figs. 5 (a), (b), and (c).) The blank outline is painted out, in green, in the drawings of the side face and end face. The tool for Yaxis machining on the end face is drawn as shown in Fig. 5 (b). The tool for Yaxis machining on the side face is drawn as shown in Fig. 5 (c). During machining simulation, the picture of the blank figure can be refreshed. The following two methods are supported: a. [REFRESH] soft key If this soft key is pressed during simulation, the displayed blank figure, tool path, and machining path are refreshed. b. Automatic refresh At the end of each Yaxis machining process, the blank figure, tool path, and machining path are refreshed. In Yaxis side facing, the data is refreshed each time the phase angle is changed. To simulate Yaxis machining, set related system parameters. See f, Parameters related to animated simulation in 6, system Parameters.
578
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Fig. 5 (a)
Fig. 5 (b) (Yaxis end facing)
579
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Fig. 5 (c) (Yaxis side facing)
580
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
WARNING System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data, described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. a. Parameters to enable the skipping of prompts
Parameter No. 0009 Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00010000 Description Specify to skip a particular question.
Bit 7 0 6 5 0 4 3 0 2 1 0
Remarks
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 6
Designation of index position Designation of home position Designation of machining start point Designation of Yaxis index position and home position Selection of drawing format Selection of standard surface roughness 0: Non skip 0: Skip
581
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
b. Common parameters for Caxis machining and Yaxis machining

Parameter No. 0320 Format Real number Initial value 0 Description Dwell time in a Caxis or Yaxis drilling process (unit: seconds) Cutting speed override for applications using a tool made of special material (percentage of the cutting speed for a carbide tool) Feed amount override for applications using a tool made of special material (percentage of the feed amount for a carbide tool) Maximum spindle speed for Caxis or Yaxis machining tool (unit: rpm) Extension amount for approach/escape along a tangent line or circle in Caxis notching or Yaxis contouring Unit: mm or inches Remarks
0321
Integer
80
0322
Integer
80
0370
Real number
2000 1.0
0371
Real number 0.1
c. Y coordinates of home and inde to positions

Parameter No. Format Initial value Undefined 0222 Real number Undefined Undefined 0223 Real number Undefined Undefined 0224 Real number Undefined Undefined 0225 Real number Undefined Undefined 0226 Real number Undefined Undefined 0227 Real number Undefined Undefined 0228 Real number Undefined Undefined 0229 Real number Undefined inch specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification mm specification Description Ycoordinate value of the home position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the home position (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the index position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the index position (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the home position on back side machining (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the home position on back side machining (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the index position on back side machining (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of the index position on back side machining (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe) Unit: mm or inch
582
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
d. System parameters related to a process (for Yaxis machining)

Parameter No. 0400 Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00100100 Description Yaxis center drilling process parameter
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Remarks For Yaxis machining
Bit 1
Coolant 0: Not used 1: Used
Bit 2
Cancellation of tool compensation 0: Not output 1: Output Bit 3, 4 Approach 00: Simultaneous 1 axis 01: Simultaneous 2 axis 10: Simultaneous 3 axis 11: Simultaneous 4 axis Bit 5, 6 Return relief 00: Simultaneous 1 axis 01: Simultaneous 2 axis 11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is: 0: Not displayed. 1: Displayed. 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0410 00000000 Yaxis drilling process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis tapping process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis pattern machining process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis contouring process parameter (refer to the For Yaxis machining parameter No.400) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Single step of Yaxis center drilling process
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
0401
00100100
0402
00100100
0403
00100100
0404
00100100
0405 to 0409
00000000
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Process start Just before approach Just before escape 0: Not stopped 1: Stopped
0411
0, 1 designation (8 bits)
00000000
Single step of Yaxis drilling process (refer to the parameter No.410)
583
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Parameter No.
Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits)
Initial value
Description Single step of Yaxis tapping process (refer to the parameter No.410) Single step of Yaxis pattern machining process (refer to the parameter No.410) Single step of Yaxis contouring process (refer to the parameter No.410) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis center drilling Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0412
00000000
0413
00000000
0414
00000000
0415 to 0419
00000000
2. 0420 Real number 0.08 0421 Real number Undefined 2. 0422 Real number 0.08 2. 0423 Real number 0.08 0424 Real number Undefined 2. 0425 Real number 0.08 2. 0426 Real number 0.08 2. 0427 Real number 0.08 2. 0428 Real number 0.08 0429 Real number Undefined 2. 0430 Real number 0.08 2. 0431 Real number 0.08
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 1) Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount (C2) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 1) Unit: mm or inch
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount (C2) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch Cutting depth (D1) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch Return relief amount (U) of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount (C2) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) Unit: mm or inch
584
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value 2. mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification
Description Clearance amount (C3) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) Unit: mm or inch Cutting depth (D1) of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0432
Real number 0.08 2.
0433
Real number 0.08
0434
Real number
Undefined 2.
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis tapping Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount (C2) of Yaxis drilling Unit: mm or inch Cutting depth (D1) of Yaxis tapping (machining method 3: Rigid tapping with pecking) Unit: mm or inch
0435
Real number 0.08 2.
0436
Real number 0.08 2.
0437
Real number 0.08
0438
Real number
Undefined 2.
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance (C1) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 1) Unit: mm or inch Clearance (C2) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 1) Unit: mm or inch Finishing allowance (TS) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 1) Unit: mm or inch
0439
Real number 0.08 2.
0440
Real number 0.08 2.
0441
Real number 0.08
0442 0443
Integer Real number
80 Undefined 2.
Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Clearance (C1) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch Clearance (C2) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch Finishing allowance (TS) of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 2) Unit: mm or inch
0444
Real number 0.08 2.
0445
Real number 0.08 2.
0446
Real number 0.08
0447
Integer
80
Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)
585
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0448
Format Real number
Initial value Undefined
Description Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification Clearance (CD) in longitudinal direction of the and clearance (C1) in circumferential direction of tool for Yaxis contouring Unit: mm or inch Finishing allowance Yaxis contouring Unit: mm or inch (TS) the tool the the
Remarks
2. 0449 Real number 0.08 0.5 0450 Real number 0.02 0451 to 0459 Real number Undefined
inch specification
mm specification inch specification
of
Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
e. System parameters related to color display (for Yaxis machining)

Standard setting value Parameter No. Value 0570 0571 0572 0573 0574 0575 to 0578 0579 2 2 2 2 2 Undefined 6 Color Green Green Green Green Green Undefined Light blue Machining path of Yaxis machining (center drilling) Machining path of Yaxis machining (drilling) Machining path of Yaxis machining (tapping) Machining path of Yaxis machining (pattern machining) Machining path of Yaxis machining (contouring) Not used Yaxis machining parts figure Description
f. Parameters related to animated simulation

Parameter No. 0733 0734 0771 Format Integer Integer Character Initial value Undefind Undefind Undefind Description Value of the M code used for starting Yaxis machining Value of the M code used for ending Yaxis machining Axis names and their order (Specify axis names in the order in which they are programmed on the NC. Example: XZCY) Remarks
586
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
WARNING The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below are different from those used for a production run. Actual setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
a. MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 1000 to 1999

Parameter No. Format Initial value 0.001 1022 Real number 0.0001 3 1032 Integer 4 1048 2 characters 2 characters YV inch specification Yaxis command address 1st character: absolute command 2nd character: incremental command Circular center address (designate 2 same characters) in Yaxis direction Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates 0: Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate 1: Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate (standard setting) 2: Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate 3: Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate Circular interpolation function 0: Two or more quadrants (Note 1) 1: One quadrant only (Note 1) 2: Specifying radius R 3: Specifying radius R (one quadrant only) (Note 1) The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become the addresses of the center on the axes. inch specification mm specification Number of decimal digits of the Yaxis minimum setting unit mm specification Description Yaxis minimum setting unit Unit: mm or inch
1049
JJ
1081
Integer
1082
Integer
587
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
Description Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or two axes if the Yaxis FAPT function is used (valid only when simultaneous approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in system parameters 0400 to 0405) 0: Approach is always started from the XY plane. Retraction is always started from the Zaxis. 1: End face Approach: Tool axis (Zaxis) Tool path (XY plane) Escape: Tool path (XY plane) Tool axis (Zaxis) Side face Approach: Tool axis (Xaxis) Tool path (ZY plane) Escape: Tool path (ZY plane) Tool axis (Xaxis) 2: Reverse movement sequence of 1 above (standard setting) 3: Approach is always started from the Zaxis. Escape is always started from the XY plane. mm specification inch specification Yaxis rapid traverse rate Unit: mm or inch
1084
Integer
4000. 1093 Integer 160.
1304
In each process, the specifications of a canned drilling cycle (Caxis or Yaxis) are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. 00000011
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Center drilling Drilling

Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
1305
00000000
Bit 0
For face milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of Yaxis pattern machining, and contouring, cutter compensation is: 0: Carried out by the FAPT. (G40, G41, or G42 is not output.) 1: Carried out by the NC. (G40, G41, and G42 are output.)
1350
Integer (3 bits)
29
M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping
588
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
b. Function table (MTF2000 to MTF2999)

Parameter No. Description Remarks
2018
Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse simultaneous approach along two axes. command, Outputs the block of move commands for coolant on, etc. simultaneous approach along four axes (with Yaxis FAPT). Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse simultaneous retraction along two axes. command, Outputs the block of move commands for coolant off, etc. simultaneous retraction along three axes (with Yaxis FAPT). First motion of approach along an axis. First motion of simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes as the same time (Yaxis) Second motion of approach along an axis. Second or subsequent motion in simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes (Yaxis). First motion of retraction along an axis. First motion of simultaneous retraction along one or two axes (Yaxis). Second motion of retraction along an axis. Second or subsequent motion of simultaneous retraction along one or two axes (Yaxis) Beginning part of Yaxis machining (Note 1) Beginning part of Yaxis center drilling Beginning part of Yaxis drilling Beginning part of Yaxis tapping Beginning of Yaxis pattern Beginning of Yaxis contouring Not used End part of Yaxis center drilling End part of Yaxis drilling End part of Yaxis tapping End of Yaxis pattern End of Yaxis contouring Beginning of a turning process (Note 2) Beginning of a milling process (Note 3) Block in which cutter compensation for face Valid when bit 7 milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of MTF1305 is of Yaxis pattern, or Yaxis contouring is started. set to 1 Block in which cutter compensation for face milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of Yaxis pattern, or Yaxis contouring is canceled.
2019
2031
2032
2033
2034 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2110 2111 2212
2213
589
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining. If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. 2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process. If two or more turning processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. 3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process. If two or more milling processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining process or Yaxis machining process. c. Function codes
Highorder three digits 2 5 2 5 0 0 Loworder one digit 1 1 Function 3rd axis output (Y axis) Remarks Address specified MTF1048 in in
3rd axis auxiliary output Address specified (circular center Y axis) MTF1049 Output of V0
Output when approach or retraction is simultaneously performed along two axes or when movement is performed along the Yaxis only Address of the first character in MTF1048 Address of the second character in MTF1048 Address of the first character in MTF1049 Address of the second character in MTF1049
2 2 5 5
0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0
7 7 7 7
Output of Y0 Output of Y0 Output of J0 Output of J0
590
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
d. Referring to a function table in a Yaxis machining process Example) Yaxis drilling
Point to be referenced (1) Home position (beginning of a program) (2) Home position Toolchange point (3) Toolchange point (beginning of a process)
Parameter No. 2000 2016 2017
Description Feed, EOB, program number G50X_Z_Y_; Movement to the toolchange point G0X_Z_Y_; Beginning of a milling process (Note 1) Beginning of a Yaxis machining process (Note 2) Beginning of a Yaxis machining process: 2072 for a drilling process Coordinate system setting, tool selection G50X_Z_Y_C_S_; GOT; Specifying spindle speed G97S_Mxx;
2111 2070 2071 to 2075 2202
2024
591
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Point to be referenced (4) Approach First movement from the toolchange point, coolant on
Parameter No. Servo motor control method 2018 or 2031 2032
Description
Simultaneous approach along four axes Simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes The number of axes along which movement is performed is determined by bits 3 and 4 of system parameters 400 to 404.
Spindle positioning method 2031 2032 2211 (5) to (9) Command of linear movement or rotation Simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2) Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3)
When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 0 (canned drilling cycle is not used) Servo motor control method 2017 Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed (linear movement or rotation)
Spindle positioning method 2017 2211 Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed (linear movement) Specifying spindle indexing
When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 1 (canned drilling cycle is used) Servo motor control method 2203 to 2206 Specifying a canned drilling cycle (linear movement or rotation)
Spindle positioning method 2203 to 2206 2211 Specifying a canned drilling cycle (linear movement) Specifying spindle indexing
WARNING 1 Specify whether the approach is simultaneously performed along one, two, or three axes. 2 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move command). 3 A Caxis move command is executed.
592
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTE 1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes. 2 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent process of continuous Yaxis processes.
Point to be referenced (10) Escape Movement to the toolchange point, coolant off
Parameter No. 2019 or 2033 2034
Description Simultaneous escape along three axes Simultaneous escape along one or two axes The number of axes along which the movement is performed is determined by bits 5 and 6 of system parameters 400 to 404. End part of the process: 2082 for a drilling process Txx00; M1; Movement to the home position G0X_Z_Y_;
(11) Toolchange point (End of the process) (12) Toolchange point machine zero point (13) Home position (end of the program)
2081 to 2085 2017
2001
Trailing section Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
593
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
Example)
Yaxis pattern machining
Point to be referenced (1) Home position (beginning of a program) (2) Home position Toolchange point (3) Toolchange point (beginning of a process)
Parameter No. 2000 2016 2017
Description Feed, EOB, program number G50X_Z_Y_; Movement to the toolchange point GOX_Z_Y_; Beginning of a milling process (Note 1) Beginning of a Yaxis machining process (Note 2) Beginning of a Yaxis machining process: 2074 for a drilling process Coordinate system setting, tool selection G50X_Z_Y_C_S_; G0T; Specifying spindle speed G97SMxx;
2111 2070 2071 to 2075 2202
2024
594
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Point to be referenced (4) Approach First movement from the toolchange point, coolant on
Parameter No. Servo motor control method 2018 or 2031 2032
Description
Simultaneous approach along four axes Simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes The number of axes along which movement is performed is determined by bits 3 and 4 of system parameters 400 to 404.
Spindle positioning method 2031 2032 2211 (5) to (15) Command of linear movement or rotation 2017 2020 or 2221 Simultaneous approach along one, two, or three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2) Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3) Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed (linear movement or rotation) Specifying a movement with circular interpolation MTF1084 = 0, 1 (Specifying I, J, K) MTF1084 = 2, 3 (Specifying radius R) Simultaneous escape along three axes Simultaneous escape along one or two axes The number of axes along which movement is performed is determined by bits 5 and 6 of system parameters 400 to 404. End part of a process: 2084 for a pattern machining process Txx00; M1; Movement to home position G0X_Z_Y_;
(16) Escape Movement to the toolchange point, coolant off
2019 or 2033 2034
(17) Toolchange point (End of the process) (18) Toolchange point home posision (19) Home position (end of program)
2081 to 2085 2017
2001
Trailing section Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
WARNING 1 Specify whether the simultaneous approach is performed along one, tow, or three axes. 2 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move command). 3 A Caxis move command is executed.
595
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes. 2 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent process of continuous Yaxis processes.
596
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
7.1
SETTING MTF PARAMETERS WHEN THE YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS SUPPORTED
Example of setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999 (servo motor control method) To use the Yaxis FAPT function, change MTF parameters, with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999, as shown below. (For other MTF parameters, specify standard FANUC values.)
MTF 2016 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004 G50 X Z Smax ; G0 Txxx ; MTF 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004 G90 G0 X Z Y C F ; G91 G1 MTF 2018 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000 G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ; G18 G91 G1 G19 MTF 2019 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ; G91 G1 MTF 2020 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 4401, 000E, 1700 G90 G0 X Z Y C I MTF 2300 G91 G3 MTF 2021 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 000E, 1701 G90 G2 X Z Y C MTF 2301 G91 G3 MTF 2031 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000 G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ; G18 G91 G1 G19 MTF 2032 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000 G17 G90 G0 X Z Y C M08 ; G18 G91 G1 G19 MTF 2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ; G91 G1 MTF 2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 G90 G0 X Z Y M09 ; G91 G1 MTF 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000 G50 X Z Y C ; G0 Txxx ; MTF 2203 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G98 G98 G81 X Z Y C R P F G99 G82 MTF 2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; K MTF 2205 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503 G98 G98 G81 X Z Y C R Q F G99 G82
597
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
MTF 2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000 L ; K MTF 2207 = 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203 G98 G98 G84 X Z Y C R Mxx S G99 G84.1 MTF 2208 = 0005, 0503, 0B03, 0004 M03 F L ; M04 K MTF 2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000 G90 G0 G41 X Z Y C F ; G91 G1 G42 MTF 2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000 G90 G0 G40 X Z Y C F ; G91 G1 MTF 2300 = 3301, 5501, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 K J F ; MTF 2301 = 9901, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 R F ;
598
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Machining profile
Machining definition Process 1: Process 2: Yaxis drilling, 10 mm diameter, 30 mm deep Yaxis pattern machining (pocketing), 16 mm diameter, 8 mm depth of cut, 2 mm finishing allowance, compensation by the FAPT The following NC data is output: %; O1000 ; G50X200Z200YO. ; G0X150.Z150.Y0. ; G50X150.Z150.Y0.C0.S2000 ; G0T0101 ; G97SxxxxM03 ; M08 ; G17C90. ; X40.Z102.Y10. ; G98G83Z68.R0.Fxxx ; Y10. ; G0C270. ; Y10. ; G83Z68.R0. ; Y10. ; G0X150.Z150.Y0. ; T0100 ; M1 ;
599
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C270. ; G0T0202 ; G07SxxxxM03 ; M08 ; G19C0. ; X84.Z30.Y8. ; G1X40. ; Y10. ; Z60. ; Y0. ; Z30. ; Y10. ; Z60. ; Y12. ; G3Z62.Y10.K2. ; G1Y10. ; G3Z60.Y12.J2 ; G1Z30. ; G3Z28.Y10.K2 ; G1Y10. ; G3Z30.Y12.J2. ; G1Z60. ; Y10. ; G0X84. ; C180. ; Z30.Y8. ; G1X40. ; Y10. ; Z60. ; Y0. ; Z30. ; Y10. ; Z60. ; Y12. ; G3Z62.Y10.K2. ; G1Y10. ; G3Z60.Y12.J2. ; G1Z30. ; G3Z28.Y10.K2 ; G1Y10. ; G3Z30.Y12.J2. ; G1Z60. ; Y10. ; G0X84. ; Z150.X150.Y0. ; T0200 ; M1 ; X200.Z200.Y0. ; M5 ; M30 ; %
600
B63304EN/02
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
8. NOTES
NOTES
This function does not support the following: 1) Automatic process determination 2) Machining with a vertical lathe 3) Yaxis machining with tool post 2 selected on a fouraxis lathe (TT)
601
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
This specification applies to the following machine tool configurations: (1) Machine tool with two spindles and one turret
Turret First spindle Second spindle
(2) Machine tool with two spindles and two turrets

Turret 1
First spindle
Second spindle
Turret 2
605
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
SPECIFICATIONS
606
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
PROGRAMMING 2.1.1
Material Data Input (Menu No.1)
Input back machining base line ZP2 as well as primary machining base line ZP. In case of drawing format 2:
2.1.2
Part Figure Input (Menu No.2)
(1) Part figure input for turning This is the same as standard input method. Define the final part figure without primary machining and/or back machining. (2) Part figure input for C axis machining When defining figures of end face hole, end face groove, and front face milling, the following question is displayed. POSITION . . . . . FS = (0: FRONT FACE, 1:REAR FACE) This question indicates a face where the part figure exists. Input FS = 0 in case of front face, input FS = 1 in case of rear face. If you input FS = 0, input figure data as an image viewed from the front face. If you input FS = 1, input figure data as an image viewed from the rear face. For front view, draw an image viewed from the front side and express front side figure with full lines and rear side figure with dotted lines.
607
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
#2 #1
When defining a hole on a side surface, groove 1 on a side surface, groove 2 on a side surface, and a groove on a cylindrical surface, enter the figure data defined with reference to the front side no matter which spindle is used in machining. (3) Entering a part figure for Yaxis machining When you are defining holes on concentric circles on an end face, a hole on a straight line on an end face, a hole at an arbitrary point on an end face, a pattern on an end face, or an arbitrary figure on an end face, the following prompt is displayed: End face position ..... FS = (0: front side, 1: Rear side) This prompt requests you to indicate which end face the part figure is on. If it is on the front end face, specify FS = 0. If it is on the rear end face, specify FS = 1. If FS = 0 is specified, enter the figure data as viewed from the front end face. If FS = 1 is specified, enter the figure data as viewed from the rear side. Images drawn in the front view are always those as viewed from the front side. The frontside figure is drawn with solid lines, and the rearside figure, with dotted lines.
#2
#1 #2
#1
#1: Hole on the front side #2: Hole on the rear side
608
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
When you are defining holes on concentric circles on a side surface, a hole on a straight line on a side surface, a hole at an arbitrary point on a side surface, a pattern on a side surface, or an arbitrary figure on a side surface, enter the figure data defined with reference to the front side no matter which spindle is used in machining.
2.1.3
Home Position and Turret Index Position (Menu No.3)
Input the home position (DXH, ZH) and the turret index position (DXI, ZI) for back machining as well as those for primary machining. If those for back machining are the same as those for primary machining, input the same values. If a position is in the second quadrant as shown in the figure below, input a minus value for ZH or ZI.
For those questions, initial values can be set system parameters No.206 to 221. These can be skipped based on the value of system parameter No.0009.
2.1.4
Machining Definition (Menu No.4)
Machining except cutting off and bar feed machining can be performed on the rear side. (1) Machining type selection Specify a machining type without discrimination of primary machining/back machining. For work regrasping on moving from primary machining to back machining, use Sub cycle. (2) Spindle number The question for a spindle to be used appears on the tool data screen. SPINDLE NO ... SN = (1: 1ST SPINDLE, 2: 2ND SPINDLE) Input SN = 1 in case of primary machining; input SN = 2 in case of back machining. This question is used to decide an M code for commanding spindle rotation direction. WARNING That SN = 2 in any process before sub cycle for work regrasping and SN = 1 after this process can be input but proper machine function cannot be guaranteed.
609
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
(3) Tool data Designate tool data for back machining as follows: a) Center drilling/drilling
AS=0 (AS=180 in Primary machining)
b) OD cutting Same as tool data for primary machining. A reversible tool may be used frequently.
c) ID cutting
d) OD grooving Same as tool data for primary machining. e) ID grooving
610
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
f) End face grooving
g) OD necking Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for OD grooving (AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving. h) ID necking Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for ID grooving (AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving (AS). i) OD threading Same as tool data for primary machining j) ID threading
AN is used if cutting is made along the groove center. k) Face threading Designate 0 degree as tool mounting angle for primary machining (AS). l) C axis machining/Y axis machining The following question regarding mounting direction is displayed. SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE) For machining of rear end face, select 2.
611
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
WARNING Machining start position This is automatically calculated using the turret turning position and tool mounting position. To change this value, note the following conditions. The path of approach or escape varies with the relation between the work position and machining start position. In simultaneous two axis movement, approach or escape is performed ad shown in Fig. A unless no interference between a work and tool exists. If interference with a work exists, the tool bypasses the work as shown in Fig. B.
(4) Cutting direction and cutting data Input direction is the same sa standard one. Select CP = 2 for C axis machining or Y axis machining of rear end face, as milling tool data to move the cursor to machining position. (5) Cutting condition Input method is the same as standard one.
2.1.5
NC Data Preparation (Menu No.5)
Primary machining NC data are prepared in primary machining coordinate system, and back machining NC data, in back machining coordinate system. X2 axis is not drawn.
Primary machining coordinate
Back machining coordinate
612
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared back machining NC data require use of geometry offset. A tool is selected at the machining start position in primary machining coordinate system, geometry offset is applied at the time of approach, and work coordinate system is shifted. When machining is completed, offset is canceled at the time of escape, and the tool returns to the machining start position in primary machining coordinate system. NC data to shift coordinate system using G50 cannot be prepared. Example G00 X200. Z300. ; G50 S4500 M75 ; T100; G96 S200 M3 ; X104. Z5. T0101 ; * X100. ; G01 X97. Z2 F0.65 ; . . . G00 X200. Z300. T0000 ; M01 ; . . . . . * A block which approach is not made directly from the machining start position (X200. Z300.) to approach point (X100. Z5.) and which a work is bypassed, is output.
2.1.6
Animation Drawing (Menu No.6)
The layout of screen is the same as before. Milling front view is a drawing viewed from the front side. On this screen, any figure on the rear side is drawn with dotted lines. In back machining FAPT, any shuck figure is not drawn. Work regrasping from primary machining to back machining is not drawn. Designate an M code in MTF No.1145 with which FAPT perceives the start of back machining. When the M code designated here is executed, FAPT animation drawing changes into back machining mode.
613
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC. 2.2.1
System Parameters
#7 708
Bit 7 for system parameter No.708 indicates whether or not back machining is performed.
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 7 0 : Back machining is not performed. 1 : Back machining is performed. If 708#7 = 0, Machining is the same as former FAPT. If 708#7 = 1, D A question for indicating the end face position, FS = _ is added on the figure definition screen for end face hole, end face groove, and front face milling. D A question for indicating a spindle to be used, SN = _ is added on the tool data screen for machining definition. D A question for indicating mounting angle, AS = _ is added on the tool screen for drill and center drill. D To the question of mounting position, CP = _ on the milling tool data screen 2 (rear end face) can be input. D If M code that has been designated in MTF No.1145 is executed in animation drawing, the screen changes into back machining mode. No.214: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret 1 back machining. No.215: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret 1 back machining. No.216: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret 2 back machining. No.217: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret 2 back machining. No.218: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the turret 1 back machining. No.219: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the turret 1 back machining. No.220: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the turret 2 back machining. No.221: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the turret 2 back machining.
614
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
(System parameter)
No. 0802 Format Bit Initial value 00000000 Description If bit 0 = 0, the data for the second spindle is output, using the coordinate system shown below. If bit 0 = 1, the data for the second spindle is output, using the same coordinate system as for the first spindle. (If bit 0 = 0) Caxis positive direction Caxis positive direction Remarks
(If bit 0 = 1)
Caxis positive direction
0740
Integer
Undefined
M code number (for the first spindle) for starting animated simulation for lathe turning surface Not to be specified if only simulation for lathe turning surface is performed. M code number (for the first spindle) for starting animated simulation for Caxis end facing M code number (for the first spindle) for starting animated simulation for cylindrical surface M code number for starting animated simulation for Yaxis end facing/side facing List of axis names (for the first spindle) in animated simulation for Yaxis end facing/side facing (Specify axis names in the same sequence as for NC program axis names for individual axes. Example: XZCY) M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for lathe turning surface Not to be specified if only animated simulation for lathe turning surface is to be performed. M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for Caxis end facing M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for cylindrical surface M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for Yaxis end facing/side facing
0741 0742 0743 0771
Integer Integer Integer Character
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
0736
Integer
Undefined
0737 0738 0749
Integer Integer Integer
Undefined Undefined Undefined
615
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
2.2.2
MTF
(1) Back machining start M code This M code is used to start animated simulation for back machining. Set the M code value in MTF1145. Animated simulation for back machining is started when an M code having the set value is specified in the NC program. (2) MTF related to workpiece coordinate system setting G codes 1) MTF1xxx Set the following parameters for workpiece coordinate system selection G codes.
No. 1252 1253 Format Initial Value Integer Integer 54 55 Description Workpiece coordinate system selection G code for the first spindle (for back machining) Workpiece coordinate system selection G code for the second spindle (for back machining)
D If 1 is specified, the corresponding G code is not output. D During the creation of NC data, whether G54 or G55 will be output is determined from the spindle number (SN), defined using the tool data screen for machining definition. 2) MTF2xxx (function tables) Set the following function tables: Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning (for back machining) 2068=4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G50 X Z Smax ; G0 Txx ; Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for milling (for back machining) 2069=4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G50 X Z C ; G0 Txx ; These function tables are referenced during back machining. To output a coordinate system selection G code, modify the setting as required. 3) Function code The following function code has been added:
Upper three digits Detailed classification 4 C 0 Lowest digit Major classification 2 Function
Outputs the G code specified with MTF1252 or MTF1253. This G code is not subject to modal control. (Workpiece coordinate system selection G code)
616
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
(3) MTF related to additional M codes for the second spindle 1) MTF1xxx Set the following M codes for the second spindle:
No. 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 Format Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Initial Value 1 1 5 1 1 68 69 Description Forward rotation M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Reverse rotation M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Spindle stop M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Caxis connection M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Caxis disconnection M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Caxis clamping M code for the second spindle (for back machining) Caxis unclamping M code for the second spindle (for back machining)
D An M code for which the corresponding parameter is set to 1 is not output. D During the creation of NC data, whether the M code for the first spindle or that for the second spindle will be output is determined from the spindle number (SN), defined using the tool data screen for machining definition. D Threedigit integers can be used for the above M codes. D Conventionally, the forward/reverse rotation M codes for the second spindle have been specified using MTF1142 and MTF1143. These MTF parameters can, however, specify only twodigit integers. To enable the specification of threedigit integers, MTF1410 and MTF1411 have been added. MTF1142 and MTF1143 can no longer be used.
617
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
2) Function codes The following function codes are referenced. These function codes are the same as those used conventionally to output M codes for the first spindle. No additional function code need be defined for the second spindle.
Upper three Lowest digit digits Major Detailed classification classification 0 0 0 5 Function
Outputs the spindle forward/reverse rotation M code. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1410 or MTF1411.) Outputs the spindle stop M code when reversing the spindle rotation. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1412.) Outputs the spindle stop M code. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1412.) Outputs the Caxis connection/disconnection M code. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1413 or MTF1414.) Outputs the Caxis clamping M code. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1415.) Outputs the Caxis unclamping M code. (Outputs the M code specified with MTF1416.)
0 1
2 0
0 0
5 5
1 1
6 7
0 0
5 5
(4) MTF related to the output format for tool post 2 D The angle of the Caxis for tool post 2 is output according to the expression angle = 180 + angle. D The sign of values for the Xaxis and Caxis being subjected to polar coordinate conversion for tool post 2 is inverted before being output.
(Coordinate system for tool post 1) (Coordinate system for tool post 2)
+X (C0) +X (C0)
For a machine tool in which the Caxis origin for tool post 1 is shifted 180 degrees opposite to the origin for tool post 2 (in other words, an angle of 0 degrees for tool post 1 and an angle of 180 degrees for tool post 2 are in the same position), the output format is changed.
618
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
(NC machine file: CNC specification)

No. 1086 Format Integer Initial value 1 Description Output format for data for tool post 2 1: Usual output format 1: Output format used when the Caxis origin for tool post 2 is 180 degrees opposite to the origin for tool post 1. D The sign of Xaxis values for tool post 2 is inverted before being output. D The sign of Xaxis and Caxis values that are undergoing polar coordinate conversion for tool post 2 is inverted before being output.
To the contrary, the expression angle = 180 angle is used in foreground animated simulation. (5) MTF related to the spindle rotation M code for a rotation tool on tool path 2 Specify the M code related to spindle rotation (normal, reverse, or stop) for a rotation tool on tool post 2, using three digits. (NC machine file: CNC specification)
No. 1417 1417 Format Three characters Three characters Initial value 1 1 Description M code for tool spindle (normal rotation) on tool post 2 M code for tool spindle (reverse rotation) on tool post 2
NOTE If MTF1417 = 1, the M code set up for tool post 2 is equal to the M code set up for tool post 1.
2.2.3
Tool Data
2 (rear end face) can be designated as mounting direction of tool data for milling (CP). CP = _ (1: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE) In this case, tool information 2 in tool data (FLAG2) means as follows:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR) 0 : Positive rotation 1 : Inverse rotation Bit 1, 2 Mounting direction (CP) 00: Side 01: Front face 11: Rear face
619
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B63304EN/02
2.3
WARNINGS AND CAUTION
WARNING 1 C axis/Y axis end face machining In a section to which part figure is defined on the rear side, C axis end face machining cannot be performed in primary machining. Although rear end face machining before sub cycle with work regrasping can be defined in machining definition, machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC data.
#1: Defined machining position #2: Machining position in case #1 machined in primary machining In a section to which part figure is defined on the front side, C axis end face machining cannot be performed in back machining. 2 Machining sequence Define the machining sequence as follows regardless of axis C axis machining, Y axis machining or turning: (1) Primary machining, (2) Sub cycle (work regrasping), (3) Back machining 3 Spindle number The question of spindle number on the tool data screen, SN = _ is used to decide an M code for indicating spindle rotation direction. Although, SN = 2 in any process before auxiliary machining with work regrasping or SN = 1 after this process can be defined, machine operation is not guaranteed. 4 Workpiece coordinate system setting G code Before attempting to run an NC program created using this function, ensure that the workpiece origin offset for the workpiece coordinate system to be used has been set in the NC parameter correctly. Failure to set the correct offset may cause damage to the blank or tool.
620
B63304EN/02
BACK MACHINING FAPT
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
This section shows an example output block when MTF2068 is set as follows: Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning (for back machining) 2068 = 5002, 4C02, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 G0 G54 Txx M8 ;
Example output 0100(BACKFAPT) ; N001(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the first spindle. G0G54T0101M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068. G96S1500M3 ; X85. ; Z2. ; G1X5.F0.65 ; . . <Reholding of workpiece by means of miscellaneous function> N006(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the second spindle. G0G55T0606M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068. G96S2000M203 ; X65.5 ; Z2. ; Z0. ; G1X1.5.F0.2 ; . .
621
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B63304EN/02
AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
WARNING For those machining processes that have been automatically created, check the machining sequence. If the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself, or injury to the user. The automatic process determination function enables the operator to create NC data by simply entering the material figure and part figure and pressing soft keys. This function eliminates or greatly reduces the number of data entering operations for menu item 4 (machining definition). This function uses tooling information, tool data, and setting data. Set these data before using this function. The following processes can be specified using the automatic process determination function: 1) Turning process Center drilling Drilling Outer surface roughing Inner surface roughing Outer surface semifinishing Inner surface semifinishing Outer surface finishing Inner surface finishing Grooving or residual machining Cuttingoff (B option for the automatic process determination function) Threading Bar feeding (B option for the automatic process determination function) 2) Caxis process Caxis center drilling Caxis drilling Caxis tapping Caxis grooving Face milling Cylindrical grooving
625
1. OUTLINE
B63304EN/02
CAUTION The tools to be used are determined from tooling data and tool data.
NOTE 1 The end surface and outer surface can be machined in separate processes for outer surface machining. 2 For the outer and inner surface machining processes, inverse processes can also be automatically determined (B option for the automatic process determination function). 3 The following processes cannot be automatically determined. Enter data manually. Reaming Tapping 4 Auxiliary machining processes cannot be automatically determined. 5 Multiple processes can be specified for drilling (only for turning) to create multitiered parts (B option for the automatic process determination function). 6 The cuttingoff process cannot be determined when system parameter 140 is 0.
626
B63304EN/02
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
627
B63304EN/02
2.1
DEFINING A NEW PROCESS
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when no process is defined yet, the KINDS OF MACHINING screen appears. On this screen the automatic process determination function is enabled.
[+]
[+]
Pressing the rightmost soft Key [+] changes the soft key menu. Pressing the AUTO soft key starts (executes) the automatic process determination function. Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS SETTING screen (see Chapter 3, Setting the Machining Procedure for setting machining procedure data). CAUTION Pressing the AUTO soft key starts the automatic process determination immediately without displaying the PROCESS SETTING screen. Set machining procedure data beforehand.
628
B63304EN/02
(1) Executing automatic process determination When automatic process determination starts, the processes, tools, and cutting areas are automatically determined from the machining procedure data, tooling information, tool data, and material data. (Automatic screen transition) The automatic screen transition function can display how the material figure changes on the screen during automatic determination. To enable automatic screen transition, change the following system parameter:
No.708: 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 Speed of automatic process determination
0 : High speed (Automatic screen transition is disabled.) 1 : Low speed (Automatic screen transition is enabled.) For Caxis processes, the change of the material figure is not displayed but the position of the machined area is indicated by the cursor. (2) Suspending automatic process determination If the manual input flag is on or a necessary data item cannot be automatically determined during automatic process determination, processing stops at the screen displayed when a problem occurs. In that case, enter necessary data and press the NEXT PAGE soft key to resume processing. (3) Ending automatic process determination When all processes are created, processing stops displaying the tool list on the screen. To create NC data, press the NEXT PAGE soft key to return to the menu, then press the soft key for menu item 5. To check or modify processes, press the CORRECTION soft key, press the CURSOR or CURSOR soft key to position the cursor at the desired process, then press the NEXT PAGE soft key.
629
B63304EN/02
2.2
MODIFYING A DEFINED PROCESS
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when processes are already defined, the MACHINING PLAN screen appears. On this screen the operator can modify or add processes. Pressing the NEW soft key on this screen displays the KINDS OF MACHINING screen. On that screen, the automatic process determination function is enabled.
NOTE Note that pressing the NEW soft key deletes all existing processes.
630
B63304EN/02
3. SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE
SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE
Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS SETTING screen for setting the machining procedure. After the setting is completed, pressing the EXEC soft key starts automatic process determination. Manual input flags can also be set on this screen.
The PROCESS SETTING screen displays the setting data for the machining method group number (No.000) and the machining procedure data for the group (No.100 to 129, No.200 to 229, or No.300 to 329). If the machining method group number is not defined, the group number is determined by the material figure and the machining procedure data for that group is displayed. Round bar: Machining method group 1 (data in No.100 to 129) Perforated round bar: Machining method group 2 (data in No.200 to 229) Special material: Machining method group 3 (data in No.300 to 329)
631
B63304EN/02
The function of each soft key is as follows: ESCAPE: Returns to the execution procedure menu for FAPT. REGST.: Registers the set data in submemory. INSERT: Inserts a process immediately before the process pointed to by the cursor. Pressing this soft key displays the soft key menu for selecting a process. PROC. DELETE: Deletes the process pointed to by the cursor. MANUAL FLAG: Displays the soft key menu for setting the manual input flag for the process pointed to by the cursor. ORIGIN PROC.: Restores the data for the edited group (returns the data to the state before editing). CURSOR : Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process. CURSOR : Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process. SELECT GROUP:Selects the machining method group (1 to 3). EXEC: Starts automatic process determination. (1) Changing the machining method group Pressing the SELECT GROUP soft key switches the machining method group from 1 to 2, 2 to 3, or 3 to 1. (2) Inserting a process Move the cursor to the desired position using the CURSOR or CURSOR soft key and press the INSERT soft key. The soft keys for selecting the process type are displayed. Pressing the [+] soft key displays other process type soft keys. Pressing the soft key for the desired process type inserts the new process immediately before the process pointed to by the cursor. Pressing the soft key exits the insert mode and returns the display to the first soft key menu.
632
B63304EN/02
[<]
[+]
[<]
[+]
[<]
[+]
[<]
[+]
NOTE When using a cuttingoff process, set the following system parameter to 1:
No. 140: Whether a cuttingoff process is defined Initial value: 0 0 : No cuttingoff process is defined 1 : A cuttingoff process is defined
633
B63304EN/02
(3) Setting a manual input flag Pressing the MANUAL FLAG soft key changes the soft key menu as shown below to enable the operator to set the manual input flag for the process pointed to by the blinking cursor. Manual input flags are setting data No.130 to 166, No.230 to 266, and No.330 to 366. When a manual input flag is on, automatic process determination stops at the screen for which the flag is set, enabling data to be input manually.
Pressing a soft key toggles it between AUTO and MANUAL.
AUTO soft keys are displayed in reverse video.
The function of each soft key is as follows: : Returns the display to the automatic procedure setting screen. xxx AREA: Toggles between automatic and manual for specifying the machining area, cutting area, or cutting position. xxx TOOL: Toggles between automatic and manual for specifying the tool data, start point, or passing point. xxx COND.: Toggles between automatic and manual for specifying the cutting conditions. CURSOR : Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag. CURSOR : Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag. NOTE Machining procedure data can also be set on the setting screen.
634
B63304EN/02
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND NOTES ON ITS USE
DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND NOTES ON ITS USE
635
B63304EN/02
4.1
AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF A TOOL
In automatic process determination, the tool to be used is selected from tooling information and tool data. First the tooling information is searched to select the tool. If the tool is not found in tooling information, the tool is then selected from tool data. In tool selection, the process type (KP) is referenced for a turning tool and the tool type (TP) is referenced for a milling tool. KP or TP is registered for each tool in tooling information or tool data. Set the value of KP for turning tools and TP for milling tools before executing the automatic process determination function. If the tool is not found in either tooling information or tool data, processing stops on the tool setting screen so the operator can manually select the tool.
636
B63304EN/02
CAUTION 1 For drilling, grooving, and residual machining, both tooling information and tool data are searched for the tool, and the optimum tool (the largest tool which can be used) is selected. For other processes, the tool which is found first is used. If the selected tool is not a desired one, turn the manual flag on and select the tool manually, or change the tool after all processes are determined. 2 If the tool is selected from tool data, the tool is automatically added to tooling information. The data items for the added tool are automatically set as follows: The tool selection number (TN) is set to the smallest unused number. The tool compensation number (TM) is set to the same number as the tool selection number. For the other data related to mounting, the same data as that in tool data is used. Automatic process determination therefore cannot operate correctly if the tool data related to mounting is incorrect. 3 When the tool is selected from tooling information, the turret to be used is automatically selected from tooling data if there are two or more turrets. When the tool is selected from tool data, the turret number is normally set to 1. To set the turret number to 2, turn on the manual input flag and manually enter the turret number or change the turret number after all processes are determined. When balance cutting is performed, the turret number for the second tool is automatically set to 2 even when the tool is selected from tool data. 4 The tool can be selected only from tooling information or from tool data by changing the following setting data:
No.72: Data searched to select the tool 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x Tooling information Tool data 0 : searched 1 : Not searched
637
B63304EN/02
4.2
DETERMINING INVERSE PROCESSES (AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION B OPTION)
The use of inverse tools can be set in automatic process determination for the following processes: End surface roughing Outer surface roughing Inner surface roughing End surface semifinishing Outer surface semifinishing Inner surface semifinishing End surface finishing Outer surface finishing Inner surface finishing When determining inverse processes, set the following setting data:
No.71: Whether inverse processes are determined 00000xxx For end surface machining For outer surface machining For inner surface machining
0 : Does not determine inverse processes. 1 : Determines inverse processes. When machining procedure data is set in the following order, the processes are determined as described below: Machining procedure data End surface roughing Outer surface roughing Inner surface roughing Conditions 1) There are areas to be cut with inverse tools on the end surface, outer surface, and inner surface. 2) The tooling information and tool data for the tools which cut the end surface and the tooling information and tool data for the tools which cut the outer surface are separately set. Determined processes Process 01 Outer surface roughing (on the end surface with a normal tool) Process 02 Outer surface roughing (on the outer surface with a normal tool) Process 03 Outer surface roughing (on the end surface with an inverse tool) Process 04 Outer surface roughing (on the outer surface with an inverse tool) Process 05 Inner surface roughing (on the inner surface with a normal tool) Process 06 Inner surface roughing (on the inner surface with an inverse tool) * The processes are determined so that the end surface and outer surface are cut first with a normal tool then with an inverse tool.
638
B63304EN/02
CAUTION To determine processes automatically, set a value other than 2 (machinig below an overhang) in system parameter 101. If 2 is specified, the correct cutting area for an overhang is not automatically determined.
No.101: Initial value: Data related to turning method 1
0 : Does not perform pocketing. 1 : Performs pocketing. 2 : Machines beneath overhang.
NOTE 1 For residual machining, the processes for sections a and b in the figure below can be determined but processes using inverse tools, such as the processes for sections c and d, cannot be determined. Such processes should be manually added after all processes are automatically determined.
639
B63304EN/02
NOTE 2 When a very small pocket is machined using a normal tool during end, outer, or inner surface machining, an error occurs when the inverse process is determined in the following case: When an area is left uncut after tool angle check is performed (Fig. a) but there is no area to be cut with the inverse tool as a result of applying offset (Fig. b).
Shaded area: Area left uncut after tool angle check is performed (area to be cut with the inverse tool)
Fig. a
Shaded area: Area to be cut with the normal tool after tool angle check is performed and offset is applied There is no area to be cut with Error! the inverse tool.
Fig. b
NOTE 3 When the back of the area to be cut with the inverse tool intersects with the material figure as shown below, the process using the inverse tool is not determined.
Area to be cut with the normal tool Shaded area: Area left uncut (area to be cut with theinverse tool) Intersects with the material figure at this point.
640
B63304EN/02
NOTE 4 If an area is still left uncut after the machining with the inverse tool, no additional process for cutting that area (shaded area in the figure below) can be automatically determined.
Area (1) : Cut with the normal tool Area (2): Cut with the inverse tool Shaded area: Left uncut
NOTE 5 The inverse process for balance cutting cannot be automatically determined.
641
B63304EN/02
4.3
CUTTING DIRECTION
(1) Always from +X to X along the end surface (from X to +X for the inverse process)
(2) If outer surface machining is set in machining procedure data without setting end surface machining, the end surface is cut in the same way as for the outer surface machining.
(3) When the machining procedure data is set as shown below for outer surface finishing, the end surface is cut from the outside to the center, then the outer surface is cut with the same tool, if there is no inner surface (Fig. a). If there is an inner surface, the end surface and outer surface are cut in one continuous operation (Fig. b). Setting of machining procedure data End surface finishing Outer surface finishing
Fig. a When there is no inner surface
Fig. b When there is an inner surface
642
B63304EN/02
To cut the end surface from the outside to the center and then cut the outer surface with the same tool as shown in Fig.a even when there is an inner surface, change the following setting data:
No.71: x 0000000 Method of outer surface finishing
0 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a or b depending on whether there is an inner surface. 1 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a regardless of whether there is an inner surface.
643
B63304EN/02
4.4
AREA DIVISION
(1) Division direction for end surface machining (normal process) The area is divided as shown in Fig.a when there is no inner surface and as shown in Fig.b when there is an inner surface.
Fig. a Division direction when there is no inner surface
Fig. b Division direction when there is an inner surface
(2) Division direction for outer surface machining (normal process) If the end surface is cut at the same time, the area is divided as shown in Fig.a when there is no inner surface and as shown in Fig.b when there is an inner surface. If the end surface is separately cut, the area is divided as shown in Fig.c regardless of whether there is an inner surface.
Fig.a Division direction when there is no inner surface
Fig.b Division direction when there is an inner surface
Fig. c When only the outer surface is cut
644
B63304EN/02
(3) Division direction for inner surface machining (normal process) The area is divided as shown in Fig. a and Fig. b regardless of whether an element of the part intersects with the Zaxis.
Fig. a Division direction when an element of the part intersects with the Zaxis
Fig. b Division direction when no element of the part intersects with the Zaxis
(4) Division direction for grooving The area is divided into the groove on the end surface (Fig. a), groove on the outer surface (Fig. b), and groove on the inner surface (Fig. c).
Fig. a Groove on the end surface
Fig. b Groove on the outer surface
Note) DS and DE depend on the tool figure.
Fig. c Groove on the inner surface
645
B63304EN/02
(5) Cutting start point for a cuttingoff process (B option for the automatic process determination function) The cutting start point for a cuttingoff process is determined as shown in Fig.a when there is no C/R (chamfer/corner R) at the cutoff section and as shown in Fig.b when there is a C/R at the cutoff section.
Fig. a Cutting start point when there is no C/R at the cutoff section
Fig. b Cutting start point when there is a C/R at the cutoff section
(6) Division direction for inverse processes (B option for the automatic process determination function) The division direction at division point DS for an inverse process is one of the following three types (outer surface machining is taken as an example):
[Type 1] Division starts at point j, proceeds toward the subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects first with the part figure
[Type 2] Division starts at point j, proceeds toward the subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with the material figure at two or more points
[Type 3] Division starts at point j, proceeds toward the subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with the material figure at less than two points
646
B63304EN/02
4.5
RESIDUAL MACHINING AND THREADING
In residual machining and threading, two or more sections can be machined using the same tool.
4.6
CENTER DRILLING AND BAR FEEDING
If a center drilling process or bar feeding process is set in machining procedure data, that process is always determined regardless of the part figure. However, the process is not determined when no center drilling tool or bar feeding tool is registered in tooling information or tool data. When not using a center drilling process or bar feeding process, do not set the process in machining procedure data, or delete the process after all processes are determined. The bar feeding type is automatically determined based on the setting in the following system parameters:
Pullout method 1 No.152 (CAX) No.153 (CAZ) No.154 (WG) No.155 (CEZ) Undefined Set Set Undefined Pullout method 2 Set Undefined Set Undefined Slidestop method 1 Undefined Set Undefined Set Slidestop method 2 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
No.152: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAX) No.153: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAZ) No.154: Position at which the fingers pinch the workpiece during bar feeding (WG) No.155: Amount of tool retraction during bar feeding (CEZ) NOTE The B option for the automatic process determination function is necessary for automatically determining the bar feeding process.
647
B63304EN/02
4.7
MULTITIER DRILLING (B OPTION FOR THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION)
When the inner surface is machined with the automatic process determination function, multitier drilling can be performed using drills with different diameters. When performing multitier drilling, set the following setting data:
No.50: Initial value: Minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool (unit: mm) Undefined
Set the minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the prepared inner surface machining tool. The automatic process determination function determines the process so that a diameter less than the set value is machined with drills.
Fig. 1
WARNING 1 The automatic process determination function always machines a diameter less than the set value with drills regardless of the values in setting data No.52 and 53. 2 If the value is undefined, the automatic process determination function determines the process so that all inner surface are machined with the inner surface tool. 3 The automatic process determination function specifies cutting areas so that machining for a diameter less than the set value does not require an inner surface tool.
No.51: Initial value:
Maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills (unit: mm) Undefined
Set the maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills. The automatic process determination function machines a diameter less than the set value with drills. Multitier drilling can be performed for a diameter less than the set value.
648
B63304EN/02
Fig. 2
WARNING If the value is undefined, the automatic process determination function determines the process so that all inner surfaces are machined with drills. Setting data Nos.52 and 53 determine whether drills are used for machining the inner surface with a diameter greater than the value in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) and less than the value in setting data No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills). The inner surface with a diameter less than the value in setting data No.50 is always machined with drills regardless of the values in setting data No.52 and 53.
No.52 and 53 are effective.
No.52 and 53 are not effective.
Fig. 3 No.52: Initial value: Minimum allowance for drilling (unit: mm) Undefined
Set the minimum allowance on the inner surface to be drilled. The inner surface is drilled when the allowance is more than the set value.
649
B63304EN/02
Drilled when more than the set value
Fig. 4
WARNING If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
No.53: Initial value:
Minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be drilled (unit: mm) Undefined
The inner surface is drilled when the lengthtodiameter ratio is more than the set value.
Set value < 1 D
Fig. 5
Drilling is performed when 1/D is more than the set value. WARNING 1 If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed. 2 Drilling is performed only when the conditions for both setting data No.52 and 53 are satisfied.
650
B63304EN/02
No.70: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Specifies how to machine the inner surface with two or more steps using drills. Specifies the tool selection method.
How to machine the inner surface with two or more steps using drills 0 : Performs two or more drilling steps in ascending order of drill diameter. 1 : Performs two or more drilling steps in descending order of drill diameter. Specify ascending or descending order of drill diameter when machining the inner surface in two or more drilling steps. Tool selection method 0 : Creates the drilling process using the machinable tool selected by the automatic process determination function. 1 : Prompts the operator to enter the tool figure on the tool data screen if a drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist information or tool data. Set the method of selecting the tool if a drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist in the tooling information or tool data when the automatic process determination function creates a drilling process. If a drill suitable for the diameter to be drilled does not exist when this setting data is set to 0 (creates the drilling process using the machinable tool selected by the automatic process determination function), an uncut area may remain after drilling.
Uncut area may remain if a drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist
Fig. 6
* Examples of machining The following examples show how the drilling process or inner surface machining process is automatically determined, depending on the values in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) and No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
651
B63304EN/02
(1) When the value in No.50 is smaller than the value in No.51
No.51(maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills) No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) Fig. 7
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.7, the following processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling Drills area (1) in Fig.8.
Fig. 8
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the second area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d Value in No.53 < 1 D
Fig. 9
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling) No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be drilled)
652
B63304EN/02
When the conditions in Fig.9 are satisfied Process 02 Drilling Drills area (2) in Fig.10.
Fig. 10 When the conditions in Fig.9 are not satisfied Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 11
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the third area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d Value in No.53 < 1 D
Fig. 12
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling) No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be drilled)
653
B63304EN/02
When the conditions in Fig.12 are satisfied Process 03 Drilling Drills area (3) in Fig.13.
When the conditions in Fig.12 are not satisfied Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 13 Process 04 Inner surface machining
Fig. 14
Process 02 Inner surface machining
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
(2) When the value in No.50 is larger than the value in No.51
No.50 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) No.51 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with drills)
Fig. 17
654
B63304EN/02
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.17, the following processes are created:
Fig. 18
Checks the conditions shown in Fig. 9 for the second area to be drilled. When the conditions in Fig. 9 are satisfied When the conditions in Fig. 9 are not satisfied
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Uncut area
655
B63304EN/02
(3) When a value is set in No.50 but No.51 is undefined
No. 50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) Fig. 23
When setting data No. 50 is set as shown in Fig. 23, the following processes are created:
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
656
B63304EN/02
Checks the conditions shown in Fig.12 for the third area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig.12 are satisfied Process 03 Drilling Drills area (3) in Fig.26. When the conditions in Fig.12 are not satisfied Drilling is not performed.
(4) When a value is set in No.51 but No.50 is undefined
No. 51 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with drills)
Fig.30
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool): Undefined
657
B63304EN/02
When setting data No.51 is set as shown in Fig.30, the following processes are created:
Fig. 31
Fig. 32 Process 03 Drilling Drills area (3) in Fig.33.
Fig. 33 Process 04 Inner surface machining
Fig. 34
658
B63304EN/02
(5) When both No.50 and No.51 are undefined
Fig.35
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool): Undefined No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills): Undefined The following processes are created:
Fig.36
Fig.37
659
B63304EN/02
[Warnings and Note] WARNING 1 Setting data No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling) and No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be drilled) are effective for machining a diameter greater than the value in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) and less than the value in setting data No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills). 2 If setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool) is set to a value larger than that set in setting data No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills), an uncut area may as shown in Figs.21 and 22.
NOTE If an uncut area remains after machining using a drill with a tip, that area is not cut in later processes that are automatically determined.
Not cut with automatic process determination Fig.38
660
B63304EN/02
4.8
AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FOR A CLOSED FIGURE
If the part figure is closed, the automatic process determination function may not correctly operate. Example 1) When the start point of the part figure has a larger X coordinate than the end surface
If the part figure starts from F, the outer surface machining process is not correctly determined.
Example 2) When the start point of the part figure is the same as the cuttingoff start point
If the part figure starts from the cuttingoff start point, the cuttingoff process is not correctly determined.
661
B63304EN/02
4.9
MACHINING FOR WHICH AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION CANNOT BE USED
The automatic process determination function cannot be used when machining includes the following: Combshaped turret Backward machining
662
B63304EN/02
5. SETTING DATA
SETTING DATA
See Section 1, Setting Data List in Appendix A.
663
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
B63304EN/02
DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
The double side machining function enables to prepare two NC programs by only one editing operation so that the frontside NC program has been executed, and then the direction of blank is changed and then the rearside NC program is executed. i. The definition of blank figure and part figure is same as the ordinary way of standard system. When you do the work reversing, switch it according to the parameter. ii. The part figure is defined by the final part figure with the single stroke drawing by using symbolic key. iii. To rotate the part figure to X axis and to process the back side from the front, the process definition and NC data preparation are done. iv. Automatic processing decision can be used. v. NC data output only of the front side or the back side can be done.
667
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER
B63304EN/02
SYSTEM PARAMETER
The work reversing processing becomes effective by setting an undermentioned parameter. System parameter
#7 104 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 2 Parameter bit concerning work reversing 0 : The conversation system becomes two axis lathes usually. 1 : The work reversing processing definition becomes possible. D Back Machining FAPT cannot be used.
668
B63304EN/02
2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
Position ZP of reference line of the first processing. And position ZP2 of the reference line of a second processing are inputs. In the help screen, it is drawn to the guide chart like Fig. 2. [For drawing format 2]
Fig. 2
669
3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE
B63304EN/02
DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE
The method of defining part figure with the single stroke drawing by using symbolic key is the same as standard system. There are following remarks and a restriction matters. a. Do not define it as shown in the figure below. D The line crosses. (Fig. 3. (a)) D There are same lines on one line. (Fig. 3 (b)) D One point comes in contact. (Fig. 3 (c))
Fig. 3 (a)
Fig. 3 (b)
Fig. 3 (c)
b. Please define the figure to become the end point as same place the start point. c. Please make a head and the last element an arrow element. Do not specify Chamfer or Round element for a head or last element. d. The position of start point and the end point exerts the effect on the definition of the processing area. The position of start point and the end point becomes the division point of the processing area division in Automatic process decision. Therefore, it is necessary to specify start point and the end point after previous is foreseen to some degree. (Please refer to 5.2.5 and 5.3.4)
670
B63304EN/02
4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
Home and index positions of the First process and the second process can be set.
671
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
B63304EN/02
PROCESSING DEFINITION
672
B63304EN/02
5.1
OUTLINE
i. The definition of the processing assumes the definition of a Secondary processing after the end First processing to be a principle. ii. The First processing and Secondary processing are switched with the softkey.
673
B63304EN/02
5.2
DEFINITION BY MANUAL
The definition of the First processing side is as it is. In the definition of the Secondary processing side, blank figure and the part figure draw in shape that the reverse to X axis symmetry for draw on the First processing side. Definition method on the Secondary processing side is shown as part part finishes defining for First processing. follows. When the (Refer to Fig. 5.2 (a)) The process list screen is displayed as shown in Fig. 5.2 (b).
Fig. 5.2 (a)
Fig. 5.2 (b)
It will change into soft key like the under figure, if softkey of a right edge is pushed.
Fig. 5.2 (c)
674
B63304EN/02
If 2ND CHCK is pushed, it will become the following screen.
Fig. 5.2 (d)
The process for a Secondary processing is defined from this state. Definition method is same as the First processing. In the following explanations, outside rough cutting process is advanced to the example.
5.2.1
Tool Data Screen
Define the tool data by means of the ordinary way.
Fig. 5.2.1
675
B63304EN/02
5.2.2
Cutting Area Screen
The coordinate value of the point which the cursor shows displays the coordinate value in the coordinate system of Secondary processing.
Fig.5.2.2
Do not specify the cutting area by stepping over the start and end points of the part figure. Example
For instance, the shaded portion cannot be specified for a cutting area when the part figure started from a point.
5.2.3
Cutting Condition Screen
Define the cutting condition by the same way of standard system.
676
B63304EN/02
5.3
AUTOMATIC PROCESSING DECISION FUNCTION
WARNING For those machining processes that have been automatically created, check the machining sequence. If the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself, or injury to the user. First of all, the cutting area of the First processing and Secondary processing are divided. Next time, the process for the First processing is decided automatically according to the processing procedure data. The process on a Secondary side is continuously decided.
5.3.1
Processing Area Division Screen
When soft key AUTO PROC is pushed, on the kinds of machining screen, the screen is switched to decide the first and second processing area used for automatic process definition function.
Fig. 5.3.1 (a)
677
B63304EN/02
Specify the first and second processing areas using the cursor and arrow keys on the MACHINING AREA DIVISION screen as same way as the CUTTING AREA DEFINE screen. The arrows of , , , can be used on this screen.
Fig. 5.3.1 (b)
The position of DC1 becomes the starting point of the part figure definition. The dividing direction of DC1 can be changed. However, the position cannot be changed. DC2 can change both positions and directions of division. When the specifies dividing point as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (b). The area of the First processing and a Secondary processing will divided as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (c).
Secondary processing area
First processing area
Fig. 5.3.1 (c)
If the NEXT PAGE is pushed in Fig. 5.3.1 (b), the screen switches to the PROCESS SETTING screen.
678
B63304EN/02
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen
This screen is the same as that for the current Series 16TA new CAP2 except that soft key [BACK PAGE] has been added.
D The processing procedure data becomes common to the First processing and a Secondary processing. D When BACK PAGE is pushed, it will return to the screen of Fig. 5.3.1 (b).
5.3.3
Automatic Processing Decision
The machining list screen is displayed while Automatic processing decision. The display of EXECUTING blinks while processing. Each data input screen of the processing definition is not displayed. However, the screen is displayed and the processing stops temporarily in the screen specified to be going to input data with the manual and the screen where the undefined data exists. Can be display each screen of the processing definition by setting system parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
System parameter
708
Bit 6 Each screen of Automatic process decision 1 : Displays. 0 : Does not display.
679
B63304EN/02
5.3.4
Process Area Division
i. Part figure definition and relation of DC1 Automatic processing decision judges that DC1 to DC2 in the clockwise area for the First processing and DC2 to DC1 in the area for Secondary processing.
First processing area
Secondary process area
Fig. 5.3.4 (a)
It is necessary to specify start point on the drawing upper. At the part figure definition to make the process without uselessness. ii. Definition method of DC1 and DC2 The division as shown below cannot be defined. EXAMPLE A. The direction of division is same as that of element.
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
680
B63304EN/02
EXAMPLE B. Secondary processing area is overhang.
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
681
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
B63304EN/02
NC DATA PREPARATION
WARNING Even when the tool path and machining processes specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
The distribution of the program number is as fouraxis lathe system. (Odd number: First processing. Even number: Secondary processing) After when the First processing (Fig. 6 (a)) ends, being drawn to the material and the part figure again, animation on the Secondary processing side will start. (Fig. 6 (b))
Fig. 6 (a) (First processing)
682
B63304EN/02
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
Fig. 6 (b) (Secondary processing)
683
7. MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN
B63304EN/02
MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN
After preparing NC data, the soft key will change as follows so that the machining time can be checked.
Fig. 7 (a)
When MACHN. TIME softkey is pressed, the MACHINING TIME screen is displayed as follows.
Fig. 7 (b)
These kinds of machining time can be checked: first processing, secondary processing, and sum of first and secondary processing time.
684
B63304EN/02
8. TOOL DATA
TOOL DATA
The tool data used for this function is the same as that of standard system.
685
9. TOOLING INFORMATION
B63304EN/02
TOOLING INFORMATION
The tooling information used for this function is the same as that of standard system.
686
B63304EN/02
10. RELATION WITH BACKSIDE MACHINING FAPT
10
RELATION WITH BACKSIDE MACHINING FAPT
If the parameter settings are such that both workpiece reversing and backward machining FAPT functions are selected, the workpiece reversing function can be used, but the backward machining FAPT function cannot. To enable the backward machining FAPT function, set system parameter No. 104 to Do not use workpiece reversing. Basically, a family program created using the backward machining FAPT function cannot be used with the parameters set as stated above. If this family program is used, define the machining processing newly.
687
11. RELATION WITH 4AXIS LATH
B63304EN/02
11
RELATION WITH 4AXIS LATHE
If MTF parameter Nos.1050, 1055 are set to 2axis lath, the double sided machining function can be performed. If these MTF parameter are 4axis lath, this function cannot be used.
688
B63304EN/02
12. SYSTEM PARAMETER
12
SYSTEM PARAMETER
The initial values of home and index positions are set the system parameters. No.206: X coordinate of first processing home position No.207: Z coordinate of first processing home position No.210: X coordinate of first processing index position No.211: Z coordinate of first processing index position No.214: X coordinate of secondary processing home position No.215: Z coordinate of secondary processing home position No.218: X coordinate of secondary processing index position No.219: Z coordinate of secondary processing index position
689
13. MTF PARAMETERS
B63304EN/02
13
MTF PARAMETERS
The MTF parameters are set to the same values as for ordinary 2axis lathes.
690
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II
B63304EN/02
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II
The functions described herein cannot be used with the 16TA CAP II, 16TTA CAP II, 16TB CAP II, 15TFB, or 15TTFB.
693
1. OUTLINE
B63304EN/02
OUTLINE
The animated simulation function is used to execute actual machining simulation by displaying blanks, chuck figures, tailstock figures, and tool figures on the CRT screen. When the user selects the screen used for animated simulation and starts operation of the NC in machine lock mode, the user can view a blank being cut by the tools that are changed each time a T code is issued. In addition, the animated simulation function II has the following features to perform further real simulation. (1) Turning can be simulated with gradation. (2) Simulation can be performed by expanding the Caxis cylindrical grooving. (3) The screen is divided into four parts each time the phase angle is changed during machining of a Yaxis side face. The results of the previous machining simulation are scrolled. (4) The user can check the machining path for all the processes from Caxis machining to Yaxis machining with the threedimensional wire frame display.
694
B63304EN/02
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION
FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION
Main menu screen 6 (INPUT) Animated simulation screen Executing an M code automatically switches between the following screens: Turning screen Caxis screen Caxis cylindrical grooving screen Yaxis screen
Animated simulation parameter screen
Sets the gradation to on or off.
Chuck
Tailstock
Tool holder
Standard chuck data screen
Standard tailstock data screen
Tool holder number list screen
Special chuck data screen
Special tailstock data screen
Tool holder data screen
D With any of the above screens, pressing the [END] soft key returns control to the previous screen. D Regardless of which screen is currently displayed, pressing the [MENU SCREEN] soft key returns control to the main menu screen. For details of how to set a chuck, tailstock, tool holder, and animated simulation parameters, see Section 3.6, Checking NC Data.
695
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II
B63304EN/02
OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
Select 6 from the main menu screen. A blank is drawn on the screen. The blank is automatically scaled up or down such that the entire figure can be safely displayed on the screen. NOTE When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank is displayed in the full screen. As blank data, data for D and L input from menu 1, SELECTION OF MATERIAL & SETTING OF BLANK SIZE is used. (1) Adjust machine conditions. D Set the coordinate system so that the correct workpiece coordinate of a tool can be given when starting the program. Alternatively, move the tool to the start point of the program. D Search for the beginning of the NC program. D Set machine lock mode. (2) Press the [CHECK START] soft key. START is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. (3) Start NC operation. When a T code is issued, an image of the tool is displayed and the user can view a blank being cut.
696
B63304EN/02
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS
ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS
697
B63304EN/02
4.1
ANIMATED SIMULATION OF TURNING
(1) When menu 6 is selected, a blank viewed on the XZ plane is drawn. Drawing based on the XC plane is not performed. (2) Either the interference check function or tool path plotting function is enabled. To use the interference check function, the [INTER CHECK] soft key must be set to on before executing animated simulation. (3) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning. When C or Yaxis animated simulation begins, this screen is switched to another screen. (4) Up to 128 turning tools, can be used for the animated simulation of turning. (5) The maximum tool number usable in the animated simulation of turning is 255.
698
B63304EN/02
4.2
ANIMATED SIMULATION WITH GRADATION
(1) When gradation is set to on with the parameter screen, animated simulation with gradation is performed. Only drawing based on the XZ plane is performed. (Valid only for a singlepath lathe) (2) Half of the blank is drawn with gradation and the other half is filled in. (When the drawing format is reversed, the display is reversed.) (3) For drawing with gradation, the drawn image cannot be enlarged or shrunk, and the tool path display is disabled. (4) Drawing with gradation is enabled for a bar, tube, and special blank. (5) When the [INTER CHECK] soft key has been set to on before executing animated simulation, an interference check is performed during animated simulation. (6) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning. When C or Yaxis animated simulation begins, this screen is switched to another screen.
699
B63304EN/02
4.3
CAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing the tool selection T code switches to the Caxis machining screen. (For cylindrical grooving, an M code set in system parameter No. 742 is referenced.) This screen is displayed in the same way for animated simulation with gradation. (2) The right half of the screen is used to display Caxis cylindrical grooving, the lower left quarter is used to display Caxis end face machining and Caxis side face machining other than cylindrical grooving, and the upper left quarter is used for threedimensional display. (3) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section (a circle) of the tool tip. Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line, regardless of whether the tool path is set to on or off. (4) Even when a portraitmode lathe is being used, drawing is displayed in landscape mode. (5) Up to 32 milling tools can be used in Caxis animated simulation (including those for Yaxis animated simulation). The maximum usable tool number is 127.
700
B63304EN/02
4.4
YAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing the tool selection T code causes switching to the Yaxis machining screen. This screen is displayed in the same way for animated simulation with gradation. (Yaxis side face drawing is updated when the phase angle is changed.) (2) The right half of the screen is used to display Yaxis side face machining, the lower left quarter is used to display Yaxis end face machining, and the upper left quarter is used to display threedimensional line drawing. (3) For Yaxis side face machining, the screen is further divided into four pieces. Each time the phase angle is updated, machining display is scrolled. (The latest machining result is always displayed at the bottom of the screen.) (4) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section of the tool tip. Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line, regardless of whether the tool path is set to on or off. (5) Up to 32 milling tools can be used in Yaxis animated simulation (including those for Caxis animated simulation). The maximum usable tool number is 127.
701
B63304EN/02
4.5
INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION
(1) The interference check is performed only while animated simulation of turning is being executed. (2) If a tool tip and a chuck or tailstock interfere with each other during simulation, an interference alarm is issued. (3) Set the interference check to on or off with the [INTER CHECK] soft key before executing animated simulation. This soft key is automatically locked when animated simulation starts. When the interference check is set to on, the [TOOL PATH] soft key is automatically set to off and locked even if it has been set to on.
702
B63304EN/02
4.6
ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR TWOPATH LATHE
(1) Animated simulation is performed for the first and second turrets. (For a twopath lathe, animated simulation with gradation is not supported.) (2) Normally, the first turret is displayed at the top of the screen and the second turret is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Setting bit 1 of system parameter No. 705 to 1 enables the position of the turrets to be reversed. (3) When the interference check function is on, interference between the first and second turrets is checked, as well as interference between a turret and a chuck or tailstock. (4) For Caxis animated simulation, drawing is performed in the same way as for a singlepath lathe.
703
B63304EN/02
4.7
SOFT KEYS
The following soft keys are displayed on the animated simulation screen. When gradation is turned off
CHECK START
ORIGINAL
PARAM- TOOL ETER PATH
DRAWING INTER RANGE CHECK
END
When gradation is turned on
CHECK START
ORIGI- ROTATE AROUND SECTI- PARAMNAL ON ETER
INTER CHECK
END
[CHECK START] . . . . . . . Starts the animated simulation function. [ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . . . . Restores the blank to the premachining figure. [PARAMETER] . . . . . . . . . Enables to set parameters related to animated simulation. [TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . . . . Enables or disables the tool path display. [DRAWING RANGE] . . . . Enlarges or shrinks a figure. [INTER CHECK] . . . . . . . Enables or disables the interference check function. (This key is not displayed when bit 5 of system parameter No. 701 is set to 0 so that the interference check is not performed.) [END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen. [ROTATE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotates a figure. [AROUND] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to an entire figure. [SECTION] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to half of a figure and draws a cross section of the other half of the figure. NOTE 1 The [ROTATE], [AROUND], and [SECTION] soft keys are disabled during C or Yaxis animated simulation. 2 Animated simulation is possible for 128 tools counted from the beginning of the tooling information. No animated simulation is possible for any more tools.
704
B63304EN/02
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
System parameters used for animated simulation are as listed below. These system parameters are used to set M codes for switching between animated simulation mode for turning and animation simulation mode for C or Yaxis machining. By specifying the M codes that are set using these parameters, before the tool change command in the NC program, animated simulation mode can be switched automatically.
No. 740 741 Format Integer Integer Initial value Undefined Undefined Description Value of the M code for turning (NOTE)
Value of the M code for Caxis machining excluding cylindrical grooving (for switching to the Caxis animated simulation screen) Value of the M code for cylindrical grooving (for switching to the animated simulation screen for cylindrical grooving) Value of the M code for Yaxis machining (for switching to the Yaxis animated simulation screen) Axis name list (must be set when Yaxis animated simulation is performed)
742
Integer
Undefined
743
Integer
Undefined
771
Character Undefined
NOTE The setting of this parameter can be omitted when only turning is performed. However, it cannot be omitted when turning is performed after C or Yaxis machining.
705
6. SUPPLEMENT
B63304EN/02
SUPPLEMENT
(1) Outputting an M code for switching between C and Yaxis machining screens When using the new animated simulation function with 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T, M codes are required to switch between the animated simulation screens for turning, Caxis machining, Caxis cylindrical grooving, and Yaxis machining. Define an MTF function table so that the M codes are output before the tool change command for each machining process. Specify function codes in those MTF function tables to be referenced at the start or end of each Caxisrelated process, as described below, such that the M code indicated by the M code number for the start of Caxis machining or cylindrical grooving, which is set using system parameters, is output. For turning and Yaxis machining, define each existing function table at the start of machining, such that the corresponding M codes are output. Examples Assume that an M code for switching to the Caxis animated simulation screen is to be output at the start of Caxis machining. 1. Set system parameter No. 741 to 22. 2. When Caxis machining is executed at one time, specify the following function codes in MTF No. 2200. To switch to the Caxis animated simulation screen for each Caxis machining process, specify the following function code in MTF Nos. 2220 to 2224. Start of Caxis center drilling NO.2220 = 0168, 0100, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 M22 FEED; This setting outputs an M code block, M22, used to switch to the Caxis animated screen at the start of Caxis center drilling.
706
B63304EN/02
6. SUPPLEMENT
MTF Parameter No. 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 Description Start of Caxis center drilling Start of Caxis drilling Start of Caxis tapping Start of Caxis grooving Start of Caxis notching Start of Caxis cylindrical grooving End of Caxis center drilling End of Caxis drilling End of Caxis tapping End of Caxis grooving End of Caxis notching End of Caxis cylindrical grooving Start of Yaxis process Start of Yaxis center drilling Start of Yaxis drilling Start of Yaxis tapping Start of Yaxis grooving/pocketing Start of Yaxis optional figure Remarks Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T Only for 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, and Symbol CAPi T
(2) Drawing of a tool tip figure using animated simulation is performed within a rectangle having the following size: Vertical size: approximately 45 mm Horizontal size:approximately 36 mm (3) If two or more of the following conditions overlap, animated simulation may not follow the operation of the NC program. D Simultaneous machining has been performed using balance cut. D The holder displayed on the screen is too large. D An extremely high feedrate is set for NC program operation. In this case, the following symptoms can be observed. D The tool path is not displayed correctly. D Part of a figure can not be cut. In such cases, correct the setting as follows: D Make the size of the holder figure smaller. D Scale down the drawing. D Make the feedrate in the NC program operation slower.
707
XIV. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B
B63304EN/02
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B
1. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B
711
B63304EN/02
1.1
SPECIFICATIONS
The ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B provides another view of the animated simulation for the CAP II system with CAXIS FAPT function.Selecting Menu 6[Machining Simulation] in the Main menu,XZ side view of the turning simulation or the CAxis machining simulation is drawn on left half of the screen,and XC front view of the CAxis machining simulation is drawn on right half of the screen.This new simulation function is named as ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B in contrast with the conventional isometric CAxis simulation which is now renamed as ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION A. Whether to use ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION A or ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B is switched by a system parameter. The ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION option and CAxis FAPT FUNCTION option are required to utilize this function.VERTICAL LATHE ANIMATION FUNCTION option is also required if the animated simulation is desired to be drawn vertically on the screen.
1.1.1
Availability
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B is available for following products. FS16/18TC CAPII, FS16/18iTA CAP II
1.1.2
Screen View of Menu 6
When Menu 6 is selected, both XZ side view and XC front view of the work is drawn on the screen,if Caxis machining figure is defined for the work. Side view of the blank is drawn on left half of the screen and front view of the blank is drawn on right half of the screen,including Caxis machining figure defined in Menu 2 [Input of Part Figure]. Both blank figures are painted with specified color in the same manner as conventional animation function. Regarding the color of the Caxis machined figure, refer to the section 2.3 System Parameter. These pictures are drawn in appropriate size by automatically adjusting the magnification factor so that each blank figure fits in corresponding half of the screen. In case Caxis machining figure is not defined for the work, only XZ side view of the work is drawn on full screen.
712
B63304EN/02
1.1.3
Tool Figure for Milling Machining
Following tool patterns are available for Caxis animated simulation.

XZ side view XC face view
End face cutting
Side cutting
Tool holder is drawn only in XZ side view. Tool Diameter (DT) and Tool Length (LT) parameters among the tool data are used to determine width and length of the tool picture respectively, with following exceptions. Width of the center drilling tool picture is determined by the Cut Width (DS) parameter and Length of the tapping and reaming tool picture is determined by the sum of the Tool Length (LT) and the Biting Length (LE) parameters.
1.1.4
Maximum Number of Tools
Maximum number of the tools, which ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B can handle, is total 128 including both turning and milling tools. Among this limit, maximum number of turning tools allowed is 128, and maximum number of milling tools allowed 32. If more than 128 tools are registered in the tooling information, only 128 tools of least significant tool selection numbers are drawn and simulated on the screen.
1.1.5
Animated Simulation
Machining process is simulated as follows. 1) Turning simulation XZ side view: Tool motion is simulated on the screen and machined part of the blank workpiece disappears as tool runs over it. Tool path is also drawn on the screen in accordance with the state of the TOOL PATH softkey. XC front view: Turning simulation is not performed in this view.
713
B63304EN/02
Turning
2) Caxis machining XZ side view: Tool motion is simulated and tool path is drawn on the screen but the workpiece is not cut on the screen. XC front view: Rapid traverse movement is shown by dotted line as a tool path trace and cutting movement is shown by painting workpiece with the footprint of the tool along the tool path. Painting color automatically changes among six colors of yellow, violet, white, gray, light blue, and red each time the tool is changed. Caxis rotation is shown by the circular movement of the tool instead of rotating the front view picture of the workpiece.
Caxis end face drilling
714
B63304EN/02
Caxis side drilling
1.1.6
Interference Check
During turning simulation, following interference is being monitored. And if interference is detected, alam is indicated on the screen. 1) Interference between tool and chuck or tailstock. 2) Interference between tools of turret 1 and turret 2. (In case of two path lathe simulation) Interference is not checked during rapid traverse movement.
1.1.7
Drawing Format
Direction of Xaxis in the XZ side view is determined in accordance with the setting of the Drawing Format. Upward direction of Xaxis in the XC front view always corresponds to the positive direction of Xaxsis, regardless of the setting of the Drawing Format.
1.1.8
Simulation of 2Paths Lathe
In case of simulating 2paths lathe, machining processes are simulated on the screen as follows. In the XZ side view, tools of both turret 1 and turret 2 are drawn for both turning and Caxis machining simulation. If simultaneous cutting by both turret 1 and turret 2 tools, which can be programmed for only turning process, is simulated, both turret 1 and turret 2 tools in this view move simultaneously. In the XC front view, the motion of either one of the tools which is now cutting the workpiece is simulated as described in section 2.1.5, only while Caxis machining process. While turning process, no tool motion is simulated in this view. Refer to section 2.3, System Parameter, for the position of the turrets which are drawn on the screen during the simulation.
715
B63304EN/02
1.2
OPERATION 1.2.1
Drawing Type
By setting appropriate value in the parameter DRAWING TYPE C =, which is included in the PARAMETER SETwindow of the animated simulation, the simulation picture can be selected as follows. C=1: Draw XZ side view on left side and XC front view on right side of the screen =0: Draw XZ side view on full screen Following softkeys are available for animated simulation.
1.2.2
SoftKey
CHECK START ORIGINAL
PARAMETER
TOOL PATH
DRAWNG RANGE
INTER. CHECK
END
[CHECK START] Press to start animated simulation. [ORIGINAL] Press to restore blank workpiece figure on the screen. [PARAMETER] press to set various parameters relating to the animated simulation. [DRAWNG RANGE] Press to increase or reduce the size of the simulation picture on the screen. This softkey is not valid and not shown on the screen when simulation views of both side view and front view are displayed on the screen. Also, because this softkey is valid only before the CHECK START softkey is pressed and it disappears from the screen when CHECK START is pressed, this softkey must be operated before pressing CHECK START key if magnification or reduction is required. [TOOL PATH] Each time this key is pressed, the tool path tracing mode alternates between ON and OFF. When ON, tool path traces are drawn on both side view and front view of the simulation. Tool path tracing mode can be alternated during the simulation. While in the interference check mode, the tool path traces are not drawn. [INTER.CHECK] Each time this key is pressed, the interference check mode alternates between ON and OFF. This softkey disappears when bit 5 of the system parameter No. 701 is ON(disable interference check). When the interference check mode is switched ON, tool path tracing mode is forced to be OFF. The interference check mode can be changed only before the CHECK STARTsoftkey is pressed. After the key is pressed, pressing INTERFERENCE softkey does not change the state of the interference check mode. [END] Press to return to the Main Menu.
716
B63304EN/02
1.3
PARAMETERS 1.3.1
System Parameter
No. 0019 Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits) Initial value 00000000 Description Select horizontal or vertical drawing format for the drawings of: Bit 0 Menu 4, 5, and 6. or (Note) Bit 1 Menu 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6.. 0: Horizontal Drawing 1: Vertical Drawing Color of lines which indicate outline of a part machined by turning process.
0552 0590 0701
Integer Integer 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits)
1 (RED)
6 Color of lines which indicate outline of a (Light Blue) part machined by Caxis machining. 00000000 Bit 0 Select Animated Simulation Function A or B 0: Animated Simulation Function A 1: Animated Simulation Function B Turret placement during 2path lathe simulation 0: Place turret 1 in upper side of the screen. 1: Place turret 1 in lower side of the screen.
0705
00000000
Bit 1
NOTE ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION for VERTICAL LATHE option is required if the animated simulation of Menu 6 is desired to be drawn vertically on the screen.
717
B63304EN/02
1.4
RESTRICTIONS
Followings are the restrictions for the ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B. 1) Gradation painting of the workpiece is not available 2) Yaxis machining cannot be simulated. 3) When both XZ side view and XC front view are shown in a screen, magnification or reduction of the size of the workpicec cannot be done. 4) When Interference Check mode is ON, tool path traces are not drawn on the screen during machining simulation. 5) During Caxis machining simulation, Interference Check function is not available. 6) It can happen that the animated simulation cannot properly follow the actual movement of the NC program being executed, if following three condition are met at the same time. D Simulating simultaneous 2paths machining of the Balance Cut FAPT Function. D Tool holder is extremely large. D Feed rate is extremely fast. In this situation, following malfunction can be observed. D Tool path traces are not correctly drawn. D Workpiece is not correctly cut on the screen. To avoid this, make following adjustment. D Make the size of the tool holder smaller. D Reduce the size of the simulation picture. D Reduce feed rate.
718
XV. Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
The functions described herein cannot be used with the 16TA CAP II, 16TTA CAP II, 16TB CAP II, 16TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II, 15TFB, or 15TTFB.
721
1. GENERAL
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
GENERAL
D Information is displayed on the screen using background colors and 3D soft keys in such a way that the information is easy to understand. D Conventional screen mode (no background colors and no 3D soft keys) can also be used by specifying the corresponding system parameter. D Any of three different coloring patterns can be set. D If either Symbol CAPi T or NC screen is specified to use, or not use, background colors, normal display may not be possible in some cases.
Fig. 1. Screen with background color
722
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
2. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS
723
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
2.1
DISPLAYING SCREENS WITH BACKGROUND COLOR
D Setting bit 0 of system parameter No. 801 to 0 enables screen displays with background colors and 3D soft keys. This is referred to as background color mode. When using this mode, set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3119 to 0 so that NC screen displays are also provided with background colors. D Setting bit 0 of system parameter No. 801 to 1 does not enable screen displays with background colors and 3D soft keys. This is referred to as plain mode. When using this mode, set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3119 to 1 so that NC screens are also not displayed with background colors. D If you switch the screen mode using bit 0 of system parameter No. 801, reset the system parameters related to color data and displays so that the screen is easy to read. D See Section 2.4, Coloring Data Setting Initialization for an explanation of how to change all the color settings at the same time.
2.2
SELECTING COLOR PATTERNS
You can select a desired color pattern from the three different coloring patterns on the initial screen using soft keys.
Fig. 2.2 Initial screen
If bit 1 of system parameter No. 801 is set to 1, the following soft keys are displayed and can be used to select a coloring pattern. [COLOR1 SELECT] . . . . Selects coloring pattern 1. [COLOR2 SELECT] . . . . Selects coloring pattern 2. [COLOR3 SELECT] . . . . Selects coloring pattern 3.
724
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
2.3
COLORING DATA SETTING
D Three coloring patterns can be specified on the coloring setting screen. D Each of the three coloring patterns has containers (hereafter called palettes) for 15 character colors and 15 graphics colors. D The color on any palette can be changed. D System parameter Nos. 500 to 699 specify the location where each palette is used. D Each palette has a fixed use. Use caution when selecting a palette. D Coloring data (generic name of data specified in three different coloring patterns) can be input and output by setting system data and using the input/output screen. D Coloring data is held only in submemory. No copy of it is held in main memory. The uses of the coloring data listed below are fixed. They cannot be changed, even with the system parameters for setting color displays. Character coloring data
Table 2.3.1 (a) Palette number 0 Fixed use D Background color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Portion representing shadow of a recessed display D Registered character color 1 (soft key frame) Note) The color on the palette cannot be changed. D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animated tool/holder display color (animation with gradation) D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) Standard color Black
2.3.1
Fixed Use of Coloring Data
Pale red
D Character color for animation windows displayed on Dark gray the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Registered character color 2 (portion representing shadow of a recessed soft key) D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Background color for prompt input windows D Registered character color 3 (background color for an animation window displayed in the soft key frame) D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Background color for soft keys and NC status displays D Registered character color 4 (background color of soft key display in the soft key frame) Gray 1
Gray 2
725
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
Palette number 5
Fixed use D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) D Character color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Bright portion of a recessed display D Registered character color 5 (bright portion of a recessed soft key) D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) D C/Y animation coordinate axis and frame line color (animation with gradation)
Standard color Pale yellow
Pale sky blue
Bright white
D Character color for portions other than animation Dark gray windows displayed on NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Character color for portions other than animation windows displayed on NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Character color for portions other than animation windows on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animation blank figure crosssection color (animation with gradation) D Character color for portions other than animation windows on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen Dark red
10
Dark green
11
Dark yellow
12
D Character color for portions other than animation Dark blue windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animated chuck/tailstock display color (animation with gradation) D Character color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) D Character color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation with gradation) Dark reddish purple
13
14
Dark sky blue
15
D Character color for portions other than animation Dark gray windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen
726
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
Graphics coloring data

Table 2.3.1 (b) Palette number 0 Fixed use D Line color for animation windows on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen Note) The color in the palette cannot be changed. D Line color for animation windows on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animated tool/holder display color (animation without gradation) D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animation blank figure crosssection color (animation without gradation) D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) Standard color Black
Pale red
Dark green
Pale yellow
D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC Light blue data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Animated chuck/tailstock display color (animation without gradation) D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) Light reddish purple
D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC Light sky data creation screen and machining simulation screen blue D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) D Line color in animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) D C/Y animation coordinate axis and frame line color (animation without gradation) Bright white
D Line color for portions other than animation windows Dark gray displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen Dark red
10
Dark green
727
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
Palette number 11
Fixed use D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation)
Standard color Dark yellow
12
D Line color for portions other than animation windows Dark blue displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen D C/Y animation 3D tool path color (animation without gradation) D Line color for portions other than animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen Dark reddish purple
13
14
Dark sky blue
15
Bright gray
NOTE The background color for animation windows displayed on the NC data creation screen and machining simulation screen is fixed to black.
2.3.2
Coloring Data Setting Screen
(1) Press soft key [DATA SETTING] on the Symbol CAPi T initial screen. (2) Select 1. SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT. (3) Selecting 21. COLORING DATA SETTING displays the coloring data setting screen shown in Fig. 2.3.2.
Fig. 2.3.2 Coloring data setting screen (character color)
728
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
The following operations can be performed by pressing the respective soft keys listed below. [CURSOR ] . . . Selects the number of the palette in which a color on which is to be changed. [RED+] . . . . . . . . . . Increases the degree of redness. (NOTE 1) [RED] . . . . . . . . . . Decreases the degree of redness. [GREEN+] . . . . . . . Increases the degree of greenness. [GREEN] . . . . . . . Decreases the degree of greenness. [BLUE+] . . . . . . . . Increases the degree of blueness. [BLUE] . . . . . . . . Decreases the degree of blueness. [GRPC. COLOR] . . Switches to the graphics color setting screen. (NOTE 2) [CHAR. COLOR] . Switches to the character color setting screen. [END] . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT menu. Pressing the rightmost soft key [+] changes the soft key displays as shown below:
[+]
[COLOR1 COPY] . . . . Copies the data of coloring pattern 1 to the selected coloring pattern. [COLOR2 COPY] . . . . Copies the data of coloring pattern 2 to the selected coloring pattern. [COLOR3 COPY] . . . . Copies the data of coloring pattern 3 to the selected coloring pattern. (NOTE 3, 5) [COLOR1 SELECT] . . Selects coloring pattern 1 as the coloring pattern to be displayed and set. [COLOR2 SELECT] . . Selects coloring pattern 2 as the coloring pattern to be displayed and set. [COLOR3 SELECT] . . Selects coloring pattern 3 as the coloring pattern to be displayed and set. (NOTE 4, 5)
729
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 The range that can be specified for the gradation tone is 0 to 15; the higher the number, the greater the illuminance. 2 Either the [GRPC. COLOR] or [CHAR. COLOR] soft key is displayed depending on the type of the current coloring data setting screen. 3 When a coloring pattern is copied, the color of the displays changes immediately, as specified in the copy source coloring data. 4 When the coloring pattern is switched, the color of the displays changes immediately, as specified in the selected coloring pattern. 5 For both character and graphics coloring patterns, the data corresponding to the specified number is copied or selected.
2.3.3
Coloring Data Input/Output
The specified coloring data can be output to an external device and subsequently input again. (1) Press soft key [DATA SETTING] on the Symbol CAPi T initial screen. (2) Select 1. SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT. (3) To output the coloring data, select 22. COLORING DATA OUTPUT. To input the coloring data, select 23. COLORING DATA INPUT.
Fig. 2.3.3 System parameter setting and input/output screen
D The detail input/output operations for this system data are the same as those for other system data. See Section 2, INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA. D If coloring data is input from an external device, the coloring data and displays are switched accordingly.
730
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
2.4
COLORING DATA SETTING INITIALIZATION 2.4.1
SP Key
If the power is switched on with the SP key held down, the coloring data for [COLOR1] to [COLOR3] is set using the FANUC standard values for background color mode, and the coloring pattern for [COLOR1] is selected.
2.4.2
P Key
If other than the correct coloring is specified, the display on the screen may become impossible to read. To overcome this, switch on the power while holding down the P key. The coloring data for [COLOR1] to [COLOR3] is set using the FANUC standard values for background color mode, and the coloring pattern for [COLOR1] is selected.
731
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
2.4.3
Auxiliary Commands
(1) CFINT If submemory initialization CFINT is performed, the coloring data for [COLOR1] to [COLOR3] is set using the FANUC standard values for background color mode, and the coloring pattern for [COLOR1] is selected. (2) NEWCOLOR/OLDCOLOR All the initial values of the system parameters related to color displays and coloring data can be set to the FANUC standard values for the background color or plain mode at the same time. 1 Press soft key [AUXILIARY] on the Symbol CAPi T initial screen. 2 Respond to the prompt Request = with either of the following commands. NEWCOLOR: D Resets bit 0 of system parameter No. 801 to 0 (background color mode). D Initializes the system parameters related to color displays and coloring data to the FANUC standard values for background color mode. OLDCOLOR: D Sets bit 0 of system parameter No. 801 to 1 (plain mode). D Initializes the system parameters related to color displays and coloring data to the FANUC standard values for plain mode. NOTE These commands save all the system parameters from main memory to submemory.
Fig. 2.4.3 Screen with no background color or No 3D soft keys (conventional screen)
3 When these commands are executed, the message PLEASE TURN OFF POWER appears on the screen. Switch the power off and on again.
732
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
2.5
SOFT KEY STATUS INDICATION
The operation status of some soft keys is indicated. In plain mode, whether the operation of a soft key is under way is indicated by reversing the color of the soft key display. In background color mode, whether the operation of a soft key is under way is indicated by recessing the soft key.
Fig. 2.5 (a) Soft key status indication in plain mode
Fig. 2.5 (b) Soft key status indication in background color mode
If a soft key is not of a type whose operation status is indicated, pressing it does not cause it to be recessed.
2.6
SWITCHING TO AND FROM THE NC SCREEN 2.6.1
Screens for other than Menu Number 6
If switching occurs from the Symbol CAPi T screen to the NC screen, and reverse switching occurs again, the Symbol CAPi T screen returns to its previous status.
2.6.2
Screen for Menu Number 6
When both the NC and Symbol CAPi T screens are in background color mode (screen with a background color), and if switching to the NC screen occurs in animation mode, followed by switching back to the Symbol CAPi T screen, all previous animated drawings are canceled, and the blank figures that existed before animation are drawn. When both the NC and Symbol CAPi T screens are in plain mode (screen with no background color), the situation varies depending on whether gradation is used. If gradation is not used, animated drawings are maintained in the background even after switching to the NC screen occurs. When switching back to the Symbol CAPi T screen occurs, therefore, resumed drawings represent the situation of a figure machined as directed by the executed NC program. If gradation is used, the situation is the same as when both the NC and Symbol CAPi T screens are in background color mode.
733
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
2.7
COMPATIBILITY WITH CAP II
The Symbol CAPi T (series 5F01/5F11) is upwardcompatible with CAP II (series 5F00/5F10). In other words, they are functionally equivalent except for the screen displays. Family programs and other data prepared on CAP II can be used on the Symbol CAP T. When software is updated from the CAP II (series 5F00/5F11) to the Symbol CAPi T (series 5F01/5F10), bit 0 of system parameter No. 801 is automatically set to 1 (plain mode in which a background color or 3D soft key is not displayed), and system parameter Nos. 690 to 699 and coloring data are automatically initialized to the FANUC standard values for plain mode. So, the displays remain unchanged from state existing before the update.
Fig. 2.7 Plain mode screen (conventional screen)
734
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
D Set color display system parameter Nos. 500 to 699 to a number between 0 to 7. Table 3 (a) lists the relationships between each specified number and the palette referenced by the number. The meaning of each specified number differs depending on the screen display mode (bit 0 of system parameter No. 801) and the display area. D If a negative number is specified for a character color, the character color becomes reversed to the background color.
Table 3 (a) Specified parameter numbers and referenced pallet numbers Palette number Specified number Background color mode Plain mode Display area outside animation windows 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Display area within animation windows 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
735
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
Table 3 (b) Color display system parameters Parameter No. 500 501 502 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 570 571 572 573 574 575 to 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 to 589 Coloring data type Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Standard value 4 4 3 0 2 1 7 4 4 2 2 2 2 6 6 5 3 2 2 2 2 2 Undefined 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 Undefined Details Fixed screen for drawing type setting Fixed screen for blank figure and basic line setting Not used Coordinate axis Line showing blank figures Line showing machining profiles Threading area for machining definitions with menu No. 4 Center drilling path Drilling, reaming, and tapping path Outer surface rough machining path Inner surface rough machining path Outer surface semifinish machining path Inner surface semifinish machining path Outer surface finishing path Inner surface finishing path Grooving/necking path Threading path Yaxis machining path (center drilling) Yaxis machining path (drilling) Yaxis machining path (tapping) Yaxis machining path (pattern machining) Yaxis machining path (contour machining) Not used Parts figure for Yaxis machining Caxis machining path (center drilling) Caxis machining path (drilling) Caxis machining path (tapping) Caxis machining path (grooving) Caxis machining path (notching) Caxis machining path (cylindrical grooving) Line showing onhold machining profile (onhold mode Not used
736
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
Parameter No. 590 591 592 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621
Coloring data type Graphic Graphic Graphic Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character
Standard value 6 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 2 0 1 1 4 6 4 3 4 1 4 4 4 7 4 4 4 Parts figure for Caxis machining Caxis machining path (reaming) Caxis machining path (boring)
Details
Version information displayed on the initial screen Not used Displaying entered commands in response to a request made by pressing the [AUXILIARY] key on the initial screen Messages from the system Mounting messages related to BC and EF Name of a file displayed when a family program is input and output Menu display Displaying invalid input data Message (1: ABORT, 0: CONTINUE) Wink No. 1 (wink for menu numbers on the menu screen and symbol names in prompts) Wink No. 2 (wink being executed) Wink No. 3 (wink for parameter Nos. being specified) Wink No. 4 (process number wink for menu No. 4) Cursor for indicating a machining area and an enlargement range Error message Prompt symbol name at the bottom Symbol (called keyword) for messages other than the current prompt message Entered data (displayed to the right of a keyword) Main title on the first line, and page number Subtitle on the first line, and the same message in a prompt (mainly in the main prompt) Message on line 2 Fixed messages (messages other than prompts that always appear on the page, and related messages) (Example) 1 : ROUND BAR on the material selection screen. Fixed messages for one page (a group of similar messages on one page of a process chart or the like) Prompt messages Not used
622 623 624
Character Character
6 4 7
737
Symbol CAPi T
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 625 626 627
Coloring data type Character Character Character
Standard value 3 5 6
Details Keyword in a prompt and the related data Message PRESS THE SOFT KEY (with the screen fixed) Message accompanying a message in a prompt (Example) Accompanying message displayed when EErelated data is entered for groove figures (0: THIS SIDE, 1: NEXT) Data (including numeric data) already entered (Example 1) Color of element symbol displayed on line 2 on a machining profile definition screen (Example 2) Parameter data and coordinate data displays Main title with no page number (Example 1) Parameter and data setting displayed when DATA SET on the initial screen is pressed Not used Scaling factor display character S= T code display character T Onumber display character O NC data Coordinate characters X and Z Cutting time display character Cutting = Rapid traverse time display character Rapid traverse = Color for blank figures in animated drawings Color for chucks in animated drawings Color for tailstocks in animated drawings Color for center lines in animated drawings Color for tool holders in animated drawings Color for the chip of tool post 1 in animated drawings Color for the chip of tool post 2 in animated drawings Not used Color for input data on the initial screen data setting screen CAF (machining area) drawing color (Do not change the data.) Not used Prompt symbol name at the bottom of the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Symbol (called keyword) for prompt messages other than the current prompt message on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Do not change the set values.
628
Character
629
Character
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 to 699 670 671 672 to 689 690 691
Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Character Graphic Character Character
2 0 4 1 5 7 4 4 2 4 4 5 1 1 1 Undefined 4 4 Undefined 7 7
738
B63304EN/02
Symbol CAPi T
Parameter No. 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699
Coloring data type Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character
Standard value 7 5 7 6 7 11 3 4
Details Data entered on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 (characters entered on the entry line at the bottom) Prompt message and message on line 2 of the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Prompt data in a prompt on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Numeric data on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 T code display character T on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Background color for title displays Background color for the prompt input window Background color for soft key and NC status displays
Number 0801
Type 0.1 Specification (eight pieces)
Initial value 00000000

Bit 7 6 5 4
Description
Remarks New
1 0
0 0
Bit 0
Screen display mode 0 : Background color mode 1 : Plain mode Coloring data selection method 0 : Cannot be selected on the initial screen 1 : Can be selected on the initial screen
Bit 1
Note) If you change the screen display mode, press soft key [SAVE END] on the setting screen and switch the power off and on again.
NOTE 1 If the following NC functions are used, and switching occurs to the NC screen, it becomes impossible to restore the previous graphics drawing correctly. D Servo waveform diagnosis function D Graphics drawing function D Dynamic graphics drawing function D C executor 2 Set both bit 0 of system parameter No. 810 and bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3119 to 1, or reset both to 0.
739
XVI. CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES
B63304EN/02
CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES
1. CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES
743
B63304EN/02
1.1
OUTLINE
This is a conversational automatic programming function which is dedicated for creating part programs for the 2path lathe with two opposing spindles each of which accompanies its own turret.
Primary Turret
Secondary Turret
X1
X2
Z1
Z2
Primary Spindle Fig.1.1(a)
Secondary Spindle Fig.1.1(b)
D Part programs are generated associating the primary turret tools with the primary spindle for the primary machining process and the secondary turret tools with the secondary spindle for the secondary machining process. D Coordinate systems for both the primary turret (path 1) and the secondary turret (path 2) are as shown in Fig.1.1 (a) and Fig.1.1 (b) respectively. D Conveying process of the work between the spindles can be programmed by using the Sub Cycle Function. D Animated simulation for both primary and secondary machining processes can be performed simultaneously.
744
B63304EN/02
1.2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1.2.1
Definition of Blank Figure
Define the base line position for the secondary cutting process, ZP2, as well as the base line position for the primary cutting process, ZP.
X2 L X
ZP2
ZP
NOTE This figure describes the case in Drawing Format 2.
BASE LINE . . . . . . . . . ZP = BASE LINE 2 . . . . . . . ZP2= BASE LINE (ZP) : Specify the distance between the base line of the primary spindle side coordinate system and the end face of the blank. BASE LINE 2 (ZP2) : Specify the distance between the base line of the secondary spindle side coordinate system and the end face of the blank.
1.2.2
Definition of Part Figure
(1) Part Figure for turning process Just define the whole finished part figure in the same manner as the conventional CAP II for 1path or 2path lathe. There is no need to distinguish the portion, which is machined in the primary cutting process, from the portion, which is machined in the secondary cutting process.
745
B63304EN/02
(2) Part Figure for C axis machining When defining figures for end face hole, end face groove and face milling, you are prompted to select the plane, which those figures are defined on, from one of FRONT FACE or REAR FACE. Refer to chapter X. BACK MACHINING FAPT, section 2.1.2 Part figure input, item (2) Part figure input for C axis machining, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04.
1.2.3
Home Position and Turret Index Position
Specify the coordinates of the home position (DXH,ZH) and the turret index position (DXI,ZI) for the primary turret and the secondary turret.
Primary Turret
Secondary Turret
ZH,ZI DXH,DXI DXH,DXI
ZH,ZI
Primary Spindle
Secondary Spindle
TURRET NO. = 1 HOME POSITION DXH = ZH = INDEX POSITION DXI = ZI =
TURRET NO. = 2 HOME POSITION 2 DXH = ZH = INDEX POSITION 2 DXI = ZI =
Coordinates of the home position and the turret index position for primary and secondary turret should be specified in each corresponding coordinate system. These coordinate values can be registered in the following system parameters as a default value.
746
B63304EN/02
Primary Turret Machine home position (X value) Machine home position (Z value) Turret index position (X value) Turret index position (Z value) Secondary Turret Machine home position (X value) Machine home position (Z value) Turret index position (X value) Turret index position (Z value)
System Parameter No. : No.206 : No.207 : No.210 : No.211 : : : : No.216 No.217 No.220 No.221
1.2.4
Machining Definition
(1) Machining type selection Following machining types are available. Use Sub Cycle and create appropriate macrocall command to realize work conveying process from the primary spindle to the secondary spindle. Available machining types.
b. e. h. k. n. q. t. w. DRILLING BAR FEED SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIG. SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIG. ROUGHING OF GROOVE CAXIS CENTER DRILLING CAXIS GROOVING SUB CYCLE c. f. i. l. o. r. u. REAMING CUTTING OFF FINISHING OF OUTER FIG. FINISHING OF INNER FIG. FINISHING OF GROOVE CAXIS DRILLING CAXIS FACE MILLING
a. d. g. j. m. p. s. v.
CENTER DRILLING TAPPING ROUGHING OF OUTER FIG. ROUGHING OF INNER FIG. GROOVING OR NECKING THREADING CAXIS TAPPING CAXIS SIDE MILLING
Among these machining types, BAR FEED and CUTTING OFF can be specified only for the primary machining process. Define the sequence of the machining steps as follows in the KINDS OF MACHINING window. (1) Primary machining process (2) Sub Cycle (Work conveying process) (3) Secondary machining process D Whether a machining step belongs to the primary machining process or the secondary machining process is determined by selecting the turret number in the tool data setting window, described later. D The Sub Cycle for work conveying process must be defined in between the primary process and the secondary process. (2) Tool Data (a) Turret Selection Select turret number to determine which machining process, primary or secondary, the machining steps specified in the KINDS OF MACHINING window belong to. TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . TOOL ID. NO. . . . . . . . . . . . TL TN TM ID = = = =
747
B63304EN/02
D Set as TL = 1 to specify the current machining step to be the primary machining process. Set as TL = 2 to specify it to be the secondary machining process. (b) Setting Tool Data for Turning process D Set the tool data for the primary machining process referring to the figures below noted as Primary Turret. D Set the tool data for the secondary machining process referring to the figures below noted as Secondary Turret. Following tool figures are the examples in case drawing format 1 or 2 for lateral lathe is selected. 1) Center drilling/ Drilling
Primary Turret Secondary Turret
AS = 180 +AN +DD AS = 0 +DD +AN
2) OD Cutting Normal tool

Primary Turret AS=90 Secondary Turret AS=90 AC AN+ AN XN+ RN+ ZN+ Cutting direction RN+ ZN Cutting direction
AC+
XN+
748
B63304EN/02
Reverse tool
Primary Turret AS=90 AC AN XN+ RN+ ZN ZN+ XN+ RN+ Secondary Turret AS=90 AC+ AN+
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
749
B63304EN/02
Button tool
Primary Turret AS=90 AC=0.00001 AN= 0.00002 Secondary Turret AS=90 AC= 0.00001 AN=0.00002
AC AN+ AN
AC+
XN+
RN+
RN+
XN+
ZN+ Cutting direction
ZN Cutting direction
Primary Turret AS=90 AC= 0.00001 AN=0.00002
Secondary Turret AS=90 AC=0.00001 AN= 0.00002
AC+ AN
AC AN+
RN+
XN+
XN+
RN+
ZN Cutting direction
ZN+ Cutting direction
3) ID Cutting Normal Tool

Primary Turret XN+ RN+ ZN+ AN Cutting direction AC+ AC AN+ Cutting direction AS = 180 AS = 0 RN+ ZN Secondary Turret XN+
750
B63304EN/02
Facing tool
Primary Turret XN+ RN+ AS = 180 AS = 0 Secondary Turret XN+ RN+ ZN AC AN Cutting direction
ZN+
AC+
AN+ Cutting direction
Button tool
Primary Turret AS=180 AS= 0 AC+ AC Secondary Turret
AC=90.00001 AN=0.00002
AC=90.00001 AN = 0.00002
ZN+
RN+ AN AN+
RN+
ZN
XN+
XN+
Cutting direction Primary Turret AS=180
Cutting direction Secondary Turret AS= 0 AC ZN+ ZN AN RN+ AC=89.99999 AN= 0.00002
AC=89.99999 AN= 0.00002
AN+ RN+
AC+
XN
XN
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
751
B63304EN/02
Button tool facing

Primary Turret XN+ AC=0.00001 AN= 0.00002 Secondary Turret AC= 0.00001 AN=0.00002 XN+
AC ZN+ RN+ AN+ AS=180 AS= 0
AC+ ZN RN+ AN
Cutting direction Primary Turret Secondary Turret
Cutting direction
AN
AS=180
AS= 0
AN+ RN+ ZN+
RN+ ZN AC+ AC
XN+ Cutting direction
AC= 0.00001 AN=0.00002
AC=0.00001 AN= 0.00002
752
B63304EN/02
4) OD Grooving
Primary Turret AS =90
Secondary Turret AS =90
Cutting direction RN+ XN+ ZN+ AN
AC+
AC AN+
Cutting direction RN+ XN+ ZN
WN+ Primary Turret AS =90
WN+
Secondary Turret AS =90
Cutting AC AN+ direction RN+ XN+ ZN WN+
Cutting direction AN RN+ XN+ ZN+ WN+ AC+
5) ID Grooving
Primary Turret XN+ WN+ Secondary Turret WN+ XN+ RN+ ZN+ AN+ RN+ AS = 180 AC = 0 AS = 0 AC = 0 ZN AN RN+
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
753
B63304EN/02
6) End Face Grooving

Primary Turret Cutting direction XN+ RN+ ZN+ AN AC+ AN+ AC AS = 180 AS = 0 RN+ ZN WN+ Secondary Turret Cutting direction XN+
WN+
Primary Turret Cutting direction
Secondary Turret Cutting direction
WN+
AC AN+
AC+ AN
WN+ ZN+
ZN RN+ XN+ AS = 180 AS = 0 RN+ XN+
7) OD Necking Primary Turret Specify 135 degrees as tool mounting angle (AS) for OD grooving or end face grooving tool. Secondary Turret Specify 45 degrees as tool mounting angle (AS) for OD grooving or end face grooving tool. 8) ID Necking Primary Turret Specify 135 degrees as tool mounting angle (AS) for ID grooving and 135 degrees for end face grooving tool. Secondary Turret Specify 45 degrees as tool mounting angle (AS) for ID grooving and 45 degrees for end face grooving tool.
754
B63304EN/02
9) OD Threading Normal thread

Primary Turret AS=90 Secondary Turret AS=90 AC+
AC AN+ AN
XN+ ZN=0 RN+ RN+ ZN=0
XN+
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
Reverse thread
Primary Turret AS=90 AC+ AC AN+ Secondary Turret AS=90
AN
XN+ RN+ ZN=0
XN+ ZN=0 RN+
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
10) ID Threading Normal thread
Primary Turret AS =180 XN = 0 ZN+ AC+ AN Cutting direction Cutting direction AS = 0 XN = 0
Secondary Turret
RN+
RN+ ZN AC AN+
755
B63304EN/02
Reverse thread
Primary Turret RN+ ZN+ AC+ AN+ Cutting direction Cutting direction AS =180 XN = 0 AS = 0 XN = 0 ZN AC AN Secondary Turret RN+
11) Face Threading Normal thread

Primary Turret Secondary Turret
RN+ AN ZN=0 AC+
AS=180
AS=0
RN+ AN+ AC ZN=0
Reverse thread
Primary Turret XN+ Secondary Turret XN+
ZN=0
AC AN+
AS=180
AS=0
AC+
ZN=0
RN+
AN
RN+
Cutting direction
Cutting direction
756
B63304EN/02
(c) Setting Tool Data for Caxis Machining D In setting tool data for Caxis machining process, it is not necessary to distinguish the turret which the tool is mounted on. D Refer to chapter VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION, section 2.1.2 Tool data for Caxis machining of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE, OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04, for the settings of tool data for Caxis machining process. D When setting tool data for Caxis machining process, you are prompted to specify the mounting direction of the tool as follows. SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . CP = ( 0: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE ) Specify CP = 1 for the machining of the portion which is defined as FS = 0 (FRONT FACE) in the part figure definition step, and specify CP = 2 for the portion defined as FS = 1 (REAR FACE). (d) Reversing the Tool Shape With following operations, a tool shape is automatically reversed around the Xaxis. 1) In case the secondary turret (TL = 2) is specified for a tool; When a tool management (ID) number is specified in the tool data window, the registered tool data with the same ID number is read out of the Tool Data database. If the secondary turret is specified for this tool at this time, the tool shape in the database is reversed around the Xaxis and displayed in the window. 2) When turret number is changed; When the turret number (TL) is changed in the tool data window, the tool shape is reversed around the Xaxis in the tool data window. NOTE Automatic reversing of the tool shape is valid when system parameter No.800#3 is set to 1.
(3) Cutting Area Method for determining the cutting area is the same as that of conventional CAP II for 1path or 2path lathe. Determine the cutting area by moving graphic cursors along the part figure. D For the method of determining the cutting area for the turning process, refer to chapter III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT, section 3.4.7 Specifying the direction and area of cutting, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04.
757
B63304EN/02
D For the method of determining the cutting area for the Caxis machining process, refer to chapter X. BACK MACHINING FAPT, section 2.1.4 Machining definition, (5) Cutting direction and cutting data of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04. (4) Cutting Condition Method for determining the cutting condition is the same as that of conventional CAP II for 1path or 2path lathe. Refer to chapter III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT, section 3.4.8 Cutting conditions, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04. (5) Notes (a) Front face features cannot be machined in the secondary cutting process and rear face features cannot be machined in the primary cutting process. (b) BAR FEED and CUTTING OFF machining cannot be specified for the secondary machining process. (c) Define the machining steps in the sequence with the primary machining processes first and the secondary machining processes next. Staggering the primary and the secondary machining processes results in a part program with which the machine does not operate correctly. (d) The automatic process determination function cannot be used for the part which has a feature or features machined in the secondary machining process. (e) Automatic determination of the cutting area is not available for the secondary machining portion of the work. (f) Yaxis machining cannot be programmed. (g) Do not specify the cutting area so that start point and/or end point of the part figure is included in it as shown in the following figure. Wrong cutting area will be created as a result.
Start point/End point of part figure

DE
DS
758
B63304EN/02
1.2.5
NC Data Preparation
D Method for creating NC data is the same as that of conventional CAP II for 1path or 2path lathe. D Primary machining NC data is stored in the main part program memory of the CNC and secondary machining NC data in the sub part program memory of the CNC. D Primary machining NC data is created in the primary coordinate system and secondary machining NC data in the secondary coordinate system. D With Extended Sub Cycle Function option, identical sub cycle process commands can be output on both primary and secondary machining NC data by setting 0 for the TURRET No. (TL = 0) in the SUB CYCLE window. D For other details, refer to chapter III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT, section 3.5 NC Data Preparation, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04.
Primary machining NC data
Secondary machining NC data
Primary machining process Identical sub cycle machining commands are output on both NC data by setting 0 for the TURRET NO.(TL =0).
Sub cycle process
Sub cycle process
Secondary machining process
759
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Machining time is not displayed for sub cycle process. 2 Motion of sub cycle process is not simulated in the background animated simulation. 3 Process Editing Function is not available.
1.2.6
Animated Simulation Function
D Primary and secondary machining processes are simulated simultaneously. D Primary machining simulation is displayed on the left half of the screen and secondary machining simulation on the right half of the screen. (See Fig.1.2.6 (a) and Fig.1.2.6 (b)) D Only work piece and tool are drawn on the screen during the simulation. D During Caxis machining simulation, isometric perspective view is shown in upper half of the primary and/or secondary machining window, and Caxis front view or side view is shown in lower half of the window. D Following operations are performed on the work piece figures by receiving corresponding Mcode from NC part program. Actual Mcodes are defined by the corresponding system parameters. 1) Restore original blank figure on the primary machining window. (Mcode defined by system parameter No.744) (Work piece figure in the secondary machining window is not deleted.) 2) Move work piece figure from the primary machining window to the secondary machining window. (Mcode defined by system parameter No.745) (Work piece figure in the primary machining window is deleted.) 3) Delete work piece figure in the secondary machining window. (Mcode defined by system parameter No.746) (Work piece figure in the primary machining window is not deleted.) D * MOVE WORK and COPY WORK softkeys are available for moving or copying work piece figure from the primary machining window to the secondary machining window. 1) By depressing the MOVE WORK softkey, the work piece figure drawn on the primary machining window is moved to the secondary machining window and the primary machining window is erased. (See Fig.1.2.6 (c)) 2) By depressing the COPY WORK softkey, the work piece figure drawn on the primary machining window is duplicated on the secondary machining window. (See Fig.1.2.6 (c)) D Tool position in the animated simulation picture can be switched between upper side and lower side of the simulation window according to the state of the system parameter No.705#1. D Gradationally rendered 3D animation is available in gradation mode.
760
B63304EN/02
*** CHECKING OF NC DATA ***
Turning simulation on both primary and secondary window Fig. 1.2.6(a)

*** CHECKING OF NC DATA ***
Caxis simulation on primary and turning simulation on secondary window Fig. 1.2.6(b)
CHECK START
ORIGINAL
MOVE WORK
COPY WORK
PARAMETER
TOOL PATH
END
Fig. 1.2.6(C)
761
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Chuck and/or tailstock are not shown in the simulation window. 2 Interference check function is not available. 3 Zoom In/Out function of the simulation picture is not available. 4 If the system parameter No.701 #6 is set to be Restore blank figure by M30, a blank figure is restored on the primary machining window when M30 command is executed in either primary or secondary path. 5 If successive MOVE WORK operation is performed manually or by the Mcode without restoring blank figure in between, both primary and secondary work piece figures disappear. 6 If blank figure is restored on the primary machining window before moving the work piece figure to the secondary machining window, the work piece figure is overlaid with the blank figure and lost. 7 Tool motion, caused by the execution of macro program, can be simulated and drawn if the tooling information is registered for the tool which is used in the macro program. 8 In gradated animation mode, when display is switched from the CAP II screen to the NC screen and back to the CAP II screen again, the primary machining window is redrawn with blank work piece figure for turning simulation. The secondary machining window is erased. 9 Softkeys, ROTATE, AROUND and SECTION, which are displayed in gradation mode, are valid for turning process simulation only. If one of these keys are depressed during animated simulation, the simulation is stopped. 10 Do not switch the display between CAP II window and NC window when moving work piece from primary to secondary machining window. Otherwise, the result of the moving operation is not guaranteed.
1.2.7
Tool Data, Tooling Information, Tool Holder Data
(1) Tool Data Both primary and secondary turret share common Tool Data database. Refer to chapter V, SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA, section 2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04, for details.
762
B63304EN/02
(2) Tooling Information Each of the primary and the secondary turret has its own tooling information. When tooling a tool from the tool data to the primary tooling information, geometry of the tool is copied as is. When tooling a tool to the secondary tooling information, geometry of the tool is reversed around Xaxis and copied. NOTE Tool geometry is reversed when system parameter No.800 #3 is set to 1. (3) Tool holder data Both primary and secondary turret share common tool holder data. When a tool holder is specified to be the holder for the secondary turret tool, the tool holder is reversed around Xaxis when it is drawn on the screen. The original tool holder data itself is not reversed. Refer to chapter III, PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT, section 3.6.7 Setting of tool holder figure, of the CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORs MANUAL, B61804E2/04, for details. NOTE Tool holder geometry is reversed when system parameter No.800 #3 is set to 1. Because tool geometry and tool holder geometry are not reversed when system parameter No.800 #3 is set to 0, care should be taken to select tool and tool holder for the secondary turret.
763
B63304EN/02
1.3
PARAMETERS
1.3.1
System Parameter
No. 0206 Format Real Number Initial value Undefined Undefined 0207 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0210 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0211 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0216 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0217 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0220 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0221 Real Number Undefined Undefined 0705 0 or 1 00000000 mm spec. Description Xcoordinate value of the home position (origin) of the primary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch Zcoordinate value of the home position (origin) of the primary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Xcoordinate value of the index position of the primary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Zcoordinate value of the index position of the primary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Xcoordinate value of the home position (origin) of the secondary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Zcoordinate value of the home position (origin) of the secondary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Xcoordinate value of the index position of the secondary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Zcoordinate value of the index position of the secondary turret. inch spec. Unit : mm or inch mm spec. Bit #1 In the animated simulation drawing; 0: Both primary and secondary tools are drawn on upper side on the windows. 1: Both primary and secondary tools are drawn on lower side on the windows. 0744 Integer Undefined Mcode to restore original blank figure on the primary machining window. JUser for animated machining simulationK Mcode to move work piece figure from the primary machining window to the secondary machining window. JUser for animated machining simulationK New Changed Remarks
0745
Integer
Undefined
New
764
B63304EN/02
No. 0746
Format Integer
Initial value Undefined
Description Mcode to delete work piece figure in the secondary machining window. JUser for animated machining simulationK
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Remarks New
0800
0 or 1 (8 bits)
00001100
New
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Define comments for arguments of a subcycle by; 0 : Alphanumeric characters. 1 : Character codes. In the SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, POS.1 MACHIN softkey is; 0 : Not available. 1 : Available In the SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, POS.2 MACHIN softkey is; 0 : Not available. 1 : Available In the TOOLING INFORMATION window or the TOOL DATA window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, when tooling tools onto secondary turret; 0 : Tool data and/or holder data is copied as is, without reversing. 1 : Tool data and/or holder data is reversed around Xaxis and copied. In the SUB CYCLE window under the MACHINING DEFINITION window, when arguments are left undefined; 0 : Addresses corresponding to undefined arguments are not output in part program. 1 : Addresses corresponding to undefined arguments are output in part program with the value of 0.
1.3.2
MTF
No. 1050 Format Integer Initial value 2 Number of turrets (1 or 2) 1: 2 axis lathe (1 spindle/1 turret or 2 spindle/1 turret) 2: 4 axis lathe (1 spindle/2 turret or 2 spindle/2 turret) 1055 Integer 2 Turret types 0: Ordinary 2 axis lathe 1: 2 axis lathe with reversible Xaxis (Chasing tool type turret etc.) 2: 4 axes lathe 1130 1131 1132 1315 1316 1351 Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer 3 4 5 1 1 68 Mcode for primary spindle CW Mcode for primary spindle CCW Mcode for primary spindle stop Mcode for primary spindle milling start Mcode for primary spindle turning start Mcode for primary spindle Caxis clamp (primary machining) (primary machining) (primary machining) (primary machining) (primary machining) (primary machining) Description
765
B63304EN/02
No. 1352 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416
Format Integer 3 chrs. 3 chrs. 3 chrs. 3 chrs. 3 chrs. 3 chrs. 3 chrs.
Initial value 69 1 1 5 1 1 68 69
Description Mcode for primary spindle Caxis unclamp Mcode for secondary spindle CW Mcode for secondary spindle CCW Mcode for secondary spindle stop Mcode for secondary spindle milling start Mcode for secondary spindle turning start Mcode for secondary spindle Caxis clamp Mcode for secondary spindle Caxis unclamp (primary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining) (secondary machining)
766
B63304EN/02
1.4
RESTRICTIONS
Following optional functions are not available for this CAP II. D D D D Yaxis FAPT function Back Machining FAPT function Balance Cut FAPT function Vertical Lath Animated Simulation function
1.5
APPLICABLE CNC
FS16/18TC CAP II (5910 series CAP II) FS16i /18i TA CAP II (5F10 series CAP II)
767
XVII. SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING
B63304EN/02
SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING
1. OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
This function lets you interactively create NC data for slanted surface machining where a tool angular axis is used. The function can be used only in the Symbol CAPi T. D Machining where a tool angular axis is used (hereinafter called slanted surface machining) D Outer surface, inner surface, end face lathe turning where a tool angular axis is used D Normalprocess and inverseprocess lathe turning or secondspindle lathe turning where tool normal or reverse clamping is used Using this function needs the slanted surface machining function option. Using this function also needs the following options: D Caxis FAPT function option (Symbol CAPi T option) D Yaxis FAPT function option (Symbol CAPi T option) D Threedimensional coordinate conversion option (NC option) Performing rigid tapping on slanted surfaces further needs the following options: D Rigid tapping option (NC option) D Threedimensional rigid tapping option (NC option) Programming the subspindle needs the following option: D Backward machining FAPT function option (Symbol CAPi T option)
771
1. OVERVIEW
B63304EN/02
1.1
SUPPORTED MACHINE CONFIGURATIONS
Slanted surface machining can be programmed for the following machine configuration: Spindle: Main spindle only, or main spindle + subspindle Tool post: ATC type or turret type tool post (one path) Note) Twopath machines (those having two tool posts) are not supported. Controlled axes: X, Z, C, Y, (the axis is for tilting the tool.) NOTE In slanted surface machining, only positioning can be performed for the tool angular axis and Caxis. The following machining types, in which the tool angular axis and Caxis are controlled, are not supported. D Machining in which the tool axis is always kept facing in the normal direction. D End face machining, cylindricalsurface grooving, polar coordinate interpolation machining, and cylindrical interpolation machining which are performed by tilting the tool axis.
772
B63304EN/02
1. OVERVIEW
1.2
SUPPORTED MACHINING SURFACES
The slanted surface machining function supports slanted surfaces that are determined with rotation center O (x, z) and the slanted surface slant angle. The function allows up to six phase angles to be specified for the Caxis. This feature enables a surface tilted at an arbitrary angle to be machined.

B X X O B Z Z Y

X O C
The following figures can be defined for creation on tilted surfaces. They are entered for slanted surfaces (YZ plane) to be machined. D SLCIRCLE HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLLINE HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLRANDOM HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLANT PATTERN (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLANT LINE (only one Caxis phase angle can be specified.)
X X
O Y Z Z Y
The following machining programs can be created for a slanted machining surface: D Hole machining (center drilling, plain drilling, and tapping) D Patterned machining (rectangular pocket milling) D Contour machining (milling along an arbitrary figure)
773
2. DEFINING PART FIGURES (MENU NO. 2)
B63304EN/02
DEFINING PART FIGURES (MENU NO. 2)
The following machining figures can be defined for slanted surfaces. The same method as for the conventional Yaxis sidefacing figure is used to enter the machining figures. Machining figures can be created on an arbitrary slanted surface no matter whether the first or second spindle is involved. Up to 10 figures (including Yaxis end facing/side facing figures) can be defined. D SLCIRCLE HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLLINE HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLRANDOM HOLE (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) D SLANT PATTERN (up to six Caxis phase angles can be specified.) Data for a rectangle with rounded corner R (pocket) can be entered for a slanted plane. Each side of the rectangle is parallel to one of the coordinate axes that form the plane.
D SLANT LINE (only one Caxis phase angle can be specified.) An arbitrary figure formed with arcs and straight lines can be entered for a slanted plane, using symbolic keys (arrows). The tool can be moved at the right, left, or on a line, of the entered figure.
X Z
774
B63304EN/02
2.1
DEFINING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES
(1) After a part figure is entered for lathe turning in menu No. 2, the following soft keys appear on the screen.
(2) Pressing the [YAXIS MENU] soft key displays the menu screen for entering Yaxis or slanted surface machining figures. At the FIGURE TYPE = prompt, enter a type number for a slanted machining surface (4, 5, 6, 9, or 10). When the type number is entered, the detail data input screen appears.
775
B63304EN/02
(3) On the detail data input screen for each figure type, pressing the [SLANTED SURFACE SETTING] soft key displays the SLANTED SURFACE SETTING screen.
(For other than arbitrary slanted surfaces) ESCAPE BACK PAGE
SLANTED SURFACE SETTING
CHECK
CURSOR CURSOR " #
NEXT PAGE
(For arbitrary slanted surfaces: Screen for entering the startpoint) ESCAPE BACK PAGE
SLANTED SURFACE SETTING
CHECK
CURSOR CURSOR " #
NEXT PAGE
NOTE No slanted surface can be specified for Yaxis end facing figures. (4) On the SLANTED SURFACE SETTING screen, set up the slanted surface rotation center O (Z, DX), slant angle A, and safety height from the slanted surface. Pressing the [END] soft key resumes the previous detail data input screen.
776
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 The input range of slant angles can be specified using system parameter Nos. 760 and 761. 2 If A = 0 is specified, a figure on a side surface, rather than a figure on a slanted surface, is defined. 3 The entered safety height value must be 0 or greater. 4 Figures to be machined using even the second spindle are entered with respect to the reference position on the firstspindle side. (5) On the detail data input screen, basically, the same method as for Yaxis machining figures is used to enter the data about figures machined on a slanted surface, except that a slanted surface (YZ plane) is involved. See the descriptions about Yaxis machining figures for details.
777
B63304EN/02
2.2
CHECKING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES
Slanted surface machining figures can be checked using the following procedure: D On the YAXIS FIGURE menu screen, press [ALL CHECK] soft key. D On the detail data setting screen, press the [CHECK] soft key. Slanted surface machining figures are drawn as follows: D The axes of the slanted surface coordinate system in the ZX plane are drawn with solid lines. D The position of figures on a slanted surface in the ZX plane is drawn with dotted lines (for arbitrary figures, in the interpolation plane). D Figures entered in the slanted surface coordinate system are drawn. D The phase angle of the Caxis and the position of the Yaxis of the slante d surface coordinate system are drawn.
778
B63304EN/02
3. MACHINE ZERO POINT/ TURRET TURNING POSITION (MENU NO. 3)
MACHINE ZERO POINT/TURRET TURNING POSITION (MENU NO. 3)
The operating procedure to be used on the screen for setting the machine zero point/turret turning position is the same as for the Yaxis FAPT function. See the descriptions about the Yaxis FAPT function for deta
779
4. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU NO. 4)
B63304EN/02
MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU NO. 4)
The following slanted surface machining types can be programmed. The basic behavior of machine tools for these machining types is similar to that for conventional Yaxis machining. D Making holes on slanted surfaces (center drilling, plain drilling, and tapping) D Patterned machining on slanted surfaces (rectangular pocket milling) D Contour machining on slanted surfaces (milling along an arbitrary figure) NOTE Performing rigid tapping on slanted surfaces needs the rigid tapping option and threedimensional rigid tapping option.
WARNING Use the linear interpolationtype positioning mode for positioning (G00) in slanted surface machining. Otherwise, the tool may collide with the workpiece or machine or behave unnaturally, possibly leading to tool or machine breakage, or injury.
780
B63304EN/02
4.1
DEFINING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING
(1) To define slanted surface machining, press the [MILLING] soft key in menu No. 4 (machining definition).
(2) Select a machining type from the Yaxis machining soft key menu.
781
B63304EN/02
4.2
SETTING TOOL DATA FOR SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING
Selecting a machining type displays the TOOL DATA setting screen. To perform slanted surface machining, be sure to set a rotation tool for side facing. The side facing tool can be set by entering SETTING DIRECTION . CP = 0.
The method for setting other tool data in detail is the same as for Yaxis machining. See the descriptions about Yaxis machining for details. Pass points can be entered with reference to the workpiece coordinate system, similarly to the conventional method.
782
B63304EN/02
4.3
SELECTING SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES
Selecting Yaxis machining enables machining figures defined on slanted surfaces as well as Yaxis machining figures to be selected as targets. If machining figures defined on slanted surfaces are selected, they are automatically redefined for slanted surface machining. However, the following restrictions apply to selection of slanted surface machining figures. D Only one slanted surface machining figure can be selected for one machining process. D Slanted surface machining and side facing figures cannot be intermixed in one machining process. Machining figures defined on slanted surfaces are drawn as stated below. D The axes of the slanted surface coordinate system in the ZX plane are drawn with solid lines. D The position of figures on a slanted surface in the ZX plane is drawn with dotted lines (for arbitrary figures, in the interpolation plane). D Figures entered in the slanted surface coordinate system are drawn. D The phase angle of the Caxis and the position of the Yaxis of the slanted surface coordinate system are drawn.
783
B63304EN/02
4.4
ENTERING CUTTING CONDITIONS FOR SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING
The method for entering cutting conditions for slanted surface machining is the same as for Yaxis machining. See the descriptions about Yaxis machining for details. Similarly to Yaxis machining, cutting conditions cannot be determined automatically for slanted surface machining.
784
B63304EN/02
4.5
APPROACH, ESCAPE, AND MOVEMENT BETWEEN SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING FIGURES
(1) Making holes and performing patterned machining on a slanted surface a) Safetyfirst mode (bit 1 of system parameter No. 309 = 0) When approaching in this mode, the tool moves from the toolchange position to the safe plane (machining figure top surface + safety height (SH) + clearance (C1) apart) at the rapid traverse rate simultaneously with respect to the three axes (X, Y, Z). Then it starts cutting at the cutting feedrate. Between figures, the tool moves to the safe plane, then to the next figure at the rapid traverse rate. When escaping, the tool moves to the safe plane at the rapid traverse rate, then returns to the toolchange position by reference position return or rapid traverse.
Toolchange position
G30 or G00
C1 Rapid traverse Cutting feed
SH
b) Efficiencyfirst mode (bit 1 of system parameter No. 309 = 1) When approaching in this mode, the tool moves from the toolchange position to the safe plane (machining figure top surface + safety height (SH) + clearance C1 apart) at the rapid traverse rate simultaneously with respect to the three axes (X, Y, Z), then to a position clearance C1 apart from the top surface of the machining figure at the rapid traverse rate. After this, it starts cutting at the cutting feedrate. Between figures within one Caxis phase, the tool moves to a position clearance C1 apart from the top surface of the machining figure, then to the next figure, at the rapid traverse rate. Between Caxis phases, the tool passes through a position clearance C1 apart from the top surface of the machining figure to the safe plane, then to the next figure, at the rapid traverse rate. When escaping, the tool moves through a position clearance C1 apart from the top surface of the machining figure to the safe plane at the rapid traverse rate, then to the toolchange position by reference position return or rapid traverse.
785
B63304EN/02
Toolchange position
G30 or G00 C1 C1 SH C1
(2) Slanted surface contour machining When approaching in slanted surface contour machining, the tool moves from the toolchange position to the safe plane (interpolation plane + safety height (SH) + clearance (C1) apart) at the rapid traverse rate simultaneously with respect to the three axes (X, Y, Z). Then it starts cutting at the cutting feedrate. Between figures, the tool moves to the safe plane, then to the next figure, at the rapid traverse rate. When escaping, the tool moves to the safe plane at the rapid traverse rate, then return to the toolchange position by reference position return or rapid traverse.
Toolchange position
G30 or G00
C1
SH
Bit 1 of system parameter No. 309 is not referenced. No efficiencyfirst mode is usable for slanted surface contour machining (similarly to Yaxis machining).
786
B63304EN/02
4.6
SETTING TOOL DATA FOR MACHINING WITH TOOL NORMAL OR REVERSE CLAMPING USED
On a machine tool in which the tool can be switched between normal and reverse, setting bit 1 of system parameter No. 802 to 1 causes the CLAMP DIRECTION prompt to appear on the TOOLING INFORMATION setting screen, thus enabling you to select either normal or reverse clamping.
Then, the clamp direction is displayed on the same line as for the SET ANGLE prompt on the MACHINING DEFINITION TOOL DATA setting screen for machining definition.
787
B63304EN/02
4.7
METHOD OF USING THE SAME TOOL FOR SEPARATE MACHINING TYPES WHERE TOOL AXIS SLANT ANGLES ARE DIFFERENT
This section explains how to output the same T code when the same tool is used for different machining types by tilting the tool axis and using either norma l or reverse clamping. It is impossible to assign the same tool number to tools if their size and setting direction are different. However, using the following method enables the same T code to be output: (1) Output method Set up MTF1104 = 3, and enter a threedigit tool number. Then, setting bit 3 of system parameter No. 802 to 1 enables only the lowest two digits of the entered threedigit tool number to be output as the T code. Therefore, assigning a tool number as listed below enables the same T code to be output. (Example)
Tool number 101 201 301 401 501 601 Machining type Slant angle B0 B0 B90 B90 B90 B90 Clamp Output T code T01 T01 T01 T01 T01 T01
Outer surface machining (normal process) Outer surface machining (inverse process) Front end facing (normal process) Front end facing (inverse process) Rear end facing (normal process) Rear end facing (inverse process)
Normal Reverse Reverse Normal Normal Reverse
NOTE 1 Since the output tool number is two digits, up to 99 tools can be registered. 2 If the same T code is used to draw tool figures different in the way they are set, as mentioned above, in foreground animated simulation, it is necessary to output an M code specific to each tool figure. (See chapters explaining machining simulation for details.)
788
B63304EN/02
5. CREATING NC DATA (MENU NO. 5)
CREATING NC DATA (MENU NO. 5)
789
B63304EN/02
5.1
EXAMPLE OF OUTPUTTING NC DATA
The NC data explained below can be output for slanted surface machining. (1) Output example 1 % 5 O5000 (SLANTDRILLING) N02G17G98 G28U0.W0.H0 G30U0.W0.V0. G68.1XxoZzoY0.I0.J1.K0.R45. G0T0202 B45. G97S2000M13 C0. Xxb Zzb Yyb Xxc Zzc Yyc Xxd Zzd Yyd G98G83XzdR0.F200. Xxc Zzc Yyc Xxb Zzb Yyb G30U0.W0.V0. T0200M5 G69.1 M1 G28U0.W0. M30 %
Pass point B Safe plane C D X
Starts threedimensional coordinate conversion.
Outputs coordinates in the XYZ plane.
Cancels threedimensional coordinate conversion.
A Toolchange point Starts/cancels threedimensional coordinate conversion.
O Z Z
790
B63304EN/02
(2) Output example 2 % 5 O5000 (SLANTDRILLING) G98G97S500 G50Xxa.Zza.C0. G68.1XxoY0.Zz0 I0.J1.K0.R45. T0202 G00Xxb Zzb Yyb Xxc Zzc Yyc Xxd Zzd Yyd G98G83XzdR0.F200. G00Xxc Zzc Yyc T0200 G69.1 Xxb Zzb Yyb Xxa Zza Yya M05 M01 %
Starts threedimensional coordinate conversion. Outputs coordinates in the XYZ plane.
Cancels threedimensional coordinate conversion.
Pass point B Safe plane C D
Toolchange point Starts/cancels three dimensional coordinate conversion.
X X
Cancels threedimensional coordinate conversion. Z Z
The timing when the threedimensional coordinate conversion cancel command is issued can be changed using MTF1087. However, the specification states that in menu No. 6 (foreground animated simulation), the movement of the tool is not drawn with T code offset canceled. In this example, therefore, no tool path for traveling is drawn after T0200. CAUTION When approaching from the toolchange position, the tool always moves simultaneously with respect to the three axes. If threedimensional coordinate conversion is to be canceled at the toolchange position, be sure to use a reference position return (G30) to cause the tool to escape to the toolchange position. (Example of setting the function table for tool escape to the toolchange position) MTF2019 = G30U0.W0.V0.
791
B63304EN/02
5.2
OUTPUTTING COMMENTS TO NC DATA
Setting bit 2 of system parameter No. 708 to 1 causes the process name to be output as a comment. For slanted surface machining, the following comments are inserted. (SLCENT.DRIL) (SLDRILLING) (SLTAPPING) (SLPATTERN) (SLCONTOUR)
792
B63304EN/02
5.3
OUTPUTTING THE TOOL ANGULAR AXIS ANGLE
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 2 1 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 3
The address of the tool angular axis angle can be output using the following NC machine file setting and function code.
(NC machine file: Function code)

Function Remarks
Outputs the tool angular axis angle (Bb)
Address set in MTF1405
(NC machine file: Address output format)

No. 1405 Format 2 characters Initial value BB Description Address of the tool angular axis angle
The tool slant angle to be output is determined as follows: 1) Milling of slanted surfaces The tool slant angle is determined automatically from the slant angle of the machine figure. Tool slant angle = machine figure slant angle 2) When the tool axis of the milling tool is tilted The tool slant angle is determined according to the tool setting direction as follows: SETTING DIRECTION CP = 0 (for side facing) ! R tool slant angle = 0 SETTING DIRECTION CP = 1 (for front end facing) ! R tool slant angle = 90 SETTING DIRECTION CP = 2 (for rear end facing) ! R tool slant angle = 90 3) When the tool axis of the turning tool is tilted The tool slant angle is determined according to the tool setting angle as follows: SETTING ANGLE AS = 90 ! R tool slant angle = 0 SETTING ANGLE AS = 180 ! R tool slant angle = 90 SETTING ANGLE AS = 0 ! R tool slant angle = 90 The tool angular axis indexing angle can be output with an arbitrary sign, using an arbitrary position as the origin, by setting the following MTF. (In figure definition, however, the slanted surface angle is always entered with reference to the Zaxis.)
No. 1087 Format Bit Initial value 00000100 Bit 1 Description Sign of the tool angular axis angle 0: specifies to output the sign of the tool angular axis angle without inverting it. 1: specifies to output the sign of the tool angular axis angle by inverting it.
1125
Real number
This set value is added to the tool angular axis angle.
793
B63304EN/02
5.4
OUTPUTTING THE SPINDLE NUMBER
The address of the spindle number can be output using the following NC machine file setting and the function code. (NC machine file: Function code)
Function Remarks
Spindle number H1: First spindle H2: Second spindle

No. 1406 Format 2 characters Initial value HH Spindle number address Description
794
B63304EN/02
5.5
OUTPUTTING DATA ABOUT THE TOOL CLAMPING TYPE (NORMAL OR REVERSE)
The address of data about the tool clamping type (normal or reverse) can be output using the following NC machine file setting and the function code.

Function Remarks
Turning tool clamping type output I0: Normal clamping of the turning tool I1: Reverse clamping of the turning tool

No. 1407 Format 2 characters Initial value II Description Address of the turning tool clamp type
795
B63304EN/02
5.6
ANIMATED SIMULATION OF SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING AT NC DATA CREATION
The animated simulation of slanted surface machining at NC data creation is drawn only in the ZX plane as shown below. In the drawing, the slanted surface machining tool is tilted.
796
B63304EN/02
6. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU NO. 6)
ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU NO. 6)
In animated simulation, figures for slanted surface machining can be drawn according to NC data saved in NC memory, as follows: D Isometric tool path drawing The actual tool path is plotted in the workpiece coordinate system. D Animated simulation in the YZ plane (side view) The projection of a tool used for slanted surface machining is drawn in the plane in which the workpiece exists as viewed in the positive direction of the Xaxis of the workpiece coordinate system. The tool figure projection is represented with a filled true circle rather than a filled ellipse.
NOTE For slanted surface machining, it is impossible to use animated simulation function B, which is intended to draw side and front views simultaneously.
797
B63304EN/02
6.1
ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR DIFFERENT MACHINING TYPES PERFORMED WITH THE SAME TOOL
If a single tool (such as a lathe drilling tool or milling tool) is used by changing the slant angle of the tool angular axis or switching the tool between normal and reverse clamping, using the same T code for all of the different tool attitudes prevents a normal animated simulation of machining figures. In this case, a normal animated simulation of machining figures is enabled by setting bit 3 of system parameter No. 802 to 1 and writing the M code set in the following NC machine file before the T code. In animated simulation of tool figures, the tool that matches the tool attitude and orientation specified in the M code is selected from among the tools for which the lowest two digits of the tool number specified in the T code matches those of the tool number registered as tooling information. This animated simulation is not performed unless a matching tool has been registered as tooling information. (NC machine file: M code output format)
No. 1420 1421 1422
Format 5 Characters 5 Characters 5 Characters
Initial value 1 1 1
Description Tool attitude 1 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Tool attitude 2 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Tool attitude 3 M code (for foreground animated simulation)
NOTE The range of the M code values that can be entered is from 0 to 65535.
No. 1423 1424
Format 5 Characters 5 Characters
Initial value 1 1
Description Turning tool orientation 1 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Turning tool orientation 2 M code (for foreground animated simulation)
NOTE The range of the M code values that can be entered is from 0 to 65535.
Tool attitude 3 T01

T01
Tool attitude 1 T01
Tool orientation 1
Tool orientation 2
T01
T01
Tool attitude 2
798
B63304EN/02
(Example of setting) MTF1420 = 30190 /* M30190 tool attitude 1 B = 90 */ MTF1421 = 30100 /* M30100 tool attitude 2 B = 0 */ MTF1422 = 30090 /* M30090 tool attitude 3 B = 90 */ MTF1423 = 30000 /* M30000 tool attitude 1 I = 0 */ MTF1424 = 31000 /* M31000 tool attitude 2 I = 1 */ NOTE 1 Two M codes (one for tool attitude and the other for turning tool orientation) listed above are output according to the desired attitude and orientation of the tool. 2 For lathe turning drilling and milling tools, no M code for turning tool orientation need be output. 3 For slanted surface machining, the M code for tool attitude 2 must be output.
799
B63304EN/02
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
WARNING The following system parameters, setting data, and MTF data vary from one machine tool to another. When using them, refer to the applicable manual issued by the machine tool builder of your machine. Unless they match the machine in actual use, no correct NC data can be created. If machining is carried out using incorrect NC data, the tool may collide with the workpiece or behave unnaturally, possibly leading to tool or machine breakage, or injury.
800
B63304EN/02
(System parameters)
No. 578 760 761 802 Format Integer Real number Real number Bit Initial value Undefined Undefined Undefined 00000000 Description Color of the axes of a slanted surface coordinate system (FANUC standard value = 4, blue) Minimum slanted surface angle Maximum slanted surface angle
Bit 7 0 6 5 4 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0
Remarks
Bit 0
Specify the parameter output format for the second spindle. 0 : The data for the second spindle is output using the coordinate system explained blow. 1 : The data for the second spindle is output using the same coordinate system as for the first spindle. Y (If bit 0 = 0) Z X (C0) (If bit 0 = 1) X (C0) Y Z Caxis positive direction Caxis positive direction
Caxis positive direction Y X (C0) Z
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Specify whether to display the CLAMP DIRECTION prompt on the TOOLING INFORMATION setting screen, as follows: 0 : Not to display. 1 : To display. Specify how to obtain the tool angular axis angle for machining types other than slanted surface machining, as follows: 0 : degrees 1 : In accordance with the direction in which the tool is mounted Specify how to obtain the tool number, as follows: 0 : Use the entered tool number without modifying it. 1 : Use the lowest two digits of the entered tool number.
NOTE The system parameters for Yaxis machining are also used. See the descriptions about the system parameters for Yaxis machining for details.
801
8. NC MACHINE FILES (MTF)
B63304EN/02
NC MACHINE FILES (MTF)
WARNING The MTF (NC machine file) initial values listed below may differ from those values used in actual machining. The actual settings vary from one machine tool to another. Refer to the applicable manual issued by the machine tool builder of your machine. Unless they match the machine in actual use, no correct NC data can be created. If machining is carried out using incorrect NC data, the tool may collide with the workpiece or behave unnaturally, possibly leading to tool or machine breakage, or injury.
802
B63304EN/02

No. 1028 Format Real number Initial value 0.001 0.0001 1038 Integer 3 4 1029 Real number 0.001 0.0001 1039 Integer 3 4 1020 Real number 0.001 0.0001 1021 Real number 0.001 0.0001 1022 Integer 0.001 0.0001 1030 Integer 3 4 1031 Integer 3 4 1032 Integer 3 4 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center (Zaxis) in threedimensional coordinate inch specification conversion mm specification Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center (Xaxis) in threedimensional coordinate inch specification conversion mm specification Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center (Yaxis) in threedimensional coordinate inch specification conversion mm specification Least input increment for the rotation center (Yaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Least input increment for the rotation center (Xaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Least input increment for the rotation center (Zaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the angle in threedimensional coordinate conversion Least input increment for the angle in threedimensional coordinate conversion Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the tool angular axis angle Description Least input increment for the tool angular axis angle

No. 1020 Format Real number Initial value 0.001 0.0001 1021 Real number 0.001 0.0001 1022 Real number 0.001 0.0001 1030 Integer 3 4 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Zaxis) in threedimensional inch specification coordinate conversion mm specification Least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Yaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Xaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Description Least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Zaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion
803
B63304EN/02
No. 1031
Format Integer
Initial value 3 4 mm specification
Description Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Xaxis) in threedimensional inch specification coordinate conversion Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the rotation center axis orientation (Yaxis) in threedimensional inch specification coordinate conversion mm specification Bit 0 Specify the output format for the Zaxis sign for secondspindle data as follows: 0: The Zaxis sign for secondspindle data is not inverted. 1: The Zaxis sign for secondspindle data is inverted before being output. Specify the output format for the sign of the tool angular axis angle, as follows: 0: The sign of the tool angular axis angle is not inverted before being output. 1: The sign of the tool angular axis angle is inverted before being output. Specify the output format for the sign of the rotation angle in threedimensional coordinate conversion, as follows: 0: The sign of the rotation angle is not inverted before being output. 1: The sign of the rotation angle is inverted before being output. Specify the output format for the sign of the rotation angle for the second spindle in threedimensional coordinate conversion, as follows: 0: The sign of the rotation angle for the second spindle is not inverted before being output. 1: The sign of the rotation angle for the second spindle is inverted before being output. Specify the timing when threedimensional coordinate conversion is to be canceled, as follows: 0: A cancel command is output after the tool reaches the toolchange position. 1: A cancel command is output just before the tool reaches the toolchange position.
1032
Integer
3 4
1087
Bit
00000100
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
1125
Real number
The value set in this parameter is added to the tool angular axis angle before output.
(NC machine file: G code output format)

No. 1385 1386 Format Real number Real number Initial value 68.1 69.1 Description G code for starting threedimensional coordinate conversion G code for canceling threedimensional coordinate conversion

No. 1040 1041 1048 1042 Format 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character Initial value ZW XU YV KK Description Address for the rotation center (Zaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the rotation center (Xaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the rotation center (Yaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the rotation center axis orientation (Zaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion
804
B63304EN/02
No. 1043 1049 1404 1405 1406 1407
Format 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character 2 Character
Initial value II JJ RR BB HH II
Description Address for the rotation center axis orientation (Xaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the rotation center axis orientation (Yaxis) in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the rotation angle in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address for the tool angular axis angle Address for the spindle number Address for the turning tool clamp type
(NC machine file: M code output format)

No. 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 Format 5 Character 5 Character 5 Character 5 Character 5 Character Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 Description Tool attitude 1 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Tool attitude 2 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Tool attitude 3 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Turning tool orientation 1 M code (for foreground animated simulation) Turning tool orientation 2 M code (for foreground animated simulation)
NOTE The range of the M code values that can be entered is from 0 to 65535. (NC machine file: Function table)
No. 2019 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 Meaning Outputting escape command (for Yaxis) for simultaneous movement with respect to the three axes Starting threedimensional coordinate conversion Canceling threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting T code for tool selection Starting lathe turning process Starting milling process Remarks G30 U0. W0. V0. G68.1 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Rr G69.1 G0 Txxxx G700 Hh M17 Bb Ii G700 Hh M18 Bb
805
B63304EN/02

Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 6 6 1 1 1 1 9 A A B C D 0 0 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 2 2 3 3 3 3 Function Remarks
Outputting G code for starting G code set in MTF1385 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting G code for canceling G code set in MTF1386 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the rotation center Zaxis in Address set in MTF1040 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the rotation center Xaxis in Address set in MTF1041 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the rotation center Yaxis in Address set in MTF1048 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the direction of the rotation Address set in MTF1042 center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Zaxis direction) Outputting the direction of the rotation Address set in MTF1043 center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Xaxis direction) Outputting the direction of the rotation Address set in MTF1049 center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Yaxis direction) Outputting the rotation angle in Address set in MTF1404 threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the tool angular axis angle (Bb) Address set in MTF1405 Spindle No. H1: First spindle H2: Second spindle Address set in MTF1406
2 2 2
0 1 2
0 0 0
3 3 3
Outputting turning tool clamp type I0: I1: Normal clamping of the turning tool Reverse clamping of the turning tool
Outputting a reference position return for Address set in MTF1405 the tool angular axis (B0)
The NC machine file (MTF) for Yaxis machining is also used. See the descriptions about the NC machine file (MTF) for Yaxis machining for details.
806
B63304EN/02
9. RESTRICTIONS
RESTRICTIONS
The slanted surface machining function does not support the following items: 1) Automatic process determination 2) Vertical lathes 3) Twopath machine (having two tool posts)
807
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data, described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
811
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.1
SETTING DATA TABLE
(1) Auto process setting data Automatic process setting means that processes are determined by setting data. To specify setting data, press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen, enter 2, then press the INPUT key. Data items (except data 900 to data 902) are used to determine processes automatically. The following table describes the setting data.
Initial value 1 Description Selects a machining group (1 to 3). 1: Data items 100 to 166 in the 1st group are used. 2: Data items 200 to 266 in the 2nd group are used. 3: Data items 300 to 366 in the 3rd group are used. If this value is not defined, one of the following groups is specified according to the blank figure. Round bar: Group 1 Drilled round bar: Group 2 Special blank: Group 3 Remarks
Data No. 0000
Format Integer
0001 0002 0003
Real number Real number Real number
Not defined Not used Not defined Not used 1 Drilling coefficient 1 When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of data 3, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 1. Drilling coefficient 2 When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data 3 and does not exceed the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 2. When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0004
Real number
101
0005 0010 0011 0012 0020
Integer Real number Real number Real number Real number
Not defined Not used 3. 0. 0. 1. Center drilling depth (D) Finishing width allowance for grooving (TW) Finishing depth allowance for grooving (TB) Coefficient 1 of Caxis drilling When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of data 20, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 1. Coefficient 2 of Caxis drilling When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data 20 and does not exceed the value of data 21, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 2. When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data 21, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0021
Real number
101
0022 0023 0024 0030 to 0049 0050 0051
Real number Real number Real number Integer Real number Real number
Not defined Caxis center drilling depth (D1) 100. 80. % of upperlimit for a prepared hole for Caxis tapping % of lowerlimit for a prepared hole for Caxis tapping
Not defined Not used Not defined Minimum inner surface diameter that can be machined Not defined Maximum diameter of a workpiece that can drilled Option B Option B
812
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Data No. 0052 0053 0054
Format Real number Real number Real number
Initial value Not defined Minimum drilling allowance
Description
Remarks Option B Option B
Not defined Lengthtodiameter ratio for the section to be drilled Not defined Coefficient for calculating the diameter of a prepared hole for Caxis tapping (thread catch rate) If this value is not defined, 1.082532 is specified. Maximum prepared hole diameter =DP C (value of data 22/100) Minimum prepared hole diameter =DP C (value of data 22/100) D: Nominal diameter, P: Pitch, C: Value of data 54 Not defined Not defined 00000000
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0
0055 to 0069 0070
Real number Eightdigit binary
Option B
Flags for multitier drilling Bit 0 Method for drilling a hole having two or more tiers 0 : Multiple drilling in the order: minor diameter to major diameter 1 : Multiple drilling in the order: major diameter to minor diameter Bit 1 Change of the tool selection method 0 : The effective tool selected by automatic process setting is used for drilling. 1 : When the drill suitable for a machining diameter is not found in tooling information or tool file, the input of the tool data is requested on the tool data screen. 0071 Eightdigit binary 00000111
Bit 7 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Option B
Flag for automatic setting of mirrorimage machining Bit 0 End facing Bit 1 Outer surface machining Bit 2 Inner surface machining 0 : No mirrorimage machining is specified. 1 : Mirrorimage machining is specified. Flag for outer surface finishing Bit 7 When the following order is specified for the machining procedure data: 1) End face finishing 2) Outer surface finishing, 0 : Machining continues from end face to the outer surface when the workpiece has an inner surface. 1 : The end face and outer surface are machined in separate cycles when the workpiece has an inner surface. 0072 Eightdigit binary 00000000
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0
Option B
Flag for automatic tool setting Bit 0 Tooling information Bit 1 Tool file 0 : Retrieved 1 : Not retrieved 0073 to 0099 Eightdigit binary 00000000 Not used
813
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Machining procedure data

Data No. 0100 0200 0300 0101 0201 0301 0102 0202 0302 0103 0203 0303 0104 0204 0304 0105 0205 0305 0106 0206 0306 0107 0207 0307 0108 0208 0308 0109 0209 0309 0110 0210 0310 0112 0212 0312 0111 0211 0311 0113 0213 0313 0114 0214 0314 0115 0215 0315 0116 0216 0316 0117 0217 0317 0118 0218 0318 0119 0219 0319 0120 0220 0320 0121 0221 0321 0122 0222 0322 0123 0223 0323 0124 0224 0324 to to to 0129 0229 0329 Format Integer Initial value Description Remarks
Not defined Specifies the 1st machining process. 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 32 34 36 31 33 35 37 Specifies the 2nd machining process. Specifies the 3rd machining process. Specifies the 4th machining process. Specifies the 5th machining process. Specifies the 6th machining process. Specifies the 7th machining process. Specifies the 8th machining process. Specifies the 9th machining process. Specifies the 10th machining process. Specifies the 11th machining process. Specifies the 12th machining process. Specifies the 13th machining process. Specifies the 14th machining process. Specifies the 15th machining process. Specifies the 16th machining process. Specifies the 17th machining process. Specifies the 18th machining process. Specifies the 19th machining process. Specifies the 20th machining process. Specifies the 21st machining process. Drilling End face roughing Outer surface roughing Inner surface roughing End face finishing Outer surface finishing Inner surface finishing End face grooving Outer surface grooving Inner surface grooving Residual outer surface machining Residual inner surface machining Front face threading Outer surface threading Inner surface threading End face center drilling End face drilling End face tapping Caxis end face grooving Side face center drilling
Specifies the 22nd machining process. Side face tapping Specifies the 23rd machining process. Specifies the 24th machining process. Side face drilling Caxis side face grooving
Not defined Specifies from the 25th to the 30th machining processes.
814
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Correspondence between settings and machining Fro turning 1: Center drilling 2: Drilling 2: Drilling 3: End facing roughing 4: Outer surface roughing 5: Inner surface roughing 6: End face semifinishing 7: Outer surface semifinishing 8: Inner surface semifinishing 9: End face finishing 10 : Outer surface finishing 11 : Inner surface finishing 12 : End face grooving 13 : Outer surface grooving 14 : Inner surface grooving 15 : Residual outer surface machining 16 : Residual inner surface machining 17 : Front face threading 18 : Outer surface threading 19 : Inner surface threading 20 : Cuttingoff 21 : Bar feed For Caxis machining 30 : End face center drilling 31 : Side face center drilling 32 : End face drilling 33 : Side face drilling 34 : End face tapping 35 : Side face tapping 36 : Caxis end face grooving 37 : Caxis side face grooving 38 : Front face milling 39 : Cylindrical grooving NOTE Be sure to specify that Caxis machining is executed after turning finishing.
815
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Manual input data flags

Data No. 0130 0230 0330 0131 0231 0331 0132 0232 0332 0133 0233 0333 0134 0234 0334 0135 0235 0335 0136 0236 0336 0137 0237 0337 0138 0238 0338 0139 0239 0339 0140 0240 0340 0142 0242 0342 0141 0241 0341 0143 0243 0343 0144 0244 0344 0145 0245 0345 0146 0246 0346 0147 0247 0347 0148 0248 0348 0149 0249 0349 0150 0250 0350 0151 0251 0351 to to to 0156 0256 0356 0157 0257 0357 0158 0258 0358 0159 0259 0359 0160 0260 0360 0161 0261 0361 0162 0262 0362 0163 0263 0363 0164 0264 0364 0165 0265 0365 0166 0266 0366 Format Eightdigit binary Initial value 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 For front face milling For cylindrical grooving For end face center drilling For side face center drilling For end face drilling For side face drilling For end face tapping For side face tapping For Caxis end face grooving For Caxis side face grooving For center drilling For drilling For end face roughing For outer surface roughing For inner surface roughing For end face semifinishing For outer surface semifinishing For inner surface semifinishing For end face finishing For outer surface finishing For inner surface finishing For end face grooving For outer surface grooving For inner surface grooving For residual outer surface machining For residual inner surface machining For front face threading For outer surface threading For inner surface threading For cuttingoff For bar feed Not used Description Remarks
816
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Meaning of each flag

#7 0 #6 0 #5 0 #4 0 #3 0 #2 0 #1 #0
Bit 0 Specifies whether a tool is manually selected and whether the machining start point and passing point are manually specified. 0 : The correct tool is automatically selected from the tooling information. 1 : A tool is manually selected. The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on the tool data screen, so the operator can manually enter a tool number, machining start point, and passing point. Bit 1 Specifies whether cutting conditions are manually entered. 0 : Cutting conditions are automatically set. 1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on the cutting condition screen, so the operator can manually enter cutting conditions. Bit 2 Specifies whether a cutting direction and cutting area are manually specified. 0 : A cutting direction and cutting area are automatically specified. 1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on the cutting direction and area screen, so the operator can manually enter a cutting direction and cutting area. (2) FAPT I/O interface data
Data No. 0900 0901 Format Integer Integer Initial value 1 10 Description Reader/punch interface number (1 to 3) Specifies a baud rate. Setting Baud rate Setting Baud rate 0902 Integer 2 1 50 7 2 100 8 3 110 9 4 150 10 5 200 11 6 300 Option B Remarks
600 1200 2400 4800 9600
Specifies the number of stop bits and the use of the DC code. 1: One stop bit and the DC code is used. 2: Two stop bits and the DC code is used. 5: One stop bit and the DC code is not used. 6: Two stop bits and the DC code is not used.
817
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.2
SYSTEM PARAMETER TABLE
Parameter No. 0000 0001 Format Integer Integer Initial value 0 1 Description Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Sets output code of system parameter, MTF and setting data. Only 1: ISO 2: EIA 15TF/ 15TTF Sets sequence number output of NC tape 1 : Sequence number is not output. 0 : Output every process. 1 or over : Output every block (increment) Increment every process (If this value exceeds the increment in a process, the initial value of the next process is set to be larger than the final value of the previous process.) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Waiting time until going to the next screen after entering the answers to all questions. 1 : No waiting time 0 : Until the soft key NEXT PAGE is pressed. N : n second Specify to skip a particular question.
Bit 7 0 6 5 0 4 3 0 2 1 0
Remarks
0002
Integer
0003
Integer
0004 0005 to 0007 0008
0, 1 designation (8 bits) Character Integer
01100000 Not defined 1
0009
0, 1 00010000 designation (8 bits)
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 6
Designation of index position Designation of home position Designation of machining start point Designation of Yaxis index and home positions Selection of drawing format Selection of standard surface roughness 0 : Non skip 1 : Skip
00010
00011110
Skip of question on surface rughness 0 : Non skip 1 : Skipped

Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 0011 Real number 1. 25.4
All surface roughness Surface roughness to C Surface roughness to G Surface roughness to N Surface roughness to R System variable (Do not change the setting by yourself.)
818
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0012
Format Real number
Initial value 1000. 12. mm specification inch specification
Description System variable (Do not change the setting by yourself.)
Remarks
0013
Real number
Setting of display time of initial graphic 0 : Initial graphic display is always displayed. n : Initial graphic display is cleared, if its display lasts n second. Note) If the screen display has background color, it is impossible to specify the number of seconds. Just enter 0.
0014
Real number
6.4
Move amount of cursor at a time when expansion or contraction is done by DRAWING RANGE key. This value is specified by a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive. Set the I/O unit of family program, material file, and tooling file.
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 3 0 2 0 1 0 0
0015
Bit 0 Input unit Bit 4 Output unit 0 : Memory cassette 1 : Submemory 0016 0017 to 0018 0019 Character Character Undefined Set the name of material file to be automatically loaded. Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Setting of CRT when a figure is drawn vertically 0 : Horizontal drawing display. 1 : Vertical drawing display.
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0
Within 15 characters.
Bit 0 Bit 1 0020 0049 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits)
Setting for menu No.4, 5 and 6. Setting for menu No.1, 2, 4, 5 and 6
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Single step of bar feed process 0 : Not stopped 1 : Stopped
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 0050 0051 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits)
Process start Just before approach Just before escape
Single step of center drilling process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of drill process, reamer process and tapping process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of rough cutting process (Refer to parameter No.49)
0052
819
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0100 0101
Format
Initial value
Description Single step of semifinish cutting process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of finish cutting process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of grooving process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of Threading process (Refer to parameter No.49) Single step of cutting off process (Refer to parameter No.49) 0 : Absolute command NC data 1 : Incremental command NC data 0 : Pocketing is not performed. 1 : Pocketing is performed. 2 : Lower part of overhang is machined. 0 : Tool nose angle is not checked. 1 : Tool nose angle is checked. 0 : Nose R is not compensated. 1 : Nose R is compensated. 2 : Nose R is compensated, and overshoot check is done.
Bit 7 6 5 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0
Remarks
0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) Integer Integer 0 1
0102 0103
Integer Integer
1 3
0104
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Questions of XS and ZS is 0 : Skipped 1 : Not skipped Questions of firsttime override of rough cutting is 0 : Skipped 1 : Not skipped At rough machining 0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging portion. 1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging portion. At semifinish and finish machining 0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging portion. 1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging portion Regarding data display 0 : 1 or 1/10000 in unit 1 : 0.1 or 1/100000 in unit
820
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0105
Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits)

Bit 7 6 5 4
Description
3 2 1 0
Remarks
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 6
Bit 7
Constant surface speed control 0 : Not used 1 : Used Coolant 0 : Not used 1 : Used Cutter compensation cancel 0 : Not output 1 : Output Approach 0 : Simultaneous 2 axes 1 : Simultaneous 1 axis Escape 0 : Simultaneous 2 axes 1 : Simultaneous 1 axis Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by the turret on the front side. Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by the turret on the opposite side. 0 : By MTF No.1130. 1 : By MTF No.1131. Setting screen for passing point 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116
0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 designation (8 bits) Real number
01011100 01011100 01011100 01011100 01011101 01011101 01011101 01011101 00011100 01011101 2. 0.08
Tapping process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Bar feed process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Center drilling process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Drilling process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Roughing process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Semifinishing process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Finishing process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Grooving process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Threading process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Cutting off process parameter (Refer to parameter No.0105) Overrun in drilling a penetration hole in the automatic process specification inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
821
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0117
Format Real number
Initial value 0.5 0.02 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification
Description Finishing allowance in X axis of roughing Unit: mm or inch Allowance in X axis of semifinishing Unit: mm or inch Final cutting depth of threading Unit: mm or inch Return relief of roughing and drilling Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0118
Real number
0.1 0.04
0119
Real number
0.01 0.0004
0120
Real number
1. 0.04
0121 0122 0123 0124
Real number Real number Real number Real number
2. 5. 0. 1. 0.04
Cutting depth D1 (multiple of the drilling diameter) of one drilling process (machining methods 2 and 3) Drawing depth D2 (multiple of the drilling diameter of drilling (machining) method 3) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Stub rate of drilling (machining method 3) and feed rate of return relief during necking inch specification Unit: mm/rev or inch/rev mm specification Inner threading Constant to obtain threading depth from pitch (Threading depth) = (Pitch) (Parameter No.0125) Threading Boundary value of ordinary thread/face thread
0125
Real number
0.6495
0126
Real number
45.
0127 0128 0129 0130
Real number Real number Real number Real number
3. 2000. 1.5 0.0005
Cutting edge protection angle (degree) Maximum spindle speed (rpm) Grooving dwell time (rev) mm specification System constant (R4TOLD) (Do not change the setting by yourself.) System constant (R4TOLR) (Do not change the setting by yourself.) System constant (R4TOLT) (Do not change the setting by yourself.)
0.0000197 inch specification 0131 Real number 0.0005 mm specification
0.0000197 inch specification 0132 Real number 0.01 mm specification
0.0003937 inch specification 0133 Real number 0.001 System constant 4 (R4 TOLP) (Dont change this setting at random.)
822
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0134 0135 0136 0140
Format Real number Real number Integer Integer
Initial value 0.000573 3. 0 0
Description System constant 5 (R4 TOLA) (Dont change this setting at random.) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Specification of cuttingoff process. 0 : Cuttingoff process is not defined. 1 : Cuttingoff process is defined. Cuttingoff point of cuttingoff machining (CO). Specify the distance from the inner inch specification diameter of the part Unit: mm or inch mm specification Machining condition change point (CR) of cuttingoff machining. Specify the distance from the cuttingoff inch specification point. Unit: mm or inch mm specification Drawing amount (RA) of cuttingoff machining. Specify the distance from the machining inch specification condition change point. Unit: mm or inch mm specification Outer diameter beveling amount on the blank side cuttingoff. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
Remarks
0141
Real number
0.
0.
0142
Real number
5.
0.2
0143
Real number
1.
0.04
0144
Real number
0. 0.
0150 0151 0152
Integer Integer Real number
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 10. 0.4 Clearance amount (CAX) at the time of bar feed tool approach. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount (CAZ) at the time of bar feed tool approach. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Position at which the fingers grip the work by bar feed (WG). inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification mm specification inch specification Spindle speed at bar feed (S1) Feed rate (F1) for putting fingers on the work by bar feed. inch specification Unit: mm/min or inch/min mm specification Bar feed return amount (CEZ) of the tool Unit: mm or inch
0153
Real number
10. 0.4
0154
Real number
20. 0.8
0155
Real number
20 0.8
0156 0157
Real number Real number
100 1000. 40.
823
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0158
Format Real number
Initial value 3000. 120. mm specification
Description Feed rate (F2) for positioning on the work by bar feed. inch specification Unit: mm/min or inch/min Feed rate (F3) of tool after positioning on the work by bar feed. inch specification Unit: mm/min or inch/min mm specification Dwell time when the chuck is opened or closed in bar feed. (Second) Cutting depth per cut of machining a groove by the pecking motion D inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Return relief amount during machining of a groove by the pecking motion U inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification mm specification inch specification mm specification Zaxis allowance at intermediate finishing Zaxis finishing allowance at roughing Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0159
Real number
1000. 40.
0160 0170
3. 2. 0.08
0171
Real number
1. 0.04
0172
Real number
0.5 0.02
0173
Real number
0.1 0.004
inch specification Unit: mm or inch Constant for obtaining the depth of a thread from the pitch of outer surface threading (Depth) = (pitch) (parameter No.174)
0174
Real number
0.7578
0175 to 0179 0180
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 mm specification inch specification Clearance amount of Drilling (machining methods 1, 2, and 3) C. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Secondary clearance amount of drilling (machining method 3) C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of roughing in the Xaxis direction CX inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of roughing in the Zaxis direction CZ inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of semifinishing in the Xaxis direction CX. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of center drilling C Unit: mm or inch
0181
Real number
2. 0.08
0182
Real number
2. 0.08
0183
Real number
2. 0.08
0184
Real number
2. 0.08
0185
Real number
2. 0.08
824
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0186
Format Real number
Initial value 2. 0.08 mm specification
Description Clearance amount of semifinishing in the Xaxis direction CZ. inch specification Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount of finishing in the Xaxis direction CX. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of finishing in the Zaxis direction CZ. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of grooving or necking C inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Second clearance for inner surface machining CZ2 inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification mm specification inch specification Speed override at return of reaming (1.010.0) Clearance amount (C1) of tapping Clearance amount of cutting off C1 Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount of threading CE Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount of threading CS Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount of threading CT Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0187
Real number
2. 0.08
0188
Real number
2. 0.08
0189
Real number
2. 0.08
0190
Real number
2. 0.08
0191
Real number
2. 0.08
0192
Real number
2. 0.08
0193
Real number
2. 0.08
0194
Real number
2. 0.08
0195
Real number
2. 0.08
0196 0197 to 0199 0200 0201 0202 0203
Real number Real number Integer Integer Real number Integer
5.
Undefined Unusable (Data unchangeable) 2 Set the drawing type.
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 1 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
825
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0204
Format Integer
Initial value 1
Description Sets the position of parts as viewed from the advancing direction of the definition of parts figure. (1) 1 : Right side 1 : Left side (when drawing format is 1 or 2) (2) 1 : Right side 1 : Left side (when drawing format is 3 or 4) However, if vertical drawing display is available, right and left should be reversed.
Remarks
0205 0206
Integer Real number
Set the standard surface roughness by the number of the finish symbols.
Xcoordinate value of the machine datum (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st process in doublesided machining) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of the machine datum (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st process in doublesided machining) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of the machine datum (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe). Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of the machine datum (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe). Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of the turret turn position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st process in doublesided machining) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of the turret turn position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st process in doublesided machining) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of the turret turn position (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe). Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of the turret turn position (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe). Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of the turret turn position (for head 2 with the 4axis lathe). Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification
0207
Real number
0208
Real number
0209
Real number
0210
Real number
0211
Real number
0212
Real number
0213
Real number
0213
Real number
826
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0214
Format Real number
Initial value Undefined mm specification
Description
Remarks
Xcoordinate value of machine origin on back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4axis lathe) (2nd process in doublesided Undefined inch specification machining) Unit: mm or inch Zcoordinate value of machine origin on back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4axis lathe) (2nd process in doublesided Undefined inch specification machining) Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of machine origin on back working side (for tool rest 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of machine origin on back working side(for tool rest 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4axis lathe) (2nd process in Undefined inch specification doublesided machining) Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4axis lathe) (2nd process in Undefined inch specification doublesided machining) Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Xcoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for tool rest 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Zcoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for tool rest 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of machine origin (for head 1 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of machine origin (for head 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of turret turning position (for tool rest 1 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of turret turning position (for head 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification
0215
Real number
0216
Real number
0217
Real number
0218
Real number
0219
Real number
0220
Real number
0221
Real number
0222
Real number
0223
Real number
0224
Real number
0225
Real number
827
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0226
Format Real number
Initial value Undefined mm specification
Description
Remarks
Ycoordinate value of machine origin on back working side (for head 1 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Ycoordinate value of machine origin on back working side (for head 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for head 1 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification Ycoordinate value of turret turning position on back working side (for head 2 in 4axis lathe) Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch Undefined mm specification 1 0 Number of times final finishing is repeated in a multiple thread cutting cycle (valid for the Series 16) Length of incomplete thread in a multiple thread cutting cycle (valid for the Series 16) Caxis center drilling process parameter
Bit 7 6 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
0227
Real number
0228
Real number
0229
Real number
0230 0231 0300
Integer Integer
For Caxis machining
Bit 1
Coolant 0 : Not used 1 : Used Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation 0 : Not output 1 : Output Bit 3,4 Approach 00: Simultaneous 1 axis 01: Simultaneous 2 axis 11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axes Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis) 0 : Simultaneous 2 axes 1 : Simultaneous 1 axis Bit 7 Passing point setting screen 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed Process parameter on center drilling 0301 0302 0303 0304 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) Caxis drill processing process parameter (Refer to the parameter 300) Caxis tapping processing process parameter (Refer to the parameter 300) Caxis groove processing process parameter (Refer to the parameter 300) Caxis face milling process parameter (Refer to the parameter 300)
828
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0305 0306 to 0309 0310
Format
Initial value
Description Caxis drill working process parameter (see parameter 300) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Single step process for Caxis center drilling
Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Remarks
0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits)
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Head of process Before approach Before escape 0 : Not stop 1 : Stop
0311 0313 0314 0315 0316 to 0319 0320 0321 0322 0323 0330
0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) Real number Integer Integer Real number Real number 0. 80 80 0. 2. 0.08
Single step process for Caxis drilling process (Refer to parameter 310) Single step process for Caxis grooving (Refer to parameter 310) Single step process for Caxis face milling (Refer to parameter 310) Single step process for Caxis drill process (see parameter 310) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Dwell time (sec) of drill processing Caxis/ Yaxis
Cutting speed override (% to special tool) when the tool Caxis/ material is Special. Yaxis Feed amount override (% to special tool) when the tool material Caxis/ is Special Yaxis Coordinates values at Caxis zero point Clearance amount of Caxis center drilling C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
0331 0332
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 1) C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 1) C2. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
0333
Real number
2. 0.08
0334 0335
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
829
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0336
Format Real number
Description Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) C2. inch specification Unit: mm or inch
Remarks
0337 0338
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Cutting depth of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) D1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Return relief amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) U. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 3) C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 3) C2. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Clearance amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 3) C3. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Cutting depth of Caxis drilling (machining method 3) D1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification
0339
Real number
1. 0.04
0340
Real number
2. 0.08
0341
Real number
2. 0.08
0342
Real number
2. 0.08
0343
Real number
2. 0.08
0344 to 0362 0363
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Depth of cut for Caxis tapping (machining method 3: Containing peck rigid tapping) inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance amount of Caxis tapping C2. Unit: mm or inch Clearance amount of Caxis tapping C1. Unit: mm or inch
0364
Real number
2. 0.08
0365
Real number
2. 0.08
0366 0367
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Tool direction clearance of Caxis grooving CD and notching clearance of Caxis grooving C1. inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Finishing allowance notching inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification in Caxis front
0368
Real number
0.5
830
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0369
Format Real number
Initial value
Description
Remarks
Undefined Maximum allowable rotation speed of a milling tool on tool post 2 Note) If parameter No. 369 is undefined, a value specified in parameter No. 370 is used as the maximum allowable rotation speed of a milling tool on tool post 2, as usual.
0370 0371
2000. 1.0 0.1
Max. rpm of tool (rpm) Extension amount for approach/escape along a tangent line or circle in Caxis milling or Yaxis contouring Cutting rate toward a diameter for Caxis face milling Finishing allowance of Caxis face milling (in the Z axis direction) inch specification Unit: mm or inch mm specification Yaxis center drilling process parameter
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
Caxis/ Yaxis
0372 0373
0.2 0.5 0.02
For Caxis machining
0400
For Yaxis machining
Bit 1
Coolant 0 : Not used 1 : Used Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation 0 : Not output 1 : Output Bit 3,4 Approach 00: Simultaneous 1 axis 01: Simultaneous 2 axis 10: Simultaneous 3 axis 11: Simultaneous 4 axis Bit 5,6 Return relief 00: Simultaneous 1 axis 01: Simultaneous 2 axis 11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 to 0409 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00100100 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) Yaxis drilling process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis tapping process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis pattern machining process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Yaxis contouring process parameter (refer to the parameter No.400) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) For Yaxis machining
831
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0410
Format
Initial value
Description Single step of Yaxis center drilling process

Bit 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Remarks
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Process start Just before approach Just before escape 0 : Not stopped 1 : StoppedBit
0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 to 0419 0420
0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) Real number 2. 0.08
Single step of Yaxis drilling process (refer to the parameter No.410) Single step of Yaxis tapping process (refer to the parameter No.410) Single step of Yaxis pattern machining process (refer to the parameter No.410) Single step of Yaxis contouring process (refer to the parameter No.410) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Clearance amount of Yaxis center drilling C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
0421 0422
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 1) C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 1) C2 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
0423
Real number
2. 0.08
0424 0425
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) C2 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Cutting depth of Yaxis drilling (machining method 2) D1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Return relief amount of Caxis drilling (machining method 2) U inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
0426
Real number
2. 0.08
0427
Real number
2. 0.08
0428
Real number
2. 0.08
0429
Real number
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
832
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0430
Format Real number
Description Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) C2 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) C3 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Cutting depth of Yaxis drilling (machining method 3) D1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
Remarks
0431
Real number
2. 0.08
0432
Real number
2. 0.08
0433
Real number
2. 0.08
0434 0435
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Cutting depth of Yaxis tapping (machining method 3: Rigid tapping with pecking) D1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling C2 Unit: mm or inches Clearance amount of Yaxis tapping C1 Unit: mm or inches
0436
Real number
2. 0.08
0437
Real number
2. 0.08
0438 0439
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 1) C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 1) C2 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Finishing allowance of Yaxis pattern machining TS (machining method 1) inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)
0440
Real number
2. 0.08
0441
Real number
0.5 0.02
0442 0443 0444
Integer Real number Real number
80
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 2) C1 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Clearance of Yaxis pattern machining (machining method 2) C2 inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Finishing allowance of Yaxis pattern machining TS (machining method 2) inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
0445
Real number
2. 0.08
0446
Real number
0.5 0.02
833
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0447 0448 0449
Format Integer Real number Real number
Initial value 80
Description Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)
Remarks
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 2. 0.08 Clearance CD in the longitudinal direction and clearance C1 in the circumferential direction of the tool for Yaxis contouring inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification Finishing allowance of Yaxis contouring TS inch specification Unit: mm or inches mm specification
0450
Real number
0.5 0.02
0451 to 0459 0578 0700 0701
Real number Integer
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Undefined Color of the axes of a slanted surface coordinate system (FANUC standard value = 4, blue) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Parameter for animation drawing
0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits) 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits)
Bit 7
1 0
0 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
When interference alarm sounded: 0 : Stop drawing 1 : Continue drawing Animation drawing in manual operation mode 0 : Disable 1 : Enable Center line is 0 : Drawn 1 : Not drawn Interference check is 0 : Executed 1 : Not executed By executing M30, blank is 0 : Not redrawn 1 : Redrawn The setting of parameters for drawing is 0: Possible 1: Prohibited
834
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0702
Format
Initial value
Bit 7 6 5 4
Description
3 2 1 0
Remarks
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Questioning for maximum spindle speed 0 : is not performed 1 : is performed (for each process) The direction of spindle revolution for each tool 0 : can not be set (The spindle rotating direction follows the system parameters (No.107 to 115) per process.) 1 : can be set (Ignore the system parameter No.107 to 115 setting.) Initial value of maximum spindle speed (Valid it bit 0 is 1) 0 : become the value of system parameter No.128 1 : become undefined data In machining definition, the tool figure data: 0 : Cannot be set. 1 : can be set. Special threading is: 0 : Not carried out. (A conventional triangular thread is formed.) 1 : Carried out. (A square or trapezoidal thread is formed.) The second clearance specified for inner surface machining is rendered: 0 : Invalid. 1 : Valid. The depth of center drilling is measured from: 0 : The tool shoulder. 1 : The tool tip. The method of cutting depth of drilling 0 : Cutting depth is specified by incremental programming 1 : Cutting depth is specified by absolute programming
6 0 5 4 3 0 2 1 0 0 0
0703
Bit 7
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 7
One process end, return point of turret 0 : Return to next machining start point 1 : Return to this machining start point Prompting order for input of blank figure dimensions 0 : D, D0, and L 1 : L, D, and D0 Input of surface roughness 0 is 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid When the function to determine processes automatically is used, a drill having the same diameter as the inner surface: 0 : Cannot be used 1 : Can be used.
835
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0704
Format
Initial value
Bit 7 6 5 0 4
Description
3 2 1 0
Remarks TT only
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
Bit 7
When operating both turrets simultaneously using the process editing function, the waiting 0 : not output before T code cancel 1 : output before T code cancel At the start of new process when the spindle revolution direction is different between new and old processes, the spindle stop M code is 0 : not output 1 : output Auto collision avoidance function is 0 : used repeatedly 1 : used once For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool offset is: 0 : Not output 1 : Output Before cutting with a minor cutting edge is started for grooving, the T code of the second tool offset number is: 0 : Not output 1 : Output Specifies whether a blank figure (BWF) is filled in on the machining definition screen. 0 : Not filled in 1 : Filled in (For the 5900 and 5F00 systems, a blank is not filled in regardless of the setting of bit 6.) Specifies whether a machining area (CAF) is linedrawn. 0 : Not linedrawn 1 : Linedrawn
6 0 5 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0
0705
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 6
In the animation drawing, 0 : Upper tool is turret 1 1 : Lower tool is turret 1 Specifies the following when the T code cancellation command is executed during foreground simulated animation. 0 : The pictorial tool stops. 1 : The pictorial tool continues moving. When another module requests the right to use graphics exclusively during simulated machining, 0 : The right is not released. 1 : The right is released.
836
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0706
Format 0, 1 designation
Description Next tool and rigid tapping parameter

Bit 7 6 5 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0
Remarks
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Calling the next tool from turret 1 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed Calling the next tool from turret 2 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed Format of the rigid tapping cycle 0 : A normal rigid tapping cycle is output. 1 : An interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output. TT only
0707
Designation of balance cutting process

Bit 7 6 5 4 0 3 0 2 1 0
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Outside diameter roughing Outside diameter semifinishing Outside diameter finishing 0 : Not made to the balanced cutting process. 1 : If the condition is satisfied, it can be made to the balanced cutting process. Setting of surface speed control for balance cut B during outer surface rough machining 0 : Constant surface speed control is not used. (G97) 1 : Constant surface speed control is used. (G96) Setting of balance cut approach during outer surface rough machining 0 : The waiting M code is not output before approach. 1 : The waiting M code is output before approach (waiting for spindle rotation to be reached). Balanced cutting type of outside diameter roughing 0 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data screen to the value of system parameter No.755 so that type B is selected. 1 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data screen to 0 so that type A is selected.Bit
837
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0708
Format
Initial value
Bit 7 6 0 5 0 4
Description
3 2 1 0 0
Remarks
Common data to be restored when the power is turned on 0 : System parameters 1 : Family data Bit 2 Specifies whether process names are automatically inserted for each process when an NC data is created. 0 : No process name is automatically inserted. 1 : Process names are automatically inserted. Bit 3 Specifies whether the initial screen display function is used. 0 : Not used 1 : Used Bit 4 Input/output format of material data and tooling information 0 : Binary 1 : ISO/EIA Bit 5 Specify whether the same program is to be output for all paths. 0 : The program number is incremented. 1 : The program number is not incremented. Note) Specify that bit 5 of parameter No. 708 = 0 if the workpiece turnover function is used. Bit 7 Specify whether back machining is performed. 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed 0709 0, 1 10000000 designation (8 bits) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Bit 4 When the cutting end point is on a blank 0 : The tool retracts to the minimum diameter of the blank. 1 : The tool retracts in the Z axis direction. Prompt for CUTTING ANOTHER AREA BY SAME TOOL? ... CN= 0 : Displayed on the cutting condition setting screen. 1 : Displayed on the CN setting screen. On the machining procedure setting screen, 0 : The machining procedure data cannot be registered in submemory. 1 : The machining procedure data can be registered n submemory.
Bit 0
Bit 5
Bit 7
0710 0711 0712
Undefined Unused 100 1 One time override value during outer diameter rough machining Magnification of the cutting feedrate when the constant surface speed is set for balance cut B (Setting range: 1 to 100) If the value set for the parameter falls outside the setting range, it is clamped to magnification 1).
0713 to 0728
Integer
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
838
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0729
Format Integer
Initial value 2
Description Display language switching parameter 1: Japanese 4: French 7: Norwegian 10: Dutch 2: English 5: Swedish 8: Danish 11: Italian 3: German 6: Finnish 9: Chinese 12: Spanish
Remarks The optional ROM is required for Swedish and the languages beyond it. 15TTF only
(Otherwise English display) 0730 0731 0732 0733 Integer Integer Real number Real number 100 200 Initial value of waiting M code Initial value of waiting M code which is inserted automatically in ACA
Undefined Value of the M code for inverting a workpiece Value of the M code for starting Yaxis machining Undefined Value of the M code for ending Yaxis machining Only for the 5710 and 5800 and 5E00 Only for the 5710 and 5800 and 5E00
0734
Real number
Undefined Value of the M code for ending Yaxis machining
0735 0736
Real number Integer
500
Initial value of the waiting M code for each machining path Only for TT when using balance cut B.
Undefined M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for lathe turning surfaces Not to be specified if only animated simulation for lathe turning surfaces is performed. Undefined M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for Caxis end facing Undefined M code number (for the second spindle) for starting animated simulation for cylindrical surfaces Undefined Password for protecting a file Undefined M code number for the start of turning Setting of this parameter can be omitted when only turning is performed. However, it cannot be omitted when turning is performed after C or Yaxis machining. Only for the 5900 and 5F00 systems
0737 0738 0739 0740
Integer Integer Integer Integer
0741
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of Caxis machining (switching to Only for the the Caxis animated simulation screen) 5900 and 5F00 systems Undefined M code number for the start of cylindrical grooving (switching Only for the to the cylindrical groove animated simulation screen) 5900 and 5F00 systems
0742
Integer
839
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0743
Format Integer
Initial value
Description
Remarks
Undefined M code number for the start of Yaxis machining (switching to Only for the the Yaxis animated simulation screen) 5900 and 5F00 systems Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Undefined M code number (for the second spindle) Yaxis/sidesurface animated simulation 1 3. 0.1 Graphic scale constant mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Max. angle in which fine chamferring is performed. (Setting range 0< Angle to 180), Unit: deg. Delay amount of tool 2 with respect to tool 1 during balance TT only cutting (type B), Unit: rev Initial value of the fine chamfering amount. Unit: mm or inch Tip width of the generalpurpose tool. Unit: mm or inch Tip width of the threading tool. Unit: mm or inch Tip width of the grooving tool. Unit: mm or inch Tip width of the drilling tool. Unit: mm or inch starting Parameters for animated drawing
0744 to 0748 0749 0750 0751
Integer Integer Real number Real number
0752
Real number
3. 0.1
0753
Real number
2. 0.08
0754
Real number
5. 0.2
0755
Real number
0.2 0.008
0756 0757 0758, 0759 0760 0761 0762 to 0768 0769 0770 0771 0772 to 0776
120. 1.5
0, 1 Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) designation (8 bits) Real number Real number Undefined Minimum slanted surface angle Undefined Maximum slanted surface angle
0, 1 Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) designation (8 bits) Real number Character Character 0.8 Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Max. 15 characters.
Undefined File name of the sub cycle file using the automatic loading Undefined Axis names and their order (Specify the axis names in the order in which they are programmed on the NC. Example: XZCY)
0, 1 Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) designation (8 bits)
840
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0801
Format
Initial value
Bit 7 6 5 4
Description
3 2 1 0 0 0
Remarks
Bit 0
Screen display mode 0: Background color mode 1: Plain mode Bit 1 Coloring data selection method 0: Cannot be selected on the initial screen 1: Can be selected on the initial screen Note) If you change the screen display mode, press soft key [SAVE END] on the setting screen and switch the power off and on again. 0802 0, 1 00000000 designation (8 bits)
Bit 7 0 6 5 4 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0
Bit 0
Specify the parameter output format for the second spindle, as follows: 0: The parameter for the second spindle is output using the coordinate system explained blow. 1: The parameter for the second spindle is output using the same coordinate system as for the first spindle. Y Caxis positive (If bit 0 = 0) Caxis direction positive Z Y direction X X (C0) (C0) Z (If bit 0 = 1) Y X (C0) Z Caxis positive direction
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 7
Specify whether to display the CLAMP DIRECTION prompt on the tooling information setting screen, as follows: 0: Not to display. 1: To display. Specify how to calculate the tool angular axis angle is to be tilted in machining types other than slanted surface machining, as follows: 0: 0 degrees 1: In accordance with the direction in which the tool is mounted Specify how to obtain the tool number, as follows: 0: Use the entered tool number without modifying it. 1: Use the lowest two digits of the entered tool number. Specify how to obtain the Caxis position, as follows: 0: Use the conventional calculation method. 1: Use a calculation method that can reduce calculation error.
841
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
NOTE The undefined character parameter is indicated with the J code. To return to undefined data after setting data at the undefined parameter, input two or more SP codes. In this case, instead of the J code, a space is displayed on the CRT. To change the undefined parameter to undefined data, input
DEL
and
INPUT
System Parameter Table Concerning Color Display

Parameter No. 0500 0501 0502 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0555 0556 0557 0558 0559 0560 0561 0562 0563 0570 0571 0572 0573 0574 0575 to 0578 0579 0580 0581 Coloring data type Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Standard value 4 4 3 0 2 1 7 4 4 2 2 2 2 6 6 5 3 2 2 2 2 2 Undefined 6 2 2 Details Fixed picture for drawing format setting. Fixed picture for blank figure and base line setting. Not used. Axis. Lines that indicate blank figure. Lines that indicate machining figure. Threading area when machining is defined by menu No.4. Center drilling tool path. Drilling, reaming or tapping path. Outsidediameter rough machining tool path. Insidediameter rough machining tool path. Outsidediameter semifinish machining tool path. Insidediameter semifinish machining tool path. Outsidediameter finish machining tool path. Insidediameter finish machining tool path. Grooving and necking tool path. Threading tool path. Machining path for Yaxis machining (center drilling) Machining path for Yaxis machining (drilling) Machining path for Yaxis machining (tapping) Machining path for Yaxis machining (patten machining) Machining path for Yaxis machining (contouring) Not used. Yaxis machining parts figure Machining path for Caxis machining (center drilling) Machining path for Caxis machining (drill)
842
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0582 0583 0584 0585 0586 0587 to 0589 0590 0591 0592 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619 0620
Coloring data type Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character
Standard value 2 2 2 2 0 Undefined 6 2 2 1 2 1 2 4 2 0 1 1 4 6 4 3 4 1 4 4 4 7 4 4 Message from system.
Details Machining path for Caxis machining (tap) Machining path for Caxis machining (groove) Machining path for Caxis machining (notching) Machining path for Caxis machining cylindrical groove Line representing a pending machining profile (pending mode) Not used Caxis machining parts figure. Caxis machining path (reaming) Caxis machining path (boring) Edition No. display at initial screen. Not used.
Mount message concerning BC, EF, etc. File name displayed at input/output of family program. Menu display. Misinput data display. (1: KILL 0: CONT) message. Wink 1 (wink of menu No. at menu display and of symbol name at request picture). Wink 2 (wink of EXECUTING). Wink 3 (wink of parameter No. during parameter setting). Wink 4 (wink of process No. at menu No.4 aprocess list). Cursor that indicates range of machining area and enlargement. Error message. Lowest question symbol name. Symbols of messages other than that currently under question at question message (key word). Keyin data (data displayed at right to key word). 1stline main title and page No. 1stline subtitle and message currently under question (principally main question). 2ndline message.
843
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 0621
Coloring data type Character
Standard value 4
Details Fixed messages (messages other than questions that invariably appear on that page and their accompanying messages). (Example) 1. CYLINDER display at material select picture. Fixed messages for one page (groups of messages that appear several times on one page, such as process list). Question message. Not used. Question key word and relevant data. PRESS SOFT KEY message (with picture fixed). Messages accompanying the message currently under question. (Example) Accompanying message displayed when EE data is entered at groove shape input: (0: LAST 1: NEXT) Already keyedin data and numeric data (Example 1) Color of element symbol displayed on the 2nd line at machining figure definition picture. (Example 2) Parameter data and coordinate data display. Main title with no page No. (Example) PARAMETER & DATA SET when DATA SET key is pressed at initial picture. Not used. Scale value display S = T code display T O No. display O NC data. Coordinate display X, Z. Cutting time display CUTTING =. Rapid feed time display RAPID =. Color of blank of animated simulation Color of chuck of animated simulation Color of tail stock of animated simulation Color of center line of animated simulatio Color of tool holder of animated simulation Color of tip of turret 1 Color of tip of turret 2 (TTF only) Not used Color of the data programmed on the initial screen data setting screen Do not change the setting
0622 0623 0624 0625 0626 0627
Character Character Character Character Character
6 4 7 3 5 6
0628
Character
0629
Character
0650 0651 0652 0653 0654 0655 0656 0657 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 0665 0666 0667 to 0669 0670
Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Graphic Character
2 0 4 1 5 7 4 4 2 4 4 5 1 1 1 Undefined 4
844
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 0671 0672 to 0689 0690 0691 0692 0693 0694 0695 0696 0697 0698 0699
Coloring data type Graphic Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character
Standard value 4 Undefined 7 7 7 5 7 6 7 11 3 4
Details CAF (Machining area) drawing color (Do not change the data) Not used Prompt symbol name at the bottom of the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Symbol (called keyword) for prompt messages other than the current prompt message on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Data entered on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 (characters entered on the entry line at the bottom) Prompt message and message on line 2 of the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Prompt data in a prompt on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Numeric data on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 T code display character T on the animation screen for menu Nos. 5 and 6 Background color for title displays Background color for the prompt input window Background color for soft key and NC status displays
NOTE 1 Negative symbol () means inverted display. 2 It is impossible to change the color for animated drawings at Nos. 660 to 666.
845
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.3
MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) TABLE
Parameter No. 1000 1001 Format 8 Characters Integer Initial value F16 1 File name (NC name) Zaxis command inversion 1 : Normal output 1 : Inverted output of Zaxis command value Reference to the NC data output format corresponding to the case when there is no move at approach or return relief. 0 : Not referred. 1 : Referred. mm specification inch specification Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Least input increment of dwell time (sec) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Number of decimal digits of the X axis minimum setting unit Number of decimal digits of the Z axis minimum setting unit Least input increment for the angle in three dimensional coordinate conversion Least input increment for the tool angular axis angle Highprecision screw lead (E code) Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev Feed per revolution and screw lead (F code) Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev Yaxis minimum setting unit Unit: mm or inches X axis minimum setting unit Unit: mm or inch Z axis minimum setting unit. Unit: mm or inch Maximum command radius of arc interpolation Unit: mm or inch Description
1002
Integer
1010
Real number
9999.999 999.9999
1011 1020
0.02 0.001 0.0001
1021
Real number
0.001 0.0001
1022
Real number
0.001 0.0001
1023
Real number
0.0001 0.000001
1024
Real number
0.0001 0.000001
1025 1026 1028
Real number Real number Real number
0.001 1.0 0.001 0.0001
1029
Real number
0.001 0.0001
1030
Integer
3 4
1031
Integer
3 4
846
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1032
Format Real number
Initial value 3 4 mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification
Description Number of decimal digits of the Yaxis minimum setting unit Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of feed per revolution and screw lead (F code) Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of highprecision screw lead (E code)
1033
Integer
4 6
1034
Integer
4 6
1035 1036 1037 1038
Integer Integer Integer Integer
3 0 0 3 4
Number of digits below decimal point of dwell time Setting of the number of digits below decimal point of S code. Applicable to S 3digit and S 4digit output. Cant use. (Dont change the data.) mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification Zaxis command address 1st character: Absolute command 2nd character: Incremental command Zaxis command address 1st character: Absolute command 2nd character: Incremental command Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in Zaxis direction Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in Xaxis direction Feedrate and thread lead command address (Designate 2 same characters) Highprecision thread lead command address 1st character: For normal screw 2nd character: For face screw Dwell command address (Designate 2 same characters) Circular radius R specification address (Designate 2 same characters) Yaxis command address 1st character: absolute command 2nd character: incremental command Circular center address in Yaxis direction (designate 2 same characters) Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the angle threedimensional coordinate conversion Number of decimal places in the least input increment for the tool angular axis angle
1039
Integer
3 4
1040
2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters 2 Characters
ZW
1041
XU
1042 1043 1044 1045
KK II FF EE
1046 1047 1048
UU RR YV
1049
JJ
847
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 1050
Format Integer
Initial value 1
Description Number of turrets (1 or 2) 1 : 2spindle lathe 2 : 4spindle lathe (1 spindle/2 turrets) No.1 turret position 1 : Turret on this side 1 : Turret on the counter side No.2 turret position 1 : Turret on this side 1 : Turret on the counter side No.1 turret selection M code (1 is set, if not used) No.2 turret selection M code (1 is set, if not used) Setting of turret types 0 : Normal 2spindle lathe 1 : 2spindle lathe with reversible Xaxis (Chasing tool type turret, etc.) 2 : 4spindle lathe
Bit 7 6 5 0 4 0 3 2 1 0
1051
Integer
1052
Integer
1053 1054 1055
1 1 0
1060
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 6
Bit 7
Specifies whether or not to output G50 at home position. 0 : Output 1 : Not output Specifies whether or not to output the shift from home position to index position. 0 : Output 1 : Not output Specifies whether or not to output the shift from index position to home position. 0 : Output 1 : Not output Specifies whether the value is output for each axis during approach. 0 : Not output when there is no travel. 1 : Output even when there is no travel, for all axes. In a threading process, the G code of multiple thread cutting cycle is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. Specifies whether or not to use G code for fixed cycle at tapping in turning. 0 : Not use 1 : Use
1061 to 1064 1070 to 1073 1080
Real number Real number Integer
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.) 1. Program number 1 : Provided 2 : Output with main program and subprogram format.
848
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1081
Format Integer
Initial value 1
Description Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates 0 : Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate 1 : Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate (standard setting) 2 : Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate 3 : Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate Circular interpolation function 0 : Two or more quadrants 1 : One quadrant only 2 : Specifying radius R 3 : Specifying radius R (one quadrant only) The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become the addresses of the center on the axes. Specification of threading cycle (canned cycle G92) 1 : None 0 : Straight threading only 1 : Taper threading is possible Simultaneous oneaxis moving sequence (Effective when simultaneous one axis is specified by system parameters No.0107 to 0115.) 0 : Xaxis moves first in approach, while the Zaxis moves first in escape at all times. 1 : Inner diameter, end face Approach: Zaxis Xaxis Escape: Xaxis Zaxis Outer diameter Approach: Xaxis Zaxis Escape: Zaxis Xaxis 2 : Reverse procedure of set values in 1 (Standard setting) 3 : Zaxis moves first in approach, while Xaxis moves first in escape at all times. Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or two axes if the Yaxis FAPT function is used (valid only when simultaneous approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in system parameters 0400 to 0405) 0 : Approach is always started from the XY axes. Escape is always started from the Zaxis. 1 : End face Approach: Tool axis (Zaxis) Tool path (XY plane) Escape: Tool path (XY plane) Tool axis (Zaxis) Side face Approach: Tool axis (Xaxis) Tool path (ZY plane) Escape: Tool path (ZY plane) Tool axis (Xaxis) 2 : Reverse movement sequence of 1 (standard setting) 3 : Approach is always started from the Zaxis. Escape is always started from the X, Y axes.
1082
Integer
1083
Integer
1084
Integer
849
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 1085
Format Integer
Initial value 1
Description Constant surface speed control 0 : Not provided 1 : Provided (G96 directly output) 2 : Provided (G97 output, then G96 output) G50X_ Z_ S_ ; G97S_M03; (Dummy rotation) G00X_ Z_ ; (Approach) G96SX_ ; (Constant surface speed) Data output format for tool post 2 1: Usual output format 1: Output format used when the Caxis origin for tool post 2 is 180 degrees opposite to the origin for tool post 1. S The sign of Xaxis values for tool post 2 is inverted before being output. S The sign of values for the Xaxis and Caxis that are undergoing polar coordinate conversion for tool post 2 is inverted before being output.
Bit 7 6 5 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0
1086
Integer
1087
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Specify the output format for the sign of the Zaxis for the second spindle, as follows. 0 : The sign of the Zaxis for the second spindle is not inverted before being output. 1 : The sign of the Zaxis for the second spindle is inverted before being output Specify the output format for the sign of the tool angular axis angle, as follows: 0 : The sign of the tool angular axis angle is not inverted before being output. 1 : The sign of the tool angular axis angle is inverted before being output. Specify the output format for the sign of the rotation angle used in threedimensional coordinate conversion, as follows: 0 : The sign of the rotation angle is not inverted before being output. 1 : The sign of the rotation angle is inverted before being output. Specify the output format for the sign of the rotation angle used in threedimensional coordinate conversion for the second spindle, as follows: 0 : The sign of the rotation angle for the second spindle is not inverted before being output. 1 : The sign of the rotation angle for the second spindle is inverted before being output. Specify the timing when threedimensional coordinate conversion is to be canceled, as follows: 0 : A cancel command is output after the tool reaches the toolchange position. 1 : A cancel command is output just before the tool reaches the toolchange position. Zaxis rapid feed rate Unit: mm/min or inch/min
1090
Real number
4000. 160.
850
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1091
Format Real number
Initial value 4000. 160. mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification
Description Xaxis rapid feed rate (radius value) Unit: mm/min or inch/min Maximum value of highprecision screw lead (E code) (1.0 when no E code is specified) Unit: mm or inch Yaxis rapid traverse rate (radius value) Unit: mm or inch
1092
Real number
1. 1.
1093
Real number
4000. 160.
1100 1101
Integer Integer
4 0
Number of digits of sequence number (N) command Specification of zero suppress of F code 0 : Zero suppress is done (Leading zero are not output.) n : F code is output in n digits at all times. Number of digits of S code command number Not used Number of digits of T code tool selection number Number of digits of T code tool offset number T code value to be output after all process ends (Required for returning to a specified tool number. This parameter is set to 1, if this function is not required.) Decimal point input function 0 : Not provided 1 : Provided (If this parameter is set to 1, address P is not assignable to parameter No.1046.) 1st stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used) 2nd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used) 3rd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used) 4th stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used) Minimum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Maximum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Minimum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Maximum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Minimum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Maximum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Minimum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Maximum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (1, if not used) Change ratio of S code output
1102 1103 1104 1105 1106
Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer
4 4 2 2 1
1107
Integer
1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122
Integer Integer Integer Integer Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number
1 1 1 1 50 5000 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.01
851
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 1125 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 to 1149 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1210 1211 1220 1221
Format Real number Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer value Integer value Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer
Initial value 0 3 4 5 8 9 30 1 98 99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 32 92 90 94 97 96 1 1
Description The value set in this parameter is added to the tool angular axis angle before output. M code value in normal revolution of spindle (1, if not used) M code value in reverse revolution of spindle (1, if not used) M code value in spindle stop (1, if not used) M code value with coolant on (1, if not used) M code value with coolant off (1, if not used) M code value in program end (1, if not used) Output M01 at completing a process. When 1 is set, it is not output. M code for subprogram call (1, if not used) M code for subprogram end (1, if not used) Cant use. (Dont change the data.) M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not in use: 1) M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not in use: 1) M code for clockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining) (Not used: 1) M code for counterclockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining) (Not used: 1) Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.) M code for starting back machining (Not used: 1) Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.) Cutting feed G code Circular interpolation (CW) G code Circular interpolation (CCW) G code Threading G code Canned cycle G code Not used Not used Constant surface speed control off G code Constant surface speed control on G code Absolute command mode G code Incremental command mode G code
852
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1222 1223 1224 1225 1230 1231 1232 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1260 1261 1262 1300
Format Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Two characters
Initial value 1 1 1 1 40 41 42 4 28 29 30 50 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 54 55 98 99 1 CH Not used Not used Not used Not used
Description
Tool nose radius compensation cancel G code Tool nose radius compensation (left side) start G code Tool nose radius compensation (right side) start G code Dwell G code Not used Not used Not used Coordinate system setting G code Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used First spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code Second spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code Per minute feed G code Per revolution feed G code G code for return to the initial point (only for 5E00, 5710 series) Caxis command address 1st character: Absolute command 2nd character: Incremental command Caxis lease input increment (Deg) No. of digits to the right of decimal point of Caxis least input increment. Caxis rapid traverse rate (Deg/min)
1301 1302 1303
Real number Integer Real number
0.001 3 4000.
853
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 1304
Format 0, 1 designation (8 bits)
Description Drilling canned cycle in each process (Caxis/Yaxis) 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. Drilling Center drilling
1305
Specified with 0 or 1 (8 bits)
00000000
Bit 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
IN front notching, finishing of Yaxis pattern machining, and contouring, cutter compensation is carried out by: 0 : FAPT (G40, G41, and G42 are not output.) 1 : NC (G40, G41, and G42 are output.) Specifies whether the radius command for cylindrical interpolation is output with a decimal point. 0 : No decimal point 1 : With a decimal point
1306
Integer
Method of Caxis control 0 : Servo motor control method 1 : Spindle positioning method When controlled axes are simultaneous 2 axes. 0 : XZ axes are simultaneous 2 axes. 1 : XCaxis or ZCaxis are simultaneous 2 axes. Command method at the time of spindle positioning 0 : Half fixation angle indexing 1 : Arbitrary angle indexing mm specification inch specification mm specification inch specification No use No use M code of forward tool rotation M code of reverse tool rotation Milling start M code Cutting start M code Orientation M code Spindle positioning release M code Spindle indexing M code Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of feed rate per minute Feed rate (feed per minute) Minimum setting unit: mm or inch
1307
Integer
1308
Integer
1309
Real number
1. 0.01
1310
Integer
0 2
1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 to 1339
Real number Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Real Integer
0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Undefined Indexing angle 1 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
854
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1340
Format Integer
Initial value 0
Description Specifies whether the Caxis is parallel to the X or Yaxis. 0 : Xaxis 1 : Yaxis Specifies the number of decimal places of data specified for the Caxis. 0 : That specified in the least input increment for the Xaxis in MTF 1030 1 : That specified in the least input increment for the Zaxis in MTF 1031 Cant use. (Dont change the data.) Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
1341
Integer
1342 1343 1344 to 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1360 1376 1377 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1390
0, 1 designation (8 bit) Integer Integer (3 digit) Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Real number Real number Integer
00000000
0 29 68 69 1 2 6 83. 85. 89. 107. 112. 113. 384 380 68.1 69.1 1
Cant use. (Dont change the data.) M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping Caxis clamping M code Caxis unclamping M code Cutting along the X axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle Cutting along the Y axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle Tool calling M code Drilling cycle dwell off Front face Boring cycle Front face Boring cycle Side face Cylindrical interpolation start/cancel Polar coordinate interpolation start Polar coordinate interpolation cancel G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping cycle G code for starting threedimensional coordinate conversion G code for canceling threedimensional coordinate conversion Output format of canned cycle R code 0 : absolute, 1 : incremental Canned cycle repetitive code Address specifying the difference in radius of the thread for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00) Address specifying the thread height for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1391 1392 1393
1 characters 2 characters 2 characters
K RR II PP KK
855
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1404 1405 1406 1407 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417
Format 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters 3 characters
Initial value QQ DD PP AA PP PP RR RR FF TT BB RR BB HH II 1 1 5 1 1 68 69 1
Description Address specifying the depth of the first cut for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00) Address specifying a tool angle for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00) Address specifying the cutting method for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00) Address specifying a finishing allowance for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00) Pitch command address for the interpolation type rigid tapping cycle Cutin direction command address for the interpolation type rigid tapping cycle Command address for a nexttool call Address of the rotation angle address in threedimensional coordinate conversion Address of the tool angular axis angle Address of the spindle number Address of the turning tool clamp type M code for rotating the second spindle in the normal direction (back machining) M code for rotating the second spindle in the reverse direction (back machining) M code for causing the second spindle to stop rotating (back machining) M code for connecting the Caxis on the second spindle (back machining) M code for disconnecting the Caxis on the second spindle (back machining) M code for clamping the Caxis on the second spindle (back machining) M code for unclamping the Caxis on the second spindle (back machining) Tool spindle (normal rotation) M code for tool post 2 Note) If MTF1417 = 1, the M code for tool post 2 is the same as the M code specified for tool post 1.
1418
3 characters
M code for the tool spindle (reverse rotation) on tool post 2
856
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424
Format 5 characters 5 characters 5 characters 5 characters 5 characters
Initial value 1 1 1 1 1
Description M code for tool attitude 1 (for foreground animated simulation) M code for tool attitude 2 (for foreground animated simulation) M code for tool attitude 3 (for foreground animated simulation) M code for turning tool orientation 1 (for foreground animated simulation) M code for turning tool orientation 2 (for foreground animated simulation)
CAUTION Parameter numbers other than listed above may also appear on the CRT. These parameters are employed the system. Dont change them.
857
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.4
FUNCTION TABLE (MTF 2000S)
The parameter numbers 2000s of the MTF (Machine Tool File) are used as a function table to be referred to when NC data is prepared by the Symbolic FAPT. When a parameter number of 2000s is referred to, NC data of the format in accordance with the function code set therein is prepared. The format of NC data can be altered by changing the function code to be set in and after the parameter number 2000.
A.4.1
Outline
Each parameter in and after the MTF parameter number 2000 is provided with the following meaning: NOTE For details of the parameters to be referenced by the Yaxis FAPT function, see Part IX.
Parameter No. 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
Meaning The leader part of NC data is prepared. The trailer part of NC data is prepared. The beginning part of center drilling process The beginning part of drilling process The beginning part of rough machining process The beginning part of medium finish machining process The beginning part of finish machining process The beginning part of grooving process The beginning part of threading process The end part of center drilling process The end part of drilling process The end part of rough machining process The end part of medium finish machining process The end part of finish machining process The end part of grooving process The end part of threading process Setting of coordinate system and output of tool selection T code Output of rapid traverse, cutting feed move command block Output of approach two axes at a time move command block
Remarks FEED, EOR, program No., etc. M30, EOR, etc.
Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. G50, Txxxx, etc. G01 X_ Z_ F_ ; Rapid traverse coolant ON, etc. move command,
Escape command output (for Yaxis) for simultaneous movement G30 U0. W0. V0. with respect to the three axes Output of circular interpolation move command block In case of I or K command.
858
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 2021 2022
Meaning Output of circular interpolation move command block Threading command block output
Remarks In case of radius R command. Tapping process retapping command when threading cycle is not used and MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0 In case of the threading cycle used. rpm command The spindle range is changed over. When no threading cycle is used
2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2040 2041 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054
Output of threading cycle command block Output of spindle speed command block Output of spindle range changeover block Output of a threading command block Output of dwell command block Constant surface speed control ON Unused. Output of spindle maximum speed clamp value command block 1st motion for approach in one axis at a time 2nd motion for approach in one axis at a time 1st motion for return relief in one axis at a time 2nd motion for return relief in one axis at a time Starting part of cuttingoff processing Starting part of bar feed processing End section of cuttingoff processing End section of bar feed processing Output of a specific cedeFor model TT only Simultaneous 2axis approach move command of bar feed Simultaneous 1axis approach 1st motion Simultaneous 1axis approach 2nd motion Move command to the work gripping position in bar feed Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be opened. Move command for work feeding in bar feed. Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be closed. Move command 1 after work feeding in bar feed. Move command 2 after work feeding in bar feed
G50S_ ;
Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. Tool offset cancel, M01, etc. For model TT only M05; G00X_ Z_ ; etc. M05; G00X_ ; etc. M05; G00Z_ ; etc. G98G01Z_ F_ ; or G98G01X_ F_ ; M_ ; G04U_ ; etc. G01Z_ F_ ; etc. M_ ; G04U_ ; G01Z_F_ ; or G01X_ F_ ; G00Z_ ;
859
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059
Meaning Starting section for reaming Starting section for tapping Ending section for reaming Ending section for tapping
Remarks
Command block outputs for tapping cycle (G84) and reverse Tapping process relief cutting tapping cycle (G84.1) command when canned cycle is used and MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1 Command block 1 for a multiple thread cutting cycle Command block 2 for a multiple thread cutting cycle Outputs the T code specifying tool offset for each cutting area. TXXXX; Outputs the T code specifying the second tool offset for grooving Block for preparing the next tool Block for cutting with balance cut B Setting of the coordinate system for turning and T code output Setting of the coordinate system for milling and T code output Beginning part of Yaxis machining (CAUTION 1) Beginning part of Yaxis center drilling Beginning part of Yaxis drilling Beginning part of Yaxis tapping Beginning of Yaxis pattern Beginning of Yaxis contouring Not used End part of Yaxis center drilling End part of Yaxis drilling End part of Yaxis tapping End of Yaxis pattern End of Yaxis contouring Start of main program End of main program Start of subprogram End of subprogram Subprogram call block Beginning of a turning process (CAUTION 2) Beginning of a milling process (CAUTION 3) FEED, O_ , etc. M99, M30, FEED, etc. M98P_ ; (Back machining) (Back machining)
2060 2061 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2110 2111
860
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Parameter No. 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205
Meaning Start part of Caxis machining End part of Caxis machining Setting of coordinate system for Caxis machining, Tool selection T code output Drill cycle (G81, G82) Command block output Part 1 Drill cycle (G81, G82) Command block output Part 2 Peck drilling cycle (G83), Highspeed peck drilling cycle (G83.1), Command block output Part 1 Peck drilling cycle (G83), Highspeed peck drilling cycle (G83.1), Command block output Part 2 Tapping cycle (G84), Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1), Command block output Part 1 Tapping cycle (G84), Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1), Command block output Part 2 Start of cylindrical interpolation End of cylindrical interpolation Spindle indexing command block output
Remarks
G81 is output when the dwell time is 0 G82 is output when the dwell time is other than 0 Machining type 2: G83.1 3: G83
2206
2207
In the case of reverse screw: G84.1 is output
2208
2209 2210 2211 2212
Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar Valid when bit 7 of MTF 1305 is set to coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Yaxis pattern/contouring 1 is started Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Yaxis pattern/contouring is canceled Cylindrical interpolation start block Cylindrical interpolation cancellation block Boring cycle block (G85, G89) 1 Boring cycle block 2 Start of Caxis center drilling Start of Caxis drilling Start of Caxis tapping Start of Caxis grooving Start of Caxis notching Start of Caxis cylindrical grooving (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2213
2214 2215 2216 2217 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225
861
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Parameter No. 2226 2227 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 Start of Caxis reaming Start of Caxis boring
Meaning
Remarks (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems) (Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
End of Caxis center drilling End of Caxis drilling End of Caxis tapping End of Caxis grooving End of Caxis notching End of Caxis cylindrical grooving End of Caxis reaming End of Caxis boring Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block (1) Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block (2) Block for canceling a Caxis interpolation tapping cycle Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block (1) Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block (2) Block for canceling a Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle Starting threedimensional coordinate conversion Canceling threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting T code for tool selection Starting lathe turning process Starting milling process Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code Output of the special function code
G68.1 Xx Yy Zz Ii Ji Kk Rr G69.1 G0 Txxxx G700 Hh M17 Bb Ii G700 Hh M18 Bb Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10 Number of codes that can be set: 10
862
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
CAUTION 1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining. If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. 2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process. If two or more turning processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. 3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process. If two or more milling processes are defined continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining process or Yaxis machining process.
863
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.4.2
Function Code
Hexadecimal number of 4 digits set to the MTF 2000s is called a function code, which represents the format of NC data to be output when each function table is referred to. (1) Structure of Function Code The function code of 4 digits is divided into the least significant one digit, and the most significant three digits; the function represented by that code is roughly classified by the least significant three digits; the function represented by that code is roughly classified by the least significant one digit, and the details of that function are specified by the most significant three digits.
1 2 3 4 Function code of 4 digits Least significant 1 digit (major classification) Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification)
(2) Major Classification of Function Codes

Least significant 1 digit of function code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A F Special function Output of move command Output of G code Output of F, S, or T code, etc. Output of special code Output of M code (set to MTF 1130s) Output of special M code (range selection or turret selection) Output of code of value 0 Output of optional M code (M code other than major classification 5, and 6) Output of optional S code Output of optional T code Canned word output Function
864
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(3) Detailed classification of function code The detailed classification of function code is as follows: (a) Special function When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 0 ... ***0;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 0 0 Function Remarks
No operation Feed output Output a x 20 feeds
other than (= a)
(b) Output of move command When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 1 ... ***1;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 1 3 4 6 0 1 3 4 6 0 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 1 1 1 1 1 Function Remarks
First axis output (Z axis)
Address set to MTF 1040
Second axis output (X axis) Address set to MTF 1041 First auxiliary output (circular center Z axis) Second auxiliary output (circular center X axis) Screw lead output (F code) Address set to MTF 1042 Address set to MTF 1043 Address set to MTF 1044. However, if the setting value of MTF 1092 is not exceeded, the output is made with lead (E code)
7 8 9 A C
7 8 9 A C
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
Highprecision screw lead Address set to MTF 1045 (E code) Dwell command output Address set to MTF 1046
Circular radius value output Address set to MTF 1047 Third axis output Output of W0 Address set to MTF 1300 Output is made only in the case of Z direction of simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in approach and escape Output is made only in the case of X direction of simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in approach and escape
Output of U0
E E E E
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1392. Thread radius Outputs the address specified in MTF 1393. Thread height Outputs the address specified in MTF 1394. Depth of the first cut Outputs the address specified in MTF 1397. Finishing allowance
865
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(c) Output of G code When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 2 ... ***2;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Function
Remarks
G code output (G00) set to Output of G code of MTF 1200 1207 MTF 1200 CAUTION G code output (G01) set to The G code of MTF 1200 1207, MTF 1210 MTF 1201 1211, MTF 1220 1225, and MTF 1230 1232 is model managed for each group. Thus, when the G code output (G02) set to function code specifying these G code is referred MTF 1202 to, the G code is output only when it is different from the G code output. Also, this G code is not G code output (G03) set to output when 1 is set to MTF 1200 1251. MTF 1203 G code output (G32) set to MTF 1204 G code output (G92) set to MTF 1205 G code output (G90) set to MTF 1206 G code output (G94) set to MTF 1207 G code output (G97) set to G code output of MTF 1210 1211 MTF 1210 G code output (G96) set to MTF 1211 G code output (G40) set to G code output of MTF 1230 1232 MTF 1230 G code output (G41) set to MTF 1231 G code output (G42) set to MTF 1232 G code output set to MTF G code output of MTF 1220 1225 1220 G code output set to MTF 1221 G code output set to MTF 1222 G code output set to MTF 1223 G code output set to MTF 1224 G code output set to MTF 1225
866
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Function
Remarks
G code output (G04) set to G code output of MTF 1240 1251 MTF 1240 CAUTION G code output (G28) set to The G code of MTF 1240 1251 is not modal MTF 1241 managed. Thus, when the function code specifying these G code is referred to, the G code G code output (G29) set to is always output. Also, this G code is not output MTF 1242 when 1 is set to MTF 1240 1251. G code output (G30) set to MTF 1243 G code output (G50) set to MTF 1244 G code output (G70) set to MTF 1245 G code output (G71) set to MTF 1246 G code output (G72) set to MTF 1247 G code output (G73) set to MTF 1248 G code output (G74) set to MTF 1249 G code output (G75) set to MTF 1250 G code output (G76) set to MTF 1251 G code set to MTF1252 or G code for selecting a back machining coordinate MTF1253 is output system MTF 1200 (G00) or 1201 The G code of MTF 1200 and 1201 are output in the (G01) is output case of rapid traverse move and cutting feed (line), respectively. MTF 1202 (G02) or 1203 The G code of MTF 1202 and 1203 are output in the (G03) is output case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively. G codes of MTF 1220 and The G codes of MTF 1220 and 1221 are output in the 1221 are output case of absolute command and incremental command, respectively. Output MTF 1231 (G41) or MTF 1231 for left side cutter compensation MTF 1232 1232 (G42) for right side cutter compensation G codes of MTF 1202 and The G codes of MTF 1203 and 1202 output in the 1203 are output case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively. G codes of MTF 1222 and The G codes of MTF 1222 and 1223 are output in the 1223 are output case of mm input and inch input, respectively.
5 5
1 2
0 0
2 2
5 5 5
3 5 6
0 0 0
2 2 2
867
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 5 7 0
Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 2
Function
Remarks
The selected G code is XC plane: G17 output. ZX plane: G18 CZ plane: G19 G codes of MTF 1260 and MTF 1260 at every minute feed, MTF 1261 at every 1261 are output revolution feed Initial point return G code is The G98 is output only in the case of B, C of G code output system G81 or G82 is output G83 or G83.1 is output G84 or G84.1 is output G7.1 is output. The G code set in MTF 1381 is output. The G code set in MTF 1382 is output. The G code set in MTF 1376 and 1377 is output. Outputting G code for G code set in MTF1385 starting threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting G code for G code set in MTF1386 canceling three dimensional coordinate conversion The G code (G98) set to G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are output. MTF 1260 is output CAUTION The G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are modal The G code (G99) set to managed. Thus, when the function code MTF 1261 is output specifying these G code output. Also, this G code is not output when 1 is set to MTF 1260 1261. The G code (G384) set to MTF 1383 is output The G code (G380) set to MTF 1384 is output The G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 8
0 0
0 0
2 2
868
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(d) Output of F, S, and T codes When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 3 ... ***3;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 3 Function Remarks
Tool offset cancel T code It depends on the setting of process parameter of output system parameter whether the T code is actually output. T code output S code (rpm) output Tool offset start It is output only when the change rate from the speed output immediately before exceeded the setting value of MTF 1122.
0 0
1 2
0 0
3 3
Maximum speed clamp It is output only when the MTF 1085 has the constant value S code output surface speed control function and the constant surface speed control function is used in the process parameter (system parameter 0108 0114). Surface speed command S code output F code output It is output only in the case of cutting feed. It is compared with the modal value and is output only when it is a different value.
0 0
4 5
0 0
3 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Output of program number It is not output when 0 is set to MTF 1080. Final T code output The T code set to the MTF 1106 is output. No output is made when 1 has been set.
Output of subprogram call The subprogram number (PXXXX) is output by the P code subprogram call program (M98PXXXX). R code output Q code output L code output P code output For canned cycle For canned cycle For canned cycle For canned cycle
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 15 only) Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 16 only) Outputs the address specified in MTF 1396. Specified cut method (valid for the Series 15 only) F code output Outputs the address specified in MTF1398 Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
T code output Outputs the address specified in MTF1399
Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
869
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Function
Remarks
B code output Outputs the address specified in MTF1400.
Preparing the tool used in the first process.
B code output Outputs the address specified in MTF1400.
Preparing the tool used in the next process.
1 1 1
4 5 A
0 0 0
3 3 3
T code output T code output
Output the tool number (TN). Output the tool offset number (TM).
Outputting the rotation Address set in MTF1040 center Zaxis in three dimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the rotation Address set in MTF1041 center Xaxis in three dimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the rotation Address set in MTF1048 center Yaxis in three dimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the direction of Address set in MTF1042 the rotation center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Zaxis direction) Outputting the direction of Address set in MTF1043 the rotation center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Xaxis direction) Outputting the direction of Address set in MTF1049 the rotation center axis in threedimensional coordinate conversion (Yaxis direction) Outputting the rotation Address set in MTF1404 angle in threedimensional coordinate conversion Outputting the tool angular Address set in MTF1405 axis angle (Bb)
870
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Function
Remarks
Spindle No. H1: First spindle H2: Second spindle Outputting clamp type turning
tool Address set in MTF1407
I0: Normal clamping of the turning tool I1: Reverse clamping of the turning tool
(e) Output of special code When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 4 ... ***4;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 4 4 4 4 4 Function Remarks
EOB output (;) EOR output (%) /..... EOB output NC data output NC data output cancel
One block of NC data is output. However, the block with EOB only is not output. The EOR (%) is output. One block of NC data with/(optional skip) is output. Valid for an address indicating other than the amount of travel Valid for an address indicating other than the amount of travel
(f) M code output (set at the MTF 1130 1139) When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 5 ... ***5;
Spindle forward revolution The M codes of MTF 1130 or 1131 are output M code output (M03 or corresponding to the spindle revolution direction set M04) by the process parameter (system parameter 0108 0113) and turret position MTF 1051. The spindle stop M code When the spindle revolution direction is reversed the (M05) is output on spindle M05 (MTF 1132) is output. Nothing is output when the reverse revolution direction of revolution does not change. Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132 is output. Also, the (M05) M03 M05 are modal managed and the M code which is the same as the modal value is not output. Coolant on M code output The M code of MTF 1133 is output. However, this (M08) applies to the coolant use process only (by designation of process parameter).
871
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Function
Remarks
Coolant off M code output The M code of MTF 1134 is output. Also, the M08 and (M09) M09 are modal managed and it is output only when it is different from the modal value. Program end output (M30) Optional stop output (M01) M M code The M code set to the MTF 1135 code The M code set to the MTF 1136
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
5 6 7 8 9 A 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Subprogram call M code The M code set to the MTF 1137 output (M98) Subprogram return M code The M code set to the MTF 1138 output (M99) MTF 1139 (unused) Tool calling M code Cautions) When 1 is set to the MTF 1130 1139, its M code is not output. M code specified in MTF1355
Milling machining M code The M code set to the MTF 1315 and 1316. It is or turning machining M selected by machining type. code output Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132. It is output when the milling machining is executed from the turning machining or the turning machining is executed from the milling machining. Spindle indexing M code The M code set to the MTF 1319 output Orientation M code output The M code set to the MTF 1317
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0 0
5 5 5 5 5 5
Spindle positioning release The M code set to the MTF 1318 M code output The M code set in MTF 1321 is output. Outputs the Caxis M code specified in MTF1351 clamping M code (M68). Outputs the Caxis M code specified in MTF1352 unclamping M code (M69).
872
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(g) Output of special M code (range selection, turret selection) When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 6 ... ***6;
Spindle range selection M The M code (MTF 1110 1113) corresponding to the code selected range is output. Also, the M code of MTF 1110 1113 is modal managed. Turret selection M code The M code of MTF 1054 1056 is output. Currently output (unused) it is not used.
(h) Value 0 code output When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 7 ... ***7;
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 0 1 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Function Remarks
Z0 output W0 output X0 U0 K0 K0 K0 K0 J0 J0 F0 F0 F0 F0
The first character address of MTF 1040 The second character address of MTF 1040 The first character address of MTF 1041 The second character address of MTF 1041 The first character address of MTF 1042 The second character address of MTF 1042 The first character address of MTF 1043 The second character address of MTF 1043 The first character address of MTF 1049 The second character address of MTF 1049 The first character address of MTF 1044 The second character address of MTF 1044 The first character address of MTF 1045 The second character address of MTF 1045
873
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 8 8 9 0 1 0 0 0 0
Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 7 7 7
Function
Remarks
C0 output H0 output
The first character address of MTF 1300 The second character address of MTF 1300 set in
Outputting a Address reference MTF1405 position return for the tool angular axis (B0)
(i) Arbitrary M, S, T code output When the significant 1 digit (major classification) is 8, 9, A.
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) M code value S code value T code value Least significant 1 digit (major classification) 8 9 A Function Remarks
M code output S code output T code output
NOTE With the function codes of major classes 8, 9 and A, the M, S, T code specified by the first 3 digits of the function code is output. The value of the M, S, T code to be output is specified by a 3digit hexadecimal number.
8: M code 9: S code 0: T code output M, S, T code value (hexadecimal number)
Example) The function code to output S100 is specified as follows.

0 6 4 9
Indicateds that the address to be output is S. Expresses the value to be output 100 in a hexadecimal number.
874
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(j) Fixed word output The least significant 1 digit (major classification) is F ... ***F
Most significant 3 digits (detailed classification) 0 to F (a) F 0 0 1 to 7 (b) 8 to F (b) F Subsequent to address characters, the following 2word value is output. b: b8: Total output digit number No. of digits past the decimal point Least significant 1 digit (major classification) F F Function Remarks
Only address characters are output Subsequent to address characters, the following 1word value is output. b: Output digit number
a: ASCII code of output address
Example 1) If the function code is set to 503F, 0064, the following is output as NC data output. P100 Example 2) Set No. MTF 2200 as follows. 2200 = 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 NC data at the Caxis machining head part is output as follows. M98P8000; CAUTION 1 Any other function code than those listed in this table is undefined. Any other code than them must not be set to the function table. 2 Difference between CC01 and 0107, between DD01 and 1107. If the latter parameter is referred to, W0 and U0 are output always. Besides, for the former parameter, W0 and U0 are output only when it is the symmetry axis resulting from division.
875
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.4.3
Size of Function Table
The function table of MTF 2000s is fixed in size, that is, the number of function codes which can be set for each parameter number is fixed. The number of the function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is equal to the number of those displayed on the picture, and a larger number of function codes cannot be specified any longer. When all of the allowable number of function codes are not used, 0000 should be set to the remaining ones. The number of function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is listed in the following table.
Parameter Number of Parameter Number of Parameter Number of No. function No. function No. function 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 10 10 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 10 10 9 8 7 7 10 8 7 4 10 7 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2040 2041 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2065 4 10 10 10 10 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 6 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2110 2111 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 10 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 4 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
(Example)
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503 G17 G98 G98 G81 X Z C R P F G18 G99 G82 G19
876
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Example of Setting
2000 = 0300, 0104, FEED % 2001 = 0205, 0004, M05 ; 2002 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2003 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2004 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2005 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2006 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2007 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2008 = 0100, 0000, FEED 2009 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2010 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2011 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2012 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2013 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2014 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2015 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2016 = 4402, 1101, G50 X 2017 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2018 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2019 = 5202, 5002, G90 G00 G91 G01 2020 = 5202, 5102, G90 G02 G91 G03 2021 = 5202, 5102, G90 G92 G91 G03 2022 = 5802, 5202, G98 G90 G99 G91 2023 = 0502, 1101, G92 X 0004, 0603, ; 0 0703, 0004, TXXXX ; 0000, 0000, 0004, ; 0505, M30 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0004, 0104, 0004, 0300, 0000 ; % ; FEED 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0605, M01 0605, M01 0605, M01 0605, M01 0605, M01 0605, M01 0605, M01 0001, Z 1101, X 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0004, ; 0303, Smax 0001, Z 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0004, 0002, ; G00 AA01, 0503, C F 0103, 0004 TXXXX ; 0004, 0000 ;
1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z C M08 ; 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z M09 ; 1101, 0001, AA01, 4401, 3301, 0503, 0004 X Z C I K F ; 1101, 0001, AA01, 9901, 0503, 0004 X Z C R F ; 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004 G32 X Z F ; E 0001, 4401, 6601, 0004, 0000 Z I F ; E
877
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
2024 = 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, G00 M05 ; MXX ; G97 S M03 ; M04 2025 = 0002, 0205, 0004, 0006, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 G00 M05 ; MXX ; 2026 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Unused) 2027 = 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000 G04 U ; 2028 = 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1102, 0403, 0005, 0004, 0000, M05 ; MXX ; G96 S M03 ; M04 2029 = 1002, 0203, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 G97 S ; 2030 = 4402, 0303, 0004, 0000 G50 Smax ; 2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z C M08 ; G91 G01 2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z C M08 ; G91 G01 2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z M09 ; G91 G01 2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z M09 ; G91 G01 2035 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED 2036 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED 2040 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000 TXX00 ; M01 ; 2041 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000 TXX00 ; M01 ; 2045 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, (Unused) 2046 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z ; G91 G01 2047 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z ; G91 G01 2048 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, G90 G00 X Z ; G91 G01 2049 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, G98 G90 G00 X Z F ; G91 G01 2050 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, G04 U ; 2051 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, G98 G90 G00 X Z F ; G91 G01 2052 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, G04 U ;
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000 0000
0000
0000
0000
0000 0000
0000
878
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
2053 = 7002, 5202, 5002, G98 G90 G00 G91 G01 2054 = 7102, 5202, 5002, G99 G90 G00 G91 G01 2055 = 0100, 0000, 0000, FEED 2056 = 0100, 0000, 0000, FEED 2057 = 0003, 0004, 0605, TXX00 ; M01 2058 = 0003, 0004, 0605, TXX00 ; M01 2059 = 5802, 6302, 1101, G98 G84 X G99 G84.1
1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z F ; 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 X Z F ; 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000 0004, ; 0004, ; 0001, Z 0000, 0000 0000, 0000 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000 R F ;
FS15 format 2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 2061 = 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004 G76 X Z I K D F A P ; FS16 format 2060 = 4B02, 0E03, G76 P 2061 = 4B02, 1101, G76 X 2065 = 0103, 0004, TXXXX ; 2100 = 0603, 0004, 0 ; 2101 = 0703, 0004, TXXX ; 2102 = 0100, 0603, FEED 0 2103 = 0205, 0004, M05 ; 2104 = 0705, 0803, M98 P 2110 = 0000, 0000, Not used 2111 = 0000, 0000, Not used 2200 = 0100, 0004, FEED ; 2201 = 0003, 0004, TXX00 ; 2202 = 4402, 1101, G50 X 2203 = 5802, 6002, G98 G98 G99 2204 = 0004, 0000, ;
0E401 0004, R ; 0001, E101, Z R 0000, 0000,
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000 P Q F ; 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0505, M30 0004, ; 0805, M99 0004, ; 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 ; 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0204, 0505, 0004, 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000 /; M30 ; FEED 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 1105, M05 0605, M01 0001, Z 6102, G81 G82 0000, 0004, 1005, ; MXX 0004, 0000, ; AA01, 0004, C ; 1101, 0001, X Z 0000 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000 ; G28 H0 ; 0000 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000 G00 TXXXX ; AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03 C R P F L K
879
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
2205 = 5802, G98 G99 2206 = 0004, ; 2207 = 5802, G98 G99 2208 = 0503, F
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03 G98 G83 X Z C R Q F L G83.1 K 0000, 0000 0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005 Z C R Mxx S M03 M04
6002, 6302, 1101, G98 G84 X G84.1 0B03, 0004, 0000 L ; K 2209 = 0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, G1 G17 W0 M0 G18 G19 2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000 G107 C ; G7.1 2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101, G90 G00 G41 X G91 G01 G42 2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101, G90 G00 G40 X G91 G01 2214 = 6502, 0004, 0000, 0000, G112 ; G12.1 2215 = 6602, 0004, 0000, 0000, G11.3 ; G13.1
0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000 ; G107 C ; G7.1
0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000 Z C F ; 0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 000 Z C F ; 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
880
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
A.4.4
Reference of Function Table
The following example describes where MTF parameter Nos. 2000 to 2999 are referenced by Symbolic FAPT when it prepares NC data. (Example) Outer surface rough machining
In the process of making up the NC data which commands the machinings of (1) to (19), the parameters 2000s are referred to as follows:
Point to be Referred to Parameter No. 2000 2016 (2) Home position Exchange point of tool (3) Tool change point (start of process) 2017 2002 to 2008 or 2035 or 2036 2016 2024 or 2028 Feed, EOR, program No. G50X_ Z_ ; Move to the tool exchange point G00X_ Z_ ; In case of the beginning part of process, or rough machining of outer diameter, 2004 is referred to. Description
(1) Home position (start of program)
G50X_ Z_ S; G00T_ ; Output of spindle speed G97S_M03; Constant surface speed ON G97S_ M03;
881
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point to be Referred to
Parameter No.
Description
The first move from the tool exchange point. Coolant ON (4) Approach 2018 or 2031 2032 2046 or 2047 2048 (5) (11) (13) (15) Linear move (5), (10) Spindle range switch 2017 In case the machining process except for the bar feed process 2018 is referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2031 and 2032 are referred to for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.108 115 of bit 3. In case of bar feed process 2046 is referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2047 and 2048 are referred to for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.107 of bit 3. Rapid traverse, cutting feed (linear) move command. When constant surface speed control is not performed: Spindle range switch No. of spindle revolution output When constant surface speed control is performed Spindle max. speed clamp Spindle range switch Constant surface speed ON
2025 2024 2030 2025 2028
According to MTF 1110 to 1121 setting (12) Circular move 2020 2021 2019 2033 2034 Circular interpolation move command. 2020 is referred to when MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I, K command) and 2021 is referred to when MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (radius R command). Move command to tool exchange point. Coolant OFF. 2019 is referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2033 and 2034 are referred to for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.107 115 of bit 4. The end part of process. In case of outer diameter rough machining, 2011 is referred to. TXX00; M01;
(16) Escape
(17) Tool change point (end of process)
2009 to 2015 or 2040 or 2041 2017 2001
(18) Tool change point Machine datum (19) Home position (end of program)
Move to home position G00 X_ Z_ ; Trailer part Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
882
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Reference of Function Table in Bar Feed Process (Example) In the case of bar feed 1) Pullout system 1
Point referenced (1) Home position (start of program)
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of bar feed process Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on
(2) Home position Tool exchange point (3) Tool exchange point (start of process)
2017 2036 2016
(4) Approach 2046 or 2047 and 2048
Simultaneous 2 axes Simultaneous 1 axis Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
(5) Linear move
2049
Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece G98 G1 Z_ F_ ; or G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
883
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point referenced (6) Dwell (7) Linear move (8) Dwell (9) Linear move
Parameter No. 2050 2051 2052 2053
Descriptions Dwell command on opening chuck Shift command of work feed G1 Z_ F_ ; Dwell command on closing chuck Shift command1 after work feed G1 Z_ F_ ; or G1 X_ F_ ; Shift command2 after work feed G0 Z_ ; Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
(10) Linear move (11) Escape
2054
2019 or 2033 and 2034
(12) Tool exchange point (end of process)
2041
End part of bar feed process TXX00 ; M1 ; Shift to the home position G0 X_ Z_ ; Trailer part Spindle stop and tool offset cancel Program stop and EOR
(13) Tool exchange point Home position (14) Home position (end of program)
2017 2001
884
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
2) Pullout system 2
Point reference (1) Home position (start of program)
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of bar feed process Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2017 2036 2016
(4) Approach 2046 or 2047 and 2048
(5) Linear move
2049
Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece G98 G1 Z_ F_ ; or G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
885
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point reference (6) Dwell (7) Linear move (8) Dwell (9) Linear move
Parameter No. 2050 2051 2052 2053
Descriptions Dwell command on opening chuck Shift command of work feed G1 Z_ F_ ; Dwell command on closing chuck Shift command1 after work feed G1 Z_ F_ ; or G1 X_ F_ ; Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
(10) Escape 2019 or 2033 and 2034
2041
2017 2001
886
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
3) Slide stop system 1
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of bar feed process Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; When constant surface speed control is not performed: G97 S_ M03 ; When constant surface speed control is performed: G96 S M3;
2017 2036 2016
2024 or 2028
It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.
887
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point referenced (4) Approach
Parameter No.
Descriptions First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2046 or 2047 and 2048
(5) Point referenced (6) Linear move (7) Dwell (8) Linear move (9) Escape
2050 2051 2052 2054
Dwell command when opening chuck Shift command to work feed G1 Z_ F_ ; Dwell command when closing chuck Shift command after work feed 2 G0 Z_ ; Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
2019 or 2033 and 2034
2041
2017 2001
888
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
4) Slide stop system 2
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of bar feed process Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; When constant surface speed control is not performed: G97 S_ M3 ; When constant surface speed control is performed: G96 S_ M3; It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.
2017 2036 2016
2024 or 2028
(4) Approach 2046 or 2047 and 2048
First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on Simultaneous 2 axes Simultaneous 1 axis Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
889
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point referenced (5) Dwell (6) Dwell (7) Escape
Descriptions Dwell command when opening chuck Dwell command when closing chuck Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
2019 or 2033 and 2034
2041
2017 2001
Reference of Function Table in Caxis Machining Process (Example) In the case of C axis drilling
890
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of process (NOTE 1) Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; Tool speed command G97 S_ M?? ;
2017 2200 2202
2024 (4) Approach
First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on In the case of servo motor control system 2018 or 2031 and 2032 Simultaneous 3 axes Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter numbers 300 to 304. In the case of spindle positioning system 2031 2032 2211 Simultaneous 2 axes and Simultaneous 1 axis (CAUTION 1) and (CAUTION 2) Spindle identification command (NOTE 2)
CAUTION 1 Set the simultaneous 1 axis or simultaneous 2 axes (XZ C). 2 Never set the function code of AA01 (Caxis shift command).
NOTE 1 If the Caxis machining process has been defines continuously, the second process and thereafter cannot be referenced. 2 Perform the shift command of Caxis.
891
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Point referenced (5) (9) Line or rotation shift
Parameter No.
Descriptions
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = 0 (when no drilling canned cycle is used) In the case of servo motor control system 2017 Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line or rotation) shift commands In the case of spindle positioning system 2017 2211 In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = (the drilling canned cycle is used) In the case of servo motor control system 2203 to 2206 Drilling canned cycle command (line or rotation shift) In the case of spindle positioning system 2203 to 2206 2211 Drilling canned cycle command (Linear move) Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands. Spindle identification comman
Spindle identify command Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
(10) Escape 2019 or 2033 and 2034
Simultaneous 2 axes Simultaneous 1 axis Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the setting of bit 5 of system parameter No.300 to 304.
2201
End part of process TXX00 ; M1 ;
2017 2001
Shift to the home position G0 _ Z ; Trailer part Spindle stop and tool offset cancel Program stop and EOR
892
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(Example) In the case of face milling
Point reference (1) Home position (start of program)
Descriptions Feed, EOR, and program number G50 X_ Z_ ; Movement to the tool exchange point G0 X_ Z_ ; Start part of process (NOTE 1) Coordinate system setting and tool selection G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ; G0 T_ ; Spindle speed command G97 S_ M?? ; First move from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2017 2200 2202
2024 (4) Approach 2018 or 2031 and 2032
Simultaneous 3 axes Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter No.304.
(5), (7), (10), and (12) Linear move
2017
Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands (NOTE 2)
893
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 When the Caxis machining process has been continuously defined, the second process and thereafter are not referenced. 2 The polar coordinate interpolation is started before the point (5) of line shift.
Parameter No. 2020 or 2021
Point referenced (6), (8), (9), and (11) Circular move (13) Escape
Description Circular interpolation shift command (NOTE 3) MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I and J commands) MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (Radius R command) Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
2019 or 2033 and 2034
2201
End part of process TXX00 ; M1 ;
2017 2001
Shift to the home position G0 X_ Z_ ; Trailer part Spindle stop and tool offset cancel Program stop and EOR
NOTE 3 Cancel the polar coordinate interpolation after the point (11) of circular shift
894
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Output of NC data for use in tapping processing 1) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1, an NC format with the G codes for a canned cycle is output.
1060 1 #7 0 #6 0 #5 0 #4 0 #3 x #2 x #1 x #0
1 or 0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF 2059. 2059=5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000 G17 G98 G84 X Z R F ; G18 G99 G84.1 G19 With the above setting the tapping processing NC format output would be G17 G99 G84 Z_ R_ F_ ; 2) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0, an NC format with the G codes for a threading processing is output.
1060 0 #7 0 #6 0 #5 0 #4 0 #3 x #2 x #1 x #0
1 or 0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF 2022 for retapping and MTF 2059 for relief cutting. 2022=5802, 5202, 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004 G98 G90 G32 X Z F ; G99 G91 E 2059=0205, 0004, 0001, 0005, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M05 ; Z M04 ; M03 With the above settings the tapping operation NC format output would be either: (1) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 0 (forward rotation) G97 S_ M03; . . G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle Z_ M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief In contrast, (2) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 1 (reverse rotation) G97 S_ M04; . . G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle Z_ M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
895
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.4.5
Referencing an Optional Function Table
Parameters MTF 2300 to MTF 2399 are listed in the function table specifying special function codes. Special NC data items can be output to any block according to the table. (1) Function table specifying special function codes
Parameter No. 2300 2301 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 Meaning Remarks
Output of special Maximum number of the codes that can function codes be specified: 10 Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above
(2) Function code The following function code is added to reference the optional function table: (a) Referencing the optional function table
3 highorder 1 loworder digits digit (detailed (major classification) classification) 0 0 0 E
Function
Remarks
The function table specified by the 1word hexadecimal number listed in the following table is referenced to output NC data.
896
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
When the loworder digit (major classification) of the function code is E, the subsequent 1word hexadecimal numbers correspond to the parameters in the function table as follows:
No. of parameter in the function table 1word setting High order Low order 2000 00 00 2001 01 00 2002 to 2008 02 00 to 06 2009 to 2015 03 00 to 06 2016 04 00 2017 and 2018 05 00 to 01 2019 05 04 2020 and 2021 06 00 and 01
No. of parameter in the function table 1word setting High order Low order
2022 07 00
2023 08 00
2024 and 2025 09 00 and 01
2026 0A 00
2027 0B 00
2028 to 2030 0C 00 to 02
2031 and 2032 05
2033 and 2034 05
02 and 03 05 and 06
2035 and 2036 0E 00 to 02
2040 and 2041 0F 00 to 02
2045 to 2054 10 00 to 09
2055 and 2056 02
2057 and 2058 03
2059 16 00
2100 to 2104 0D 00 to 04
2200 11 00
07 and 08 07 and 08
2201 12 00
2202 13 00
2203 to 2210 14 00 to 07
2211 15 00
2212 to 2213 05 07 and 08
2300 to 2309 17 00 to 09
897
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
The meanings of the highorders bits of the specified word for referencing the optional function table are as follows. 00: LEADER PART 01: TRAILER PART 02: PROCESS START 03: PROCESS END 04: FROM 05: LINEAR INTERPOLATION 06: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION 07: THREAD CUTTING 08: THREAD CUTTING CYCLE 09: SPINDLE 0A: TURRET 0B: DWELL 0C: CSS CONTROL (spindle control) 0D: SUB PROGRAM (start and end of a subprogram) 0E: SPECIAL PROC. START 0F: SPECIAL PROC. END 10: BAR FEED MOTION 11: CAXIS PROCESS START 12: CAXIS PROCESS END 13: CAXIS PROCESS FROM 14: CAXIS PROCESS FIXED CYCLE 15: SPINDLE OPERATION 16: FIXED CYCLE FOR LATHE 17: OPTIONAL BLOCK OUTPUT Newly added (3) Setting example Example 1) G65P1000L1; M1; Assume that the above NC data for a miscellaneous machining call and optional stop is output to the next block after block number 0. Specify the following for the MTF function table:
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED % ; 0 : MTF2300 MTF 2300= 472F, 0041, 504F, 03E8, 4C1F, 0001, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000 G 65 P 1000 L 1 ; M1 ;
The following special NC data be output: %; O G65P1000L1; M1;
898
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Example 2 When the following is specified, another function table can be referenced from the referenced function table.
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000 FEED % ; 0 : MTF2300 MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,0000 M01 ; MTF2301 MTF 2301= 000A, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 T0000 ;
(4) Notes NOTE Do not have a table reference itself. Also, do not reference the referencing table again from the referenced table. If a table is referenced in this way, the output of the same function table continues until memory is full, then the following message is output and processing stops. WARNING! CHECK INPUT DATA When this message is displayed, check and correct the function table and output the NC data again. Example 1) Setting in which a table references itself
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M01 ; MTF2300 The table references itself.
Example 2) Setting in which a referencing table is referenced again from the referenced table
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M01 ; MTF2301 MTF 2301= 0028, 0004, 000E, 1702, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M02 ; MTF2302 MTF 2302= 0038, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 M03 ; MTF2300 The referencing table is referenced again from the referenced table.
899
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.5
ERROR MESSAGES A.5.1
Errors Common to All Screens
Message CAN NOT FUNCTION USE Meaning THIS A certain function can not be used because of incorrect using condition. An error is included in any one of input data. The data indicated by the cursor includes an error. Input correct data. Input data is wrong. Necessary data is not entered. Input correct data for each question. Input correct data for each question. Set necessary data. Reexamine the program. Remedy
DATA IS NOT CORRECT KEY IN AGAIN KEY IN DATA
LACK OF NECESSARY DATA Necessary data is not set. SYSTEM PROGRAM ERROR Program fails due to any reason. THIS IS A NULL AND VOID Invalid soft key is pressed. KEY NOW. (Example) ELEMENT DELETE soft key is pressed to delete the start point element during setting of multiple face milling figure. (The start point element can not be deleted according to the specification.)
WARNING! CHECK INPUT 1) Incremental command is continued for 1) Specify an absolute value halfway not to DATA over 50 elements at defining a part figure. continue an incremental value for over 50 elements. 2) Program fails due to any reason. 2) Reexamine the program.
900
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
A.5.2
Errors at Defining Figures (Menu 2)
Message Meaning Remedy
END POINT OR GROOVE At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point or the groove direction. DIRECTION IS NOT an error exists at the end point or in the CORRECT! groove direction and the figure can be correctly defined. END POINT OR NECK At the entry of neck corner, an error exists Check the end point value or neck width. WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT! and in the end point value specification or the neck width and the figure can not be correctly defined. END POINT, QUANTITY CORRECT! PITCH OR At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point, pitch or quantity IS NOT any one of the end point, pitch or quantity is incorrect.
GROOVE WIDTH OR PITCH At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Increase the pitch value to larger than the IS NOT CORRECT! the pitch value is smaller than the groove groove width. width. KEY IN REPEAT NO. Figure elements are tried to copy without Input the repetition number. entering the repetition number.
LAST ELEMENT IS NOT At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, ARROW! the last element is not the arrowed element. LAST END UNDEFINED! POINT IS Pattern figure is tried to enter before the end Set the end point of the last element. point value of the last element is defined.
THE LAST FIGURE At setting multiple face milling figures, the Define the end point value of the last figure, ELEMENT HAS NO END end point value of the last figure is not then input the next figure data. POINT. defined. TOO MANY SYMBOL ELEMENT 1) At the entry of part figure, the number of Decrese the number of elements. external elements exceeds the limited number. 2) At the entry of part figure, the number of internal elements exceeds the limited number.
901
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.5.3
Errors at Machining Definition (Menu 4) and NC Data Preparation (Menu 5)
Message ERROR!! I CANT RUN ANY FURTHER. CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL OR CUTTING AREA. ERROR!! NOT EDIT Meaning Remedy
Normal machining fails because of incorrect Reexamine the machining definition. definition of cutting area, tool to be used, etc. (Refer to CHAPTER VII, 2.11 Error when NC data is prepared.) Machining process is not edited on TTF process edit screen.
FINISH ALLOWANCE IS NOT Zero or a negative value is ontered as a Input a positive value. CORRECT. finishing allowance in face milling. INPUT A POSITIVE DATA. REGISTER ERROR PROGRAM NC data cannot be stored in the NC machining memory because of any one of the following reasons. 1) The program No. is already stored in the NC machining memory. 2) The NC machining memory capacity is insufficient. 3) Key signal does not go up. (Protected) 4) Background edit function is used by the system other than FAPT.
1) Delete the program No. (NC data) stored in the machining memory, or change the program No. 2) Delete unnecessary programs to make a space. 3) Go up the key signal. 4) Stop the other systems use of background edit function, or wait until that system ends using the background edit function.
A.5.4
Errors at Animation Drawing (Menu 6)
Message Meaning Remedy
INTERFERENCE ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data. (HD1 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function, interference occurs between the turret 1 and the chuck or tail stock. INTERFERENCE ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data. (HD2 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function in FS15TTF, interference occurs between the turret 1 and the chuck or tail stock. INTERFERENCE (HD1 & HD2) ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data, or modify the NC animation drawing function in FS15TTF, data, by using the automatic collision interference occurs between the tools of the preventive function (option). turrets 1 and 2.
902
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
A.5.5
Errors at Accessing the Submemory
Message FILE MEMBER OVERFLOW FILE OVERFLOW Meaning Remedy files, then store
Files are tried to store exceeding the Delete unnecessary submemory capacity. necessary files.
1) The submemory is used over 100%. 1) Delete the files stored in the submemory, then store necessary files. 2) One program becomes too large to store in the main memory file area. 2) Delete the figure elements and machining processes to make the program small. Contact the machine tool builder.
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to delete. THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWARD PLEASE. IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to replace. THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWARD PLEASE. NOT FOUND FILE SAME FILE REGISTERED Specified file is not found in calling the file name from the submemory.
Contact the machine tool builder.
ALREADY The file name tried to store in the Change the file name, or delete the same submemory has already been stored. name file. NOT Submemory is disturbed. Initialize the submemory.
SUB MEMORY INITIALIZED
903
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
A.5.6
Others
Message COLLATING ERROR (M: MEMORY I: INPUT) ILLEGAL FORMAT DETECTED I/O NOT READY Meaning The data read from an external unit is collated with the data on the main memory, but not matched. Remedy
DATA The data input from an external unit is different from the specified format. Input/output unit is not prepared. The following reasons are considerable. 1) The unit is not powered. 2) Baud rate is incorrect. 3) In the case of reading from a cassette tape, a reading file is not recorded on the tape. Data is tried to enter a locked parameter. When the tool information contents are Check the tool ID No. copied, the tool ID No. specified as a copy source is not found.
LOCKED PARAMETER NOT FOUND ID. NO.
THIS TOOL HAS ALREADY At tooling one by one on the tooling data REGISTERED screen, the tool ID No. already tooled is specified. TV ERROR INCLUDING TV error is included in the read tape.
904
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
The following tables list the functions and parameters not supported by the models/series.
Model FANUC Series 16TA CAP II 5700 FANUC Series 16TTA CAP II Series
(1) Unsupported functions

Heading Unsupported function
III 3.2.2 Part figure input (Input method with Trapezoidal groove definition figure) III 3.2.6 Batch input functions for chamfering Corner R batch input and corner R III 3.2.7 Pattern figure input function Corner necking (*1)
III 3.2.8 Function for defining the center of an All functions arc according to a given single coordinate III 3.4 III 5.1 IV 2.5 Machining Definition Balance Cutting Process File Data Input/Output Function All functions (*2) Tool specification method (*3) All functions
VII 1.13 Outputting NC data in the FS 15/16 All functions Format VIII 1.4 Milling in Multiple Planes All functions
VIII 1.5 CAxis Machining with a Machining All functions Plane Specified VIII 2. X MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) All functions (*2) AUTOMATIC PROCESS All functions (*4) DETERMINATION FUNCTION
*1 The automatic thread depth specification function for corner type 3 cut by necking (necking for threads) is not supported. *2 Menu 4 (machining definition) has a different definition screen layout. See Appendix B.1 for details. *3 Balance cutting uses different tool specification methods. See Appendix B.1 for details. *4 Details of the automatic process determination function vary. See Appendix B.2 for details.
905
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(2) Setting data The setting data has been changed because the automatic process determination function has been improved. See Appendix B.2 for details. (3) System parameters It is impossible to use the parameters that cannot be specified under Data setting and the parameters listed below, although they are described in the manual.
Parameter No. 0671 0703 Data type Integer Description Machining area (CAF) drawing color For the automatic process determination function, use of a drill bit with the same diameter as the bore is 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled On the machining definition screen, a blank figure (BWP) is 0 : Not filled in 1 : Filled in On the machining definition screen, a machining area (CAF) is 0 : Not filled in 1 : Filled in When another module requests the right to use graphics exclusively during simulated machining, the right is 0 : Not relinquished 1 : Relinquished The material and tooling information input/output format is 0 : Binary 1 : ISO/EIA
0, 1 Bit 7 designation (8 bits)
0704
0, 1 Bit 6 designation (8 bits) Bit 7
0705
0708
(4) It is impossible to use the MTFs that cannot be specified under Data setting, the MTFs described in VII 1.13, and the MTFs listed below, although they are described in the manual. Parameter numbers 2000 to 2999
Parameter No. 2209 2210 2214 2215 Description Beginning of cylindrical interpolation End of cylindrical interpolation Polar coordinate interpolation start block Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
Function code
Function code 6 4 0 2 Function G7.1 is output. Remark G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
906
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B.1
MACHINING DEFINITION FOR 5700 SERIES B.1.1
Machining Definition of Turning
Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.
907
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.1.1
Selection of kinds of machining
soft key 4 in the menu screen.
Fig. B.1.1.1 (a)
The major types of machining required for machining are displayed on the soft keys below the screen as shown above. Press CENTER HOLE: the soft key display changes to the menu for center hole drilling. (See Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)). Press TURN: the soft key display changes to the menu for turning. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (c). Press GROOV THREAD: the soft key display changes to the menu for grooving and thread cutting. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (d). Press CAXIS: the soft key display changes to the menu for Caxis machining. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (e). at the leftmost end under the conditions shown in Fig. Press key B.1.1.1 (b) to (e) above, and the soft key display shown in Fig. B.1.1.1 (a) above is selected. at the rightmost end: the soft key display changes in the Press key following sequence: (b)(c)(d)(e)(b) ....
Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)
[CENTER DRILL] . . . [DRILLING] . . . . . . . . [REAMER] . . . . . . . . . [TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
Press this key for center drilling Press this key for drilling Select to perform reaming Select to perform tapping Press this key for sub cycle
908
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c)
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . [SFIN O.D.] . . . . . [FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . [ROUGH I.D.] . . . . [SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . [FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . [BAR FEED] . . . . . [SUB CYCLE] . . . .
Press this key for roughing of outer figure Press this key for semifinishing of outer figure Press this key for finishing of outer figure Press this key for roughing of inner figure Press this key for semifinishing of inner figure Press this key for finishing of inner figure Press this key to perform bar feed machining. Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. B.1.1.1 (d)
[GROOVE NECK] . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving or rough grooving and finishing are carried out by a single tool) or necking. [ROUGH GROOVE] . . Press this key for rough grooving [FIN GROOVE] . . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing [CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key is not displayed.) [THREADING] . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting [SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. B.1.1.1 (e)
[CAXIS C.DRIL] . . . . Press this key for Caxis center drilling [CAXIS DRILL] . . . . Press this key for Caxis drilling [CAXIS TAP.] . . . . . . Press this key for Caxis tapping [CAXIS GROOV.] . . . Press this key for Caxis grooving [CAXIS F.MILL] . . . . Press this key for face milling [SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub sycle [CAXIS S.MILL] . . . . Press this key for cylindrical grooving For example, press Rough O.D. when the soft key in Fig. B.1.1.1 (c) is displayed; Roughing of outer figure will have been selected in process No.1.
909
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.1.2
Process change and correction
Fig. B.1.1.2 (a)
When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining definition, the screen shown above will appear. [NEW] . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when reinstructing the process from the start after all processes are cancelled. [CORRECTION] . . Press this key to modify or change part of the process. When CORRECTION is depressed, following screen appears.
Fig. B.1.1.2 (b)
Each time Cursor or Cursor is depressed when the above screen appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table moves up and down. Press Cursor or Cursor to select an arbitrary Process No., and correct the machining contents. Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced. (Sample Insertion) PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 04:
910
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(1) Press Cursor or Cursor to select the Process No. to be inserted. (For example, select process 03). (2) Select the machining contents to be inserted (for example, press TURN and press ROUGH I.D.). The results are as follows. PROC 01: DRILLING PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE (INSERTION) PROC 04: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE PROC 05: (Sample Deletion) (1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the process No. to be deleted. (2) Press PROC DELETE. (Replacement) (1) Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one, or (2) Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
B.1.1.3
Output of only single process
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output. Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig. B.1.1.2 (a) appears: the screen as shown in Fig. B.1.1.2 (b) will appear. Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor * or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE.
B.1.1.4
Tool data
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen changes and the tool information required for working definition is prompted.
Tool data is displayed on the lefthand side of the screen and the tool picture is displayed on the righthand side of it. (The tool picture is displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available. To display the tool picture, press the soft key CHECK.)
911
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
The following prompts are displayed. Turret No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool selection number . . . . . . Tool offset number . . . . . . . . . Tool management number . . . TL = (NOTE 1) TN = (NOTE 2) TM = ID = (NOTE 3)
NOTE 1 The turret No. prompt is displayed if there are more than 1 tool resets. The number of tool rests is to be set in No.MTF 1050. 2 Input an integer consisting of up to two digits as TN and TM. 3 The tool management number (ID) to be input must have been registered in the tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool management number (ID) not registered in the tool data is input, a message No tool management number is found. is displayed. if DEL, INPUT is keyed in, the registered tool management number is deleted from the tooling information.
When using a tool already registered in the tooling information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input. At new registration, the tool configuration data and setting data registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool management number (ID) is input. (1) Turning Tools Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable) (Center drill) Tool type Tool tip angle Drill diameter (Drill) Tool type Tool tip angle Drill diameter (Reamer) Tool type Tool diameter Cutter length Biting length (Tap) Tool type Tool diameter Cutter length Biting length Pitch
912
TP; center drill AN; DD;
TP; drill AN; DD;
TP; reamer DT; LT; LE;
TP; tap DT; LT; LE; PT;
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(Groove/Neck/Cut off) Tool type Tool tip radius Cutter angle Tool tip angle Tool tip width Virtual tool tip position (Thread) Tool type Cutter angle Tool tip angle Virtual tool tip position (General) Tool type Tool tip radius Cutter angle Tool tip angle Cutter protective angle Virtual tool tip position (Finger) Tool type Virtual tool tip position
TP; grooving/necking RN; AC; AN; WN; XN; ZN; TP; thread AC; AN; XN; ZN; TP; general RN; AC; AN; AP; XN; ZN; TP; finger XN;
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable) Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (NOTE 1) Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS = ZS = Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD = (0 = CW, 1 = CCW) (NOTE 2) Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE 3) NOTE 1 The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill, finger tool. 2 The spindle rotating direction prompt is displayed when system parameter No.702 bit 1 = 1. 3 The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available. Set the animationdrawing tool holder number.
913
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(2) CAxis Tools Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable) (Center drill) Tool type Tool material Tool diameter Cutting diameter Cutter length Tool tip angle (Drill) Tool type Tool material Tool diameter Cutter length Tool tip angle (Tap) Tool type Tool material Tool diameter Cutter length Biting length Pitch (End mill) Tool type Tool material Tool diameter Cutting diameter Cutter length Number of tools TP; Caxis center drill MT; DT; DS; LT; AT; TP; Caxis drill MT; DT; LT; AT; TP; Caxis tap MT; DT; LT; LE; PT; TP; Caxis end mill MT; DT; DS; LT; NT;
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable) Setting direction . . . . . . CP = (0: side working; 1: end working) Setting position . . . . . . . XS = ZS = Rotation direction . . . . . TR = (0: clockwise; 1: counterclockwise) Holder number . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE) NOTE The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available.
When creating an NC data, interference is checked or offset is calculated according to the tool configuration. Note that a correct NC data is not output unless tool data is input accurately. If tooling information has already been created, the other data is automatically displayed when the tool management number (TN) is input. If there are no changes, press NEXT PAGE to proceed to the next screen.
914
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
To add or change data, move the cursor with CURSOR X, CURSOR Y and input the data. For tool configuration data, just the tool data of the set tool management number (ID) is displayed, so it is impossible to change data directly. When proceeding to the next screen by pressing NEXT PAGE, the set data is registered as tooling information. Also if a tool management number having a tool type not compatible with the current process has been input, a message This tool does not fit the current process. is displayed. Meaning of Soft Keys ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . Return to the menu screen. PAGE BACK . . . . . . . Return to the last screen (working process list screen). CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional animation drawing function is available. The tool picture is displayed according to the currently displayed data. If this key is pressed after changing tooling information, the tool picture is displayed anew according to the changed data. TOOL DATA . . . . . . . A tool data list is displayed. TOLING INFOR. . . . A tooling information list is displayed. NEXT ID . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional automatic process decision function is available. Select the tool of the next ID number in which the working process type (KP) is set. NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . Proceed to the next page. In the 2tool rest type, the tool configuration picture is inverted if the turret number is changed. Also the following screen is displayed in the balance cut process.
In the diagram, the upper picture is the tool for cutter No.1 and the lower picture is the tool for cutter No.2. (Cautions about Tool Picture) 1. The chip only is displayed if the holder has not been defined for the tool. 2. It is impossible to change the chip or holder scale value.
915
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.1.5
Machining start position
When all tool data are input, the system asks you the machining start position as follows. MACHINING START POSITION XAXIS . . . . . . DXO = ZAXIS . . . . . . . ZO = NOTE By the establishment of system parameter (No.0009), the questions on the machining start position can be skipped.
B.1.1.6
Passing point
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after completion of the machining.
Fig. B.1.1.6 (a)
PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH: 1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XA1 = ZA1 = 2ND POINT . . . . . . . . XA2 = ZA2 = Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from the machining start position at the time of machining start. PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE: 1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XE1 = ZE1 = 2ND POINT . . . . . . . . XE2 = ZE2 = Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to the next machining start position upon completion of machining. When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move. For example, in the absence of input on Zaxis coordinate value after inputting some data to Xaxis coordinate value, the tool moves to the specified position only for Xaxis, and Zaxis does not move.
916
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Fig. B.1.1.6 (b) Designation of passing point
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start position using system parameter Nos.107 to 115 bits 3, 4. NOTE The conversation screen of the established passing point can be skipped by each type of machining. (By setting system parameter No.107 to 115)
917
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.1.7
Cutting direction
When the OD cutting or ID machining process is specified, you are requested to enter the cutting direction. Specify the direction to the question regarding the cutting direction CD =. At this time, it can be entered not only from the ten key pad but also from the Software key.
Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD = Negative direction of X axis Positive direction of X axis Negative direction of Z axis Positive direction of Z axis
When the X axis negative direction is selected in OD cutting, the cutting conditions for facing are automatically set. Also, the facing part is automatically selected for the machining area. When the direction other than the X axis negative direction is selected, cutting conditions for OD machining are set. In the case of ID machining, cutting conditions for ID cutting are set whatever direction nay be selected.
918
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B.1.1.8
Cutting conditions
The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while monitoring the CRT screen. If you want to change the feedrate to 75% of the displayed value, for example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75 as follows. (Examples) F1 = 3 * 0 . 7 5
INPUT
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are described below according to machining data. (1) Center drilling conditions CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm) SPINDLE SPEED . . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
(2) Drilling conditions Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to the movement of a drill. CUTTING CONDITIONS 1 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 0) SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
919
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
CUTTING CONDITIONS 2 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z =
Clearance (mm or inch) Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 0) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch) SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CUTTING CONDITIONS 3 CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling clearance CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 1) or DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) (When bit 7 of system parameter 702 is 0) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch) SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
920
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CAUTION D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method 3 As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as positive values.
Associated parameter
#7 702 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut 0 : Specifies with an incremental value 1 : Specifies with an absolute value
921
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(3) Reaming CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C =
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = SPINDLE SPEED . . . . . N = FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F =
Amount of clearance (mm or inches) (Default value is system parameter 181 [same as drilling]) Cutting endpoint coordinate (CAUTION 1) Spindle speed (rpm) Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0 or undefined F2 = F1(value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance (mm or inches) (Default value is system parameter 195) CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate (CAUTION 1)
922
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
CAUTION 1 A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be negative. Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis is always positive on the Machining definition screen of menu No.4. Specifications of the machining start points and intermediate points are all made in accordance with this system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing conditions of inner figure (6) Roughing conditions of inner figure CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis (mm or inch) TZ = Finish allowance in Zaxis (mm or inch) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch) RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return Amount quantity (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) F3 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) 1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside diameter roughing. Refer to the item (11).
923
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(7) Semifinishing conditions of outer figure (8) Semifinishing conditions of inner figure CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis (mm or inch) TZ = Finish allowance in Zaxis (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (CAUTION 2)
(9) Finishing conditions of outer figure (10) Finishing conditions of inner figure CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis (mm or inch) CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min) for (mm/rev or FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev or F2 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev or F3 = Feedrate inch/rev) for (mm/rev F4 = Feedrate or inch/rev) MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (CAUTION 2)
924
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(11) Grooving/necking machining conditions PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Yes/No of pecking 1 machining (Yes = 1, No = 0) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Cutting amount per cutting on pecking 1 machining (mm or inch) Return escape amount per cutting on pecking 1 machining (mm or inch) Clearance amount (mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U =
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C =
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finish amount in width direction (mm or inch) TB = Finish amount in depth direction (mm or inch) CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting feed rate (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Rough machining feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev) F2 = Finish machining feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev) MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm) (CAUTION 2)
Pecking machining operation The pecking operation on grooving rough machining is as follows:
925
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
NOTE There are no questions, TW, TB, or F2 in the case of necking. There are no questions on pecking 1 machining in grooving finish machining and necking machining. (12) Threading conditions CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = CS = CE = DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = DL = CUTTING SPEED . . . . V =
Clearance quantity (mm or inch) Clearance quantity (mm or inch Clearance quantity (mm or inch) Depth of cut (mm or inch) Final depth of cut (mm or inch) Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
CAUTION 2 Whether the inquiry of MAXIMUM RPM is made or not depends on the status of bit 0 of system parameter No.702. 0 : The inquiry is not made. (The maximum spindle speed depends on the value set in parameter No.128.) 1 : The maximum spindle speed is set every process. Setting of system parameter No.128 is neglected. However, the system does not ask this maximum spindle speed if the process is set in such a way as the constant surface speed function is not used in system parameters No.107 115. A value of system parameter No.128 is output in these processes. Also, the question of the maximum spindle speed is omitted when cutting another position by using the same tool. (13) 1st override for outside diameter roughing For outside diameter roughing, override can be applied to the 1st depth of cut and feed rate. In the machining definition of outside diameter roughing, the system asks the override value on the cutting condition screen. Answer this question, key in the override value. It is possible to omit the question on the override value on the cutting condition screen by advance setting to skip the override value and question on the override value in the system parameter.
926
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(a) Parameter (i) System parameter No.104 (Initial value = 0)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Bit 1 Designation of 1st override value question skipping for 1st override value for outside diameter roughing depth of cut 0 : Skip 1 : No skip (ii)System parameter No.711 (Initial value = 100) Set the 1st override for outside diameter roughing depth of cut. Not defined: 100% n: n% CAUTION However, the override setting is up to 10 to 100%. When other values than this range are set, the override value is 100%. (b) Explanation of operation (i) When skipping the question on the override value: Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 0 and the override value to No.711. In this setting, the system does not ask the override value on the cutting condition screen for the outside diameter roughing definition but with the system parameter No.711 value as the override value, the 1st override processing for outside diameter roughing is carried out automatically. (ii)When no skipping the question on the override value: Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 1: the system asks the following on the cutting condition screen for the outside diameter roughing definition. 1st override ... % = NOTE For New, the system parameter No.711 value is set as the initial value. For Modifications, the value set so far is displayed. Answer this question, key in the override value. When the value on the display is acceptable, key in INPUT only. NOTE Even when the 1st override value for outside diameter roughing depth of cut is changed, the system parameter No.711 value remains unchanged.
927
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.1.9
Cutting area definitions
The cursors (J) are displayed along the parts figure to specify the cutting area.
A blank figure (dotted line) and machining figure (solid line) will be drawn on the CRT screen, the system asks you the dividing directions. (1) Machining area Designate the cutting area of parts figure from the start point to end point by flickering cursors on the CRT screen. One cursor shows the start point, while the other shows the end point of the cutting area. shift the cursor along the parts figure for selecting the start point and end point.
(2) Movement of cursor Depress

CURSOR FORWRD
or
CURSOR BACK
key.
The cursor shifts along the parts figure, each time the above key is pressed. (3) Division After designating the start point and end point, input the dividing direction of the blank to define the cutting point. Depress arrow key when the system asks you the following questions. DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DS = Dividing direction at start point DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DE = Dividing direction at end point
928
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(4) Example of division Assume a line is drawn in the arrow direction from the flickering cursor when each arrow key is depressed. The portion bounded by the lines in these arrow directions, blank figure, and parts figure are machined. A residual blank figure, which may be kept unmachined after the cutting area has been lathed out, will be displayed, on the CRT screen. Since Symbolic FAPT can display drawings of these residual blank figures one by one, you can check the remaining cutting quantity very easily. It is possible that a part of blank cannot be machined by any means because of tool figures. In such a case, the system automatically checks the relation between tool figure and parts figure, and displays such an unmachined pocket on the CRT screen. Accordingly, you can machine the pocket by using another tool.
929
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(5) Designation of cutting of residual pocket
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket only by using a reversible tool.
It should be carefully noted that if a reversed tool is not properly positioned or if tool figure data is not appropriate, the pocket area cannot always be input. After the cutting area has been designated, the designated cutting area is lathed out from the blank figure by the tool. The, the system asks you to check if another portion is to be cut by the same tool or not. CUTTING ANOTHER AREA BY SAME TOOL? . . . CN = (1: YES 0: NO)
930
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Answer this question by one of the following operations. . . . In case of YES. INPUT 1 (Another position is cut by the same tool) . . . In case of NO. INPUT 0 (Not cut by the same tool) After answering all questions, the CRT screen returns to the process list which asks you the kind of machining. If you want to prepare NC data after defining the kind of machining, depress [NEXT PAGE] key in response to the system question about the kind of machining. [NEXT PAGE]
B.1.2
Cut off Machining, Bar Feed B.1.2.1
Cut off machining Setting of tool data
When the system parameter No.140 is defined as Definition for cut off machining, on the screen which defines the type of machining, by displaying as cut off, the cut off machining can be selected.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (a)
Input the tool data. Use the grooving tool. CAUTION When defining cut off machining tool, set the data so that the cutting direction is in the minus X axis direction.
931
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Definition of cutting conditions
Fig. B.1.2.1 (b)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = . (mm or inch) Specify the clearance in X axis direction from the blank figure. FINISH ALLOWANCE: . . . . . . . TZ = . (mm or inch) Specify the finish allowance at the parts side during cuttingoff operation. CUT OFF POS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO = . (mm or inch) Specify the cutoff position with the work inner diameter or the distance from the work center. COND.RESET POS: . . . . . . . . . . CR = . (mm or inch) Specify the position for changing the machining conditions with the distance from the cutoff position. RETURN AMOUNT: . . . . . . . . . RA = . (mm or inch) Specify the pullout amount of a tool in X axis direction from the machining condition change position. CUTTING SPEED: . . . . . . . . . . . V1 = . (m/min or feet/min) V2 = . (m/min or feet/min) FEED RATE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev) V2 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev)
932
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Designate the cutting speed for a b and b c in Fig. B.1.2.1 (c) below with V1, the feed rate with F1, c d cutting speed with V2 and the feedrate with F2.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (c)
The value of CO, CR, RA is designated in system parameter as Number 141, 142 and 143 respectively.
Definition of cutting start position
Fig. B.1.2.1 (d)
933
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
STARTING POINT OF CUTTING OFF: SP Designate the cuttingoff start position, using the cursor on the screen. The cursor moves every time soft keys CURSOR and CURSOR are depressed. The cursor moves forward or backward along the parts figure. If the cutting start position is designated, using the cursor, press INPUT key or soft key NEXT PAGE, and define its point as the cutting start position. The cursor just after this screen is displayed is blinking where Xcoordinate value on the figure element at the leftmost side of part figure is maximum. The tool path for cutting off when the cutting start position is designated at this point is illustrated below. (Fig. B.1.2.1 (e))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (e)
Further, the cutting path when one previous element figure is designated as the cutting start position with the cursor moved is illustrated below. (Fig. B.1.2.1 (f))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (f)
934
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Designate the chamfering of outer diameter at the cutoff (blank) side, using system parameter No.144. When the blank side chamfering is designated, the blank side chamfer is inserted after cuttingoff. (Fig. B.1.2.1 (g))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (g)
B.1.2.2
Bar feed
(1) On the KINDS OF MACHINING screen, press TURN to display the software keys for defining the bar feed process.
(2) The bar feed amount is the distance between the work edge left after cuttingoff and the work edge defined by the blank figure. This amount is automatically calculated by the system.
Work end face after cutting off

Fig. B.1.2.2 (a)
935
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
Tool data setting
Fig. B.1.2.2 (b)
VIRTUAL TOOL POS: . . . . . . . . . . XN = SETTING POSITION: . . . . . . . . . . . XS = ZS = Input the virtual tool position and the setting position. For the virtual tool position setting, refer to the following figures.
Fig. B.1.2.2 (c)
Fig. B.1.2.2 (d)
Fig. B.1.2.2 (e)
Setting of cutting conditions
The cutting condition screen initially asks you to input the type of machining. Type . . . . . . . BT = Type 1: Pullout method 1 Type 2: Pullout method 2 Type 3: Slidestop method 1 Type 4: Slidestop method 2 Changing the type value alters the contents of the prompt accordingly.
936
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(1) Pullout method 1 Clearance . . . . . CAZ=approach clearance (mm) Grip position . . . WG =work grip position (mm) Recess amount . CEZ= tool recess amount (mm) Feed rate . . . . . . F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min) F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning) (mm/min) F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
(2) Pullout method 2 Clearance . . . . . CAX=approach clearance (mm) Grip position . . . WG =work grip position (mm) Feed rate . . . . . . F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min) F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning) (mm/min) F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
937
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(3) Slidestop method 1 Clearance . . . . . CAZ=approach clearance (mm) Recess amount . CEZ= tool recess amount (mm) Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm) Feed rate . . . . . . F2 = feed rate (for feeding) (mm/min)
(4) Slidestop method 2 Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm)
938
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B.1.3
Machining Definition of Caxis Machining B.1.3.1
Specification of Caxis machining definition
In menu 4 Machining Definition, press soft key CAXIS MACHINING. 1) Kind of Caxis machining specification When CAXIS MACHINING button is pressed, the soft key for selecting the kind of Caxis machining is displayed. NOTE For the spindle positioning method (MTF1306 = 1), the FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software keys are not displayed.
2) Tool data for Caxis machining After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be used is displayed.
Tool data and the tool picture are displayed respectively on the left and right of the screen. (The tool picture is displayed if the optional animation drawing function is available. To display the tool picture, press the soft key CHECK.) The following prompts will be displayed. TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = (NOTE 1) TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . TN = TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . ID = (NOTE 2)
939
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than 1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in No.MTF1050. 2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been registered in tool data. If a tool ID number (ID) not registered in tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number having a tool type not compatible with the present process is input, a message The tool type of this ID is not compatible with the present process. is displayed. The registered tool ID number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as DEL INPUT. When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input. In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID number (ID) is input. (Center Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER CUT WIDTH CUT LENGTH NOSE ANGLE (Drill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER CUT LENGTH NOSE ANGLE (Tap) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER CUT LENGTH PECK LENGTH PITCH (End mill) TOOL TYPE TOOL MATERIAL TOOL DIAMETER CUT WIDTH CUT LENGTH CUT COUNT
940
TP; Caxis center drill MT; DT; DS; LT; AT; TP; Caxis drill MT; DT; LT; AT; TP; Caxis Tap MT; DT; LT; LE; PT; TP; Caxis End mill MT; DT; DS; LT; NT;
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Prompts on data of setting (Settable/Alterable) SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining, 1: End machining) SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = ZS = ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards) HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE) NOTE The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional animation drawing function is available. 3) Machining start position When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start position. MACHINING START POSITION X coordinate values . . . . . . DXO = Z coordinate values . . . . . . ZO = 4) Cutting conditions for Caxis machining The cutting conditions required for a particular type of machining are requested according to the type of machining selected. (a) Center sink conditions RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution (mm/rev) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Infeed amount (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) (b) Drilling conditions (Machining method 1) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N Tool speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution (mm/rev) DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =1 with dwell at hole bottom, 0 without dwell CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C2 = Clearance quantity 2 (mm) (c) Drilling conditions (Machining method 2) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution (mm/rev) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C2 = Clearance quantity 2 (mm) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Infeed amount (mm) RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Return amount (mm)
941
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(d) Drilling conditions (Machining method 3) RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution (mm/rev) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C2 = Clearance quantity 2 (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C3 = Clearance quantity 3 (mm) DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Infeed amount (mm) (e) Tapping conditions RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C2 = Clearance quantity 2 (mm) (f) Grooving, milling and cylindrical groove conditions RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm) FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool diameter revolution (mm/rev) FEED RATA . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution (mm/rev) CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm) (g) Face milling conditions (1) Screen and questions i) There are no particular changes to Part figure definition on menu 2. Use a symbolic key to define the part figure shape in the same way as before. If CP = 2 (on the line) is given in response to Cut on which side (relative to the direction of the element)? (CP), then the same machining will result, regardless of whether roughing or finishing is selected. (Machining on the line.) ii) If Face milling is selected at Machining definition on menu 4, (1) Machining type TP and (2) Finishing allowance TS are added to the question about cutting conditions. (2) Cutting conditions i) Machining type Select the required machining type in response to TP = (1: ROUGH 2: FINISH 3: ROUGH FINISH) on the cutting conditions screen. TP = 1: Roughing only TP = 2: Finishing only TP = 3: Roughing, then Finishing If 1 or 3 is keyed in for TP, a further question will appear to ask for the finishing allowance (TS). ii) Finishing allowance In response to TS = enter a number representing the allowance for finishing that the roughing process needs to leave. This must always be a positive number. The following error message is displayed if a negative number is input. INCORRECT FINISHING ALLOWANCE. ENTER A POSITIVE NUMBER
942
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
The default value for finishing allowance TS is set by system parameter 368.
Finishing allowance for Caxis face milling
Default: 0.5 mm or 0.02 inch (3) Machining method i) Roughing (TP=1) The machining position is offset from the defined component shape by an amount equivalent to the finishing allowance.
TS Defined component shape TS Part removed by roughing Tool position for roughing TS TS
TS
ii) Finishing (TP = 2) Machining proceeds as before. iii)Roughing then finishing (TP = 3) After roughing, the machine returns in the X axis before starting finishing. 5) Specification of cutting position for Caxis machining The cutting position is specified next after completing the specifications on the cutting condition screen. POS = (1: Yes, 0: No) Use the cursor to specify the shape to be cut. The cursor flashes to indicate shapes which can be cut. Press CURSOR or CURSOR , or key in 0 to move the cursor. When the cursor indicates the shape that you wish to cut, press NEXT PAGE or key in 1 to specify this shape. When the shape has been specified, you will be asked whether the same tool is to be used for cuts at other positions. Use this tool to cut at another position tool . . . . . CN = (1: Yes, 0: No) If you key in 1 in response, the cutting conditions screen reappears. If you key in 0 in response, you return to the screen for selecting the type of machining.
943
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.1.3.2
Explanatory drawing of cutting conditions
1) Center drilling
Dotted line: Solid line:
2) Drilling a) Machining method 1
b) Machining method 2
944
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
c) Machining method 3
3) Diagram showing conditions for Caxis tap machining a) Blind hole
b) Through hole
945
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
4) Grooving a) Side (Zaxis direction)
b) Side (Caxis direction)
c) End face
946
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B.1.3.3
Blind hole and through hole
(1) The blind hole and through hole settings The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole machining is restricted to through holes. (2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below for different hole machining processes. Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
(2) Drilling
(1) Center sink machining
(3) Blind hole tapping
(4) Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2 before the depth of the hole.
947
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.2
AUTOMATIC PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR 5700 SERIES B.2.1
Outline
The automatic process specification is a function in which NC data are prepared just by inputting the blank figure and parts figure. The function was named so because the specification of machining process in menu number 4, Machining definition, or cutting direction or cutting area are decided automatically in the given order. With this function, inputs in menu number 4 are decreased greatly. Processing with this function are done based on tooling information or setting data, so these data must be set in advance. Processes prepared with this function can, of course, be checked or corrected by manual operation. The Caxis machining process is also automatically processed, (10TF only).
B.2.2
Operation
(1) The screen MACHINING DEFINITION (type of machining) is displayed and the software key AUTO is displayed on the screen when the menu number 4 is selected. Press this software key to start the automatic process setting function. Also, if a process has already been prepared, select the menu number 4 and then the screen for MACHINING DEFINITION (machining plan) appears. Press the software key NEW and then the software key AUTO is displayed. [AUTO]
948
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(2) Press the AUTO and then the PROCESS SETTING screen is displayed. The data being displayed at this point includes the machining method group number (No.000) and the description of machining procedure data of that group (No.100 130, No.200 230, No.300 330). If the machining method group number of setting data is undefined at this time, the machining procedure data of group number set by blank figure is displayed. (3) Press the software key EXEC if the machining method group and machining procedure data displayed on the screen are proper. (4) Input the machining group number for the MG = question when modifying the machining method group. (5) Move the cursor by the software key CURSOR to modify the description of machining procedure data when modifying the description of machining procedure data. The meaning of software key used for modifying operation is as follows: [CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Set the cursor to the position where machining procedure is deleted or inserted. [PROC DELETE] . . . . . . . . . It deletes the process where the cursor is blinking. [INSERT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a new process before the process where a cursor is blinking. i) When this software key is pressed, the software key for setting the type of process appears. ii) The software key for setting the type of process changes cyclicly by pressing the software key . iii) Press the software key of process type inserted to allow a new process to be inserted. iv) Press the software key to allow the insertion mode to be released.
949
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
[ESCAPE] . . Press this key to return to the menu screen. At this time, the details where correction has been made remain on the main memory but are not registered on the sub memory. [EXEC] . . . . Automatically create the process according to the machining procedure data displayed.
950
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
(6) When the processing begins, various data and tooling information, material data set in the setting data will automatically decide machining processes, tools, and machining area. The screen will display how the material shape changes according to the automatic specification. (The screen proceeds automatically.) For the Caxis processing, the change of blank material being cut is not displayed, but the machining area is indicated by the cursor. (7) After preparing all machining process, the screen will display the list of the process, and stops. Press the [NEXT PAGE] soft key to continue it to NC data preparation. To check or to correct data, select correction mode in menu number 4, press the [CURSOR FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK] soft keys to the necessary machining process, and press the [INPUT] key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key.
951
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.2.3
Setting B.2.3.1
Setting data
Preset the data used in automatic process specification, via the setting screen. To display the setting screen, first press the DATA SET soft key, and then key in 2 INPUT. (1) Machining order data (100 129, 200 229, 300 329) Set data to indicate what order the machining is to be done. The setting of the machining process is done with numbers. The numbers and the machining processes correspond as follows: 1. CENTER DRILLING 2. DRILLING 3. ROUGH FACING 4. ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE 5. ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE 6. SEMIFINISHING FACING 7. SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE 8. SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE 9. FINISHING FACING 10. FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE 11. FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE 12. GROOVING FACING 13. GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE 14. GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE 15. NECKING OF OUTER FIGURE 16. NECKING OF INNER GIGURE 17. THREADING FACING 18. THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE 19. THREADING OF INNER FIGURE Above are turning processes. 20 to 29 are not used. 30. FACE CENTER DRILLING 31. SIDE CENTER DRILLING 32. FACE DRILLING 33. SIDE DRILLING 34. FACE TAPPING 35. SIDE TAPPING 36. CAXIS FACE GROOVING 37. CAXIS SIDE GROOVING Above are Caxis machining. FAPT performs automatic specification of machining process according to the order set here. Machining processes not set here cannot automatically be prepared.
952
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Table B.2.3.1(a) Machining order data No. Format Initial value Undefined 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 32 34 36 31 33 35 37 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Descriptions 1st machining process setting 2nd machining process setting 3rd machining process setting 4th machining process setting 5th machining process setting 6th machining process setting 7th machining process setting 8th machining process setting 9th machining process setting 10th machining process setting 11th machining process setting 12th machining process setting 13th machining process setting 14th machining process setting 15th machining process setting 16th machining process setting 17th machining process setting 18th machining process setting 19th machining process setting 20th machining process setting 21st machining process setting Drilling End face rough machining Outer surface rough machining Inner surface rough machining End face finishing Outer surface finishing Inner surface finishing End face grooving Outer surface grooving Inner surface grooving Outer surface residual machining Inner surface residual machining Front face threading Outer surface threading Inner surface threading End face center drilling End face drilling End face tapping Caxis end face grooving Side face center drilling Caxis machining Turning Remarks
100 200 300 Integer 101 201 301 Integer 102 202 302 Integer 103 203 303 Integer 104 204 304 Integer 105 205 305 Integer 106 206 306 Integer 107 207 307 Integer 108 208 308 Integer 109 209 309 Integer 110 210 310 Integer 111 211 311 Integer
112 212 312 Integer 113 213 313 Integer 114 214 314 Integer 115 215 315 Integer 116 216 316 Integer 117 217 317 Integer 118 218 318 Integer 119 219 319 Integer 120 220 320 Integer 121 221 321 Integer 122 222 322 Integer 123 223 323 Integer 124 224 324 Integer 125 225 325 Integer 126 226 326 Integer 127 227 327 Integer 128 228 328 Integer 129 229 329 Integer
22nd machining process setting Side face drilling 23rd machining process setting 24th machining process setting 25th machining process setting 26th machining process setting 27th machining process setting 28th machining process setting 29th machining process setting 30th machining process setting Side face tapping Caxis side face grooving
953
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
(2) Manual input flag data (Nos.130 166, 230 266, 330 366) These data will have no meaning unless the machining process is set in the machining procedure data.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 MPP #2 MCD #1 MCC #0 MTS
MTS Set whether or not to perform manual tool selection 1 : Tool selection is done manually. The automatic proceeding of the tool data question screen will halt, so tool number must be input manually. 0 : Tool selection is done automatically. The appropriate tool will be selected from the tooling information. MCC Set whether or not to manually input cutting conditions. 1 : Cutting conditions are input manually. The automatic proceeding of cutting conditions question screen will halt, so input cutting conditions manually. 0 : Cutting conditions are set automatically. MCD Set whether or not to manually set cutting direction and area. 1 : Cutting direction and area are set manually. 0 : Cutting direction and area are decided automatically. MPP Set whether or not to input the passing point manually 1 : Automatic processing of the passing point screen will halt, so passing point can be input manually. 0 : Processings are automatically prepared without the passing point defined.
954
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
Table B.2.3.1(b) Manual input flag data No. 130 230 131 231 132 232 133 233 134 234 135 235 136 236 137 237 138 238 139 239 140 240 141 241 142 242 143 243 144 244 145 245 146 246 147 247 148 248 149 249 to to 158 258 159 259 160 260 161 261 162 262 163 263 164 264 165 265 166 266 Format 330 Bit specification 331 Bit specification 332 Bit specification 333 Bit specification 334 Bit specification 335 Bit specification 336 Bit specification 337 Bit specification 338 Bit specification 339 Bit specification 340 Bit specification 341 Bit specification 342 Bit specification 343 Bit specification 344 Bit specification 345 Bit specification 346 Bit specification 347 Bit specification 348 Bit specification 349 to 358 359 Bit specification 360 Bit specification 361 Bit specification 362 Bit specification 363 Bit specification 364 Bit specification 365 Bit specification 366 Bit specification 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Initial Value 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Remarks CENTER DRILL DRILLING ROUGH FACING ROUGH OF OUTER FIG ROUGH OF INNER FIG SEMIFINISH OF FACING SEMIFINISH OF OUTER FIG SEMIFINISH OF INNER FIG FINISH FACING FINISH OF OUTER FIG FINISH OF INNER FIG GROOVE FACING GROOVE OF INNER FIG GROOVE OF OUTER FIG NECK OF INNER FIG NECK OF OUTER FIG THREAD FACING THREAD OF INNER FIG THREAD OF OUTER FIG Unused
FACE CENTER DRILLING SIDE CENTER DRILLING FACE DRILLING SIDE DRILLING FACE TAPPING SIDE TAPPING CAXIS FACE GROOVING CAXIS SIDE MACHINING
955
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
The above setting data are divided into three groups. 1st group: Uses data of number 100 166. 2nd group: Uses data of number 200 266. 3rd group: Uses data of number 300 366. This means that three types of machining processes can be preset. The value of setting number 0 decides data of which group are to be used. (3) Machining method decision data No.0 Group selection (1 3) Initial value 1 (Setting data of the 1st group is used.) When this value is undefined, the group is decided from the blank shape. When the blank is a bar, grout 1 is selected, when it is a pipe, group 2 is selected, and when it is of special blank, group 3 is selected. Not used Not used Coefficient 1 for drilling Initial value: 1 If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is equal to or less than the setting value of No.3, machining is done by method 1. Coefficient 2 for drilling Initial value: 101 If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than number 3 and equal to or less than the setting value of No.4, machining is done by method 2. If larger than No.4, machining is done by method 3. Unused. Presetting of center boring depth D Initial value: Undefined Presetting of finishing margin TW of the grooving width Initial value: Undefined Presetting of finishing margin TB of the grooving width Initial value: Undefined Coefficient 1 on Caxis drilling Initial value 1 If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is less than the value of setting value No.2, cutting method 1 is used. Coefficient 2 on Caxis drilling Initial value 1 If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than the value of No.20 and less than the value of No.21, cutting method 2 is used. If it is larger than the value of No.21, cutting method 3 is used. Preset value of D1 in Caxis center drilling
956
No.1 No.2 No.3
No.4
No.5 No.10 No.11 No.12 No.20
No.21
No.22
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
B.2.3.2
Tool data and tooling information
The tool to be used is automatically selected from the tool data. As a means of selection, the process type (KP) registered in the tool data per tool is referred to. The value of KP of each tool must always be set before executing the automatic process decision function. It is possible to set 3 types of KP per tool. KP Process type 1 Center boring 2 Drilling 3 End roughing 4 Outside diameter roughing 5 Inside diameter roughing 6 End intermediate finishing 7 Outside diameter intermediate finishing 8 Inside diameter intermediate finishing 9 End finishing 10 Outside diameter finishing 11 Inside diameter finishing 12 End grooving 13 Outside diameter grooving 14 Inside diameter grooving 15 Outside diameter necking 16 Inside diameter necking 17 Front threading 18 Outside diameter threading 19 Inside diameter threading Tooling information is automatically created anew if the tool is automatically selected. All the previously created tooling information is deleted. As the tool selection number (TN) and the tool offset number (TM) of the data of the tooling information created anew, the executedprocess number is set as it is. For example, the tool selection number of the tool used in process 01 becomes 01. As other setting data, the data existing in the tool data is used as it is. The automatic process decision is not executed well, therefore, unless setting data is set accurately in the tool data. The turret number is not automatically set if there are more than 1 tool rests. It is to be set manually by the operator.
957
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
B.2.4
Cautions and Notes
NOTE Facing is always done from the +X direction to the X direction.
Rough machining
Finishing
CAUTION If outer figure machining is set to the machining procedure data without setting the facing, machining will be done regarding the face as the outer figure.
Rough machining
Finishing
958
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
CAUTION Finishing of Outer Figure If machining processes are set in the machining procedure data in the order of FINISHING FACING and FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE, the outer diameter part is cut by using the same tool after cutting the end face from the outside to the center as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (a) when there exists no inner diameter part. When an inner diameter part exists, cutting is done continuously at the end face part through outer diameter part as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (b)
Fig. B.2.4 (a)
Fig. B.2.4 (b)
CAUTION If the pocket machining leaves some remainder, tool is automatically changed, and the remainder will not be cut. The remainder must be cut later, preparing the machining process manually by monitoring the screen.
959
APPENDIX
B63304EN/02
NOTE 1 Multiple neckings and threadings can be done, if the same tool is used. 2 In necking, (a) and (b) of the following figure can be machined, but (c) or (d) where back handed tools are required, cannot be machined. In these cases, add machining process manually, after automatic machining process decision.
Fig. B.2.4 (c)
NOTE Cannot be used for chaser turret.
CAUTION If a center drilling process is set as a machining procedure data, a center drilling process is always prepared irrespective of the part shape. However, the center drilling process is not generated, if the center drilling tool is not loaded into tooling data, even if center drilling is included in Machining procedure data of setting data. When the center drilling process is not required, do not set a center drilling process on the machining procedure data. Or delete the center drilling process as required after preparing all the processes.
960
B63304EN/02
APPENDIX
NOTE When a drilling tool with the diameter equal to the inside diameter width is used, no inside diameter machining is performed even when inside diameter machining operation has been set in the machining procedure setting. In Fig. B.2.4 (d) example, no inside diameter machining process itself is generated. In Fig. B.2.4 (e) example, inside diameter machining is generated, but it is only in the region where the starting point is A and the end point is B.
Fig. B.2.4 (d)
Fig. B.2.4 (e)
NOTE When the starting point of inside diameter cutting is on the outside diameter of meterial as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (f) below, the operation is as follows. (a)When Drill I.D is set in the machining procedure data, drilling process is prepared, but no inside diameter machining is prepared. (b)If drilling is not set in the machining procedure data, inside diameter machining is executed.
Fig. B.2.4 (f)
961
B63304EN/02
Index
Cautions for using Symbolic FAPT, 360 Cautions for using the 2path lathe mode, 404 Cautions on Caxis FAPT, 488 Center drilling and bar feeding, 647 Changing the number of registered tools, 305 Check screen, 345 Checking NC data (animated simulation function), 160 Checking slanted surface machining figures, 778 Chucking position, 402 Closed part, 390 Collation and input/output with floppy cassette, 227 Coloring data input/output, 730 Coloring data setting, 725 Coloring data setting initialization, 731 Coloring data setting screen, 728 Compatibility with CAP II, 734 Concaved parts in groove, 393 Constant surface speed control for balance cut B, 200 Conversational automatic programming function, 5 Conversion of input unit (mm/inch), 299 Creating NC data (menu no. 5), 789 Cut off machining, 930 Cut off machining, bar feed, 930 Cutting area, 559 Cutting area definitions, 927 Cutting area screen, 676 Cutting condition screen, 676 Cutting conditions, 109, 433, 560, 918 Cutting direction, 642, 917 Cutting direction and cutting edge angle, 367 Cutting overhung portion, 397 Cutting start position and others, 402
A
Additional parameter of submemory, 217 Ani, 798 Animated simulation, 516, 713 Animated simulation (menu 6), 578 Animated simulation (menu no. 6), 797 Animated simulation for twopath lathe, 703 Animated simulation founction, 760 Animated simulation founction B, 711 Animated simulation function (menu 6), 446 Animated simulation of slanted surface machining at NC data creation, 796 Animated simulation of turning, 698 Animated simulation screens, 697 Animated simulation with gradation, 699 Animation drawing (menu No.6), 613 Applicable CNC, 767 Application for NC chaser lathe, 331 Approach and relief to inner diameter, 339 Approach, escape, and movement between slanted surface machining figures, 785 Area division, 644 Auto collision avoidance function (15TTFB only), 202 Automatic process determination for a closed figure, 661 Automatic process specification for 5700 series, 947 Automatic processing decision, 679 Automatic processing decision function, 677 Automatic selection of a tool, 636 Auxiliary commands, 732 Availability, 712
B
Balance cut FAPT function (2path lathe only), 191 Balance cutting process, 193 Bar feed, 934 Batch input functions for chamfering and corner R, 61 Blank and drawing (drawing and blank), 33 Blank and part (part figure), 38 Blank figure in grooving area, 392 Blank figure input of special figure blank, 57 Blind hole and through hole, 445, 946
D
Defining a new process, 628 Defining machining (menu 4), 554 Defining part figures (menu no. 2), 774 Defining slanted surface machining, 781 Defining slanted surface machining figures, 775 Definition by manual, 674 Definition of sub cycle process in definition of machining, 180 Definition of blank figure, 669, 745 Definition of optional blank figure, 390 Definition of part figure, 670, 745 Depth of cut (D) in drilling, 394 Depth of screw thread, 396 Description of operations, 723 Designation method, 314 Designation of Caxis figure data, 410
C
Caxis animated simulation, 700 Caxis FAPT animated screen, 448 Caxis FAPT function B, 502 Caxis machining with a machining plane specified, 426 CAP II for twopath lathe with two opposing spindles, 743
i1
INDEX
B63304EN/02
Details of automatic process determination and notes on its use, 635 Details of Caxis figure data, 411 Determining inverse processes (automatic process determination function B option), 638 Display and setting, 291 Display of machining time, 142 Display of submemory file name and file deletion, 216 Displaying and setting of tooling informations, 456 Displaying screens with background color, 724 Division of machining area, 371 Drawing a cutting area and painting a blank figure, 135 Drawing format, 715 Drawing of program coordinate system and blank figure, 39 Drawing type, 716 Drilling, 528
File protection, 223 Finish allowance and surplus thickness, 389 Fixed use of coloring data, 725 Flow of animated simulation, 695 Flow of animation, 161 Format of parameter tape, 293 Function code, 863 Function for automatically registering parameters and data in submemory, 226 Function for automatically setting area division points, 108 Function for defining the center of an arc according to a given single coordinate, 80 Function for preparing the next tool, 353 Function table (MTF 2000S), 857
G
G85/G89 boring cycle, 487 General lathe setting method, 260 Groove bottom figure, 392 Grooving, 391 Grooving when the tool width and groove width are the same, 338
E
Enlargement and reduction in the animated screen, 170 Entering cutting conditions for slanted surface machining, 784 Error display message, 294 Error messages, 346, 899 Error when NC data is prepared, 399 Errors at accessing the submemory, 902 Errors at animation drawing (menu 6), 901 Errors at defining figures (menu 2), 900 Errors at machining definition (menu 4) and NC data preparation (menu 5), 901 Errors common to all screens, 899 Example of NC data, 621 Example of outputting NC data, 790 Executing automatic process determination, 627 Execution of Symbolic FAPT, 32 Expansion and contraction of graphic display, 314 Explanation for CRT/MDI panel, 9 Explanation of functions, 203 Explanatory drawing of cutting conditions, 943 Extended sub cycle function, 188
H
Handling of floppy cassette and adapter, 229 Home and index positions, 671 Home position and turret index position, 746 Home position and turret index position (menu No.3), 609 How a sub cycle is output on NC part program, 190
I
Infeed machining in Caxis face milling process, 491 Incremental designation, 312 Initial screen display function, 340 Initialization of tooling information, 259 Input and modification of part figure data, 55 Input and output of the tool data and collation, 455 Input/output and collation of data, 218
F
Face milling, 477 Family program, material data, tooling information sub cycle file, 219 Family program, material data, tooling information, sub cycle file, 229 FAPT I/O interface, 231 Figure definition, 492 File data input/output function, 233 File name registration in the floppy cassette or handy file, 235
Input/output and collation of tool data, 252 Input/output data format, 234 Input/output of graphic data, 172 Input/output of material data, 245 Input/output of sub cycle file, 178 Input/output with submemory, 219 Inserting or deleting Caxis figure data, 410 Interference check, 336, 392, 715 Interference check by tool shape and machining shape, 336 Interference check function, 702
i2
B63304EN/02
INDEX
Interference check in approach and return relief, 336
MTF setting when Caxis FAPT function is used, 460 Multitier drilling (B option for the automatic process determination function), 648
J
Judgement of pockets, 369
N
NC data, 198 NC data creation, 510 NC data format, 327 NC data output, 464 NC data output by single step, 317 NC data preparation, 137, 682, 759 NC data preparation (menu No.5), 612 NC machine files (MTF), 802 NC machine tool file (MTF), 587 No. of files registerable in submemory, 217 Notes on material files, 245 Notes on reading this manual, 6
K
Keys effective in FAPT mode, 16 Kind of Caxis machining specification, 430 Kind of machining, 408
M
Machine tool file (MTF) table, 845 Machine zero point and turret position, 84 Machine zero point/turret turning position (menu no. 3), 779 Machining definition, 85, 493, 747 Machining definition (menu 4), 429, 505 Machining definition (menu no. 4), 780 Machining definition (menu No.4), 609 Machining definition for 5700 series, 906 Machining definition menu, 555 Machining definition of Caxis machining, 938 Machining definition of turning, 906 Machining for which automatic process determination cannot be used, 662 Machining start position, 97, 433, 915 Machining time display screen, 684 Main memory, 215 Main memory and submemory, 214 Material and tool data, 452 Material data, 239, 453 Material data and material file, 240 Material data input (menu No.1), 607 Maximum number of tools, 713 Memory composition, 213 Method of deletion, 244 Method of modification, 243 Method of registration, 242 Method of stopping the tool on Z axis, 403 Method of using the same tool for separate machining types where tool axis slant angles are different, 788 Milling, 529 Milling in multiple planes, 425 Modifying a defined process, 630 MTF, 459, 487, 495, 616, 765 MTF Parameters, 519 MTF parameters, 690 MTF setting, 348
O
Operating instructions, 160, 745 Operation, 207, 716, 947 Operation method, 242 Operation procedure for animated simulation, 696 Outline, 189, 744 Output function for interpolation rigid tapping, 355 Output in main program and subprogram format, 322 Output of NC data, 185 Output of only single process, 91, 910 Output/input and collation, 292 Outputting comments to NC data, 792 Outputting data about the tool clamping type (normal or reverse), 795 Outputting NC data in the FS15T/16T format, 348 Outputting the NC data of a multiple thread cutting cycle, 152 Outputting the spindle number, 794 Outputting the tool angular axis angle, 793
P
P key , 731 Parameter, 233 Parameter screen for animated simulation, 451 Parameters, 518, 717, 764 Parameters, etc., 614 Part figure definition, 504 Part figure definition (menu 2), 407, 532 Part figure input (directory input system), 60 Part figure input (input method of with figure), 39 Part figure input (menu No.2), 607
i3
INDEX
B63304EN/02
Passing point, 98, 915 Pattern figure input function, 65 Precautions to be taken with background animated simulation, 141 Preparations of NC data and registrations of machining memory, 137 Process area division, 680 Process change and correction, 90, 909 Process editing function (only with 2path control), 142 Process editing of sub cycle (2path lathe), 183 Process editing screen, 197 Process setting screen, 679 Processing area division screen, 677 Processing definition, 672 Programming, 504, 607
Setting initial screen display data, 341 Setting MTF parameters when the Yaxis FAPT function is supported, 597 Setting of chuck figure, 166 Setting of parameter, 489 Setting of parameters, 326 Setting of parameters for animated simulation, 164 Setting of sub cycle, 175 Setting of tailstock figure, 167 Setting of toll holder figure, 168 Setting the machining procedure, 631 Setting the tool data and tooling information, 131 Setting tool data for machining with tool normal or reverse clamping used, 787 Setting tool data for slanted surface machining, 782 Side milling, 483 Simulation of 2paths lathe, 715
R
Reoutput of NC data by each process, 320 Reference of function table, 880 Referencing an optional function table, 895 Registration of file name onto floppy cassette, handy file (option), 232 Related parameters, 200 Related system parameters, 171 Relation with 4axis lath, 688 Relation with backside machining FAPT, 687 Residual machining and threading, 647 Restrictions, 523, 718, 767, 807 Restrictions on each system, 904 Rigid tapping NC data input, 475 Rotating the machining plane, 531 Rough cutting direction, 368
Simultaneous 1 axis movement in approach and return relief, 326 Simultaneous axis move control of approach and return relief, 489 Single step of block, 317 Single step of process, 318 Size of function table, 875 Skip function of page and question, 310 Soft key, 25 Soft key status indication, 733 Soft keys, 704 Softkey, 716 SP key , 731 Special block output to both programs, 148 Specification, 448 Specification method, 194 Specification of Caxis machining, 409 Specification of Caxis machining definition, 430, 938 Specification of move order at the time of the approach, 489
S
S code output, 324 Screen, 233 Screen flow, 340 Screen for menu number 6, 733 Screen view of menu 6, 712 Screens for other than menu number 6, 733 Selecting color patters, 724 Selecting slanted surface machining figures, 783 Selection of kinds of machining, 86, 907 Setting, 951 Setting and data which can displayed, 241 Setting data, 663, 951 Setting data table, 812 Setting data, system parameter, MTF, 290, 811
Specifications, 503, 606, 712 Specifying a Yaxis machining profile, 533 Specifying home and index positions (menu 3), 553 Specifying the cutting position for Caxis machining, 444 Specifying the direction and area of cutting, 100 Specifying the Yaxis figure data, 535 Spindle positioning method, 490 Start of Symbolic FAPT programming, 30 Starting an animated simulation, 161 Sub cycle function, 174 Submemory, 214 Submemory initialization, 298 Supplement, 706 Supplementary, 352 Supported machine configurations, 772 Supported machining surfaces, 773
i4
B63304EN/02
INDEX
Surplus thickness, 389 Surplus thickness and blank, 389 Switching to and from the NC screen, 733 Symbolic FAPT, 29 System parameter, 208, 668, 689, 717, 764 System parameter table, 818 System parameter, MTF, setting data, 219 System parameter, MTF, tool data, setting data, drawing data, 227 System Parameters, 518 System parameters, 347, 495, 581, 614, 705, 735, 800
Tool figure and setting method, 361 Tool figure data and setting method, 260 Tool figure for milling machining, 713 Tool path, 391 Tool path drawing, 496 Tool path in finish cutting and semifinish cutting, 404 Tooling information, 686 Tooling information display and setting, 255 Type of NC data, 489
T
Threading, 395 Threading depth, 396 Threading direction, 395 Tool data, 92, 454, 557, 619, 685, 910 Tool data and tooling information, 246, 956 Tool data display and setting, 248 Tool data for Caxis machining, 430 Tool data input/output format, 253 Tool data screen, 675 Tool data, tooling information, 247 Tool data, tooling information, tool holder data, 762
U
Using the automatic process determination function, 196 Utilization of direct input of tool offset value, 329
V
Various function of Symbolic FAPT, 309 Vertical lathe setting method, 273
Y
Yaxis animated simulation, 701
i5
Revision Record FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL (B63304EN)
02
Sep., 2001
Addition of following functions: D Extended sub cycle function D Back machining FAPT D Animated simulation function B D CAP II for twopath lathe with two opposing spindles D Slanted surface machining Correction of errors Addition of parameters
01
Jun., 1999
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents

Fanuc Symbol Cap I T Operator

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Fanuc Symbol Cap I T Operator

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OPERATORS MANUAL

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY Symbolic FAPT

4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

5. EXTENDED SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

6. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

7. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

2.3 2.4 2.5

V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

243 244 245 245

2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

1.5 1.6 1.7

2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.12.5

402 402 403 404 404

VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

6. CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

7. INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

8. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

2. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

4.2 4.3 4.4

X. BACK MACHINING FAPT

3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION

4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9

638 642 644 647 647 648 661 662

5. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING

XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II

5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 6. SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706

XIV. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION B

716 716 716 717 717 718

XV. Symbol CAPi T

3. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

XVI. CAP II FOR TWOPATH LATHE WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES

XVII. SLANTED SURFACE MACHINING

2. DEFINING PART FIGURES (MENU NO. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

5. CREATING NC DATA (MENU NO. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

6. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU NO. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

A.2 A.3 A.4

B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:

II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

1. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

MDI panel for 15TFB/15TTFB